Servicing Information - American Radio History

Servicing Information - American Radio History
ADDITIONAL
1959
VOLUME TV -16
Television
Servicing Information
111 ire
THEORY
cutiarEir
Compiled by
M. N. BEITMAN
VOLUME TV -16
PRICE
$3
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS
ADDITIONAL
195 9
Volume TV - 16
Television
Servicing Information
THEORY
I PRA, TO E
I EXPERIENCE I
d57
Compiled by
M. N. BEITMAN
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS
Copyright, © 1959, by Supreme Publications
1760 Balsam Road, Highland Park, Illinois
Supreme Publications
SUPREME TELEVISION MANUALS
RADIO DIAGRAM MANUALS
0 New 1959
(Warehouse and Branch Office in Chicago. Illinois)
1959 TV Manual, Tv -Is
VOLUME 19
Price $2.50
This new giant volume of 1959
television factory data will give
Repair quickly all new 1959 sets as
,1,,t. (4.e.
well as older radios. This big volume
contains clearly printed, large sche-
1959
placement parts lists, voltage values,
and information on stage gain, location of trimmers, and dial stringing,
for all important new 1959 sets. includes material on portables, clock
RADIO
I)IAGRAMS.
ol &.,:,. s'
RADIO DIAGRAMS FOR PREVIOUS YEARS
Speed up and simplify all radio repairs. Service radios faster, better,
easier, save money and time, use these SUPREME Most -Often -Needed
diagram manuals to get ahead. At the low cost (only $2 for most volumes) you are assured of having for every job needed diagrams and
other essential repair data on 4 out of 5 sets you will ever service.
Clearly printed circuits, parts lists, alignment data, and helpful service
hints are the facts you need. Average volume has 192 pages, large
size 8% x 11 inches. Manual style binding.
[-=I
0
1958 1957
$2.50
Volume 17
$2.50
Volume 12 Volume 11
$2.50
$2.50
$2.50
0 1946 0 1942
$2.00
1956 1955
Volume 16 Volume 15
$2.50
$2.00
1949
1950
0Volume
9
Volume 10
1952 0 1951
Volume 6
Television
Servici.0 140.matku.
radios, record changers, FM, and
auto sets. A worthy companion to
seventeen previous volumes used by
over 143,000 shrewd radio servicemen. Large size: 8% x 11 inches.
Manual style binding.
$25°
Postpaid, only
Volume 18
Volume 5
$2.00
D 1954 r] 1953
Volume 14
$2.50
Volume 13
$2.50
ID 1948
0
Volume 8
Volume 7
$2.50
$2.00
El 1941
1940
Volume 4
Volume 3
$2.00
$2.00
1947
agrams. Large size 81/2 x11 inches.
Sturdy covers. Book binding opens
flat. Amazing value.
$3
EARLIER TV MANUALS FOR 1958 TO 1948
Price postpaid, only....
Supreme TV manuals cover all needed service material on every popular
TV set of every important manufacturer. Here is helpful, practical,
factory -prepared data that will really make TV servicing and adjustment
easy for you. Supreme giant TV manuals have complete circuits, alignment
facts, test patterns, response curves, service hints, recommended changes,
voltage charts, waveforms, and many double -page diagram blueprints.
Here is your TV service material to help you do more expert work
quicker; and priced at only 33. Radio manuals described at left.
$3.
1958 Television Manual, TV -14,
El ADDITIONAL 1957 TV, Vol. TV -13, $3.
E EARLY 1957 TV Manual, TV -12, $3.
El 1956 TV
El 1955 TV
D 1955 TV
EJ 1954 TV
Volume TV -11
Additional, TV -10
$3.00
Early, Vol. TV -9
Volume TV -8
$3.00
$3.00
$2.00
0 1926-1938
1953 TV
Volume TV -6
Volu'me 1
$3.00
$3.00
$2.50
111 1949 TV
Volume TV -2
$3.00
$3.00
lessons. Review fundamentals, learn new servicing tricks.
ust like a $200.00 correspondence course. Everything in
radio servicing. With self -testing questions.
$250
New edition. Price only
0 Simplified Radio Servicing by
COMPARISON Method
Simplified
Radio
Servicing
by
Revolutionary different COMPARISON technique perComparison
mits you to do expert work on all radio sets. Most repairs
Method
can be made without test equipment or with only a volt ohmmeter. Many simple, point-to-point, cross-reference,
circuit suggestions locate the faults instantly. Plan copyrighted. Covers
every radio set - new and old models. This 'new servicing technique
presented in handy manual form, size 8% x 11 inches, 92 pages. Over
1,000 practical service hints. 26 large, trouble -shooting blueprints. Charts
for circuit analysis. 114 tests using a 5c resistor. Developed
$150
by M. N. Beitman. New edition. Price only
NOW TO.
Radios
jot- wort
1951 TV
Volume TV 5
$3.00
1957-58 RCA
Volume, $1.50
Let
complete only $3, full price for all lessons. Giant in size, mammoth
in scope, topics just like a $200.00 correspondence course. Lessons
on picture faults, circuits, adjustments, short-cuts, UHF, alignment
hints, antenna problems, trouble -shooting, test equipment, picture
analysis. Special, -only
RADIO MATHEMATICS
1.11CTICL
ADM WON
AD_
ATICS
mom as ma
Explains arithmetic and simple algebra in connection with
units, color code, meter scales, Ohm's law, alternating currents. ohmmeter resting, wattage rating, series and parallel
connections, capacity, inductance, mixed circuits, vacuum
rubes, curves, the decibel, etc.. and has numerous
250
examples. Only
Practical Radio & Electronics Course
Here is your complete home study course of 35 lessons designed to
train any beginner to be an expert in radio and electronics. Covers every
topic of radio, electronics, with lessons on test equipment, FM, TV, radio,
etc. Giant 8% x 11 inches, 3 -in -1 volume, includes all lessons, &eine
0 How to Modernize Radios
Cash in by improving and modernizing all out of date
radio sets and cabinets. Practical job -sheets with schematics and photographs make this work easy.
Size 8% x I I inches. Your price only
111
TELEVISION SERVICING COURSE
this new course teach you TV servicing. Amazing bargain,
RADIO SERVICING COURSE
Here is your practical radio course of 22 easy -to -follow
1948 TV
Volume TV -3
250
$3.00
1952 TV
Volume TV -7
0 INDEX for all Radio and TV Manuals
.141-e
you everything you need to repair
and adjust all present-day TV sets.
The television series manuals are
amazing bargains and defy competition. The 1959 volume contains
circuit explanations, 192 pages of
alignment facts, test patterns, response curves, waveforms, voltage
charts, hints, and dozens of mammoth double -page work -bench di-
1959
matics, needed alignment data, re-
$1
instructor's notes, test questions. New edition. Only.....
n ANSWER BOOK to the above course
4',31f
250
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CONTENTS
Admiral Corp.
Chassis 16R1C, -CB, 16AR1C, 16S1C, -CB, 16AS1C
5 to 12
(List of models is given on page 5)
Chassis 15A2, 15B2, 15B3, Remote Controls 4G3, 4H3,
Son -r Tuners S11A, S21A (models on page 13) 13 to 23
Chassis 15D1B (Essential differences from 15A2)
24
.
.
.
.
Emerson Radio and Phonograph Corp.
Chassis 120451HC(H), 120452MC(M), Models 1500,
and 1502 through 1506
25 to 30
General Electric Co.
Series M5 Chassis, for list of Models see page 31,
31 to 38
Hoffman Radio Corp.
Chassis 335 and 336, MARK 7, list of models p. 40
39 to 42
Montgomery Ward & Co.
Model WG-4204A, Serial 85X
43 to 46
Models WG-5062A, WG-5067A, WG-5072A, WG-5077A,
WG-5162A, WG-5172A
47 to 50
Motorola, Inc.
Chassis TS -430, LTS-430, QTS-430 (Models page 51) 51 to 58
Chassis TS -434, Model 14P14-1
59 to 66
Chassis TS -552, -Y, TS -553, -Y, WTS-553
67 to 78
(List of models given on page 67)
Chassis TS -551, -Y, MTS-551, -Y, VTS-551, WTS-551, -Y
For list of models see page 79
79 to 82
Chassis TS -556, -Y, Models 21T64B, M, Y21T64B, M
83 to 88
Olympic Radio & Television, Inc.
Chassis GT, GTU, GU, GUU (list of models page 89) 89 to 92
Chassig GD, GDU, GH, GHU (list of models page 93) 93 to 96
Chassis GA, GAU, GB, GBU, GF, GFU (models p. 97)97 to 100
Packard -Bell Co.
Models 17VC1, 17VT3, 17VT4, 17VT8, 17VT9, 21VT4,
Chassis V8-2 (Revised)
(Continued on page 4)
3
101 to 104
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Table of Contents, Continued
Philco Corp.
Chassis 9L37, 9L37U, 9L38, 9L38U
(For a list of models see page 105)
.
TV Model G-4720, 9L38A & Audio Amplifier .
Chassis 9L60 and 9L60U (list of models page 117)
105 to 114
115-116
117 to 122
.
R. C. A. Victor
Chassis KCS-120E, -F, Models 140P020, 140P020U,
140P023, 140P023U, 140P024, 140P024U . 123 to 126
Chassis Nos. KCS-124C through KCS-124L, for
127 to 134
list of models see page 127
Chassis KCS-126A, -B (list of models on page 135) 135 to 140
Sylvania Electric Products, Inc.
Chassis 1-542-1, -2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -7, -8, Models 21C414,
210519, 210524, 210616, 210621, 21T218, 21T305 141 to 148
Spartan Division of the Magnavox Company
Chassis 18 Series, CB and DC Schematic Diagram.
Trav-ler Radio Corp.
Chassis 943-38, 947-28, 953-28, 975-48
.
.
149
150 to 152
Westinghouse Electric Corp.
Chassis V-2365-11, V-2365-12 (list of models, 153) 153 to 160
Chassis V-2374-1, V-2374-2, V-2377-1, V-2377-2,
161 to 166
(For list of models see page 161)
Chassis V-2375-1, -2, Models H21K272 through
H21K276, and H21KU272 through H21KU276
167 to 172
Chassis V-2376-1, V-2376-2 (list of models p. 173) 173 to 178
Zenith Radio Corp.
Chassis 16C20, -Q, 16C21, -Q, -Z, 16C22Q, 16C23, 16C24,
18C20, -Q, 18C24Q, (list of models page 179) 179 to 190
INDEX (by make and model or chassis number)
.
191 and 192
This manual is made up of factory prepared service material. Editorial changes and
selections were made to conform with the objectives of this manual. Our sincere thanks
and appreciation is extended to every manufacturer whose products are covered by the
material in this manual and who aided us in the preparation of this book.
717. 27. B-ee. -7f;;;P"-----'--,-7 Chief Editor of the Engineering Staff, Supreme Publications.
4
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Admiral
CHASSIS 16R1C, 16R1CB, 16AR1C, 16S1C, 16S1CB, 16AS1C
MODEL IDENTIFICATION CHART
MODEL
NUMBER
TV CHASSIS
MODEL
CHASSIS
NAME
SERIES
VHF
TUNER
T21E20E
T21E2OF
16R1C
16R1CB
Asbury
Imperial 330
94D151-1 or -5
TA21E20E
16AR1C
Asbury
Imperial 330
94E144-30
T21E21E
T21E21F
16R1C
16R1CB
Asbury
Imperial 330
94D151-1 or -5
T21E22E
T21E22F
16R1C
16R1CB
Asbury
Imperial 330
94D151-1 or -5
TA21E22E
16AR1C
Asbury
Imperial 330
T21E23E
16R1C
16R1CB
Asbury
Imperial 330
TA21E23E
16AR1C
Asbury
Imperial 330
C21E11E
C21E11F
16S1C
16S1CB
Windsor
Imperial 330
CA21E1 1 E
16ASIC
Windsor
Imperial 330
C21EI2E
16S1C
C21E12F
16SICB
Windsor
Imperial 330
CA21EI2E
161151C
Windsor
Imperial 330
C21E13E
C21EI3F
16S1C
1651CB
Windsor
Imperial 330
CA21EI3E
16AS1C
Windsor
Imperial 330
L21 E22E
16S1C
1651CB
16S1C
1651CB
Princeton
Imperial 330
L21E22F
L21E23E
L21E23F
UHF
TUNER
94E144-13
94D112-5 or
94D155-3
94E144-13
94D112-5 or
940155-3
94E144-13
94D112-5 or
940155-3
94E144-24
94D112-5 or
94D155-3
94E144-24
94D112-5 or
940155-3
94E144-24
94E144-24
940151-2 or -6
Front
Single
Front
Front
Front
Front
Front
Front
94D151-2 or -6
94E144-22
Single
Front
94D151-2 or -6
94E144-22
Front
Front
94D151-2 or -6
94E144-22
TONE
CONTROL (5)
Front
94D151-1 or -5
94E144-9
CONTROLS
Front
94E144-13
94E144-9
LOCATION
OF TUNING
940112-5 or
940155-3
Front
Front
Single
This group of sets is similar to chassis covered on pages 29 through 34, in
TV -15, EARLY 1959 Television Servicing Information manual. The alignment
information given in this previous volume is applicable. Circuit diagram of
Chassis 16R1CB, 16S1CB, is printed on pages 10-11 of this ADDITIONAL 1959
TV manual. Chassis with these numbers but without suffix letter "B" use a
different, disc type VHF tuner employing a cascode RF amplifier. For a circuit diagram of this tuner (94E144-13, etc.) see page 32 of TV -15. Chassis
16AR1C, 16AS1C, are practically identical to types mentioned except that a
combination VHF -UHF tuner is used. The material for all of these sets is
printed on pages 5 through 12.
Warning: The chassis of these receivers are connected directly to one side of the 117 volt, 60 cycle power line. Depending upon the position of the line cord plug in the wall outlet, the total AC line voltage may exist between the chassis and any
grounded object. Do not touch the chassis unless adequate safety precautions are taken. Never touch the chassis and a
ground (radiators, pipes, etc.) at the same time.
5
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 16R1C, 16AR1C, 16S1C, 16AS1C Service Information, Continued
AUDIO HUM
VHF CHANNEL ADJUSTMENT FOR
FOR 16R1CB AND 1651CB CHASSIS
Persistent audio hum (with or without TV signal) can be
caused by high resistance leakage of coupling capacitor
C203 (.001 mf, 500 volts, ceramic). Coupling capacitor
VHF Channel adjustment of each station should be checked
upon installation and at every service call. If adjustment is
properly made, it is possible to tune from one station to
another by merely turning the Channel Selector knob.
To adjust VHF Channel Slugs, proceed as follows:
1. Turn the set on and allow 15 minutes to warm up.
2. Set VHF Channel Selector for a station; set other
controls for normal picture and sound.
C203 is connected from pin 3 of sound IF amplifier V304B
to terminal of sound detector coil L201.
GEAR TOOTHED RASTER
Distortion at right side of raster, with dark vertical line
having a "gear toothed" pattern may be due to a faulty
Set Fine Tuning control at center of its range by
3.
4.
rotating it approximately half -way.
horizontal lock coil, L401.
For table models, remove Channel Selector and Fine
Tuning knobs. For console models, remove escutcheon
Other symptoms occurring with above trouble may be a
great change in horizontal oscillator frequency when set
is switched off -channel and a few seconds delay for the
plate above Channel Selector knob after removing mounting screw at center of plate. Note: Later console
models may use snap -in plate without mounting screw.
oscillator to lock -in when set is turned back to an operating
channel.
To remove snap -in plate, insert blade end of a screwdriver against left side of channel window. With slight
pressure, pull left side of plate away from cabinet.
5.
INSTALLING UHF CHANNEL STRIPS
IN VHF TUNERS 94D151-1, -2, -5 OR -6
Receivers using VHF tuners 94D151.1, -2, -5 or -6 can
be easily adapted for UHF operation by insertion of a UHF
Insert a 1/8" blade, flexible non-metallic tool (Part No.
98A30-19) through the hole adjustment to Channel Selector shaft. For each channel in operation, carefully
adjust the channel slug for best picture. (Note that this
is not the point at which the sound is loudest.)
will be reCaution: Only slight rotation
quired; turning the slug out too far will cause it to fall
out of coil.
channel coil strip in the vacant channel position of the tuner
turret drum (between channels 13 and 2).
If more than one UHF channel can be received, additional UHF channel coil strips can be inserted in the tuner
turret drum after removing unused VHF channel coil strips.
UHF ANTENNA
DEFLECTION YOKE
YOKE RETAINING SPRING
To correct picture tilt, loosen screw on
yoke retaining spring. Rotate yoke
until
picture
is
straight.
Tighten
screw
VHF ANTENNA
VERTICAL LINEARITY
HEIGHT
SUPER RANGE FINDER
To correct improper picture height
or
vertical
linearity,
alternately
adjust HEIGHT and PERT. UN.
REMOVABLE COVER
CENTERING TABS
A. tabs closer teleifier or farther I
apart to center pictste-
FPICTURE
1.6 AMP. TYPE'N'
SLOW BLOW FUSE
SELENIUM RECTIFIERS
IF BOARD A5775- 1
HORIZONTAL LOCK
MAIN BOARD A5780
AC INTERLOCK
5
Rear View of 16R1C, 16AR1C, 16S1C and 16ASIC Chassis Showing Adjustment Locations. Note: Super Range Finder
control not in chassis stamped Run 29. UHF Antenna Terminals in VHF -UHF sets only.
6
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 16R1C, 16AR1C, 16S1C, 16AS1C, Service Information, Continued
SERVICING PRINTED WIRING
TO JOT 010305.4 0306' I #302
8f140Y TO JCT Of
8314.
A major portion of the circuitry in these receiversconis
VII 1 0310
tained in two printed wiring boards. The smaller printed
circuit board at side of chassis contains tubes and components in the video IF and video detector circuits. The
larger printed circuit board at bottom of chassis contain,
T010701 8.114
R329
11318
10 MEG,
1305
3BU8
150K
ACC
22tr0
RICO
1118f8
1..57
1415
270K
SYNC SEP
ro VHF
tubes and components in the sound IF, sound detector, sound
output, sync, AGC, video amplifier, vertical and horizontal
sweep circuits.
141
AND GATED=
TC405
150
V401
47,1EG_spy
22 I
SOY
_C404
MF
105Y
1
Trouble shooting of printed circuit wiring is similar to
that of conventionally wired sets.
014F
2
RIO
10403
-01MF
I81 TO OTHER
Note: In these illustrations, components are shown
schematically instead of pictorially. This illustrates what
10/47S
R40
i
390K
41K
8ERT
OR1Z
V404
1W
56K
1
1
RK
would be seen if it were possible to look through the printed
circuit wiring board and actually see the various components on the board.
8323. 8328
1 1309
...TO C428
C401
110Yi
s TO ICI Of
T
TO JOVE
8424
81 250V TO JOT
011502 1 C5048
R42918430
TO C418
Sync Separator and Gated AGC Circuit Used in 16R1,
16ARI, 16S1 and 16AS1 Chassis Stamped Run 29.
Do not ground chassis or connect test equipment directly to it, unless an isolation transformer is used. If an isolation transformer is not available, a neon lamp can be used to determine if the chassis is "hot". Connect an electrician's neon tester
(General Cement's "Ne-o-lite" or equivalent) between the receiver chassis (not control shafts) and some grounded point,
such as electrical conduit, water pipe, etc. If the neon lamp glows, the chassis is "hot" and the line cord plug should be
reversed. Make the same check with the neon lamp connected between ground and the ground terminal of the test equipment.
If the lamp glows, reverse the line cord to the test equipment.
TO XI
OF L502 a TO PIN 4
05048
TO PINS
TO JCT
TO PIN 5
TO
OF
TO
TO
R428
R422 a
c4I4N
C306
OF
V304
OF
V404
T401
OF
TO JCT.
OF
0401 a
V402
TO PIN I
TO JOT
OF
L3025
050413
RUN 30 OR HIGHER.
TO 9+ 2505 IN RUN 29 SETS.
6458
R324
111--JVW-
84156d
1.401
C424
TO JCT.
OF
C435 a
ID R454
R468
0
TO JCT.
OF
6459 a-4-0
R460
R425
0 -NANO --a
455
C426
z. 0
-
TO PIN4
TERM.i "R"---
40e
TO C409'4'
R42.3
CENTER
TERM.
OF 1220
R450
21e.
."-*V*V-.
C411
8202 lir 0"016A10-0
19.--o TO C319
WI
0
MOT
__J
20u5Pr
ic
c..
km
241
)R4721
\
-291
0.
I, 4.03 6.
/111
c201
o
RED
TO END
TERM.
LEAD OF R206
TO JCT. OF
C215
C21134
23I
'T°F0 V4C30
L307
--_/eso3
!324_
0201
6203
7201
PTO PIN 4
1,
_.
i-iit%,e3I
Utle
cNCS°4
R445
TO CENTER
TERILOF
R208
-t
I **di 0 Al it
'um' V30416. R322
TC420
11418
TJFET31194
TO 0320
R2I5
R2J
"iv
6C67
8320
MN #404
e.
IC406
flT
ft,.
EVIL
TO END
-
0403
11448
01\9
0 vVE
0.-0
6451
C407
OF 0419
R
NOISE GATE
R305
C4t2T4-:
T-7.It *.
5,k
or V403 ''.----"--E41C
' NI
O
0 V4401 06405
8402
R452
(TWO VIR4R°
TO L306
4/14"--.4
000
CR4131
0.-~,-
C422
#412
4);?cksi 4i*.j1:111
R4413
er.
AAA.
0.211415
oc GI 0
IR47 3
R328
6410
/ 0 %IV 0
0 Vag 0
C423
V40
HoRi
osc
C4251
TO PIN 7
OF V405
p
TO CENTER TERMINAL OF 9401 IN SETS
OF
TO
C42
V305
R321
At4
ADMIRAL
14E214-5
TO PIN 4
OF
V303
View of Printed Wiring Board A5780-5 used in 16R1, 16AR1, 1651, 16AS1 Chassis. Note: Noise Gate Circuit in
Chassis Stamped Run 30 or Higher. Gray Area Represents Printed Wiring; Black Symbols and Lines Represent Components and
Connections on Opposite Side.
7
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 16R1C, 16AR1C, 16S1C, 16AS1C, Service Information, Continued
9901
WM
M917
9901
9902
M914
may/ L904
1901
7901
M914
V902
M921
L905
M916
WV
WM
L901
M913
M904
L901
M913
14920
M912
11903
M922
M912>,
M907
111925
4
14912
91908
L902
M927
14927
61918
M918
14928
M 928
Exploded View of VHF Tuners 94D151-5 and -6
Exploded View of VHF Tuners 94D151-1 and -2
Used in Later 16J1, 16K1, 16R1CB and 16SICB Chassis.
used in early 16JI, 16K1, 16R1CB and 16S1CB Chassis.
R324
R416
C404
C403 V401 R403 R414 R306 R305 V403
12D85
3 BU8
R410 R402 R427 0411
C412 CR401 R458 R455 V404
R425 L401 C423 C424
6CG7
R415
R4 56
C425
C405
R453
R328
R417
R4 50
C318
R452
L308
C420
R473
R 323
C421
R451
C419
R320
R316
R404
R448
C407
C406
C422
C408
R321
R 327
R202
L307
R 206
R201
R417
C420
R423
C 315
R42 1
C201
0316
V402
R322
6CG7
T304
C203
R449I R445 R472 R447
R203 C203 L203 V201 C206 C210 V202 R215 C211
12CU5R213
3DT6C207 R205
R212 R211 C418 R446 R418
C204 C202 C205 R207
C314
View of Component Side of Printed Wiring Board A5780-5 used in 16RIC, 16AR1C, 16S1C and 16ASIC Chassis.
8
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Service Information on Tuner of Chassis 16AS1C, Continued
VHF TUNERS 94E144 IN 16AR1C, 94E144-22 IN 16AS1C
0101
1910
VIEW
C011
ie---TtTIER
5F1
ON
CHANNEL
2
12
LiO9
2
L
13
1101
4
11107
1.21
L13115
3,
M104
13111-I
r
C121
I
I
TI01
.2-C1111f0
-
VHF ARP
no,
_4io_
UHF 1ST IFPRUMP
cif°
V101
5-3.0
NOP
-ciT5
Ciil
-=
1000
5
UHF 2ND IF
PRE Ale
4I
R109
5%
2211
6
L 2-1 NEC j
VHF
ANTONIA
'VHF WIXER-05C.5,p028
q3)
+ 11.51,
F
.00111 61103
4BC8
L136
(-vac
0, :
Cot .----%C113L'111319
/15V
1310-1
0104
C103
101 05
0°°' -LSHI,F)N
1100
I
Jc1-01.379
R,14
7541.0mis
0107
AAA,
O
I NEC
1504
1100
It 150Y
V401
0305
ANf
1102
1000.51
0
3.91
I# ow,
0503
3.0
L141
01801
UHF TUNER 94 D155 -3
1
1S1
UHF LINE
L802
HA
,
I
/.4Pc, A_
T
CA1I1ET CROUNO /477
PIN 0
OF V305
;
CLIO
70
PIN 5
Of
V101
_l_14424
_L8°61
_
I_LE107
CINr=z,,...11"
>UHF
I
*
OSC. LINES
26
Ti
T looO
0321
V406
40.
ISIS
3A
V303
5.310
V404
C321
C503
CR 502
V403
V201
00 GO
V304
C32S
1120
V202
KA510
1.21MP
L 501
011 1200
RF CHOKE r
01501
J
1000
'Is' L.1304 -.%
00 00 00 00 00 GO
5501
L
lie
INTO
V405
0102
1 Ell 0
0027
1020
I
V801
MO
CI22
V302
00 00
__I
r - -UHF TUNER-- 1
00 00 - I ... 00 L___J
V301
J
L805
MI
0102
i 0_0 0
L
I
I
_ ____
1000
4,.I
: WOUND
I_ so _
0124
1
C6090 ,
C11071
Ito.FILAR
V402
, -- v HF TUNER- - -1
I
171
1
_
coact
Cto2,
e-7
r1.1310_41
_II
19
V801
C100
T
T
1
iNc1098
F 05C. @
1102
1
Cmct002
TO
F4A _
; 170
CHASSIS CROUNO
C1106i
tWO011A
UK 011U
113
C1101
1001
-
_ C0101_
-,-,-1-- - -
AillEIMA
1
0105
-
2NO UHF LINE
.J
12502
FUSE
8501
5A
101
0501
TYPO
ISO NI
150Y
.047MF
01508
117 VOLTS
60 CYCLE AC ONLY
_
_
0502
L502
I #130,
.15 101.511FC
C302
.0047
9
NE
C5044
COMA
100 NE
3000
100 NF
o
3000
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 16R1CB, 16S1CB, Schematic Diagram
(See page 5 for explanation of chassis differences)
'it 6A1118A
SCHEMATIC NOTES
g
connections.
MID IF Ale
V3048
xl
1 0205
001 Nf
0, 0, etc., indicate alignment points and
L2
0.
1B
1
C204
12
5%
Fixed resistor values shown in ohms ±10% tolerance,
1/2 watt; capacitor values shown in micromicrofarads ±
20% tolerance unless otherwise specified.
11202
4T0
Note: K=x1000, MEG=x1,000,000, MF=microfarad.
-FAO,
VHF TUNER 94D151-5 IN I6RICB
VHF TUNER 94D151-6 IN 16S1CB
19028
1.9020
.rarer
L902 D
L902C
rNN
_ h1_
WIRING BOARD A5775-1
g
At' ,
1013
i1037
CNN
21
L931
10%
v301
VHF
" 1921
1920
0105
221
1302
CSC.
1301
42.3 NC
V9020
1904 M301
7.5
0%
4.10
1303
47
1302
50
14 901
r
110r:
.2-18E0
COON
0301
47.250C
1105
It
_41°J
41
INN
Ills'
1191
too
40
*00
1002
!
L2-1
2
0
NEC
AM NIA
4301
r
4TO
1301
221
1301
2101
If IOU
0503
NAV
1100
101 .311
1105
Tiro -1
OW
-
AI
A504
ICC
I
120
200
I
CR1T
C800
1118
o
ton
151110
C10
;
:0!II
i502
1303
.5-1
1904
1903
I
11
14
Mt
2201 ,
5%
11011T
I
3.80
1301
41
0.1
-1
1301
120
1304
C302
3-S
C511
5%
13111-1
C305
I
11111
10%
RIOT
3.11
45.310
ASP z
18
1004
T301
0304
11
110V
r.
1/25CC8
47= V902A
001
O
FINE TUNING
2VSBN4P.
,V901
1ST IF
co2,1_906
Tip
0%
3BZ6
--
s
m902
-C-.137r--.
I3s
1401
SCHEMATIC NOTES, MEASURING
VOLTAGES AND WAVEFORMS.
101
1.211E1
3BU8
NOISE CITE
V401
41111
NfI
See page 12 for Schematic Notes, Information
on Observing Waveforms and Conditions For
$210K
AND COED ADC
1402
C401
..11415
SYNC SEP.
-5.0Y
-0404
a
OD,
Measuring Voltages.
2
-10111
10
s
10SY s
7
1401
41E0
0403
R4.11
.01 NY
v 402
RIOT
1000
r - - - - vHF TUNER --1
RUN CHANGES
V902
I
@ s10".1 of 0,0durlron
v901
00
... 00
90
SUPER
000V3050
0923
8
0401
00
j
0 0 0 0 13100 0 0 0
1120
II"
V406 C126 Z574
0924
800
800
4301
1414
ArN,
5i
5405
v
5000
RANCE
0- FINDER
f OOP
1404
11.21Q
504
V303
30
40
18V
40012.
SYNC. 88.
1325
3,4028
AC ONLY
Off OOP MOM JO x COIOIS
FUSE
TYPE T
5.11
101I
0501
01001%111
4450
1001
0451
00
0419
CR 502
3- 60
150 IN
1501,
2.2110
0445
CR 501
4.1 RR
01508
225
0441
3.31
.001 SF
0x
0.31.1_013
L502
0502
0a1.501
C504 A
05.2
M0 01
3000
CABINET 1ROUND
_J
10
C504 B
TIN) NI
3004
"'Jr
R452
4101
0421
314
.15 TO 1.51111
00414F
is r
5.65
COOS
/INCITES CLOCIPSEI01171011
AND NEON WI/INC
1420
.0047 it
0440
VERT
1.4502
.0474F
V202
144$
-0418
IMRE
1501
L
1501
IT VOLTS
60 CYCLE
V304
45
VEIL
1510
01 0201
r
V403
00 00 00 00 00 00
550/
L 501
111
voUt
6C61
IC32RO0
1505
50V
80112
4201
I1207
V404
I
111
.
V302
C32I
V405
olv 011
Mt I
.0041 MF
ROSY
4.1 MEG
1422
.04751
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL
Schematic for 16R1CB and 16S1CB Television Chassis Stamped Run 30.
PRINTED WIRING BOARD A5780-5
7/047 NM 0749/187 9T4111111011
Veer IVIMEC011114111,41/1011
3DT6
SOUND DET
SOUC2U5
ND OUTPUT
V202
C210
V201
IC208
.01111
M201
1201
94202
o
1100
102141
0F
11
Or
0.50
1,10 2
.1- C205
"0
r
1.4 Tv
NOY
AE0
0=071,2., L2031ti
0215
op
AVMS
40 112
680 02,,
,0111F
IMO 5.1.11115
0510 IN 5001
-[Ler---
R203
200 9
R205
;
3321
C2168
I ..,yaw
0209
11206
- .00474F
.5601q.047111-
;
- 02000
R201
8.26}
Ma'
1215
-0-I
rwl
21D IF
6AIVBA
L
4.71
VIDE0 AMP.
V303
V3044
IN821
11.2K
0302
0/09,
TOR12.
L307
IF
3RD
V302
100
220
/501
306
3BZ6
022 RF
41.5 NC 007
3400
"Or
3E11323
>10
6
I
.22
GF
751 2
ItI
3328
8311
0305
I
2
3
4
00
3.31
68
0310
8321
820
8311
ISO
C311
.005 NI
8313
8327
1.51.1102,
3.5- 0
_VIE.
0312
100
CAM
CONTRAST
3.56
820
SEP
R319.1
T.
A
M10.11117 Of WA IfPLICE
WM
at, PUTIMYR 0510.
6325
--J
(R31918
#1000
10
0320
K
18001 NESS
IC2113:1!
igoOV
n13/0
VDU
11422
- f-
9511
-1-.0r1F
0405
VEAi.J r
VERTICAL
22
PERT OUTPUT
1509
14024
214
12DB5
26
MAL
OK
V403
r
T401
GREEN
1a
5
DEE YOKE
11432
3,1000LD
0401
0436
11111TE- BLUE
REO
8117
C101
8121
.0111F
2201
3
230
119
017
TRITE -81406+
(-0
0117
1f 0011
476
.022 111
0113
102160
50 41
TO%
8421
R419
2006
R434
390
8
R430
50v
MOT
VEIT NOLO
1.004182
L
.017111
0410
x3112 NE
11110
1511
C416
220
31
1.5 NEC
VERT.
LINEAR Ill
1 B3CT
8426
500
H V. RECTIFIER
V407
0428
459
DISCR.
9300
v404
8401
115
6
101
.010
L40111. ig
40111241
PROVIDES BEST WI
--f---12DO6A
KOMI.
-5.59
I .1 01 C MCAT IV
MAN
1B5-4
SYNC.
COOMECI 10 10111
00IN1
I P,
MOW. OUTPUT
40412.
4"
/1.09
0421
0426
12°
0405
RED r-2-'I 14028
Pdsy or
/500
C432
330
210
100
10423
T.0039
91
I
LOCK
8158
924
C133
330
1150141110
i481:187
R466
DEF
YOKE
35 a
7 OM
BLUE
4.76
269
12156
10%
.022116
8468
R462
AN,
0
221
0435
IPS
160II
0%T
120
10%
R459
MC
HOROONTAL
6431
1501
311
6000
101111
RORIE
t
11
a
r-
11116-10.1011
8463
wv
4701
C431
-f- 0821/01
00000
SCE 1141E1ORN
rypiii. 0418 ItTORE
.047111
160
MEASURING
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 16R1C, 16R1CB, 16AR1C, 16S1C, 16S1CB, 16AS1C, Continued
CONDITIONS FOR OBSERVING WAVEFORMS
VOLTAGE WARNING
The chassis of this receiver is connected directly to one
Caution: Pulsed high voltages are present on the caps
side of the 117 volt, 60 cycle power line. Depending upon the
position of the line cord plug in the wall outlet, the total AC
of V405 and V407, and at pin 3 of V406. DO NOT attempt
to observe waveforms at these points unless suitable test
line voltage may exist between the chassis and any ground
object. When installing or servicing, do not touch the chas-
equipment is used. Waveforms at these points may be taken
unless adequate safety precautions are taken. Never
touch the chassis and a ground (radiators, pipes, etc.) at
pin 3 of V406 may also be taken by clipping or twisting the
lead from the high side of the oscilloscope over the insulation on the lead connecting to pin 3. If the waveform is
with a capactive voltage divider probe. The waveform at
sis
the same time.
taken in this manner, its shape will be the same, but the
Do not ground chassis or connect test equipment directly
to it, unless an isolation transformer is used. If an isolation
peak -to -peak voltage will be somewhat lower, depending on
the degree of coupling between oscilloscope and lead connecting to pin 3 of V406.
transformer is not available, a neon lamp can be used to
determine if the chassis is "hot". Connect an electrician's
neon tester (General Cement's "Ne-o-lite" or equivalent)
between the receiver chassis (not control shafts) and some
grounded point, such as electrical conduit, water pipe, etc.
If the neon lamp glows, the chassis is "hot" and the line
Waveforms should closely resemble those shown on the
schematic.
Waveforms are taken with a transmitted signal input to
cord plug should be reversed. Make the same check with the
neon lamp connected between ground and the ground terminal of the test equipment. If the lamp glows, reverse the
line cord to the test equipment.
the television chassis.
Set all controls for a normal picture. After the receiver
is set for a normal picture, turn the CONTRAST control
fully clockwise.
PICTURE TUBE HANDLING PRECAUTION
Oscilloscope sweep set at 30 cycles for vertical waveforms
and at 7,875 cycles for horizontal waveforms to permit
2 cycles to be observed.
The newly developed picture tube used in these sets must
be handled with much greater care because of its short, thin
neck and wafer type base. ALWAYS lift picture tube by
Peak -to -peak voltages will vary slightly from those shown
on the schematic, depending on the test equipment employed and chassis parts tolerance.
grasping firmly around face plate; NEVER LIFT TUBE BY
ITS NECK. Use care when inserting socket to prevent
bending pins. Before handling picture tube, remove static
charge from it by shorting 2nd anode well to chassis
ground with an insulated wire or screwdriver. WHEN TUBE
IS REMOVED, ALWAYS PLACE IT FACE DOWN.
HF OSC
it
CONDITIONS FOR MEASURING VOLTAGES
MIXER
VHF
HY RECT.
AMP.
Caution: Pulsed high voltages are present on the caps
1ST IF
of V405 and V407, and at pin 3 of V406. DO NOT attempt
HORIZ
OUTPUT
to measure voltages at these points without suitable test
equipment. A VTVM with a high voltage probe may be
used when measuring picture tube 2nd anode voltage.
NOISE GATE
Set the CHANNEL SELECTOR on an unused channel.
VERT OUTPUT HORIZ.
SYNC SEP I
CONTRAST and SUPER RANGE FINDER controls fully
GATED AGC
5
clockwise. All other controls counterclockwise. Do not
5
OSC
5
11
disturb HORIZONTAL DRIVE or HORIZONTAL HOLD
VIDEO AMP
adj ustments.
ILSOUND IF
1Z SYNC
DISC.
41:)$5k
4
Antenna disconnected and terminals shorted together.
SOUND
DET.
Line voltage: 117 volt AC.
OUTPUT
VERT OSC
& SYNC INV
17 VAC
TUBE LOCATIONS AND HEATER CIRCUIT
DC voltages measured with a VTVM between tube socket
terminals and chassis, unless otherwise indicated.
TUBE COMPLEMENT
V901-2BN4
V902-5CG8
V201-3DT6
Voltages measured with tubes in socket.
V202 -12CUS
V301 -38Z6
V302 -38Z6
Voltages marked (*) will vary widely with control
settings.
12
V303-3CB6
CR301-1N60, 1N87
or 1N295
V304-6AW8A
V305-210EP4A
CR401-Dual Selenium
Diode 9385-4
V401-3BU8
V402-6CG7
V403-12DB5
V404-6CG7
V405-12D06A
V406-19AU4GTA
V407-1B3GT
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Admiral
15A2, 1562, and 1563 TV CHASSIS
4G3 and 4H3 Remote Control Amplifier
Son -r Tuners S11A and 521A
MODEL IDENTIFICATION CHART
MODEL
NUMBER
TV
CHASSIS
MODEL
NAME
VHF
SON -R
TUNER
TUNER
PI 7FI
15A2
Rockwell
94E163-1
-
PI 7F2
15A2
Rockwell
94E163-1
-
PI 7F3
15A2
Rockwell
94E163-1
P517F12
15B2
Lexington
P517F13
15B2
P517F22
PSI 7F23
DIAL
LIGHT
NO
YES
NO
-
YES
NO
94E164.3
S11A
4H3
YES
YES
Lexington
94E164-3
S11A
4H3
YES
YES
15B3
Kent
94E164-3
52IA
4G3
YES
YES
1583
Kent
94E164-3
52IA
4G3
YES
YES
place the cabinet back. Grasp Channel Preset knob, press
inward and rotate counterclockwise until Channel Preset
shaft engages the slot in the nylon indexing adjustment.
Very slowly turn knob one half turn to left (counter.
clockwise) until a stop is felt. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for
all operating (desired) channels.
Do not attempt to adjust Channel Preset knob on 15B2
chassis when TV tuner is positioned between channels
13 and 2 (dot on indicator disc appears in window on
front of receiver).
Grasp Channel Preset knob (on upper left hand corner
of cabinet back when set is viewed from rear), press inward and rotate clockwise until Channel Preset shaft
engages the slot in the nylon indexing adjustment. Very
slowly turn the knob one half turn to right (clockwise)
until a stop is felt. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each non -
6.
After completing adjustments, set Son -r Off -On switch to
"ON". Check operation on all channels.
PRESETTING MAXIMUM VOLUME LEVEL
operating channel.
5.
ANTENNA
NO
non -operating channel number appears in channel indicator opening at front of set.
4.
POWER
TOWER
-
INDEXING POWER TUNING MECHANISM TO
STOP ONLY ON OPERATING CHANNELS
(Chassis 15132 and 1563)
1. Turn set on. On 15B3 chassis, set Son -r Off -On switch
at rear of set to "OFF" position.
2. Press Push Bar tuning control (front of set) until a
3.
REMOTE
CONTROL
AMPLIFIER
(Chassis 1563)
When TV receiver is operated by Son -r hand-held unit,
three settings of sound volume are obtained (low, medium
and loud).
Before operating by remote control, the loudest required
sound level must be preset. With Son -r Off -On switch set
to "OFF" position for manual tuning, tune in a channel for
If tuner skips an operating (desired) channel, remove
cabinet back and place a 3/16" wide screwdriver blade
into hollow slotted collar on rear of tuner shaft. Turn
screwdriver until a desired channel number appears in
opening at front of set.
Check to see that AC line cord is disconnected and re -
(Continued on pages 14 through 23)
13
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 15A2, 15B2, 15B3, Service Information, Continued
normal sound and picture. Adjust Volume control for loudest sound volume desired.
Set Son -r Off -On switch to "ON" position. By pressing
AGC CONTROL ADJUSTMENT
Improper AGC control adjustment may result in an overloaded picture. Picture overload can be recognized by bending and/or tearing of the picture or buzz in the sound output.
Also, loss of the picture or a weak washed-out picture can
result from improper AGC adjustment. However, these same
conditions can be caused by other troubles in the set.
If adjustment is required, it should be performed exactly
as described below:
1. Turn set on and allow 15 minutes to warm up.
2. Select strongest station in the area.
3. Set Contrast control for normal picture and Brightness
control to maximum (fully to right).
4. Set AGC control (at rear of chassis) to minimum fully
to left.
5. If picture has disappeared when AGC control is set to
left, turn AGC to right until a weak picture is obtained.
OFF-ON-VOL button on the Son -r tuner, the receiver can
be turned off and on and three sound levels can be selected
in recurring order. Press the OFF-ON-VOL button to check
the preset sound levels. Do not disturb the manual Volume
control setting on the front of the set when proper maximum
sound level is set.
If. when the set is operated manually, the Volume control
setting is changed, it will be necessary to reset maximum
volume level for remote tuning.
HORIZONTAL LOCK ADJUSTMENT
Make adjustment if picture "slips sideways" or "tears"
when switching channels. Adjustment is made by rotating
flexible shaft extending from rear of set. Adjust as follows:
1. Allow a -few minutes for set to warm up. Tune in weak-
Adjust Horizontal Lock (at rear of set) and Vertical
est station, set Brightness and Contrast controls for
normal picture. Important: Before proceeding, be sure
that AGC control has been adjusted according to instructions in this manual.
2.
6.
Reduce Contrast to minimum. Very slowly turn Horizontal Lock adjustment to the right or left until picture
is in sync. Interrupt the television signal by switching to
next channel. With Push Bar switch or Channel Selector knob, reselect weakest channel. Picture should remain in sync. If picture bends or loses sync, adjust the
Horizontal Lock so that picture remains in sync and
Hold (at front of set) for a steady picture without bending of vertical lines at top of picture.
Very slowly turn AGC control to right until picture just
begins to bend, tear, shift or until buzz is heard in sound.
Then, slowly turn AGC control to left to a point at which
overload of picture and/or buzz in sound is removed.
Turn AGC control an additional 10 degrees (approx.) to
left.
7.
Check picture at maximum contrast on
all channels.
Picture should not overload and should reappear immediately after changing channels.
IMPORTANT: AGC adjustment should always be made on
strongest TV station received.
bending of vertical lines does not appear at top of picture.
Check adjustment on all channels; if necessary, repeat
procedure.
DEFLECTION YOKE
CHANNEL INDEXING
ADJUSTMENTS
YOKE RETAINING SPRING
To correct picture tat, loosen nut
on yoke retaining spring. Rotate
yoke until picture is straight.
Tighten nut.
SLOTTED COLLAR ON
TUNER SHAFT
HORIZONTAL LOCK
See information under "Horizontal
lock Adjustment".
PICTURE CENTERING TABS
Move tabs closer together or
farther apart to center picture.
SILICON RECTIFIERS
ETCHED CIRCUIT BOARD
A7265-1
ETCHED CIRCUIT BOARD
A7270-1
AGC CONTROL
See information under "ACC Con-
trol Adjustment".
I
BRIGHTNESS
CIRCUIT BREAKER
RESET BUTTON
AC INTERLOCK
SOCKET
SON -R OFF -ON
SWITCH
Figure 3. Rear View of 15B3 Chassis Showing Adjustment Locations.
Adjustment locations are the same for chassis 1582.
14
4G3 SON -R
AMPLIFIER
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Remote Control Amplifiers 4G3 and 4H3, used with 15A2, 15B2, 15B3, Continued
12AX7
V2 12AX7
6AV6
1/2 6U8A
214 AMPLIFIER
040 AMPLIFIER
ACC RECTIFIER
TH AMPLIFIER
Ill AMPLIFIER
VIA
V1B
1112409901
O
2CO
P.43
eY
'20
kl0
Al
AEC
e
OF
222
.004716
KO
I
6
47
RIR
229
119
CR,
120
IIS
C7
5%
ISO
2
R5
4-01
910
MR
00
(PART
69110
ISO
fRI
52
21000
915
4100
009
2
V3Ak
V2
POOY
VLIEG
1504
T-
TEC
lCO
00
C01'112
OIM
R9
f B. 110Y fat (MUMS( TO APPROPI4TRY 110Y
511(2 TY 8. AMO rIMMEMIS 4100 0ISC0Ufer10
22
6591
0
0
ET
I
/3 6BJ8
2/3 66J8
OMR.
211
921
100,5%
-h
019
2 MC
04740
0016F
10%
1
SOCKET
500-9 SWITCH
15110114 IVOR'
105
COO
22 EC
220 22
4428
110
07111
COVIIP
- 0Y
20
9
025
224E0
6
R29
0- 194
24E3
,0
PIN Rif
POSITION)
0
,01111
24
L
ON:
921
4709
TV:
I
OFF:
STEP RELAY
38.2854
TOY
5%
.
921
I
Of -01-901011
'1_11
2 29E3
all
1
V42
-10Y
,
10%
I
±11
RELAY CONTROL
110
i
T
. , lug
-.10
'my
"" I/2 6U8A
Or
oc 2
1170,I
1
RELAY CONTROL
Wh
#32
NEL RELAY
1131
19.215 AC
V30
CAI
4 29
331
Schematic for 4G3 Remote Control Amplifier Chassis.
NOTE: Chassis 4G3 used with Television Chassis 1583.
1/2 12AX7
1/2 12AX7
6AV6
AST AMPLIFIER
2ND AMPLIFIER
340 AMPLIFIER
VIM
ACC RECTIFIER
VIA
AArs."
MI
V2
116
MICROPHONE
1/2 6U8A
4TH AMPLIFIER
V 3A
C3
4709
M3
.z
81,
120
R7
1506
970
95
1509
3.3MEC
RIO
oe
47,10%
2
10%
tie
C2
226
C7
150,10%
5.611EC
.-.097111
R3
1#1701 ELI INCREASE 71 411111711,47121
C6
Ita
16E2
OW,
:JP 2
Cl
RI
1101
415
3.3MEC
120
All
R13
3.36EC
1506
25
2.2K
RIe
1.02111
R11
-C9
Ca
224
tR12
NEC
e
.01111
1162,5%
100RI61I
1.02119
3101 18/8 TY 1* An 1711/12171 ARf
0/SCOWCIf0.
11
CI3
R20
100.5%
r--
2.211E6
./ever
1/2 6U8A
6AL5
CIO
-30
10%
1
1C12
400 a
I
.7a-
5%
1
214I
330
1
R23
2.2MEC
924
417
14.001111
4192.2
III
CII
0111F
TI
80110M
VIEW
-
C20
MEC
226
1
+T250
1121
MIN
r_
38.285KC
9
5
10
6
C18
1.047MF
tO%
.0161
R22
CI6
50MF
KEY
!CHANNEL RELA
-C19
.00111F
-
7
ON -Of F
II
R25
INEC
2.2MEC
-13
030
NI
170Y
101
6
TI
Alb
V 3B
.2.-
2211EC
30
I
L
1
RELAY CONTROL
215
-IS% I I 10%
927
I NEC
5.69
KEY
O
0
336
SOCCEI
M4
V4
PIN
R29
2211E6
11Y AC
01+1701
Schematic for 4H3 Remote Control Amplifier Chassis.
NOTE: Chassis 4H3 used with Television Chassis 1562.
15
VIEW
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 15B3 Schematic Diagram
Is[
90
EE
47) pq ,°
I.«
4.)
r=
a. esi
cat
tr)
00
co
-a
FAIT
C
023:
70 1.9
10411
C9031
30
2E115
1/2 5CC8
VIII AMP.
VHF MIXER
COUEC 1 10 REC11401
VIII INPu
11703
pi/
AT
C901
cue,
120
1051
1909
0906
I
L903
r
w
o
4. 1 Ix.3
0
7 c:).,
1T1301
Anew
11910
1
11.05
470
C911
14113
4303 4'
1000
1;:r
YNI
tg
-40 5%
CAIS
914
.
AcA
no,
II
L901,
:3.;
C S du it's.
^ 0c K.
T."
09029
2
cw
4.1A
413,10%
21
01
VHF 05C.
1000
1795
^7.5
L902
4
E
-,
C907
C
1/25CC8
0971
go
_1SO',
es
2
.
906
09024
V901
NT
es
0 ^7
c o) Cs)
8912
NEC
-O33
0904
TO
.
10011
IHR11.5
A C9IIA
40.63110-3
r
0.
Le)
F-1
&CO) 0
,...41)
6
-07902
11/01
1 1311131
510105
12951 COu11.41(
er3 1-11
L 904D
L904C
5
SE
V) 4)
r,
,9049
emN 1 '10111 10111'
WWI 0510 10 50111001/S.
cg4)
E
L9VHF TUNER 94E164-3
M950
0 o II:
30012
470
C916
;
IF ACC
_L'
05 Cr)
1301
4/01
7,5
= Cs4
Mx 04
.4!
eC .4C
N
NEC
P Cd
mm
RUN CHANGES
0
4400
Vert of 00o1oc0ion.
3.4 Kt
5%
M507
714140
DISCONNECT
-
.,01.110011
ACC
I
-
240 AC
vHF TUNER
110T011
0402
0
r 0901
v902
111:
C919
1920
13 POSITION
11101010ART CONTACT 11701
301
L303
0302
I0305
120
v302
6501
gm
ON -Off PIMA
r-tin
REV
CAIN
.001111j
.00141
S504
PON 141 TUNIC WITCH
INDE1 WHEEL
Fug
M506
PIN VIII
1401
12509
5/11112
I
0
224
CHASMS 040440
S502
40104
000440
CABINET
40101 440 CE KR ASSEMBLY
I
4402
1c401
1.2241
RON
0405
r'())
0322
pow
C304
1120
L304
0404
0303
V202
0403
040I
V304
450
.0011F
10%
NNNI
10 1101 ONTO 1501 /5 01-1111147110
I
1171
'50
1015 I
L501
00E4
01 1001
AL SAKE
M502
M501
=1
le PILOT LICAT
414VIII
1302
IF
IF
IS
V3
V4
11-144502
PICTURE
TUBE
VIDEO AMPS
t501rTh
9304
C
OUTPUT
JoseYM
a
SOUtg IF
5
SOUND
rj
DET
CHM
VERT OSC /
NITRO
CA4Olis
'Air+) 7MORI/ SYNC
DISCR
330 OW 1-1
i
NFU
0
RELAY
CONTROL ,T
149 CRI
,
a Au
DISCR &
4,9
1
15T 1
I RELAY_ OM IMP
CONTROL
-12AX7
V2 -6AV6
CAMPER
SOUND
SYNC SEP
10 111215 004/
IX 10115
I
5501
-6U8A
-61318
V201-3DT6
V202-12CUS
V301-3BZ6
V302-3DK6
V303-6AW8A
V304-17CWP4
V401-3BU8
V402-10DE7
V403-6CG7
V404-12D06A
V405-12AX4GTA
V406-1G3GT
V901 -2E115
V902-SCG8
CR1
-93A15.1
CR301-1N87
or 1N87A
CR401-93B5.6
CR501-931312
CR502-93B12
16
I
;Nit
5:1311E0,
I
51,1;
L-
15041
O
M 503
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
II
2000
r
12504'
I
CR 501
SOCKET
-
SILICON
160110104
LC344 .094T4fi
"ETCHED
17544
CIRCUIT BREAKER
TUBE COMP LEMENT
VI
H AC
VIDEO DET
I
L
HoRIZ
OUTPU
TORE PLUG'
--
0302
241
PANT NORIO
11110- 1
ON 4201
;
L303
L304
C50,
//7 IT AC
;
n
OH
p;Ina
NOISE CATE
O
01
CCUPLATE
!
A
MIXER
CR301
/V
4 34?
FU
01
6.
M5,0
C502
10101
80,111
12509
7001 0C
TUBE LOCATIONS
CR5
1504
AU10/041404
A circuit breaker with manual
reset is used in the receiver power
supply for protection against current overload. If circuit breaker
continues to open when "RESET"
button is pushed, troubleshooting
will be necessary to find the source
of excess current.
WARNING: Portions of the chassis
are connected directly to one side of
the 117 volt, 60 cycle power line.
De-
pending upon the position of the line
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Schematic for 1503 Television Chassis Stamped Run 10.
14 100.57 4157 I 70 /ff. Of C4f4 I 04111
70 Will II
ETCHED CIRCUIT BOARD A7265-1
SAI18A
1°,g3t".
01 501-1 011.
so3uPoTot.
10001 I
02" ._2014
NOON
0210
0211
l$S4.---.C°I2.III1r0
r
420?
0201
5%
1,
5%
1001
5$
1203
0201 1
.00111F7
560
II
08
V
LU
6110
I NEC
0042600
E
)1-
40K
'11-
C213A
1215
ION(
1.21
IV
"
9116
8206;
0201)
T.O47N1
56067
C 212
/1.111FC
$204
C205
330
V
2004
1507
10 101101 (ICI. Of ION 1 (50611
4324
III IF
3DK6
11181A
240 IF
VID. DOT.
O
v302
4-,1
13"
5%
1006
CR301
C
all 0
7302
L
1111.4Cf
I/11 leiffIf 021.0.
1305
42.211C
I
IV.!A
03030
V26106140
I my
tar
7303_Co-031° 4-6"
L307
10%
0,4 ;IV A
104r
44.2 NC
N315
13
C306
C3)11 0
120
560
0 457 7
YELLOW
8312
5%
IF
11309
01011116ST
11318
0
aigifT/ PO
334
470
113011
/
6757 /OW.
6325
334
T
603
11112.
3BU8
1.
J
k CITED 600
V401
4/0
-31.5
.024!
2201
012
4201.41.
4422
684
1/210DET
0410
6j:1410.
oltsr
.022111
114.10%
ti
III
686
opyi
11
1.
$4196
-V
I
1832011
2.5 NE
30011
i1211
6426
2.2
1.2 NEC
NEC
r
1E1105
1420 I
T.041
0
16430
.0,2211F
1IF
%
°CM
441911
394
- -di.
I021301
.7,-,010TIF
VERT.
3010
1504
0
10419
2006
4161.
(:)47
414F
114
2.40
:It
0413
0323
MD nor
8425
100220F1
C
min
210a
2-S
224
1004
-
I
1
7401
34-ar
)
I
8420
1.2130
44028
.006171
11.
1411
C4/6
CHU
O JOY
C404
$06
111111111111111111 43111,
VERT. (ISC ./ OUTPUT
0415
---
T
1/210DE7
1.157 \Ii".-----.....N.
104
.001NF
440$ 5,
C
1/1/C01 411 IIIPIOff
C318
3.91
NOISE CATE,
SYNC SEP.
/
0304
13 (41
43
.2
17CIP4
fife PIC111111
11619611111
6.8-
4.7
5%
4305
i
I
4
120K
,11422
0312
0311
*Jr
I
,i
v. - 1
nl C3Z
r,
PP I* 170Y
I.C.011501ICISII
CI
45
V301
1212
2004
.004111F f 8204
1.24
3BZ6
1* PO
4202
.0021 1101I
Or
4.5
14201
T 201
SOUND OUTPUT
/Mr
.00141
12018
1
.1 a dirtfl.,Iffl
0181 OISCONWEI.
12CU5
202
v201
741/1
0450010 1711, ifSPECI
70 1410007 77/1/1 Of 7101
AFl
,._
ITEICNT
i-
414
1C3CT
40411.
N.V. RECTIFIER
6(61
iuttv
1402
901112.
DEFLECTION YOKE
7- ' NN -1
to
176
v406
i-6
12DQ6A
1401112.01112111
21650
V404
TOO
.01
453
14401
120
LUC VIEW
1707
NEC
C456
I
.004741
464
14
C1012012 Sff 11Y11 Oil
1100
445!
11460
0411 IffOif 011501/01.
0465
;451
I Wig 11:40100
TWO
00111
16'
11 150f
R45?
0454
7471
1.1 K
10%
5%
4502
505 SOCKET
r
T013
7 7 T.
ylfL
O
L502
1.i HY
1/O6'
I
26a
I
COLD
-1041A1 1
-
4481
I
210
,
2111
5541
5041
3504
COVENS.
.0414F
I
f 1011.412f 114010150/11
VIII
)1.02211
0
1.6 173
04f.54
10411.
4462
414
0 0 11145001.0
R468
310 6
6465
4006
5
00057
1.134
41561
10 14105
IF
3060.
12n
110 / 00 11101
114
3466_,
TO et. 00 001
NN
L110402
61E1
RCUIT BOARD A7270-1
cord plug in the wall outlet, the total
line voltage may exist between the
chassis and any grounded object. When
AC
installing or servicing, do not touch
the chassis unless adequate safety pre-
cautions are taken. Never touch the
chassis and a ground (radiators, pipes.
etc.) at the same time.
Do not ground chassis or connect test
equipment directly to it unless an isolation
transformer is used. If an isolation transformer is not available, a neon lamp can be
used to determine if the chassis is "hot".
1111
NIP 0ISC011IO110.
00
C464
1_0459
lift. Of 101/1.
OM. MI.
O
6461
1201
01/1 10 fiff-
711/117740
I
151
6006
OV
141f FIN 5177111 Of
)1-*
0457
1680
5N -L
RACK
/5 11'
47y
VOLTAGES AND WAVEFORMS
Line Voltage: 117 volts AC.
Set Channel Selector on an unused channel.
Contrast control fully clockwise; all other
controls counterclockwise. Do not disturb
AGC and Horizontal Lock adjustments.
Antenna disconnected and terminals shorted
together.
DC voltages measured with VTVM between
tube socket terminals and chassis, unless
otherwise indicated.
Voltages marked (.9 will vary widely with
control settings.
Waveforms taken with transmitted
input to television chassis.
signal
For waveform measurement, all controls set
for normal picture.
17
Peak -to -peak voltages may vary slightly
from those shown.
Pulsed high voltages are present
Warning
at caps of V404 and V406, and pin 3 of V405.
Use suitable test equipment at these points.
SCHEMATIC NOTES
Numbers and letters inside hexagons indicate
alignment points.
Fixed resistor values shown In ohms ± 10%
watt; capacitor values shown In
micromicrofarads ± 20% unless otherwise
tolerance,
1/2
specified.
NOTE: SC = x 1000. MEG = x 1,000,000,
MF
microfarad.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 15A2, 15B2, 15B3, Remote Controls 4G3, 4H3, Son -r Tuners S11A, S21A
REMOTE AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENTS AND SERVICING
The 4H3 and 4G3 Remote Control Amplifiers are 4 tube
(1/2 12AX7), V2 (triode section of 6AV6) and V3A (pen-
subchassis and are mounted at the lower rear side of the
tode section of 6U8A). Signals are then fed to a discriminator
stage V4A (2/3 6BJ8).
television chassis.
The 4H3 amplifier and S11A Son -r Tuner, used with
The DC output voltage, which is dependent upon input
signal, is applied to the grids of the relay control tubes V3B
(triode section of 6U8A) and V4B (triode section of 6BJ8).
15B2 TV, operate to turn the TV on and off. Also, they control the selection of channels.
The 4G3 amplifier and S21A Son -r Tuner, used with 15B3
Depending upon which button on the Son -r tuner is
pressed, the discriminator output voltage will swing positive
TV, control the selection of TV channels during remote
operation. Also, the TV is turned on and off and three levels
of sound volume can be selected.
and overcome the bias on the proper relay control tube
(V3B or V4B) energizing the associated relay.
B+ and filament voltages are supplied to the remote
Operation of OFF -ON -VOLUME relay KI actuates the
chassis through a twelve pin socket on the television set.
ratchet on rotary switch S2 (step type volume control).
To insure uniform operation with smooth tuning for both
manual and Son -r remote tuning, it is especially important
to make VHF Channel Slug Adjustment, Indexing Power
This switch advances one step for each time the OFF-ONVOL button on the Son -r tuner is pressed. This switch gives
the Off -On function and three steps of volume level.
When the CHANNEL button on the remote tuner is
pressed, actuating the Channel Relay K2, a switch on the
TV chassis allows Tuning Motor M508 to position tuner
Tuning Mechanism and Pre -Setting Maximum Volume Level.
at next operating channel.
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SON -R
TUNER S21A AND REMOTE CONTROL
AMPLIFIER 4G3
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SON -R
TUNER Si 1 A AND REMOTE CONTROL
AMPLIFIER 4H3
Figure 4 shows a function diagram of the Son -r Tuner
S21A and 4G3 Remote Control Amplifier.
The Son -r tuner contains a metal bar that resonates at
38.285KC. Input signals are amplified by VI, V2 and V3
and fed to V4 (6AL5). When the Son -r tuner is operated,
The Son -r tuner contains two metal bars of slightly different length and mechanical resonant frequency. When a
button on the Son -r tuner is pushed, a hammer strikes one
of the resonator bars. The bar that is struck vibrates at a
definite ultra -sonic frequency. A microphone, mounted at
the front of the television set, picks up the ultra -sonic vibrations, converts them to electrical signals (damped waves)
and feeds them to the amplifier. The CHANNEL and ONOFF-VOL bars resonate at 39.285KC and 38.285KC re-
the discriminator output voltage swings positive to overcome
the bias on V3B. V3B conducts and the plate circuit relay
K1 is actuated.
When the ON -OFF CHANNEL button on the remote
tuner is pressed, actuating relay K1, a switch on the TV
chassis allows Tuning Motor M508 to position tuner at next
operating channel. When tuner stops at position between
channels 2 and 13, a cam mounted on the tuner shaft turns
the TV receiver off. By operating the remote tuner again,
the TV receiver turns on and the TV tuner is positioned at
spectively.
Input signals are amplified by VIA (1/2 12AX7), V1B
the lowest numbered operating channel.
V48
1ST
AMPLIFIER
ON -OFF
VOLUME
RESONATOR
SON -R TUNER
ULTRASONIC TRANSMITTER
39 285KC
VIA
1
2ND
AMPLIFIER
3RD AMPLIFIER
A ACC RECTIFIER
I/366J8'i
4TH
AMPLIFIER
!DISCRIMINATOR
RELIT
-
52
CONTROL
V18
STEP TYPE
/212AX7 I/2 I2AXT
SWITCH
---
CHANNEL
RESONATOR
ON-OFF-VOL
RELAY
CONTROLS ON -OFF
AND THREE VOLUME
SETTINGS
RELAY
CONTROL
38.2858C
K
V38
1/2 6U8
TURNS TUNER
CLOCKWISE
Figure 4. Functional Diagram of 521A Son -r Tuner and 4G3 Remote Control Amplifier.
SON- R TUNER
MI
ON -OFF -
ULTRASONIC
CHANNEL
TRANSMITTER
RESONATOR
I
)
CAICROPHONE
I ST
AMPLIFIER
2ND
3RD AMPLIFIER
4TH
AMPLIFIER &AGC RECTIFIER AMPLIFIER
VIA
VIB
/2I2AX7 v2 I2AX7
V2
V6
RELAY
CONTROL
KI
V3B H ON -OFF-
V3A
1/26U8
v26 1.18
CHANNEL
RELAY
DISCRIMINATOR
Figure 5. Functional Diagram of S11A Son -r Tuner and 4H3 Remote Control Amplifier.
18
TURNS SET ON
AND OFF AND
SELECTS CHANNELS
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 15A2, 15B2, 15B3, Service Information, Continued
ON -OFF -CHANNEL
BAR #288118-6
CHANNEL BAR
(1.852" LONG)
*286118-7
(I.799" LONG)
RETAINING SPRINGS
RETAINING SPRINGS
OFF -ON -VOLUME
BAR *28B118-8
(1.852"
LONG)
Figure 7. Top Inside View of 521A Son -r Tuner.
Figure 6. Top Inside View of S11A Son -r Tuner.
Location of Retaining Springs and Resonator Bar Shown.
Location of Retaining Springs and Resonator Bars Shown.
SERVICING SON -R TUNERS S11A AND S21A
SERVICING 4H3 AND 4G3 REMOTE CONTROL
AMPLIFIERS
The hand-held Son -r tuner is a mechanical device (no
tubes, transistors, etc.). With normal handling the Son -r
tuner should seldom if ever require service attention. Handle the tuner with moderate care and do not subject it to
All tubes and relays are located at top of chassis for ease
of servicing. B+ and filament voltages for remote amplifier
operation are supplied by the TV chassis.
sharp impact by dropping or striking it.
If the Son -r tuner is dropped on a solid surface or given
To expose components under the chassis for servicing,
remove screws that hold the remote chassis to TV chassis.
When servicing either remote chassis, do not allow it to
come in contact with the television chassis pan. A removable
shield covers the relays K1 and K2 on the remote amplifier
rough handling, the resonator bars may slip from their
proper position. This may cause intermittent tuning or in operation. Figures 6 and 7 show the correct mounted position of each resonator bar. IMPORTANT: Retaining springs
on the tuner must fit into grooves on resonator bars.
chassis 4G3.
If Son -r tuner is dropped, remove top section of the
tuner and check to see that resonator bar(s) have not
slipped. Retaining springs must be seated in grooves at
center of bar(s).
When the remote chassis is removed from the TV chassis,
voltages can be measured on the component side of the
chassis.
SERVICE HINTS
7---
M507 TUNER MOTOR
giV AC
1/2 6U8A
5502
RELAY CONTROL
NOM DISCONNECT
1/313
5111104
IN 10 0.1300)
GEAR
8110
AS 501181.2
POWER SWITCHING FOR TUNING MOTOR M508
As an aid to circuit tracing, refer to figure 8. Figure 8
shows relay control stage V3B and switching circuitry on
TV chassis 1563. The following explanation applies to TV
chassis 15B2 also. The symbol numbers of some compo-
1
M50E1
24V AC
O
MOTOR
nents involved in this explanation will change for TV chassis
TO 015041
OUTPUT
828
NEC
424
2.2 MEG
15B2, but the connection and values remain constant for
IE POSITION
INDEI WPM
-Mr
both chassis.
Line voltage (117V AC) is applied to T501 when switch
S501 is turned "ON". From the secondary of T501, 6.3VAC
and 24VAC are applied to the remote chassis.
J
821
4108
PEI
8.220*
21
)IOC Y/frl
011-001 POWER
fr?"1
o
0
1/1011ENTARY
10
111V AO
AND 1501
Push Bar tuning switch 5504 is connected in series with
a 22 megohm resistor through the 12 pin plug and socket
(pins 11 and 12). On the remote chassis, this series network is connected between B+ 270V and pin 9 (grid) of
V405
/4_
-.7--Cssoiri__ 17 6
I i 4,11 IC VIL-Firt-'
8501 4504
!RAY
10850)
TYPE)
6144 .....1
10 JOT OF
8501
8506 CAP
5504
PUSH BAR
TUNING SWITCH:
CONTACT
M5 PLUG
!
1
1.210*
1
TO ALVA.
:0I
P.
1100..0
12210
1R505
20R.711
10)
POWER 4U100018E8
V3B.
TO I
With 5501 turned "ON", the tuning motor can be operated by actuating Push Bar switch 5504 on front of set
VON
Figure 8. Simplified Diagram of AC Circuitry in Television
Chassis 15B3. In Chassis 15B2, K501 is replaced by switch
or by:
5505 and is operated by a cam gear on the tuner shaft.
19
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 15A2, 15B2, 15B3, Service Information, Continued
1.
2.
Pressing CHANNEL button on Son -r Tuner S21A to
actuate channel relay K2 on 4G3 remote chassis and
operate the tuning motor on TV chassis 15B3.
Pressing ON -OFF CHANNEL button on Son -r Tuner
Now, connect the positive probe of the ohmmeter to the
center lead on CR401. Measure the resistance to each end
lead with the negative lead. On the R X 100 range, no indication will normally be seen. The resistance readings will
be quite high (100 megohms or higher).
S11A to actuate ON -OFF CHANNEL relay K1 on 4113
remote chassis and operate the tuning motor on TV
4110/0 FROM Y101
chassis 15B2.
When 5504 is actuated, the grid of V3B is placed at a
near ground potential. V3B conducts, energizing the plate
circuit relay. 24VAC, normally applied to the remote
C209
O.
STACE V101.
208
IMEC
SIMPLIFIED 0/461.4N OF VOLUME
SIIICN 51. 51 ACTUATED BY
RELAY 11 ON 10.f CMISS/S.
AUDIO TO
AUDIO OUTPUT
.0111F
yo umE
C210
CON ROL
.01MF
C22 ACME
chassis, is switched by the plate circuit relay and applied to
Tuning Motor M508 through pin 1 on plug and socket.
M508 turns and allows contacts on 5502 to close. With
22K
S502 closed, the .01MF capacitor charges, negative on the
grid side, through contacts on S502.
When S502 contacts open by mechanical detent action,
SOCKET
PLUG
M202
( ON SON -R
CHASSIS I
the capacitor discharges through the 1 megohm and 2.2
megohm resistors in the grid circuit, the negative bias sup-
L
rL
ply and the 470K ohm resistor connected in series with the
capacitor. When S502 opens, the grid of V3B is driven
negative and the negative bias supply (-20V) cuts V3B off.
MIEM
(
ON
TV
CHASSIS I
1111
SECTION Of SI SON -1 OFF -ON
SIMITCH WIN IN 'ON' POSITION.
Figure 9. Simplified Diagram of Volume Level Control
Circuitry on Chassis 15B3 TV and 4G3 Son -r
The plate circuit relay deenergizes, stopping the tuning
motor. The negative bias supply holds V3B cut off until the
tuning cycle is initiated again.
When the CHANNEL button on Son -r Tuner S21A or
ON -OFF CHANNEL button on Son -r Tuner S11A is oper-
Remote Control Amplifier.
Set the ohmmeter to R X 1,000,000 range and make the
same measurements as in the preceding paragraph. A slight
deflection from the infinite resistance point on the scale
ated, the output of the discriminator stage (on remote
chassis) triggers V3B, starting the cycle of tuning motor
should be seen. This is a check for an open diode. An open
diode will give no indication on the R X 1,000,000 scale.
action.
THREE STEP VOLUME LEVEL CONTROL
TV SET OPERATION WITH SON -R
AMPLIFIER CHASSIS DISCONNECTED
TV chassis 15B2 or 15B3 may be operated when the 12
CHASSIS 15B3 AND 4G3
pin plug and socket are disconnected. By connecting one
jumper wire between pins 1, 10 and 11 on M506 and connecting a second jumper wire between pins 5, 9 and 12 on
M506, the television chassis may be operated with the Push
Bar tuning switch S504.
SERVICING HORIZONTAL PHASE DETECTOR
(DUAL SELENIUM DIODE CR401)
A plug-in type dual selenium diode is used as the horizontal phase detector CR401. The diodes have a common
cathode. See schematic diagrams (at rear of manual) for
circuit connection of CR401.
A faulty diode or poor contact between diode leads and
socket can result in no raster, intermittent horizontal sync
or loss of horizontal sync. To insure good contact between CR401 leads and socket, scrape all three leads to remove oxidation or corrosion.
Important: When inserting diode in socket, be sure to
observe polarity indication. The beveled edge of the diode
case must line up with the beveled corner on the diode
socket.
Checking dual selenium diode CR401
A quick and simple check of CR401 is made by using the
R X 100 and R X 1,000,000 scales on an ohmmeter.
Remove CR401 from socket and connect negative lead of
ohmmeter to center lead of CR401. With the positive probe
of the ohmmeter, measure the resistance to each end lead.
The resistance should be from 2,000 to 5,000 ohms in each
case.
20
Figure 9 shows a simplified diagram of volume level selection during Son -r remote control tuning. To control volume
level, the high side of Volume control R208 (jct. of C209
and R208 I is shunted, in steps, by:
1.
22,000 ohms to give "LOW" volume level.
2.
82,000 ohms and 22,000 ohms (series connected) to
3.
give "MEDIUM" volume level.
R208 is unshunted to give "HIGH" volume level.
When the set is operated by Son -r remote control and the
ON-OFF-VOL button on the Son -r tuner is pushed, relay
K2 on 4G3 chassis causes step type switch Si to move to the
next position. When set is "ON", 1, 2 and 3 (see above)
are selected in order. The set is turned "OFF" in position
4. Because of the "step -type" action of S2, the sequence
of selection is repeated. IMPORTANT: Maximum necessary volume level must be preset before operating the set
by Son -r.
SERVICING VIDEO DETECTOR (CR301)
In these receivers, a germanium diode (1N87 or 1N87A)
is used as the video detector CR301. The detector diode is
connected across the top terminals of the 2nd IF transformer
T302. The detector diode is accessible for checking or replacement after removing the snap -on cover shield from the
2nd IF transformer.
Note: The germanium diode functions with excellent stability, has long life expectancy and ability to withstand severe
mechanical shock without damage. However, the diode may
be permanently damaged by application of high current or
excessive heat to the connecting leads.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 15A2, 15B2, 15B3, Service Information, Continued
R3-.
R5
C8
RI2
V4
CI3
CII
CIO
R8
V3 \ C19
R30
R29
R22
CI8
C16
R6
VI
CI
RI3
RI7
C3
C6
V2
;
//
RIO
C9
C7 R15
RI6
1
R26
C20
SI
R9
C4
CRI
C21
R23
R24
R27
R32
Figure 11. Bottom View of Remote Amplifier Chassis 4G3. Component locations shown.
R3
RI2 C5
RII
C2N
RI3
C8
RI7 RI4
TI
CII
V4
C15
C 20
RI9
R26
R 20
LI
RI
R5
R7
R4
R2
R6
VI
CI
C6""
R22
C16
R25 R9
CI8 C19
C4
R8 RI6 V3
RIO
R15
V2
Figure 13. Bottom View of Remote Amplifier Chassis 4H3. Component locations shown.
8+
8+ BOOST
500V
270V
TO SLIDER ON
R421
0+
HEATER HEATER B+ 285V TO
250V TO PIN 7 TO PIN JCT.OF C504A
aL502
V404 40N V401
C R502
tr")
TO PIN 8
ON T403
CSOO
R462
iCR501
B+ BOOST 425V
TO PIN 4
Z
ON V304
TO JCT. OF.1P
L401 B C452
C459R463
TO
R 453
r.
C453
0503 T
9V
AC
R455
AC
V4030
0 HORIZ.OSCAni
1V
I55V
R459
-1-cill-VVW-41456
0 6CG72.-12T
1 210V
C457
WP 9V
R460
R45E
`454
R457
411---1{7,2741
-
+
C5,)2
R458
TO PIN 8
TO K40-
Figure 15. View of Wiring Side of Etched Circuit Board A7270-1.
OF M402
Gray Area Represents Etched Wiring; Black Symbols and
Lines Represent Components and Connections on Opposite Side.
21
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 15A2, 15B2, 15B3, Service Information, Continued
R309
C3I I
V302
C318
C307
R308
L303 C305
C304
L302
C301
CR301
T302
R305
C3I2
L301
C3I0
R204
R404
R3I I
/
L305
L306
L307
R303
C302
C405
R405
R406
R302
R3I2
R301
R206
C207
R202
-R211
R410
C2I0
R2I0
-C211
L202
V202
R430
V303
C317
C201
R201
C419
R205
C205
R207
C206
C209
C203
R3I0
C202
C3I6
V201
C315
C319
T303
L308
C402
R3I9
C314
R321
C3I3
C420
R428
R3I8
L201
L309
R203
R434
R3I 7
R3I5
R415
C415
R427
R426
I2
C414
R429
C406
R408
V402
R4I1
R3I 4
C204
R4I2
C404
C408
R407
C417
\C410
R418
R420
R423
C403
R450 R453 C407 R452 C409 CR401 R4I6 C4I1
Figure 16. View of Components Side of Etched Circuit Board A7265-1.
22
C421
C450
R424
C4I3
Location of Components Shown.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 15A2, 15B2, 15B3, Service Information, Continued
HH
_L,----.
TO PIN 5
II-, 000 `--
OR V902
I 322
02\ 0305
0301
L303
.4C
VIDEO
--
IF INPUT
8304
FROM 0118
IT
C304
L302
OF V102 "
.7y® 16
256
R308
303
Or
L306
R414
RF AGC
L307
R404
0 ijb___Ap
R406
111---1VW--4111
C210
1
I
RED LEAD OF .4-,
T201 8 P05.
TERM.OF 0212
O
AC
_2419 top/
TO BLUE LEAD
41-----41R
210
V202 0 ,..--"Afv-.
a
250y SOUND
O OUTPUT 0
C2il Ti
R430
4Ir
,
04°'IR203
C205
R207
2506
R313
a 0 0 /43Y
OF R208
i_ _ _ _ _ .... _ _ _., C201
'
&
SOUND IF
6AW8A
11
T- -, '60 0
r-"'"A'es.._,AAA,.._:"--, R201
C203
0 3DT6 IMP
ak GM/
(_E4.02
'
R3I0,.
c346:
C315
.74
I-1--L.L.
, -T-
,
6
I
. C313 +1303
C20241
L_ 2.01
_r_.-1-41
I
L308
ACII.
C42
0-.A.AAA-
___FR34,__.
R 319
R3I
R428
OF R320A
TO PIN 7
OF V304
0415
OR V901
I
R427
TO HIGH SIDE
OF 84198
-/Skis V402
TO GREEN LEAD
VERT. 05C. I
OF T401
VERT. OUTPUT
R429
ON C418
IR417
C417
119---1H0
11410
R41
10409
,,,_,A,,6
70
0450
6-41-*
L
5
R423
CR401
10-0AA"--4
j
T
C407
NOISE LATE Mail
0 SYVEP & 0
CA
ACC
400 3Bbe oTC404
0---~"-----0N0-al
02j1 .
R45:r_vre
I-. 2451
40-
8411
ICY
C421
;,y 100E70
OF R401
I00
8422
1111 -WW420
041413
R3204 8 C320
--ANV".
8314
8426
-AA/s."--19
TO POS. TERM. ,_,.
TO JCT. OF
a. -41-0C406
R407 R408
*
104 0 -35Y
JOY
TO HIGH SIDE
OF R4194
--
TO HIGH SIDE
1
TO 81. 270V -0--
R317
R3I5
)117180±,-,AARAF.
1
TO PIN 4
OF V101
TO VARIABLE
ARM OF R322
L309
R203
C2.-Ti°4
TO HIGH SIDE
TERM. OF 0321
VIDEO AMP
3,
12
,
0 sVuk2Car iv
TO HIGH SIDE
R323 B POS.
g /0317
,
AC
C319
TO JCT. OF
O
V303
R202.4
,
TO YELLOW
LEAD OF 7401
-15Y
8410
_ _ _ -. - - -
.?\XV 6 cry
8+
TO 8323
/2 08
C207
C206//
..<t Q.,
TO VARIABLE
ARM OF R3204".
/.
R312T 405
_taI-4
-41
OF1201
8468 80464,
toy /3
'I-4
R2T1?;$213F,
TO B, 600E7
-.....425V (JCT. OF
2209
1
TO VARIABLE ....____.
OF V304
9 L305
R3I I
3405
P302
0-AW-111
TO PIN 2
44/
C3i8
IF AGC
ARM OF R208
C312
0
-IC308
,15Y
0306
R301
1302
0 3DK6
3BZ6 0
R305
000,-*
C311 CR301
/40Y
2ND IF
or
-
L304
R307 0 V302 0
I3 F
01
C 309
-'C307
AC
we 0
4,-1-65"
0 V?ST01
OR C915
AC
R450
8449
TO JCT. OF
, C403
R302 B 8405
1,--"OTCF 74IN032
c411
*C416
TO PIN 5
ON V405
R425
0--sesMA*C416,C4I2 AND R434
ARE MOUNTED ON FOIL SIDE
OF ETCHED CIRCUIT BOARD.
I
TO JCT, OF PIN 2 124031,
C453 AND R456
TO HIGH SIDE
OF R421
Figure 17. View of Wiring Side of Etched Circuit Board A7265-1.
Gray Area Represents Etched Wiring; Black Symbols and
Lines Represent Components and Connections on Opposite Side.
23
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 15D1B (Essential information which differs from 15A2)
Models:
PL17F31B, PL17F32B,
PL17F33B, PL17F41B, VHF ANTENNA
BRIGHTNESS
PL17F42B, PL17F43B. '"""'"
DEFLECTION YOKE
YOKE RETAINING SPRING
To correct picture toll loosen WOW on
colts Mooning spring
Rotate yoke
mom is stroll.
Tighten
TUBE LOCATIONS
PICTURE CENTERING TABS
Off ICIER
YOKE PLUG
Move lobs
closer together of for.
then apart to (Inter pillUre.
I OSC
VIR AMP
ITCHED CIRCUIT BOARD
A7585-1
SILICON RECTIFIERS
SOUND
on
KM/
-OUIPiil
HEIGHT
DUIP111
MIT VIDE
1ST If
0303
VERTICAL LINEARITY
TIDO ARP 1
SON If
61301
SOUND
0®
to 1411111 onpropor optore h.ghr
or
vortkal !meanly, alternately
AC INTERLOCK
DOT
11/VAC ISO51
VIM
301
alto,HEIGHT and
AGC CO
SOCKET
information
See
under
E
3DT6
CIAS
1.44.00
m,
.1017
Lyoa
rcII
1,11
A..
emu
zois
I
=-
;:"
-t7
OF
0111
r
110(
111-10
T 201
11401
211
1201
7°
INI, IMP WOW
.1111,1 III N
IN IIISPIIIPP
fOr'ZIITIgo
I::
;Ammo
Mr.
011
1001
mm
00.1071 NP/ES
xior
1201
elOSNISI 00 IWO
1C201
110 wan, SISYK.
!Z.
,cols
RI!i
31
011.11
ISO
2011
o
ISO
PS
-,
r-
3BZ6
Ill If
3D1I6
11187A
210 If
AIL ILL
IP I
01
v302
AoI
301
I
I
1111 01 IMP IMP!
2302
L
VII SIlf MY PP
41 SIC
L303
./r
1104
,
Cf1301
A2
1.4100 Of
Cllr
1111
100
1011
511
14
-
clTil .7
:
_,C,7303-.0. J
L307
1112
1111
0-1
.0047 01
fI
111
C101
120
PP Ni MVPS
NEICIP POW
fiJr
E: 415 010.11
11102
IDA SI ( Of
51.
' 4E,
PA
IFCfb
,
1107
311
1
,
III
-1
."11
111.111.
.
....
4.
.....",
t---ir--b,
1411
0.-.Arre-
.101.1f -I-
11
551
OIL
I.
I
I
)11 Of
i ,....
1421
C414
1:10
.115
1.21116
NS
su
no
*"
+ir tO0 V
v5020
PP
i-ar
ler
1425
!'" V -la.."' .00in
.C1431f
frl[S0113
1/2 ODE?
...1 I 221
2101
!111'$
3112`
IBC
A
!I'
0113
,,
-in
_2_1r"
T
.gVor
mf1
I
,3.4
-1-
'IISI
1
11--1
1
I121
'EMI/sc./00W
",!:61".
11(3.
NM
cod_ 111
.ri i "I
,,
IV :(11.
7::
:r.,
IV
4405
IS
0404
--'. 2i'')''
PIP.
1/210DE1
TCIH
.111(
I,/
IN 2
%I
T1
/III
SAKE
"'IMP 10 1 I PO
°
%KIPP POPP PSI' POI
Imo
:I:1
V'
/ 03110
0 1105
.1--nw,
x51
B
°
I
3BU8
ts
T
1421
In
1427
....,
2.711IC
C417
MI
4
CHI
aY NI
m:
OSP 01 lfl
L01
A 141
110111.
103 CT
1001
11.1.11C111121
9385-6
°V. "'VAT D".110/
1101.1111111
V0.0
111!
tort
/SL
14.50
11455
1.01
LOC VIII
/C150
(NMI: Set PIMP
f 131
-C451
Isom
MI71 PPE LOOM
C441
1 M01
C451
1102201
JAIN
I /BINS 51010CS PN
12AX4CTA
Fill PM PPM N
11111E1
7
0N/INS.
Y.vos
OWN" KNNt /V
Off
WHIN MA. If INII.
ISIS
1502
C502
ISO NOI.
PIP
00 OPSOOP
TO /II
Nit
pp_
001101
/2
Izmir
1
12066A
1151
0452
:1
11e
1.406
,10n
1101
17051)4
MT PICTURE int
1
C112
C
.
/12. CI 110,
v03.4
1.7,101
4115
/0
So"
111(0 al.
5
SS
..--1.0015°12r
me
Ill
1/26AWBA
C
n
III
RIOS
1 8501
1
LIN,
-77r011 17172,1 PP I ar. Of CON 1 IFNI
ETCHED CIRCUIT BOARD A7585-1
CANA
1/2
VEIT
CIRCUIT BREAKER
RESET BUTTON
"AG( onle01 Adpttlivent
tie
Iwn
:12'
;iFE11404RD'"
*'
i13011
3501
-
CSOSr
a
II NI I N PSN
1508
If WE N P01
/00 IS Ili 0 PP
"II WV IS 1.114.
(For Schematic Notes see Page 17)
24
MP
AFINSISItI7
-pita
210
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MODELS
Emerson Television
USING CHASSIS:
120451 HC(H),
120452 MC(M)
(Service material on pages 25 through 30)
MODEL NO.
TV CHASSIS
1500
120451 HC(H)
1502
120451 H
1504
120451 HC
TABLE MODEL
1506
120451 H
PORTABLE
TABLE MODEL
1503
120452 M
1505
120452 MC(M)
STYLE
TYPE
PORTABLE
TABLE MODEL
VHF RECEIVERS
UHF -VHF
RECEIVERS
TUNER
KINESCOPE
471113
17AVP4A
471141
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
To Remove Mask and Lens:
1. Remove the two screws on bottom of mask.
2. Lift bottom of mask out and upward releasing the assembly.
To Remove Picture Tube:
1. Remove mask and lens assembly from front of set. (Instructions above.)
2. Disconnect two antenna leads. Remove masonite back.
3. Remove picture tube socket, ion trap, yoke bracket, and high voltage lead. (Be sure to discharge high voltage.)
4. Remove two screws on picture tube support bracket.
5. Remove picture tube from front of cabinet, guiding the yoke as the neck moves forward.
To reassemble, reverse above procedure.
To Remove Chassis from Cabinet:
1. Remove all knobs, disconnect antenna leads, and remove masonite back.
2. Take off speaker leads, picture tube socket, ion trap, yoke bracket, and high voltage lead. (Be sure to discharge high
voltage.)
3. Remove four chassis -mounting screws from bottom of cabinet.
4. Remove one screw from the VHF tuner brace on upper left of cabinet at the rear and one screw on side near knobs.
5. Pull chassis toward rear, being careful to guide and support the deflection yoke as it slides off the picture tube neck.
To reassemble, reverse above procedure.
REPAIR OF COUPLATES
Whenever possible, couplates should be repaired instead of replaced. This practice could easily become a time -saving
factor.
Example No. 1: Couplate Part #923151, Resistor R-51 open.
Clip off pin 6 from couplate. This removes R-51 from circuit. Insert a regular 47K resistor from pin 5 of couplate to
junction of C-18 and R-78.
Example No. 2: Couplate Part #923055.
Capacitor C-27 shorted.
Clip off pin 4 of couplate. This takes C-27 and R-50 out of circuit.
Insert regular 330K resistor and an 82 mmfd. from pin 3 of couplate to pin 5 of couplate Part #923151.
TUNER 471113 ,CHASSIS 120451 HC,H
AUDIO , VIDEO AND
12C5,12CU5
3AV6
OR12C5/12CU5
AUDIO OUTPUT
1B3GT
F BOARD
N.V.RECTIFIER
LIMITER e
SRBC SEP
es
AUDIO
AMPS
3IICOMI'LE
AMP
1ST
H.O.T
I
L
5 on
2nD VIDEO AMP,
AUDIO AMP, VIDEO
8 AGC DETECTOR
I2DO6A
OF 0-4
2AF4A
SATE
3C85
2 8 11
6CG7
VERT OSC
12W6GT
ART
HORIZONTAL
OUTPUT
R-72
6C67
TO PIN 3
HORIZONTAL
OSCILLATOR
AND CONTROL
&SYNC PHASE
INVERTER
W
1/0,
'
OFTour
5
IFUSIBLEI
TO CRT
VI0
1204
NOR 12 AND VERT SWEEP BOARD
TUNER 471141 , CHASSIS 120452 MC,M
DAMPER
Ac
NOTE:
INDICATES GAP BETWEEN PINS I A 7100 91 ON
MINIATURE SOCKETS OR KEYING FOR OCTAL SOCKETS.
TUBE LOCATION DIAGRAM
25
INTERLOCK(48
PLUG
SW -1
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
EMERSON Chassis 120451H, -HC, -HC(H), 120452M, -MC(M), Alignment Information
VIDEO I.F. ALIGNMENT
1. Connect 3 volts bias to AGC line. Negative terminal to junction of R13 and R15, positive terminal to chassis.
2. Connect IF marker generator to floating shield of tuner mixer tube (See Note) and VTVM to junction L-8 and R-34.
3. Adjust C -T (tuner) for maximum capacity.
4. Adjust marker to 45.5 MC and peak T-4 for maximum. (Keep signal generator output as low as possible).
5. Adjust marker to 43.25 MC and peak T-3, L-2 and T-8 (tuner I.F.) for maximum. (Keep signal generator output as low
as possible).
6. Connect oscilloscope through 20,000 ohm isolation resistor in place of the VTVM and connect a sweep generator to
"Floating" mixer tube shield along with marker generator. Adjust output of sweep to produce about 2 volts peak to
peak at oscilloscope and reduce marker signal so response curve is not distorted.
7. Adjust marker to 45.75 MC. This marker should appear 60% down with respect to related peak of response curve. If not
60%, adjust C.T. Limits of response curve are 30%tilt and 20% peak -to -valley ratio.
NOTE: Part of the procedure calls for use of a "floating" shield over the mixer tube of the tuner. The tube shields now used
in the tuner cannot be removed from their mounts. Instead of a "floating" shield, the following method is recommended:
Take a thin piece of copper on brass foil, 1A" by 2", and paste on to a thin piece of onion skin insulation. The insulation should extend about 1/8" beyond the two long sides and one short side while the foil should extend beyond the insulation on the other short side.
The shim assembly is then slipped in lengthwise to fit between the mixer tube and its shield with the metal foil facing
the tube. The short side with extended- insulation is placed toward the chassis, while the side with the foil extending
beyond the insulation is connected to the sweep generator. The shim may now be rotated for maximum coupling as observed on the oscilloscope.
SOUND I.F. ALIGNMENT:
1. With antenna loosely coupled to set, adjust receiver to a weak signal channel.
2. Place a VTVM (negative scale) to junction L-1 and R-1, and adjust T-9 and L-4 for maximum limiter voltage on
V.T.V.M. Amount of input signal should be such that a sharp maximum reading can be obtained.
3. Connect V.T.V.M. to junction R-5 and C-4, (Negative Scale) and detune discriminator (T-1) secondary to produce a
maximum negative reading. (Looking at top of chassis secondary slug is closer to you).
4. Adjust primary of T-1 for maximum negative reading.
5. Re -adjust secondary of discriminator T-1 towards original slug position for minimum reading on V.T.V.M. Check
audio, and if distorted, repeat steps No. 1-5.
ALIGNMENT OF MIRACLE PICTURE LOCK (Horizontal Oscillator and AFC)
Tune set to a known good channel and turn picture stabilizer (R-31, 100K) located on the rear chassis apron fully clockwise (minimum resistance). Short phasing coil (L-9) by means of a jumper wire across C-32, .01 mfd, accessible on circuit
board. Rotate horizontal hold control (R-57, 500K) 2/3 of its total travel in the clockwise direction. Starting with the horizontal frequency slug of T-6, (the coil mounted horizontally on board) all the way '.'out" (towards back of set), rotate "in"
until picture locks into sync. Remove short from phase coil and adjust phase coil (L-9) slug until picture holds. Adjust
horizontal hold control R-57 to full clockwise position. At this point picture should fall out of horizontal sync. (4 oars
slanted to the right as you are facing picture). Readjust phase coil for these 4 bars if necessary. Picture will now fall out
of sync at both sides of the 2/3 point (clockwise) of the horizontal hold control.
NOTE: T-6 and L-9 must be adjusted with a hex -head adjustment tool and not a screwdriver.
ADJUSTMENT OF PICTURE STABILIZER (R-31)
For local signals, this control should be set to its extreme clockwise position (minimum resistance).
If sync improvement is required in electrically noisy areas, the picture stabilizer control (R-31) is turned in a counterclockwise direction until the best sync stability is obtained. Be sure to check all channels for sync instability, since
a compromise setting of R-31 might be necessary.
IF OUTPUT
43 2550
CHANNELS 212
r 6:Par
R-57
OSC. ADJ
4MOLD
ANT.
INPUT
VHF
Er:3)
EL
R-62
CHANNEL
SELECTOR
HOLD.
R-29.
BRIGHT
TUNING /e
LOW VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
0
/OUR
SECONDARY (TOP14.5MC
iF
ON -OFF.
TUNER 474113
CHASSIS 120451 NC,H
VOLUME
L-2
H.0.7
43.25 NC.
R-33 /
CONTRAST
I
L-4 TDP
4 5NC.
0
01-3
412550
C -T
UHF TUNING
CHANNELS 2-12
OSC ADJ
CRYSTAL
1982A
VHF
- j---
FINE //
TUNING
CHANNEL I3
0
DSC ADJ
GEAR AND FRICTION
PL ATE ASSEMBLY
TUNING
7-4 NOT.
45.5 MC.
IF COUPLING
UHF FINE
CHANNEL
SELECTOR
/OUR
923150
T-1
PRIMARTIBOT.)1.5MC.
923052
R-7
CHANNEL 13
OSC ADZ
AUDIO. VIDEO & LE BOARD
t COUP 923057
SI-1
TRIMMER
IF OUTPUT/
43 2514C
.."
P
01
IF INPUT
FROM UHF
0 Ci 1
0
7-6
VERTICAL g HORIZ.
VERTICAL
SIZE
LINEARITY
FRED.
COUP t
923151
I
41.VIIT
923055
R-64
R-67
2 MEG.
.'"gIrt6
LI
COURT
1=1
ADJUSTABLE WITH NYLON
HE% HEAD TOOL THRU BACK OF SET
MORI Z
R -75
L-9
P-1
TAMP
HORIZ. PHAS
FUSE
AND VERT SWEEP BOARD
UHF SHAFTS GEAR AND CLUTCH
rASSEMBLY (SEE PARTS LIST)
TUNER 471141
PICTURE STABILIZER BR -31
CHASSIS 12045231C,M
(SEE PARTS LIST I
NOTE. UHF SHAFT MOUNTING PLATE 194215511S RIVETED TO UHF TINIER AND
IS NOT SEPARATE AS INDICATED IN PARTS LIST.
NOTC**TOP" MEANS FURTHER FROM CHASSIS OR ETCHED BOARD
t NOT USED ON CHASSIS 120451H,120452M.
ALIGNMENT POINT DIAGRAM
26
SAC INTERLOCK
FUSIBLE
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
EMERSON Chassis 120451H, -HC, -HC(H), 120452M, -MC(M), Service Information
TUNER INFORMATION
VHF tuner 471113 is a 12 position, series filament, incremental inductance -type tuner. Switching is accomplished by
means of 4 -ganged wafer sections in a removable turret with two circular rows of contacts on one side of each section.
A single stationary spring contact is used for each circular row of contacts.
Ordinarily, the only adjustments required in the field are those necessary to compensate for variations in oscillator tube
replacements. This can usually be accomplished with the channel #13 oscillator adjustment. If individual channel adjustments are necessary, proceed as follows:
(Since this tuner is of the incremental inductance type, all oscillator adjustments should be made commencing with
the higher channel and then proceeding to the lower channel).
1. Set channel selector to channel #13. Set fine tuning control to electrical center of its range.
2. Adjust Channel #13 oscillator adjustment (See figure #1) for best picture and sound. (Use a non-metallic screwdriver).
3. Channels #2, #4, and #6 have slug adjustments and should always be adjusted starting with the higher channel.
(See figure #1.) It is recommended that channels #13, #6, #4, and #2 slugs, only, be adjusted in the field in that
order when necessary.
4. Channels #12 through #7, can be adjusted when required by bending the hairpin inductances through the hole provided.
5. Channels #3 and #5 split -coil windings should not have to be compressed or separated ordinarily.
UHF -VHF Tuner 471141 -This tuner incorporates a 13 position, incremental inductance -type VHF tuner, plus a 70 channel
UHF tuner. Separate VHF anii UHF antenna inputs are provided. A 2AF4 is used as the UHF oscillator and a 1N82A as
the UHF mixer crystal. The 13th position on the VHF tuner corresponds to the UHF position and converts the VHF tuner
to two additional stages of IF amplification.
mbly of VHF Tuner 471113, VHF Section Tuner 471141
1. Remove one screw from edge of cover away from the shaft. This releases the cover and most servicing can be accomplished without further disassembly.
2. If further disassembly is needed, disengage 2 retaining wire springs and 2 grounding wire springs.
Di
3. Hold tuner so that shaft is up. In this position the ball bearing that engages the detent ring will not be lost as the
turret is disengaged.
Reverse procedure to reassemble,
Disassembly of UHF Section, UHF -VHF Tuner 471141
1. Unsolder three leads from UHF section and unplug the UHF input cable.
2. Remove the screw from the linkage bar (located beneath the crossed shafts) that locks the tuners together. The screw
forces the prongs apart causing pressure contact.
3. Remove two screws from top UHF bracket.
C- T
I.F. SANDVADTH
(MOUND
4. To reach UHF components, straighten tabs in the front cover plate.
ADJUSTMENT
I.F. OUTPUT
Reverse procedure to reassemble.
L- 32
FILAMENT
I.E OUTPUT
COIL
5+
FILAMENT
CHANNELS 2-12
NOTE.
USED ON TUNER 471115 OMIT
1,Z14.71,1fIrLuZ.112.331042LD ME ORDERED My TUNER PART MUMMER
AGC
OSC. ADJUST
A11110ESS ARE EMERSON PART HUMMERS
ANTENNA
TERMINALS
REFER TO VHF TUNER PARTS LIST, NO21113,VHF SECTION NO 41E141.
F 9ECTION TUNER 11141
CWSSLt PARTS LIST
orecn,...
R -I
P.
4.3
C.I
MOOR St In ,
IL. IL
US VA
CEA IL . ,
num. FRED TIM
C-2 M.. IUD T10.11
IT, - oEscRirta
C.2
03C.LOW ENO TRIMMER
a/.
DE.CRIRTIOM
L-3 °MCC/0FL. LOOP
C. 100010N MD TIMM
L- OSC.C.PLIN4 LOOP
CH.
L.11
1000 MN, FEED TH.
MIT Loop
L -2 RE CM/FLING LOOP
LH
40 MC OUTPUT COIL
L-4 FLAMM COIL
EMI
TUNING
L-7 CATHODE CO,
C
ARE
K. NMsnu
39C5
SATO
OSC. a
MIXER
CHANNEL 13
OSC. ADJUST.
R.F. AMP
TV TUNER, 471113
* TOMS
ALTERNATE CIRCUIT VHF
TUNER 411111
--7
r,
12.94)"42
II)
I TCH
1_*
ALT -MATE CIRCUIT
VHF TUNER .1113
E-21 Te
(IV. UHF-I.E POSITION)
YAREF
4T,ACT OM
.9621133
UHF SECTION
VHF SECTION
SCHEMATIC, EMERSON TV TUNERS 471113, 471141
27
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
EMERSON Chassis 120451H, -HC, -HC(H), 120452M, -MC(M), Continued
NOTE.
THE LETTER 't',FOLLOWiNG THE CHASSIS NUMBER,
INDICATES USE OF COUPLATES (120451 -HC)
ON NON-COUPLATE CHASSIS, INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED
COMPONENTS OF THE SAME VALUES ARE USED,
EXCEPT WHERE (*) INDICATED.
BLUE
OUTPUTT
TRANSFORMER
TO R-1
VOLUME CONTI.
TO C-25,0.01150
TO JUNCTION C-411,11-110
ON SWEEP SO RD
TO R-31
C STAB.
(5.
,c."<
4.---wm-el
TO
VHF
ANTENNA
130021 SAI.MCED1
VMF
F
TO R -2S
IRIOMTNESS
UMfVlif
CONTROL
TUNER
pANT NOA,41
R-2 ,l11(/
TO * 1400
1 uSID ON <0.1:14,1203201.0
VMf
1200
TO PIN 2
OF
TUNER
UHF SECTION
A -26,420K
PANT No Anms
X-3 IN82A Ora RIO
TO PIN II CRT
USED ON CMS 120451- MC(01)0111L.1
r
V-16 2AF4A UHF 05C
TO R-33
CONTRAST
CONTROL
My
V -I4 3BC5RIMAR
V -IS 54Te
4323.0
5AT8 osc SMIXER
U2er
ill
TUNER -4.M-7;"1",
oes
[IFABLE
OUTPUT
VHF SECTION
V-14 3BC5 it I AMP
II
41110,1C
SOARO
I
0.11-
L-2
too
0
10;/°v1CD0911D,
4.o
R1,4IER
6-.11.12
0W-41
56
8220
10 TUNER
AGC
TO PIN e.
TUNER
--11.TOM15
T 10010
I.F. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (TOP VIEW)
TO C-111A6c/
L.0
C
CONDITIONS FOR TAKING VOLTAGE AND
RESISTANCE (Static Conditions) READINGS
The voltage and resistance readings were taken on chassis 120451HC.
Due to component variations, voltage and resistance readings may vary
slightly from those given here. Slight variations may also be noticed if
chassis is not coded as mentioned above.
The picture tube, deflection yoke and high voltage circuits were connected to take the following readings and waveshapes. If picture tube
is not connected to chassis, insert test picture tube or short pins 1
and 12 in picture tube socket to complete filament circuit.
1. Antenna disconnected and antenna terminals shorted on tuner and
connected to chassis (use short leads).
2. Line voltage 117 volts (Disconnect power for resistance readings).
R -T3
SI-I
145 V
1 AMP
5
174cv,°,`,TIVII
L -I2
Sigro
1 0V
*SIGNIFIES CERAMIC OR MICA CAPACITORS,
CAPACITY IN MICRO- MICROFARADS
*SIGNIFIES TUBULAR CAPACITORS,
CAPACITY IN MICROFA RADS
RESISTORS ARE IN OHMS I K I000 OHMS /
3. 3 volt bias battery connected to A.G.C. circuit, positive terminal to
chassis, negative terminal to junction of R13 and R15, BIAS
.130V
ANDIF2 WATT, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
ARROWS AT CONTROLS INDICATE CLOCKWISE ROTATION
BATTERY USED FOR VOLTAGE READINGS ONLY.
4. All controls in position for normal picture. (Varied when it directly
17i"'D
affects reading).
5. All measurements taken with a vacuum tube voltmeter and ohmmeter.
6. All readings listed in tables were taken between points shown and
chas si s.
7. Resistance readings are given in ohms unless otherwise noted.
8. N.C. denotes no connection.
FIEATER CONNECTIONS OF VIDEO LE AND SOUND I.F
12006A
1204
2
Ri/2 R-,15
SCAT
V -I1
ECG/
11450:1
V,
6
I2C5,
I 20.C501.0 5U6
12,1,9:70
BOARD
5:.31.11
3,0411
1,5U11
WAVE SHAPE ANALYSIS CHART
The wave shapes shown on the schematic were taken on chassis
.
V-3
HEATER
120451HC:
-
Slight peak -to -peak voltage differences may be noticed on
chassis of later triangle codes.
The peak -to -peak voltages given may also vary slightly
depending on signal strength and component variations.
To accurately observe the wave shapes, the relatively high input
capacity of an oscilloscope must be reduced so as not to change the
Operating characteristics of the television set. Failure to do this will
result in wrong wove shape readings. This is accomplished by using
I
CONNECTIONS OF
I
OSCILLATOR BOARD
Cf°1I
L
TT7 J
SeZI I W3 Ca
H EAT E RS
I
±
MVP.
(CM VOLUME
CONTROL)
NATO
I
U IN
I
0-14
I
ON 017 SW -1
an Emerson low -capacity probe
1. Connect antenna and tune receiver to channel where best reception
has been obtained in the past.
2. Low end of the probe is connected to CHASSIS and the contrast
control is set for MAXIMUM UNDISTORTED CONTRAST.
3. The 30 and 7875 C.P.S. oscilloscope sweep settings are used so
as to permit observation of two cycles of the wave shape.
NOTE: A wave shape seen on your oscilloscope may be upside
down from same wave shape shown here. This will depend on
the number of stages of amplification in the oscilloscope used.
35C5
V-10
I
L
I
r.
--.1
-r
INEATER CONNECTIONS Of UHF VW TUNER
115 VOLTS
c LINE
60 CPS
I
2AF4A I
V -I6
SATS
V -IS
3005
v-14
I
I
TOPI ICS.
N3
28
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
EMERSON Chassis 120451H, -HC, -HC(H), 120452M, -MC(M), Schematic Diagram
VIDEO I. F. 8 SOUND I.F.
--
...v.
BOARD
1
99v P -P
V-1(11)
"
COURAT, 50P1 S0.
"7,
T- i
0p 9912CU5
700
315V
,-0,
V-3
I2C5.
=PLATE P11103.11130 St 12C5/12CU5
SAVE
r''-'9"--"'"'
nov
2 30 5 1
V-2
4.5644
5U8
NUS p
440
AUDIO =PUT
AUDIO DAMIEN
SOJNO LIMITER
V-1(A)7..11110111111111111111
30 CPS
1
®3411
3-3
R -2S
47K
POT
C-7
giAt
IA
.022
I
4700-r
R470
.---.TM--C> 450
2200
.9,
L -I
46U/1
21-4*lam
fg,3,z
kaa
COU PL ATE BOARDS
-f-, -;
O
ci-.)
220)
1000
+140 0 I
'AFL..
,I,
1405 1
2-71
C-5111
2206 ®
IS 47K ON ION -
CONTROL
JRACKET
2
R-11
13 N4
150
i-7e8
RIO
470
C-3
22 K
SP - I
4%0
i;80
1
i=
T-2
II
SCHEMATIC SNOWING CONNECTION Of
CONTROL BRACKET I POTENTIOMETERS
CONTROi
*0 28 IS 120 K ON NON COUPLAT1
BOARDS
R - 211, R-33,
RND R-621 TO CHASSIS BASE.
- 57
ALL POINTS MARKED 0 ARE
TIED
R-7,
6'
BRACKET
10 CONTROL
0
45101'1113
,8,-c.Z2.
L
22,11E6
I
13T VIDEO V.
,
1000 -3'
VIDEO a AGC
DETECTOR
1
6 SOUND AMP
Isv
.AV
45.5114
T-4
L
,
R-33
10 K
105
--I
.+1400
3 M-2 ItrIsTV99
700
L
-7I"AU"
1.65
0
LO -03,1
PICTURE
STABILIZER
6+.140 V
it8
O
I0 I C.-10
J.
470K
\I o
4-
00
NSA
a
V-10
7AVP4A
CONTROL
]M -I CENTERING
5
-rf0-018
r"---ts:
.
BRIGHTNESS
TO
I"000
140
I
110V TO
011
.047
ir.1
R;L2
C. -2i
BA
V. -612817A
C-24
0Y
OAj(21.1
0
o]OK
01003 OUTPUT
BOTTOM/
cos,
1
PICTURE TUBE
R-28
0
V-5(8)51418
V-5(A)5AM8
V-4 3CB6
J -c -9
R -21
470K
SOUPS
2ND VIDEO Lf. AE
AMP
+1400
-44:6.12
8200
+15°:
I
1 t -*JSZIZT
10 V
ipgmuu
11111101111
0067
33305
0 CP
E
OSCILLATOR BOARD
/1111;
11111111111111111111111
M R-30 EL C-27 ARE
REVERSED ON
cH0.012T12.134,TA.L
SYNC PHASE
IN vERTER
NON- 0
V-7 (A)
ry
6C 67
6 CG7
a7
0
30/1
R-46
"2" 11',.
8200
200
2711
2-36
OV.
10V TO
+25V
O
MA
]900
c.o(T.7"1,.-574P
+14 OV
C- 33- .6.
C-3
100
3711
I
O O W:0121'111
112
R-56
6W04
L ---J
II -MI
4702
ON SOME SITS
12 04
'P ;On
11 -MOLD CONTROL
Vr:
P.1 11
1875
715)5C PS
O
CPS/
7 Car
6
38av
1-10
+140
30 CPS
VERTICAL OUTPUT
%0?
V-13
VERTICAL
OSCILLATOR
R-59
00K
30 CPS
V-7(8)6CG7
1
.
V -I2
41400
-
.047 I
0014E
,0
1
tr.-017,
02014
C-41
100K
HOP
COILS
T-7
7-2-0-51.1W.92
131.1.
12W6GT
YELLOW
1105
R-60
R - S5
N6. I
1,E-37"--,---
R -SSA
220
5110.110
ON NW 114111
1
I
I
OV
K
Ri2A P'gi-%43`-
4140
.Ye
R-46 WY
.
1
1000
-45
.032
C-3301
I
R-84 3.04
100
T-6LfI L 9
2-11
22 K
IP'
I
I n50,
c
1-54
0
liV820
C-26
82
12 DONA
R-76
lel°
I
-Wv"-
1900 0
+230 TO -15V
IB3 GT
Ic
V-9
0-92
I
r -;.--
OUTPUT
14'
V-8(8)
V 8(A)
®
Dv
OSCILLATOR
RECTIFIER
it.
HORIZONTAL
HORIZONTAL
ATE
P2PaiI 923055
6CG7
C-025-
7875 CPS
7675 CPS
7873 C S
30 CPS
IC,"
GM VOTTAG
T-5
TA
i6gt
I
R-69
600
4 L -I
2 VERT
COILS
JOV
C-45
1000
100
V
2i'a°
411
r.
® COUPLATI PART 20623033
17.2.3,0
R-66
2.2010"
22
960K
71-
P -P
&al
7
-61
79
22MI
30 CPS
RM6EG 4
VERTICAL SIZE
CONTROL
DEFLECTION
ITV
SOOT
VERT. UNIARITT
CONTROL
R- 6 2
1 SMIG
VERTICAL HOLD
L6
+130V tI40V
C-56
2200 I
CHASSIS NO. 120451 HC, H,120452MC,A4
.CONTROL
29
YOKE
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
EMERSON Chassis 120451H, -HC, -HC(H), 120452M, -MC(M), Continued
SERVICING OF PRINTED BOARDS
To remove defective components one of severol methods may be used. A recommended method is to cut close to the body of the defective component and solder the new part to the remaining leads. Another method is to apply heat at the junction point of the com-
ponent wire lead and the printed board and lift out the component. If the wire lead is bent over, first heat and pry lead wire up. A
defective component with many terminals may be removed by clipping into several parts and removing a small section at a time.
Use a low wattage (20 to 30 watts) soldering iron. Be careful not to apply excessive heat since this may cause the printed foil to
loosen. Broken foil leads may be repaired by soldering a hookup wire across the break.
TO FOL.
TO sitOv
TO AUDIO OUT.
CONTROL
TO C-25 ON
TO JUNCTION
'WORMER T-2
R-7
OSC. SWEEP
C-48. R-20
BOARD
TO BRIGICTRESS
CONTROL R-2111
COUPLATE
*923051
R-6
-s r
L-1
4.1514
TO %ITN:Cal
fa TO PICTURE
TO 71P,13112
rSTA:631,2EN
12Vo6GT
CONTRASTTO
CONTROL3
TO VOL.
TO PIN 02
4644-.
CONTROL
R-7
cOuPLATE
0923,51
TO TUNER
TERN
STRIP
64.14.00
LUG a 7
TO TUNER
TERM
LUO"
TO PICTURE
2. 5 TAMER
L -I4
C -S3
.41.001
TO TUNER TEMP. STRIP
LUDO 2 ON VHF TUNER OR..
LU6.06 ON VHF -UHF TUNER
iLk..;,52
OOP
4
NOTE, * 12C5,12C5/12CU5 OR I2CU5
$3.12w6GT
TERM. STRIP
LUG 0. ON VHF TUNER
v 11M
-r
041
To PIN I OF
TO TUNER
I
_roc
LAW
AUDIO, VIDEO AND I.F. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD, (TOP) COUPL ATE VERSION
TO R-26
IF. VIDEO AND SOUND
TO R-57
BOARD
NOR HOLD CONTROL
R-44
R-63
TO JUNCO
R-713R-BP.L.
R-67
VERT SIZE
1,
VERT. LIN.
2.2MEG
TO PINS
C-2
TO
I
C-47
42
VERT HOLD 4--
11-,1,,,
0.1
6200AMF
41.-505AH-
R-53.2205
.-FT3.00i1-.
0-44
01
irl°446"TeR.71
"1°,1
f°°
4,
look
c3
TORN?
I1W6GT
.4414
2200
C-211
022
395
0.47
TO .140v
;PT vle"b"4:4/
H011 MigE
0.35
II
11,211
-#1.0-
CliN.O.
C01
32
HOP
fN
.-1441-14:
.001
12266T
JUNCTION
"4-4 - CAR,R'S
151
II 41
k
IOOK
6,30 v
-./VV-
RrA1-43
8 2P
CONTROL
TO R-54,
PIN 5 OF
,2006A
62 NW
2,66GT.-L.
R-66
4--FILAH---4
220
NOR
C-34
3502
.001t
R42,
T-6
R -I0
C-45
2
MEG.
I
ca ?
TO PIN
1204
;
TO PIN
V-9.120044
1-56220
-!'i27[1/50:.A."
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL SWEEP PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (TOP VIEW)
TO 0-26 ON VIDEO IF
TOMMIE HOLD
MAD I F
CONTROL R.47
VERT SIZE
110A110
VERT. LIN.
1
C 50
OUPLATE
w:iyAre
TO JUNCT;ON
TO R-54
116.-,--apIN 5 Of
M006A
;UV/SGT.-0
+130V
TO
TO VERT HOLO
214---84 JUNCTION
C-18,16-711
C -4I01
Tv?IrIN82v/66T
-se
.03.
NO
TO Pa 7
ea.:2
.ci
V -13,123E661'
TO R-68,
R-61
P165 OF
02
12366T
M41
CNN.
T
0.44_40.
ICA
ieN-42
2K
.22011
O
C -N
C-25
.47
L__
TO PIN 21r -s0
4140V
TO ONO
TO PIN 51.121v-11
V-9,1213066
220
.TO PIN I
v -012D044
1204, V -I2
OM VINO BOARD
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL SWEEP PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (TOP VIEW) (COUPLATE VERSION)
30
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Series M5,
COVERS
MODELS
(Service material on pages 31 through 38)
I 7T3304
17T 3305
17T 3306
I7T3310
17T33I I
17T3315
17T3316
17T3317
I7T3318
I7T 3320
17T3321
I 7T333IU
21T3417
21T3418
21T3419
2IT3420
2IT3421
21T3425
2IT3429
2IT 3430
21T 3431
21T 3432
ELECTRIC
GENERAL
controls,
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY - These
R204 and R208, should be adjusted simultaneously
to give proper vertical size consistent with good
Final adjustment should be
vertical linearity.
made to allow the picture to extend approximately
1/8 inch beyond the top and bottom edges of the
mask.
HORIZONTAL HOLD 1. Remove the cabinet back as described below.
2. Tune the receiver to a weak signal and adjust
the controls for normal operation.
3. Short Test Point VI to the chassis with a
jumper wire.
4. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor from Test Point
VIII to Test Point IX (in parallel with L251.)
5. Adjust horizontal hold potentiometer, R257,
until picture just "Floats" back and forth across
the screen. Leave R257 set in this position.
6. Remove the 1000 ohm resistor from Test Point
Adjust L251 stabilizer
VIII and Test Point IX.
"Floats "
just
so
that the picture again
coil
Leave L251 set in this posiacross the screen.
tion.
7. Remove the jumper from Test Point VI and
chassis.
the
MAKE YOKE ADJUSTMENT
WITH SPRING IN THIS
POSITION
2IT 3435
AFTER ADJUSTMENT
MOVE SPRING TO
2IT3436
2IC3439
2IC3440
SECURE YOKE
THIS POSITION TO
2103441
2IC3442
2103443
2103445
2103446
2103450
2103451
2IL3455
2I L3456
2IC3458
2103459
2I C3460
2103461
2IC3478
2103479
2103482
2IC3483
WITH OR
WITHOUT
UHF
five potentials may be chosen for best focus. The
five connection points for focus potential are located on the small printed board behind the vertiThe lead from R219
cal linearity potentiometer.
in the picture tube socket may be connected to the
proper point for best focus as follows:
1. Connect to Pin "B+1" near RC -304.
2. Connect to Pin "B+3" behind the vertical linearity control.
3. Connect to Pin "B+4" behind the vertical linearity control.
4. Connect to Pin with ground symbol near Y251A/
Y2941B phase detector.
5. Connect to pin at the junction of R216, R217,
and spark gap SG201.
TO REMOVE THE CHASSIS FROM THE CABINET
Remove the knobs from the shafts on the front of
Disconnect any antenna connected to
Remove the cabinet
the antenna terminal board.
back by taking out the screws securing the back to
the cabinet, the interlock bracket, and the antenleads from
the
na bracket. Remove the speaker
speaker network terminal board on
speaker
the
On some models it will be necessary
some models.)
to unsolder the speaker leads to remove them from
Connect one end of a lead to the
the speaker.
chassis and touch the other end to the anode of
the picture tube to discharge it. Remove the anode lead from the picture tube by squeezing the
anode clip and withdrawing it from the tube. Rethe cabinet
move the screws from the bottom of
which hold the chassis. Remove the picture tube
Loosen the yoke clamp and slide the yoke
socket.
Remove
back over the neck of the picture tube.
the chassis from the cabinet.
the. cabinet.
(
TO REMOVE THE 21 INCH PICTURE TUBE
FIG. 1. YOKE CLAMP
PICTURE TUBE ADJUSTMENTS
YOKE POSITION - The yoke is secured to the neck of
the picture tube by a "U" shaped clamp and spring,
Figure 1. To adjust the yoke for picture tilt,
loosen the clamp by squeezing points C and D with
long nose pliers until the eye of the spring
The yoke can
slides over the bend in the clamp.
now be adjusted for correct picture tilt. To secure the yoke, the pliers are used in the same
manner between points A and B until the spring eye
slides over the bend to its clamping position.
centering device
PICTURE CENTERING- The picture
is located on the rear of the yoke assembly. The
centering device consists of two rings each of
Each ring has
which may be rotated separately.
The holes are protwo tabs with holes punched.
vided so that an insulated alignment tool may be
inserted in them to provide an easy means of roRotate the rings so that the
tating the rings.
tabs move towards or away from each other to cenr
the picture on the face of the tube.
FOCUS - The proper focus potential for the tube
was chosen at the time the set was manufactured.
If it becomes necessary to install a new picture
tube or change the focus potential, any one of
31
The chassis must be removed from the cabinet as
previously described before the picture tube can
be removed.
After removing the chassis remove four screws
which go through the bottom of the cabinet into
the tube strap brackets. Remove the top left hand
of
nut holding the tube bracket to the top front
Hold the neck of the tube in the
the cabinet.
left hand and remove the top right hand nut. Carefully remove the tube from the cabinet.
lay the tube face
To replace the picture tube,
down on a clean cloth so that the tube face does
not become scratched. Loosen the nut on the spade
bolt securing the picture tube in the tube strap.
Place the strap
Remove tube strap from the tube.
on the new tube so that when facing the back of
the tube the anode button is to the right with the
tube strap ears at the top. Position the tape between the tube strap and the picture tube. Tighten the nut on the spade bolt to secure the strap
assembly in the
to the tube. Replace the tube
cabinet and observe if the tube aligns properly
remove the tube
with the mask. If it does not,
from the cabinet and reposition the strap as necessary to effect proper alignment of the picture
tube with the mask. Re -assemble picture tube into
the cabinet by reversing the disassembly procedure
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC Series M5 Service Material, Continued
TO REMOVE THE 17 INCH PICTURE TUBE
CLEANING THE CURVED PLASTIC SAFETY WINDOW AND PICTURE TUBE FACE
Remove the chassis from the cabinet as described
above.
After removing the chassis,
position the
cabinet face down on a soft clean cloth.
Loosen
the two self tapping screws at the top and bottom
of the picture tube sling.
Disengage the sling
from the four hooks and remove the picture tube.
To reassemble the picture tube, reverse the above procedure making sure that the picture
tube
anode button is located at that end of the cabinet
farthest from the control panel.
Remove the chassis and picture tube assembly as
previously described.
The inside of the safety
window and the picture tube face may now be cleaned.
A solution of pure soap and water and a soft
cloth is recommended for cleaning.
Most other
cleaning agents,
sprays,
detergents, or solvents
are harmful to the safety window and should not be
applied.
VIDEO I -F SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION:
The video I -F system must be in alignment in order to align most other sections of the receiver;
therefore it is treated first. A list of the frequencies of the tuned coils is given and may be
used for pre - peaking these coils, but over-all
sweep alignment is necessary to correctly align
the I -F system.
AM PRE -PEAKING AND TRAP FREQUENCIES
L135-45.75 MC
L151-42.50 MC
T151-43.00 MC
T152-45.30 MC
T153-44.15 MC
L150-47.25 MC
3. Short the antenna terminals together with a
jumper wire.
4. Connect oscilloscope to Test Point III thru a
22,000 ohm resistor not more than 2.5 inches away
from Test Point
5. Connect -4 volts bias between Test Point II
and the chassis with the negative side of the bias
voltage on Test Point II.
6. Inject signals from a properly terminated AM
signal generator or sweep generator
through the
network in Figure 4 to the I -F injection jack*.
General Electric test equipment, if used, need not
be terminated as the termination is in the attenuator.
Align the receiver to produce the response curve
in Figure 2 under "Remarks".
General Notes:
1. Allow receiver and alignment
equipment
at
least 20 minutes of warm-up time before proceeding.
2. Turn the volume control fully counter clockwise and the contrast control fully clockwise. Set
the channel selector to Channel 9 or some other
high band channel where oscillator influence is
not noted as the fine tuning control is turned.
*NOTE: The I -F injection jack is not a phono type
receptacle.
The connection is made by the end of
the phono plug touching the contact inside the injection jack.
The outside shell of the plug grips
the injection jack firmly. Press plug firmly into
place without excess pressure.
See Figure 3 for
plug construction.
Proceed as follows:
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT CHART
STEP
SIGNAL
FREQUENCY
ADJUST
REMARKS
1.
47.25 MC AM
Adjust L150 for
minimum scope
deflection
Use maximum scope sensitivity and smallest
possible signal for the 47.25 MC AM
adjustments.
2.
38-48 MC sweep
generator, scope
calibrated 3 volts
peak to peak for
2 inch deflection.
L135 (converter plate) for
maximum deflection of the
45.75 MC marker.
Do not retouch this adjustment.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SAME
SAME
SAME
SAME
SAME
L151 (1st I -F grid) for maximum deflection of the
42.5 MC marker.
L153 (Video Detector)for
maximum deflection of the
44.15 MC marker.
T152 (2nd I -F Plate) to place
45.75 MC marker properly on
the curve.
T151 (1st I -F Plate)to place
42.5 MC Marker properly on
the curve.
L153 if necessary to shape
the nose.
32
41.25M
4725 MC
3-5%
45.75MC
42.5MC
50%±5%
50% + 5%
_MI
45.omp-100%
---115
jz
44.15 MC
FIGURE 2. I -F RESPONSE CURVE
Repeat 5, 6 and 7 if necessary.
Symmetry of the nose is important. No
portion of the nose should be out of
symmetry by more than 3%.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC Series M5 Alignment Information, Continued
COAX CABLE
SHIELD BRAID
BRASS OR COPPER
TUBING
RI
I(TUBULA
R2
=111
O
PHONO PLUG
MM,
Ca:=Tiorl
MOM IIIMM OWN.
WRAP ASSEMBLY WITH TAPE
SOLDER
SOLDE
FIG. 3 I -F INJECTION PLUG CONSTRUCTION
4.5 MC TRAP ALIGNMENT
TO
POINT
1. Connect a -7.5V bias between Test Point II
and chassis.
2. Turn contrast control fully clockwise.
3. Connect detector network (Figure 5) to Test
Point IV.
Connect an AC VTVM to the network.
4. Connect oscilloscope to speaker terminals.
5. Apply an accurate 4.5 MC AM signal through
.001 MF to Test Point
The top core of T154 has two positions
showing minimum.
The bottom core has two positions showing maximum.
The correct position for
each core is the position nearest the respective
end of the coil.
0
oi
rz.
4700
IN64
685
look 1 29
TO CHASSIS
OF
"
4
TO VTVM
0
RECEIVER
FIG. 5 DEThCTaRNETWORK
NOTE:
6. Tune the top core of T154 for minimum de flection on the VTVM.
7. Turn up volume control. Tune the bottom core
of T154 for maximum deflection on the oscilloscope.
8. Retouch the top core for minimum reading on
the VTVM.
AUDIO I -F ALIGNMENT
1. Connect an antenna to the receiver and tune
in a weak television signal.
This will provide a
4.5 MC FM signal source for audio I -F alignment.
Keep the volume
control turned down
unless the
speaker is connected.
2. Connect two matched 100,000 ohm resistors in
series between Pin No. 2 of V8 (6FM8) and chassis.
3. Follow instructions in Audio Alignment chart.
AUDIO ALIGNMENT CHART
S1EY
1
CONNECT VTVM OR 20,000
OHMS/VOLTMETER
Between Pin No. 2
of V8 and chassis.
2
3
Between terminal 2
of RC -304 and the
ADJUST
METER INDICATION
Bottom core T154
Adjust for maximum deflection.
T301 primary (Top)
Adjust for maximum deflection.
T301 secondary
Adjust for zero volts d -c
output.
(Bottom)
center of the two
100,000 ohm resistor.
1
CI
1000muf
R3
1011
?
_J
FIG. 4 I -F INJECTION NETWORK
TUBE AND ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS
33
REMARKS
Repeat steps 1, 2
and 3 to assure
proper adjustments.
Each core has two
positions. Select
position for each
core nearest respective end of the coil.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC Series M5 Service Information, Continued
r
V3
V2
AGFA
L135
1ST I -F
TESTI
-
TO RI80
BRIGHTNESS
I -F
INJECTION
TO S401
RI57
12K
C151
W VW
7w UHF
5%
L-
22
150K
I
RI51
5.6K
1
V7
6AUGA
4.5MC AMP. (17")
B+
--
+ 275V
4153
330K
F1L. r +135V
TO UHF
90V
TO T251
TERM .4
TO T25I
TERM 5
T151
RI49
RiOi
I(UHF ONLYITic
TERMINAL BOARD "A"
140V
L150
47.25 MC
TRAP
TIOK,7W
TERMINAL BOARDX VIEWED
FROM REAR OF"21 CHASSIS
RI50
22
CI
8+3
+275V 134
B+3
ATIO
DET.
CI55
6153
BOOT
200V
REAR VIEW
TE
POISNTTII
OV
WIDTH SWITCH
WIRE COLOR CODE
B+I
N 405, 451,1, E5,
BROWN - FILAMENT
3.3K
0301
TERM
BLUE
+135V
121a4
TAaWF
TO T251
5000
V8A
1201 a
R218
R307 1
100
ORANGE - LOW 134 -
RATIO GET.
RED a WHITE - BA. BOOST
rI6
R304
47K
V7
6AU6A
IQI-
II
IM
I 'VOLUME 8 SW.
L
YOKE WIRING
TO WIDTH
I
TO PLATE
CAP CF VI4
TO L252
TO T154
AUDIO
TAKE -OFF
OILY)
ALL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS MADE WITH A
13+1
PIN 6
AGC. ALL OTHER CONTROLS ARE ADJUSTED
FOR NORMAL OPERATION.
TO
H *SCOPE SYNCED ATI/2 VERT.
FREQUENCY.
JUNCTION
TERM 5
C2038S
3 WAVE SHAPES,B VOLTAGES MARKED A TAKEN
WITH A NOISE' FREE SIGNAL PRODUCING -2.5
TO -3.5 VOLTS AGC AT VHF TUNER. FINE
TUNING CONTROL ADJUSTED FOR MAXIMUM
+135V
TO PICTURE
TUBE SOCKET
TO YOKE
60V
VOLUME a SW.
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER IN RESPECT TO
CHASSIS GROUND. WITH RECEIVER CONTROLS ONLY)
SET FOR NORMAL OPERATION.
4311
22
2. WITH LINE VOLTAGE MAINTAINED AT 117 VAC.
MEASUREMENTS SHORN MAY DEVIATE ,203.
TTpp
0 0265
AUDIO AMP.
R3I
20K
,11.6V
*15V
svarglim2swiTcH TERM!
1/3 6FMB
R309 (21")
I
C
WHITE
V8B
II 43191171
II
TO R2
TO PLATE
CAP OF V13
AGC
RC 304
4.5 PAC AMP.(21.1
A7 RED
TO WIDTH
SWITCH TERm. 2
HIGH Br
2/3 6FMB
WHITE -
R2I4
R213
-
RED
4.ALL OTHER VOLTAGES TAKEN WITH THE
XKK SCOPE SYNCED AT 112
SELECTOR KNOB SWITCHED TO A CHANNEL
H0412. FREQUENCY.
WITH NO SIGNAL ANC THE ANTENNA
TERMINALS SHORTED.
0209 B 0210
TO PIN 2
OF V14
5. RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS MADE WITH
COMPONENTS DISCONNECTED.
VII
5U46B
70 PIN 7
OF VI4
VARIES WITH CONTROL SET TNGS.
L.V. RECTIFIER
7401
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
YELLO
TRANSFORMER
GR
N
RED
L401
275V
8+3
1.1 HY 5511(17")
L402 i.3117 5511(21"I
HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER WIRING
BLUE1405
BLACK
WV
a
.1C6400leA
TO R179
350V
TO R321
4
B
V3
6CF6
8C401C
R401
470K
r
F
(LINK40211
$26 GAUGE
120V
60'1-
-
4
5
4
6FMB
V6
6CX8
V7
6AU6A
V12
6CG7
VI3
V15
V4
6006A
EAS4
6BZ6
VE1
3
V100 -1
V9
6AF4
UHF
VI6
FIX
I
TUNER)
6CU5
RIO
60217
800
Models 21T3435,
21T3436,
21C3445,
21C3446,
2103450,
21C3451,
21L3455
21L3456, 21C3482 and 21C3483 have an audio circuit with a phono input jack permitting its use as an audio amplifier for an external phono pickdp. ,
SHIELDED
CABLE
REAR VIEW irCONTROL PANEL
WIRING
Models 21C3458, 21C3459, 2103460 and 21C3461 feature power tuning and wireless remote control operation of the on' -off switch, volume control and channel
selector.
34
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC Series M5 Schematic Diagram (Continued)
V4
V6A
VS
6C86
6
VIDEO DETECTOR ASSEMBLY
3RD I -F
2N6D82 1-F
1I
275V
TI52
134V
3IAh
220h
I
,i,
13,24
0
a6iTgl4
0173
33(21-oNol
0170
6 2.4V .Z IOK
"r R22,pzp
T*
-4.
11 2.611
135V
%
IN '
390411
.J6-11 1.11M
'x`120C174
/ -_
t
0F V7
33 '-' $
8
I
L158
10160
TO PIN 1
R1711r
CI68
.047
L157
j
163
4.7
I
.
8 48 MC TRAP
135V
I
6
58
15K
I
K
1 .10
L161
.
3161
400V
4.
K
R175 (17") '
1-L17
a
(
R176(211f
-
l(C164
C1591
iRl59
200V1
r4.
x ass OTHERWISE NOTED
000
1PACITORS MORCTHAN000000 MMF
47063
ARE
02
1711
R174117")
7W
L
1.561
I
+ 135V
8+1
3.3M
5600
5100
R216
4%76
; - RI 80
7W
200K
4.135y BR IGHTNESS
+275V
B+3
13+1
11.8
--
I
WATT
60V
8173(21")
C165
- 500
0
PACiTORS LESS THAN i.MF
151STORS
22K
820 WI
15D
VN
+135V
8+1
1
R169
200V
275
159(17")
680Ah
8164
1806
GA
440V
L166(21.
IN
SG201
2206
no(
8+1
440V-.
FOCUS
12 K
CONTRAST
34
6
25V 8V
RI77 (17")
186
RI78 (21")
CONTRAST
+135V
B+3
'
14
25K
10v
7
55V
^
8179
+275V
17210.4 (17")
2IESP4 (21")
POINTT 131
AUDIOT1T5A4KE-OFF
RI70
I
LI56
PICTURE TUBE
i
VIDEO AMP.
CI69.-
7151
1
IL153
RI60
220
L163 I LIDS
101.
2.80h
LI54
x
iKh
-5
-1
LI62 cly
V 16
W2 6CX8
;Si Ur
VIOA
VIOB
8215.
47K
I/2 6087
1/2 6DN7
VERT. OSC.
RC 166
VERT. OUTPUT
1360V
C202
VERT R20
1/2 6c xe
CLIPPER
V9
6cu5
AUDIO OUTPUT
8314
\,,,....j_
R209
68K
BOO
75V
V6B
27511 .411
303(17")
r-
302 121")
680K
24
8+ BOOST 13+4
-141'N8
RC201
K2
R201A
96V 10
S
6811
1.v,
t;,
III
R20IC
R201D -LC2018
YOKE
C203
550V
.0039
-1
I
I
244111
t36VI
IKV
0
9
I
R203
I .5 M
-1540V
911
HEIGHT
C205-
R218
RED
®
I5K
T
_
.027
.033
400V --
1506
>
__i_
R206
R205
1
R 11(4
142
ERT.
HOLD
R20
400K
Un
YEi.
R207
6+1
Ftil(3*
31 OV
ov
-dr
+135V
'WV
1
I
150
VERT.
1201
BLUE
I
jM
L-o _ __I._
I
IW
100K
BOO
68K
20118
1226
-Ws
56K
(43.-1
vv. --1
7
560V
8211
R210
1.8M
C2IO
L_
41,
.015
!KV
C209i.01
***
-411
TES
ITT
TT saa
+275V
50V
B+3
L251
HOR12. STAB
21V
R262
33K
0258
005
rr
TEST+,
PoINT.XJ.
V12A
R255
15K
1/2 6061
HOR. M.V
0257
820
R258(
IN X
130V
R267
VI3
IM
C25
60
72 A
R252
390K
-U4 g83-
HORIZ.61
4311
1/2 6067
HOLD
HOR. M. V.
35CT251H-
R265
100
R264
470
5011
+ 275V
B+3
F25I
1711
7
375
-LT 024280:
AMP.
C22?
R263
7V
6211
5%
8206
8259
820
6A X4
480V
72K60f
'SW
.12
2001
30
7
V251:
254
820
0259
5000
!AV,
7V3
2200
V12 B
3
1$
2
N.V. RECT.
IOuh
OV
1.5m
1g1T
2000V
6 DO6A
200k5/1.
R253
KKK
FIOR. OUTPUT
R257
.--- 7951
.
3
R266
126
2W
C263
820
gm,
-
)5V
4 1255
5
5
0 DAMPER
L253
C265
HOR.
40uf
YOKE
1.2
400V
r
5250
C261K
5
WIDTH
T
066
800Y
8+4
HOR BLANKING
A_
r -A
12V
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM, MAIN CHASSIS, WITH VOLTAGES AND WAVESHAPES.
35
15KV
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC Series M5 Service Information, Continued
P
I
DICIB
E
o
A
P312
FOSE
F402
C317.1A,
307
R3I5
8317
Ti54
16 C167.*
4".
8*.
LI5
II*
GO
RI74
A.
15
C1741_
C\68
RI62
C4 024\411'
_1960 RI60
L156
C163
_L
ci6
I Liss
L _ _ _ _J
ir
LI52
150 C151
n
17" I -F BOARD COMPONENT LOCATIONS AS VIEWED FROM CONDUCTOR SIDE
L154
ASTERISKED (*) NUMBERS
OENOTE WIRE WRAP TERMINALS
6.-462
MOUNTED ON COMPONENT BOARD
TO CONNECT WIRES FROM OTHER
COMPONENTS
I
* 3. TO CONTRAST CONTROL TERMINAL
BOARD, TERMINAL
TO R319 VOLUME CONTROL
I
*4
-
L151
C8
C8
N7
L152
TO VHF TUNER FILAMENTS
*2. TO 8319 VOLUME CONTROL
if
CAPACITORS
BY SYMBOL
*5 TO C313
*6 TO T303
RESISTORS
8150
-
B8
R151
-
D7
B7
G8
G7
FE
R152
8153
R154
11155
c7
-
N8
-
N6
L3
P4
L3
P7
R5
-
-
G7
A5
R160
R161
-
17
-
J6
-
A6
N1
*14 CONNECT TO *16 WITH FILAMENT
FUSE WIRE, .26 GUAGE
*15 TO C4-01 D4416. CONNECT TO *14 WITH FILAMENT
FUSE wiRE .2 6 GUAGE
TO GREEN B WHITE LEAD ON
POWER TRANFORMER
*17 TO *8 ON SWEEP BOARD KDON RC -201)
ME
02
P3
02
08
-
K4
NB
F7
J8
7152
T154
T301
L4
M5
RC NETWORKS
L3
F5
12
-
112
V3( 6CF6)
-
05
0305
-
P2
173
03
v5(6036)
V6(6Cx8)
-
El
C306
C307
C309
-
V4(6BZ6)
15
-
Cl
V7 ( 6AU6 )
0310
-
V8(6FM8 )
C311
C312
-
B2
B3
-
A5
C402
C404
-
K.
B3
-
DE
-
P1
R170
R306
8307
8312
8313
N314
N315
O TO SHIELD OF 0
8320
11317
11318
F3
F2
A2
C2
Al
Cl
-
COILS &
c4
TRANSFORMERS
-
M1
GI
TUBES
-
V9(6CU5)
SIDE.
PLUG INTO IF BOARD WITH
COMPONENTS FACING L155
E7
118
-
L7
-
N3
13
D2
B4
DIODE
7151
B3
VIDEO DETECTOR BD.
COMPONENT LOCATION
AS VIEWED FROM COMPONENT
.
RC166
RC304
-
K1
G2
-
M2
05
LI
LI
0?
8172
R176
R177
NB
P7
P5
11171
R316
-
N7
FUSE
Di
L150
-
All
F402
P2
B6
IV
Li
J2
O TO VHF TUNER- I -F OUTPUT SHIELD
Op TO R175 CONTRAST CONTROL
ti8
07
LI62
UM, LU53
08
-
REPRESENT INTER -CONNECTING WIRES
SOLDERED INTO BOARD
O TO C40IB
C15G
119
-
R170
111614
R311
CIRCLED 0 LETTERS
L155
L156
L157
L158
L159
L161
L162
L163
T151
K7
R15'4
-
B6
G9
A7
-
-
*a TO VHF TUNER, AGC TERMINAL
-
-
C160
C161
C162
C163
C164
C165
C167
C168
C169
C170
C172
C174
C301
C302
GE
*12 TO R180 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
*13 TO PICTURE TUBE SOCKET -PIN 7
L154
IG
E5
-
R163
R164
R165
R167
R168
L153
C9
-
11157
11158
11162
A8
F7
R156
TO GREEN LEAD ON POWER
TRANSFORMER
-
-
*7. FOR TESTING 84-2 VOLTAGE
*9. TO R319 VOLUME CONTROL
*10. TO C313 GROUND TERNBNAL,C401Ca,
AND R180 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
C151
C152
C153
C154
C155
C156
C157
C158
TEST POINTS
1I
III
VIDEO DETECTOR BD.
COMPONENT LOCATION
AS VIEWED FROM CONDUCTOR
SIDE.
QE TO RI75 CONTRAST CONTROL
O To K9 ON SWEEP BOARD(viO,PIN 7 )
36
DEi'hCTOR BOARD - BOTH SIDES
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC Series M5 Service Information, Continued
L
N
G
F
I
E
IA
DIC
I
1
42
F402
R3d2
FUS
C3115/A,
L4-
..*.e
5
CI59
0.
14
-
RI73
R31
8172RNl'crio
CI 74
CI68
158
153
162
RI60
z.
1561 C1611
8
1
163
T
Cl5k
744D
T152
L_____J
LI51
.--""1--2R154
C158
1
9
"NI
155
1
CI53
A
C 156
RIG8
RI61
-"-Y151
C3
RI 57
RI62
1
5
R318
C402.
TI53
6*
C151
L150
XC154
C1577."
C15?C'
21" I -F BOARD COMPONENT LOCATIONS AS VIEWED FROM CONDUCTOR SIDE
TO C40IC
CIRCLED 0 LETTERS
A
REPRESENT INTERCONNECTING WIRES
SOLDERED INTO BOARD.
ASTERISKED (*) NUMBERS
TO C172
DENOTE WIREWRAP TERMINALS
MOUNTED ON COMPONENT BOARC
TO CONNECT WIRES FROM OTHER
® TO SHIELD OF ®
QB TO VHF TUNER- I -F OUTPUT TERMINAL
3307
R308
R312
R150
R151
R152
-
88
8314
R315
C7
D7
R316
R317
3153
-
B7
G8
G7
8318
R154
3155
3156
8157
R158
315-4
3160
3161
R162
R163
8164
R165
8167
R168
R16'+
3170
3171
8172
R173
R178
R170
8301
3302
3303
3305
-
-
F6
06
F2
-
HI
C2
Cl
B3
-
C4
D4
D6
CAPACITORS
-
H2
H2
-
F2
-
D5
C30;
0310
CI
B2
RC -166 -
MI
-
C311
-
0312
0316
0402
33
RC -306 -
GI
F3
-
A5
C404
-
C151
-
A8
-
C',
B6
A7
L150
-
F7
L151
-
H4
-
MR
-
02
A6
C15,9
-
I',
N1
C15,,
E5
0160
-
P3
P4
L3
P7
-
-
MR
N8
-
-
L152
L153
L154
L155
L156
L157
L158
85
1,161
05
15
C167
-
02
-
M2
LI62
C168
-
05
K2
-
El
016?
0170
-
L3
-
M5
-
L3
L163
L166
T151
T152
T154
-
F5
-
17
J6
J2
II
HI
II
C161
0162
0163
0164
0167
C172
C174
0301
0,
K7
07
36
K6
B3
TRANSFORMERS
-
-
T301
-
G2
RC -30I4
*9. TO GREEN LEAD ON POWER TRANSFORMER
*10. CONNECT TO *8
*11 TO RI80, BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
*12.TO PIX TUBE SOCKET, -PIN 7
*13.CONNECT TO *15 WITH FILAMENT FUSE
WIRE, #26 GAUGE
*14.TO C40ID
*I5.CONNECT TO *13 WITH FILAMENT FUSE
WIRE, -#26 GAUGE
TO GREEN 8 WHITE LEAD ON POWER TRANSF
TUBES
V3( 6CF6 )
- E7
V4 ( 6BZ6 )
V5( 6CB6 )
V6 ( 6C18 )
- if-'
*16.T0 *8 ON SWEEP BOARD (CI OF RC201 ON
SWEEP BOARD.)
- L7
- N3
V7 ( 6.AU6 )
- 13
C8
V8( 6FM8 )
V,,(6C1J5 )
- D2
- B4
C8
N7
DIODE
AQ
TO
T401
TO TERM.
08
08
Y151
-
BD..'
TERM
N7
N8
TO TIE
POINT ON
FUSE
P7
PS
LI
R402
-
6FM8 SHI
P2
07
TO
J8
1,4
II
III
IV
-
TO
6309
TEST
POINTS
N8
K4
F7
*6 TO VHF TUNER, AGC TERMINAL
*7 TO TIEPOINT ON 6FM8 SHIELD
*8 CONNECT TO * 10
RC NETWORKS
C5
COILS &
-
*3. TO C313
*4. TO 1 302
*5 FOR TESTING B+2 VOLTAGE
21' CONTRAST CONTROL
WIRING- REAR VIEW
0302.
0303
C305
0307
C152
C153
C154
C155
0156
0157
G7
A5
*2. TO R309, VOLUME CONTROL
C173
0 TO R176, CONTRAST
OF TO *9 ON SWEEP BOARD (VI0,-PIN 7)
RESISTORS
*1 TO VHF TUNER FILAMENTS
a LI66
CD TO RI76 , CONTRAST
BY SYMBOL
COMPONENTS.
TO T154
©TO C40IB
1.1441
21
P6
R3I3
C 40IC
CR3TO TERM. BOARD
TO
TO
T302
LI
12
"A' TERM. 5
8204
REAR VIEW 21' CONTROL PANEL WIRING
37
A
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC Series M5 Service Information, Continued
K IJI
I
I
H
G
I
R209
rit
13-X
1"07
R2I6
R2I7
12
*---AAA---
1
C208
2
R206
2
T C205
R2.-I_.
3
R2 7
M11011I
C206
4
II
et
15'107
SG201
0258
I
218
C202
16
A
B
-".".".
11----TIR
C210
I
C
°
E
252
5
C204
f
15* Y2518
8255
jC252
T
14
r-
Usto5
II
LLeST
I
C
C251
R258
R256
C203
-
R260
63.1_
R257
C255
018
8*
5)1"-
-Am-R254
Aft
R259
.
7
RC201
R401
*5
C256
*10
R202
8
R262
9
6 -x-
R26
3f
.--17AM6263
R208
R204
R
6
C2048 C
201
YA,
6.44253
\ZT 253
25T
210
P20IC
4
025W..1".W.
I0
T ,11,1410
SWEEP BOARD COMPONENT LOCATIONS AS VIEWED FROM CONDUCTOR SIDE
ASTERISKED (*) NUMBERS
DENOTE WIREWRAP TERMINALS MOUNTED ON
COMPONENT BOARD TO CONNECT WIRES FROM
OTHER COMPONENTS
*I
TO R203, VERT. HOLD CONTROL
*2 TO T201 (BLUE LEAD)
*3. TO T201 (YELLOW LEAD)
*4. TO C4 OIC (+135V B + I )
*5. TO T401 (RED/ BLACK LEAD),
TO AC INTERLOCK
*6 TO C4018 (+275V 8+3)
*7 TO R203, VERT. HOLD CONTROL (CENTER TERM
*8. TO *17 ON
*9 TO ®
I -F BOARD
ON I -F BOARD
*10. TO VI6, PIN I
TO V13, PIN 7
*II TO R264
*12 TO TERM. 4 OF YOKE, TO C265
*13 TO T201 (RED LEAD), TO TERM 3 OF YOKE
*14 GROUND TERM. FOR FOCUS JUMPER
*15. +275V B+3 TERM. FOR FOCUS JUMPER
*16. TO V16, PIN 3
*17 TO TERM. 7 ON T251
*18 TO TERM. 8 ON T251
TO V16, PIN 6
RESISTORS
R202
R204
R205
R206
R207
R208
R20°
R210
R211
R212
R215
R216
R217
R218
R251
R252
-
B8
El0
- F10
- D3
- D3
- B10
- F,",
-
B1
-
Di
F3
-
Jk
-
J4
13
38
R254
-
R255
R256
R257
R258
-
R25(-)
-
R260
R261
R262
R263
R401
- F9
- E9
- F9
- C8
R253
BY SYMBOL
H2
G6
G5
G7
-
F7
16
I
110
J9
18
H'
C207
C208
-
F,
C20°
C210
-
J2
-
Il
C251
C252
C253
C254
C255
C256
C257
-
F6
F5
F7
-
E7
C258
C25"
C263
CAPACITORS
D2
- F8
-
D8
-
K5
-
G10
-
H1-.
J7
RC
NETWORKS
RC201
-
C7
DIODES
Y251A
Y251B
-
-
H5
H6
SPARK GAP
-
SG201
114
TEST POINTS
COILS &
C202
C203
C204
C205
-
TRANSFORMERS
-
G3
A6
D5
-
F3
L251
0206
-
G4
-
K7
VI
-
VIII
-
IV
-
G6
16
Co
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CHASSIS 335 and 336, MARK 7
Huffman
SOUND
See page 40 for list of models, diagram
pages 40-41, additional material page 42.
IF ALIGNMENT.
VIDEO IF SWEEP ALIGNMENT
Inject a 4.5 mc, FM modulated signal,
into the grid of the 6AW8A Video Amplifier at TV -2. Then
connect an oscilloscope to the top of the volume control.
a. Connect an oscilloscope to the grid of the 6AW8A(TV-2)
using the same isolation network (Fig. 2)as for the voltmeter.
a. Turn slug out several turns in the take off coil (L101),
b. Leave -3VDC bias on AGC bus.
interstage coil (T101) and quadrature coil (L102).
c. Apply a sweep generator IF signal to test point on tuner
through .005 mfd capacitor.
b. With the signal generator set to maximum output, turn
the slug in the quadrature coil in past the first definite
peak (as indicated on scope) and then tune for maximum
output on the second peak. If generator has insufficient
4.5 mc output, rough -tune the take off coil (L101) until
signal is strong enough to accurately tune the second
d. With Contrast Control still set to full clockwise and
tuner between channels, tune sweep generator to 43mc.
and set generator sweep control to 10 or 12 mc sweep.
peak to maximum.
e. Observe IF response on scope after adjusting generator
sweep output to just below the overload point. Overload
c. Reduce signal generator output to a setting where scope
is indicated by a flattening of the top of the response
sine wave scrambles, and then tune interstage coil
(T101) until sine wave is proper. Repeat above until
curve.
lowest generator output resulting in proper sine wave is
f.
achieved.
d. Duplicate step c. while tuning the take off coil L101.
e. Increase signal level output over a wide range.
vidual IF coils may be necessary to duplicate the IF
response curve of Fig. 3. Do not readjust the last IF
stage (T203) to compensate as this state should be
Sine
wave amplitude should remain relatively uniform over a
wide range of input signal amplitude.
f.
Turn on MARKERS and check at 42.75mc. and 45.75 mc.
These markers should fall at about the 50% point on the
slopes as shown in Fig. 3. Slight readjustment of indi-
exactly 44 mc.
1N60 CRYSTAL
Connect a detector probe and meter (or scope) to the
cathode of the picture tube. Adjust the 4.5 me trap
(L204) for minimum output. See Fig. for circuit of
4
1
suitable detector probe.
VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT
FIG
11000
(OK
I
(OK
100K
a. Connect a DC voltmeter to the grid of the 6AW8A (TV -2),
using an isolation network as shown in Fig. 2.
4
b. Apply -3VDC to the IF AGC bus at TV -5 (top of AGC
bus at TV -5 (top of AGC control).
DETECTOR NETWORK
c. Connect the signal generator to the RF test point on the
tuner, with a .005 mfd capacitor in series with the
generator.
4
10K
d. Set the Contrast Control to MINIMUM, and the tuner off
channel (between channels).
FIG 2
TO
1000
e. Remove yoke plug to cut high voltage.
METERO
SC PE
f. Set tuner fine tuner knob full clockwise.
g.
ISOLATION NETWORK
Adjust 3RD IF transformer (T203) to maximum meter
deflection using an unmodulated RF signal at 44 mc.
Hold meter reading around 2 volts during alignment.
h. Adjust the 2ND IF transformer (T202) to maximum at
45.4 mc.
42.75
i. Adjust the 1ST IF transformer (T201) to Maximum at
43.25 mc.
j.
Adjust the tuner converter plate coil (L7) in a couple
turns.
TO
43 0 Mc,
of
45.75
IOPTIMUM
k. Adjust the IF input coil (L201) to maximum at 43 mc.
1. Adjust the tuner converter plate coil (L7) out to a maximum at 45 mc.
FIG 3 - IF ALIGNMENT CURVE
39
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
HOFFMAN MARK 7, CHASSIS 335,336, Schematic Diagram
VHF. TUNER.
335
B1277
K1277
M1277
P1277
W1277
EV1;
0
ANTENNA
300,-,
3 DT 6
1/2 5U 8
45.75
2.75-3 Mc
OUADRATURE
SOUND I.F.
P1%.
(IT3TCT-0
SOUND DET.
(760017)
I.F. RESPONSE CURVE
?as
28144
SOUND I . F.
100V. 6
TRANSFORMER
0102
C 101
2.2
47
V.
14.5Mc
IP IN
OSC. MIXER
762014)
MIX.
47K
4.5 Mc II
C104
R1 0K5
cool
GRID
M
4150v
C 103
14101
L101
COIL.
45c
210V 5
T101
-1-- -1
2
-10y.
SOON
RF
COIL L
AGC
R 205
Models
using
1.5K
2W
FIL
04
200V
Chassis
SZ6
TRANSFORMER
T 201
"620061 I -ST I.F.
LV203-V2041
[7262]
(762017)
ST I.F
E.V27,
336
3826
2 -ND I.F.
2 -ND I.F.
TRANSFORMER
ire 5A818
(762017)
(760019)
3 -RD I F
TRANSFORMER
3 -RD I.F.
T202
T 203
L201
GRID COIL 200V.
B1291
K1291
M1291
SP1291
W1291
B3411
M3411
SP3411
W3411
B3421
M3421
SP3421
W3421
42.75
NOTE,
USE N9 A - UHF. CONVERSION
STRIPS WITH THIS TUNER,
Chassis
V102
EV 101 -V 301]
Z201 ( 71 0 012 )
Models
using
/204-V2031
1/2 5A MS
(771008)
L202
VIDEO DET.
D.
Mc
190v 5
7
265 6
R2Il
47K
45c
3.6V 8
s,
F04
R 216
Mc.
4 7K
2
L20
C208
R2I0
R209
4.7K
47
R215
4701
"' :XJ)1(IT
12K
PC.
2W
R203
470
I F.AGC. - 3.4V T'Y
RF AGC.
+205V
.275V
205V
VIDEO IN
WAVEFORMS
a) WAVEFORMS AND SOCKET PIN VOLTAGES MEASURED WITH RECEIVER OPERA
TING UNDER AVERAGE SIGNAL CONDITIONS WITH CONTROLS ADJUSTED FOR
NORMAL SETTING.
HORIZ 35
V302 -V303
B3(4 SYNC.
AND PHASE
INVERTER
4/ MEASUREMENTS WERE MADE WITH REFERENCE TO CHASSIS AND ARE POS I
TIVE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
12AC.0V
2/3 68J8
1(
0V
IK - 2W
0505
-4011
160 MFD
L501
-'s./\/\.il .4.=
-.1
R.,513;3 Ild X502
*
C 507D
wag
11-
(7'4D6 g g
V PI X.
IK-IW
V.
1.5Kv
1827004)
R 502f
20WVV
405 403
V
40
4°1
7872
0503
V
40MF
350V.
2111/i3g884.
F -,;,.,;in v
3061 103 102 Vol,
44
C504
1
4 34 3 54
1.01
-
1111.
ItOPt.735-0-i a 1II I:C 506C
TETIR37A2D ..
38
L
j
I
WI AUDIO BYPASS.'
5 4454
8
I
i
-inrv-,:il
202
54
201
05011111i %.,7
L_
1
43
256 4 3
5ii
(768012)
5i
HOR FRED. COIL
V.H.
TUNERF
I. F. 3ASSEMBLY
r;f----`71 ni -: CHOKE ;I
2071 304 3033 28506
40 P -P
HORIZ
1
I
34
3
_ -.J
2
HORIZ
SOP -P.
2 ALL RESISTANCES ARE GIVEN IN OHMS,
K I 000. M .1 000,000.
ENCIRCLEDQ POTINTIOMETERS INDICATE CLOC141Se(3WITAtQN.
LETTERS ARE REFERED TO IN ALIGNMEW 1NMRMOTION.
4.
5 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ALL RESISTORS ARE I /2 WATT AND .10%.
16 P -P.
HC.Rc.-04.01ZP0.17(pApER
18H5ORpl-Zr,
R 403
4
600V.
6.8 K
HORIZ. C 403 J
R402
100
470K
C406
330
239/6
7
R408
A.EC
VOLT
ARE MICROPNOTED. ARADS AND SHOWN AS WHOLE
ALL CAPACITIES SHOWN AS DECIMAL FRACTIONSERWISE
NUMBERACS
L401.
IE
HOLD
NOTES
1
1.86
R505
PRINTED
TOOTH
HORIZ.
R305
8217-P. TYP 90P-
, C5078 C5068 *c507c b"ro SCREENS
I
40
...,120mr.306 ON SA1.48{14.5405 I
/500
MTG.
To
HORIZ.
SAW
IW
R50
it
jait_.° 83'46
- A
350
400
-
505.1
V.
505
R306
2.2K
HORIZ
9OP.p
2.2M
C 506A C507
%SOT
211
C302
220
R301
36(eF_
_501
T.01
3
0V
(734006) R504
.1
ACV
I
6(1
SYNC. IN
CHOKE
I-
33501
HORIZ
SYNC OUT
.565
P02
R
HORIZ. PHASE
DETECTOR
820
R 307
2.2 K
IW
POWER SUPPLY.
6°''t
5501 INTERLOCK
P501
ON R109
P -P V303 -V302
I/3 68J8
Dl SOCKET PIN VOLTAGES MEASURED WITH A V T.V V.
c) VOLTAGES ±20 TV OF THOSE SHOWN ARE NORMAL.
3.3 K
AGE.
C- 401
.0047
R404
6. -'- - INDICATES ASSEMBLY.
1500
56
INDICATES SHIELD (DASHED LINE AROUND V NUMBER INDICATE EXTERNAL
7
TUBE SH1ELD)
&NUMERALS SHOWN IN PARENTH01$ INDICATE HOFFMAN PART No.
it 9. C 505 IN CAN(857302); C 506(A,B,C I IN CAN(856909); C 50/1A ,B,C,D)IN CAN(857105).
r
10-0- INDICATES TERMINALS ON PRINTED BOARDS.
0.15 P -E
R406
100K
R407t
10K
V401- V402
6057
HORIZ.OSC.
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM FOR
40
(80000
HOr F)RIVE
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
HOFFMAN MARK 7, CHASSIS 335, 336, Schematic Diagram
V103
5 AQ5
AUDIO OUTPUT
C 108
.01
AUDIO
ITC8NVAbL
(774005)
(800016)
L102
R107
100K
(ATZTLI
0109
CONTR. I.7
820K
330K
2.2V.
LS
TO SCREEN
itITH
C 506CT
C106
ON 6AW8A
PIN No.8
(V205 -V206)
OV
'BYPASS
1.047
560K
R110
330
40 MFD. 1350V
C2I5
ALTERNATE!
rylP
HORIZ
V205 -V206
1/2 64W8 A
L 205
OUT.
°4400V
P.
LS
L._
02
0.3
s
ALTERNATE
330.0
V206 -V205
seR OUTPUT PC
I/26AW8A
15 P-PTYP.
VIDEO AMP
4.2 P -P
2_i
-)71330)
VIDEO
7
W41-9
ma.
IW
1N(856909
100 P -P TYP -It
-
101
.01
R106
RED DOT
6
R109
0105
AUDIO OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER
VOL
1000
R108
(724015) CHASSIS 335.
(724017) CHASSIS 336.
T 102
.0047
230V 5
TO
VOLUME
'-
1107
OUT.
720 P- P
100
P TYP
KEYER ABC.
VIDEO
HORIZ.
10510165V
2C°1
4, C 507C
20MFD R218
=
IT BZ P4 oR
210E P4
AGC.
V
TY
PICTURE
R222
RF
AGC
100K
IN
BAST
CONTROL
'R217
300
R2I9
820
221(
2W
413
TO CONT,101
470
V 207
CONTROL 7
I.F.
Tc7,4T 300V
TV3
-LC21
BRIGHT.
4701(
-- 50(o
0-2%6
0 PULSE
R223
4.71(
4 W.
To VIDEO
TO
KEYER
40 SE P
R220
4.5Mc TRAP
9
-3,6V
TO SYNC
_J
VIDEO
2
AGC
ONTRO
CONTRAST
C217
)
R 221
I5K
(800038)
.22
OV
R227
R225
2.7M
4 ORANG
T.
3
TUBE
(800018)
150K S
540V
RED
X2°I
-=100V
(744003) tour
RF AGC
AGC. CLAMP
DIODE -
(.2
(986007)
V304 -V305
P.A. 301
6C07
rIT,C1104.
VERT 3
L.
.012i
VFRT 14/
/KII.4140P-P
90.*
'If 1304VERT
R3I4
180K
2W
0)
i
600V
-L 0308
.0033
221(
CO
r -r
OUTPUT2°CN
1c314 OUTPUT. TRANI F300RMER
.01-1600V
VERT
TO HEIGHT
CONTROL
C313
C/Eil1EN
(800039)
8321
31G.
IM
VERT
YOKE ASSEMBLY
DO NOT
9 MEASUREII
12
.22
200V
250)
t
C3I5 92"
D
C3I1
.047
200V
600V-
VERT.
-Y314.--"R32
127K-IW. 27K- 1W
IW
VERTNTROLHOLD
.0047 (PAPER)
0310
R3I8
5.6K
R 316
1.2M
240P -P 3
- C306
FEEDBACK
4o1
_O47
12 D T
60'19V
R 312
C3I6
V306
VERT
VERT. OSC
22K
R320
IM
-
20 P -P
R3I3
IC307
1K
5
%
R317
1 5M
(VERT. LINE
IVERT. HOLD)
.1
VERT.
V403
R409
470K
12 DQ6A
DO NOT MEASURE
C312
1
200V.
V4
(782006)
HOR. OUTPUT
8
BOTTOM
VIEW
OF SOCKET
10403
HORIZ.OUTPUT TRANSFOnsr
CA
I (800039)
(800017)
H.V
REC-
83
171
TIFIER.
(880803)
c31,4
7
3K
5
-55V
(778003) 73*
a
6%1
R410
101(
2W
DO NOT 3
MEASURE
L402)
1.5-12 of
MH'
0909
.22
C410
3
625V
R4I2
22K
12D4
DAMPER
LHORIZONTAL COILS ]
C411
.068
HOFFMAN MARK 7 CHASSIS 335,336
41
.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
HOFFMAN MARK 7, CHASSIS 335,336, Service Information, Continued
SYMBOL
PART NO.
C101
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
C108
C109
C201
C202
C203
C204
C205
C206
C207
C208
C209
C210
C211
854035
854051
851140
851141
851015
871221
851003
851015
851140
851122
866301
851122
866125
851122
851122
851122
851122
851122
866301
866301
854043
851122
851015
871421
866129
866129
871605
851114
851128
851117
851117
871609
871225
0212
C213
C214
0215
C216
C217
C301
C302
C303
C304
C305
C306
C307
DESCRIPTION
C411
C412
C413
470mmf Ceramic
.001mfd, 600V Tubular
.001mfd, 600V Tubular
lOmmf Composition
470mmf Ceramic
.01 mfd, 500V Ceramic
.047 mfd, 400V Tubular
.47mfd, 200V Tubular
.22mfd, 200V Tubular
.0022mfd, 600V Tubular
220mmf Ceramic
100mmf Ceramic
820mmf Ceramic
820mmf Ceramic
.0047 mfd, 600V Tubular
. lmfd, 200V Tubular
-r
L3
it
C315
C316
C401
C402
C403
C404
C405
C406
C407
C408
C409
C410
.01mfd, 500V Ceramic
.0047 mfd, 500V Ceramic
470mmf Ceramic
.001mfd, 600V Tubular
470mmf Ceramic
.1mfd, 200V Tubular
470mmf Ceramic
470mmf Ceramic
470mmf Ceramic
470mmf Ceramic
o--
-ear-0
C501
C502
C503
C504
C505
C506A
C507C
C507D
C508
L6
COILS
5CG8
CIO
1_4.5 CII
FINE
TUNING
C2I
1000
47
CI4
18-N220
8
C3
4.7K
C12
R4
..-C15
R8
220
10
K
L2
5-10
C5
I-I 1800
0
C9
800i
RS
30
IK5
B+
4
3
H
IK
680K -,
T.P.
2BN4
LI
1000
C22
C6
AGC
120
R7
L8
RI
CI
. lmfd, 600V Tubular
.01mfd, 500V Ceramic
.01mfd, 500V Ceramic
160mfd, 150V Filter
100rrifd, 350V Filter
40mfd, 350V Filter
40mfd, 350V Filter
80mfd, 400V Filter
40mfd, 350V Filter
ZOmfd, 300V Filter
20mfd, 300V Filter
.001mfd, 500V Ceramic
851013
VHF
12
30
39Ornmf, 3KV Ceramic
390mmf, 3KV Ceramic
39mrnf, 3KV Ceramic
.01mfd. 600V Tubular
.
C8
28
. lmfd, 600V Tubular
.22mfd, 600V Tubular
. lmfd, 600V Tubular
.068mfd, 600V Tubular
C5078
4.-
C4
3900mmf Mica
470mmf Mica
330mnif Mica
.001mfd, 600V Tubular
856906
C506B
C506C
C507A
--onn50
06
04
31
C4I4
L5
L4
I
.0033mfd, 600V Tubular
.01 mfd, 500V Ceramic
. lmfd, 600V Tubular
.047mfd, 200V Tubular
. lmfd, 200V Tubular
12mmf, 3KV Ceramic
.01mfd, 1600V Tubular
.22mfd, 200V Tubular
.047mfd. 200V Tubular
.0047 mfd, 600V Tubular
.047mfd, 200V Tubular
100mmf Ceramic
871657
851015
871625
866121
866125
850105
867913
866129
866121
871609
866121
851128
862102
862101
862103
866301
866325
866329
866325
866323
850301
850301
850107
870213
870225
851119
851119
856909
C310
C311
C312
C313
C314
2. 2mmf Composition
47mmf Composition
.0047mfd, 500V Ceramic
.001 mfd, 500V Ceramic
.01 mfd, 500V Ceramic
.047 mfd, 200V Tubular
1000mmf, 500V Ceramic
DESCRIPTION
PART NO.
SYMBOL
C308
C309
CAPACITORS
5CG8
3.9K
R6
3.9 K
it
L7
C24
470
IF OUTPUT
4
5
800-,
FILAMENT
NTENN1
42
TUNER 710012
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
0 NTG 0
M
M
MODEL WG-4204A, SERIAL 85X
W
Y
R
E
A
R
D
(Material on pages 43 through 46)
automatically adjust the bias on the R -F and I -F ampli-
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT-The deflection yoke
should be positioned as far forward on the neck of
fiers so that the best possible signal to noise ratio
the tube as the bell will allow. Then, if the lines of the
raster are not horizontal or squared with the picture
mask, rotate the deflection yoke until this condition
is obtained. Upon completion of this adjustment, tighten the clamp at the rear of the deflection yoke.
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT - If horizontal or vertical
centering is required, adjust each ring in the centering device until proper centering is obtained. If a
clamp type centering device is used, rotate the device
HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT - Turn the
horizontal hold control to the extreme clockwise position. Tune in a station and adjust the horizontal
frequency control until the picture is just about to
(minimum snow) will be obtained for any signal input
to the receiver.
tear out of sync as seen at the top of the picture.
HORIZONTAL DRIVE ADJUSTMENT-While receiving a
signal from a station (with picture locked in sync) turn
contrast control fully counter -clockwise, turn the
brightness control up so that the picture appears
washed out. Turn the horizontal drive control clockwise until white bars appear in the left center portion
of the raster, then turn counter -clockwise until the
white bars just disappear: This adjustment will allow
the horizontal system to operate at maximum effici-
to the left or right and turn the knob located at the
top of the device until the picture is centered correctly.
ADJUSTMENT OF RANGE CONTROL-Tune the receiver
the strongest station in the area in which the
receiver will be used. While observing the picture
and listening to the sound, turn the control clockwise
until signs of overloading (buzz in sound washed-out
picture, sync instability) appear. Then turn the control a few degrees counter -clockwise from the point
to
ency.
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY ADJUSTMENT Adjust the height control until the picture fills the
mask vertically. Adjust the vertical linearity control
until the picture is symmetrical from top to bottom.
Adjust the picture centering device to align picture
with the mask. Adjustment of any control will require
at which overloading occurs. (The stronger the signal
input, the more counter -clockwise this setting will be.)
In areas where the strongest signal does not exceed
1000 MV the setting will usually be maximum clockwise.
With the control set correctly, the AGC will
a re -adjustment of the other control.
SILICON RECTIFIERS
2BN4
R -F AMP.
4
"11
5CG8
OU MIXER &
.010
0E3
L-201
INPUT GRID'
it
COIL
V -12A & V -I2 B
V-2
5AQ5
L-200
HORIZ. AFc
& HORIZ. OSC.
V -I3
T-200
R-325
SYNC.
STAB.
V-3
316
1ST PIX I -F
TOP OF COIL
42.8 MC
BOTTOM OF
COIL
47.25 MC
1ST PIX
2ND PIX
v-tt
COIL 4.5MC
2ND PIX
I -F
42.8 MC
I -F
13CB6
3 RD PIX
\
I -F
T-202
COIL
3RD PIX
44 MC
3BN6
AUDIO
I -F
BOTTOM OF
COIL
DET.
V -6A & V -6B
R -I00
8CX8
VIDEO AMP.
BUZZ CONTROL
4.5 MC
TRAP
T-201
V-5
L-100/
v-1
L-206
DAMPER
BOTTOM OF COIL
47,25 MC
v.7
SOUND
TAKE
QUADRATURE
I -F
3BZ6 TOP OF COIL
03AU6
I ST SYNC.
-L-102
V -I5
12D4
V-4
0
AMP.
®WAVEFORM
12DQ6-A
HORIZ. OUTPUT
RANGE
0
WATEFOM.
AUDIO
OUTPUT
INPUT
COUPLING
R-316
L-402
HORIZ. FREQ.
6CG7
OSC.
17BZP4-A
PICTURE TUBE
DANGER
FRAGILE GLASS PICTURE
TUBE IS DANGEROUS TO
SERVICE. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED SERVICEMAN.
OR -311
VERT. OUTPUT
& 2ND SYNC.
v -to
3BY6
GATED SYNC.
SEPARATOR
Chassis Tube Layout and Trimmers
AMP.
V -9A a V -9E1
5AN8
VERT. °SC.&
KEYED AGC rrf
43
to
HEIGHT
V -I4
1G3-GT
N.V. RECT.
R-300
VERT. LIN.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MONTGOMERY WARD Model WG-4204A, Serial 85X
Schematic Diagram
CONTROLS TOP OF CHASSIS
R-424
R-219
R-310
R-104
R-222
Horizontal Hold
Brightness
Vertical Hold
Off -On Volume
Contrast
OSCILLOSCOPE WAVEFORM PATTERNS
The waveforms shown on the schematic diagram are as observed on a Tektronix
type 524D wide band television oscilloscope with the receiver tuned to a reasonably strong signal and a normal picture. The voltages shown on each waveform
CONTROLS REAR OF CHASSIS
are the approximate peak to peak amplitudes. The frequency accompanying
each waveform indicates the repetition rate of the waveform not the sweep rate
of the oscilloscope. If the waveforms are observed on the oscilloscope with a
poor high frequency response, the corners of the pulses will tend to be more
rounded than those shown on the schematic diagram and the amplitude of any
/ Centering
Horizontal Centering
Vertical Centering
Horizontal Drive
Vertical Linearity
Device
C-417
R-300
Height
R-311
high frequency pulse will tend to be less.
Horizontal Wave Form
Horizontal Frequency
L-403
L-402
R-100
R-316
DC SOCKET VOLTAGES
All DC socket voltages shown on the schematic are measured with a high
Buzz
Range
impedance VTVM and under zero signal conditions.
T-200
T-201
1ST PI%
VIDEO
2ND P1X
I -F TRANS.
MONOPOLE
41.25 MCII
C-204
47.25 MC
ANT.
I -F TRANS.
56
C-20868
T-203
CASE
ANT COIL
100 V
TO /-F OUTPUT
L -20I
TERMINAL
ON TUNER
INPUT GRID
COIL
soov
R-204
C-202
R-200*
INPUT
COUPLING
COIL
ro ANT.
TERMINALS
ON TUNER
0.24V
00
L-200
C-200
1 47
500V
0.24V
d'AAS
0.8V
/.4v
0.0V
C-2031 R -20q
R-201
47
4.7 K *
39 MC
7
68K
ik
470
680
500V
* R-203
IK 10-205
470
soov
R-205
R -207 5C -2091R-208
R-206
470
C-206....,
680
500V
47
IK
500V
22
K
500 v
15K
MAN
VERT. L IN.myr
VERT. SWEEP
AAM
CONTROL
AND SYNC.
10 K
12 10
AMA
=C04-302
MA%
V-8
60 CYCLES
5CZ5
VERT. OUTPUT
TRANS.
3-6
-4-
0V
600V
.047 T40o V
047
MEG.
osr
100V
zw
R-306 4CN,
22 K
+
C-307
VERT. BLOCKING
OSC. TRANS.
I
GRN.
:2-r
7
T'
005
C -.3Q9
R-31501
R -315B
22K
8.2K
116Y6AL656i
T.40v
...c.
CONTR L
T.002
RE° s
0-
II
R-312
R-310
. 1 MEG.
Z00. 07v
8.2K
r.
T-301
VERT. HOLD
60.-
ens,
R -315A
SSV PI
ROO V
rov
CONTROL
OK
-1-
IMEG. .047
560
R -3I8 100 K
390 K
C-3084rnsl
VERT. HEIGHT
.270V 8-30.7
C-30 Z
1C.300
VERT. OSC.
R-3Il
C-303
P -P
60 CYCLES
RANGE
CONTROL
R-314
140V
10 CYCLES
s v I 5 MEG.
145 V
V -9A
5AN8
mrC-304
.047
600V
810V P -P
VERT. OUTPUT
R -3I6
A
1009 P -P
11
7
400V
T-300
470R-223
TO ACC TERM/NAL
ON R -F TUNER
8-304
R-303
R-302
15K
R-301
500 V
MM.
C-207
500 4
R-300
25 K
680
180
C-306
.01 400 V
820 K
219 P -P
60 CYCLES
T
r
R-400
INTERLOCK
7
1400
CUTOUT
MF
C-403 .LC-404A
V
0.22
ON -OFF
SwITCN
40no.n.
C-402
110
500V
400 V
-
125 M F.
300V
%
/ow
ax +
C -405A
125 MF.
300V
HORIZ.
+
DEFL.
COILS
C-4058.1.
VERT. DEFL. COILS
17
8-404
R-405
220
220
C-410..
8
500V
- 60 MI. 300V
DEFLECTION YOKE
PART
R-104
60 CYCLES
;
C -40I
T470
1500V
HORIZ. SWEEP AND POWER SUPPLY
BRACKE
ANO CASES
R-402
117 VAC Ak,2004
808
5CZ5
85.65 VAC
4
MI ER 80SC.
4.7 VAC
SCG8'
I
I
80.95 VAC
YOKE
V-/5
7
4
V-13
12006-A
17BZP4-A
32 05VAC
7
2
JO 35VAC
5A05
651 AC A
4
6CG7
4
v ail
44.65 VAC
60
3BZ6
4
v0
3BZ6
57 25 VAC
VAC
3
3BN6
V-4
T
3
SOCKET
4
R-406
4.7 I(
V-//
47.8 VAC
3AU6
50.95 VAC
3CB6
C-406,A
EARLYSRECEIVERS
44
C07o
541VAC
3
OOV
YOKE
5
C1414
TERN/NALV
VAC
3
V -/IA 6
V-7
19 45VAC
8
3BY6
68
5
v-3
V-2
V -/C
5AN8
72.95 VAC
4
I2D4
685 VAC
5
R -F TUNER NEATER
V.94 6 V-98
V-64 t V-68
V-8
4
128N4
1C-408
BLACK
PLUG
ISOLATE°
r7, -F AMP
5,02V
RED
IR-401
470 K
1.2
L-300
L-401
1AN
.7 K
4.
16-1 0 0 0 0 0
/5 *.THERMAL
C-400
A../zsv
L-400 .270V
FILTER CHOKE ° R-403 0
SILICON
RECTIFIERS
C -41 O6p
oeoosr
11:4)7
v
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
R 300
R-302
R 301
15 K
K
MONTGOMERY WARD Model WG-4204A
"
R-303
R-304
10 K
K
"" C-302
0-305
!OK
K
M4.4.
MM,
Schematic Diagram
.047
400V
V-8
5CZ5
VERT.
OUTPUT
TRANS
IC -304
A 270 v
.047
600V
EARL/ER VERT.
OUrrur STAGE
R-307
C 40413
4701
SOY
T-100
SOUND I -F AND AUDIO
R-303
T20 MF
470
/W
AUDIO OUTPUT
TRANS.
2 00V047
V-2
V -I
3BN6
SCHEMATIC IS DIVIDED INTO FOUR SECTIONS
WITH EACH SECTION HAVING ITS OWN
SERIES OF REFERENCE NUMBERS.
680
AUDIO DET.
c -104-,..R 1031 C -I05
IK 1330 K
5K
soo v
SOO V
OV
ALL RESISTANCE VALUES IN OHMS AND ±WAT T
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2
I. 5 I, /
I
OM
-
I
ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES LESS THAN 1.0 IN MF.
AND ABOVE 1.0 IN MMF. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
I
7
I
5c5-1Koi
45
I
COIL RESISTANCE VALUES LESS THAN 1.0 OHM
ARE NOT SHOWN.
I
-4
g, F=
C-IO2A
i
'T 1
7 L-100.,
R
-100r'
BUZZ
CONTROL
L-203
j
-
r
I
5
/000N
56°V.,
270
R -2I6
3.9 K
.270V
COIL
i
01L-207
0 150 MU. H.
18V TO 130
3.9K
101
1C-217'
5°V,
1100
R-218
5K
L-2069
190 MU.
500
L5.li
C -3I3 -
..,R-328%
5K
33 K
-.3;
R-320
330K
R-220
4270V
I 0.47
V -I0
3BY6
-11-327
200V
30213
1R-326
.270 V0
270 K
V
V -9B
5AN8
F2
R-325
2.5 MEG.
U-11
.047
R-330
27 K
C-.3151
.047
400V
AND SYNC.
.1f- 3AU6
C-316
0-331
201ST. SYNC.
820 K
6
/w
AMP.
R-34
R-332
47 K
R-3351
03K
6.8 K
7-68 -
.115 VA0-AAA6-3.
KEYED AGC
BOOST
VERT. SWEEP
GATED SYNC. SEP.
'313P
70V
14.5 KV
2.2 MEG
95V
8
"..C-311
3
R-2 9
.
500 K
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
2.2
MEG.
III/
12V To 62V I,
5
V-7
17BZP4-A
XY
0-3d
5
500V
2
180 K
48,
.270 V
FC-314
3.30
2O.Y1
I
400 V
CONTRAST
CONTROL
R-323
47 K
-31210004
4
7
0.1
1K
1K
R-221
100 K
C -2I8
500 V
SI
229 1.0110V P -P
A
R-2121 R-222
R -2I1
R-322 47K
n,
0
QUADRATURE
A 125 v
R6V To 4V
R -2I4
47
C -3I7
A.,925v
s
0..3V
R-213
R-210
47 K
0
n
;1* -
C -216/2530
1111111
60 CYCLES
1.5.750 .-/-
470
.270V
!,!14.0.00
VIDEO AMP.,
,L6-02,24
1
L-205
100 MU. H.
C -21I
460V P -P
330
11
as nic
4.5 MC TRAP
V -6A
C-2141
T
_ __I
5
6V3
470
,
8CX8 .""'
CHOKE
C -2I3
7
13-209
R -I06
L-206
ja3,,.
41rwerr F/LTER
rover?" F/LTER
CHOKE
C -2I2
4.71 -
7
R-105
40 MF.AT
.50V
+
250V
2.5 V
VIDEO
CK706AoK IN60 L-202
T5
2
CONTROL I
L-102
0
T-202
3RD PI% I -F ASS DET. TRANS.
1.
11.1
I MEG_
VOLUME
..'5
0047 400 49,
5
OV
R -I04
R -I01
7
- oTosoo
SOUND
CP4.53-.41.
15
I
AUDIO
OUTPUT
C-405 C
00 v
TAKE -OFF COIL
I
C- 10
J5 V
5AQ5
I
8CX8
50V P P
SYNC.
STABILITY
60 CYCLES
6111110
2ND SYNC. AMP.
10' [PP
11,)
II
ES
A .12.5 V
HOR Z. HOLD
CONTROL
R-424
50 K
P.407
120 K
2304 P -P
15.150,-.
L-402
II
1469 P.P
HORIZ.
13.73o-
FREQ.
COIL
eoov -
+2706,
R-420
68
22 K
200V
17311 ro S70 V
-64v
I
V -I2 B
V -I2 A
I 6CG7
IHORIZ.
R-409
330K
0-410
220 K
C -4I2
.047
11200V
R-4Il
820 K
I
AFC
C -4I4
-9.61/ To -25V
R -4I2
I
IL
3
C-413
82 K zoo 4..022
22V PP
,5,750-
8-419
C -4I8
R-421
HORIZ.
56K
820
500V
1 MEG.
220
r---1
H.V. RECT.
1,.5.
TRANS.
re0
V-13
I2DQ6-A
5
263 V
V -I5
I2D4
6
.1-4201-421
20V
62,
5
IgvT*
/-
.1!
R-414
3.9 K
/
R-415
R -4I7
82 K
10 K
C -4I9,
M
sov
0
500V P -P
HORI Z.
OUTPUT
V-14
1G3-GT
HORIZ. OUTPUT
/57 V
500V
R -4I3
330 K
L-403
WAVE
FORM
C -4I5
OSC.
0.47
77,
75 V
6CG71
HORIZ. I'.
-'-
80812. DRIVE
C.0-4116
R-416
.047
C -41I
j.
U"" T-400
C -4I7
170 TO 700
I
HORIZ. WAVE FORM
TEST POINT
11-422
100
I:
2W
C-423
R-4231
150
10 K
5
2W
8005r C-422
0
4
.270V
68/ P -P
15,150--
5,150
45
630V
DAMPER
0.1
T 600 V
V
QL-405
as CHOKE
4:11
r
5MU.N,
C -404C
20 ME
300 V
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MONTGOMERY WARD Model WG-4204A, Serial 85X, Service Information, Continued
45.75 MC
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
40 MC I -F ALIGNMENT - With tuner set in UHF (blank
position) connect sweeper with very short leads
through a 10K mmf disc. ceramic capacitor to mixer
grid. (Lead of a 10K ohm resistor which is accessible
through a hole at top of tuner.) With short leads,
connect crystal diode detector (Fig. 3) to plate of 1st
I -F tube. Connect -4-5V to I -F AGC line (Junction of
C-201 and R-200). Connect oscilloscope to detector
output. Adjust sweep output to give adequate de-
40% -4/.25 MC
°CYO --
4 -Input Circuit Response
g
flection.
4725 MC
er) Input Grid Coil (L-201) and Input
Coupling Coil (L-200) to give the response shown in figure 4.
shape of the curve is not as shown in figure 5, it
will be necessary to retouch the adjustments. A
small fraction of a turn is all that is necessary if
the strip is operating correctly. The position of the
44.5 Mc marker is critical (98%). The 44.0 Mc
transformer (3rd I -F) controls the symmetry of the
top. The 45.3 Mc transformer (2nd I -F) controls
the height of the 45.75 Mc marker. The 42.8 Mc
The converter plate and input grid coils control the
transformer (1st I -F) controls the height of the 42.4
ADJUST
A. FREQUENCY
1.
47.25 Mc
1st Pix I -F Coil (T-200 Bottom of Coil)
to center notch over 47.25 Mc marker.
Converter Plate Coil L-9 (Top of Tun-
2.
all P.I.F. response).
need retouching.
44.5 MC
45.75 Mc marker must be set
/00 %-
exactly on peak or the position of the 44.5 Mc marker
in the overall response curve will not be correct.
I
( 44.OMCI
XTAL DIODE
50%
42.4 MC
10 KA
330 A
0
OUTPUT
0/0-
100 KA
--40X DOWN 2 5%
47.25 MC
41.25 MC
Fig. 5 -Overall Response Curve
DO NOT RETOUCH the converter plate coil or the input
grid coil. These coils MUST be adjusted correctly with
the diode detector. Recheck position of 41.25 Mc and
47.25 Mc markers. Reset if necessary.
Fig. 3 -Crystal Diode Detector
When the input circuit is aligned place -4.5V bias
on the I -F AGC line. (Junction of C-201 & R-200).
Remove the crystal detector and connect oscillos-
VIDEO
scope and VTVM to the 2nd pix detector load
resistor R-211. Adjust sweep output to give 2.0
With 4.5 Mc unmodulated signal into grid of the video
amplifier tube and VTVM on picture tube cathode,
tune 4.5 Mc trap for minimum response. VTVM on
VDC at detector.
FREQUENCY
42.8 Mc
ADJUST
0-10 V AC scale. This adjustment can also be made
while observing a picture from a station. Tune trap
for least 4.5 Mc beat (grainy appearance) in picture.
1st Pix I -F Coil (T-200, Top of Coil) for
maximum height of 42.8 Mc marker.
2.
41.25 Mc
2nd Pix I -F Coil (T-201, Bottom of Coil)
3.
45.3 Mc
marker.
2nd Pix I -F Coil (T-201, Top of Coil)
4.
44.0 Mc
for minimum height of 41.25 Mc
AUDIO
1.
for maximum height of 45.3 Mc
marker.
3rd Pix I -F Coil (T-202, Bottom of Coil)
Tune in a TV station and reduce signal strength
at antenna terminals by use of an attenuator or
similar device until
a
"hiss"
accompanies the
sound.
for maximum height of the 44.0 Mc
marker.
These adjustments may be made with a single frequency generator if it is more convenient to do so.
C.
45.3 MC
45.75 MC
42.8 MC
1000 MMF.
B.
This adjustment will very seldom
Mc marker.
shape of the top. The input coupling coil controls the
position of the 41.25 marker. This adjustment must
be made accurately or the sound rejection will not be
correct (41.25 Mc 31 to 36 db down from top of over-
After these adjustments have been made recheck
the peak to peak output on the oscilloscope. If the
2.
Adjust sound take -off coil (L-100), quadrature coil
(L-102) and buzz control (R-100) for maximum undistorted sound and minimum buzz.
3.
If "hiss" disappears during step 2, further reduce
signal strength.
46
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MODELS WG-5062A, WG-5067A, WG-5072A, WG-5077A, WG-5162A, WG-5172A
(Material on pages 47 through 50)
SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS
CHASSIS ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
MAGNET ADJUSTMENT -The picture tube used on these
receivers is of the electrostatic type, and occasionally, to
bring about best focus, it is necessary to use a beam
aligner. The beam aligner fits on the neck of the picture
tube and appears to be an ion trap. In many cases, the
I.
Remove knobs from the front of the cabinet.
2.
3.
Remove cabinet back.
Disconnect the antenna leads. Disconnect speaker
4.
5.
Remove speaker (table models only).
Remove screws holding chassis brackets to top of
leads on consoles only.
beam aligner is not needed to properly focus the tube
and therefore is not mounted on the tube. However, if a
replacement picture tube is ever needed, it may be necessary to purchase a beam aligner to bring about satis-
cabinet.
factory focusing adjustment.
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT-The deflection yoke
should be positioned as far forward on the neck of
6.
Remove only 4 screws (2 at each side) from the
bottom side of the shelf.
7.
Gently pull the chassis assembly out from the
cabinet.
CAUTION - DO NOT LOOSEN OR REMOVE ANY
the tube as the bell will allow. Then, if the lines of the
raster are not horizontal or squared with the picture
mask, rotate the deflection yoke until this condition
OTHER SHELF SCREWS INSIDE CHASSIS COMPARTMENT.
is obtained. Upon completion of this adjustment, tighten the clamp at the rear of the deflection yoke.
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT - If horizontal or vertical
centering is required, adjust each ring in the centering device until proper centering is obtained. If a
clamp type centering device is used, rotate the device
Place entire assembly face down on a cushioned
surface which should be thick enough to allow
for clearance of control shaft. Disconnect the yoke
plug, picture tube socket, anode lead and remove
the beam aligner magnet and deflection yoke.
8.
to the left or right and turn the knob located at the
top of the device until the picture is centered correctly.
T-200
L-200
1ST PIX I -F
TOP OF COIL -PRIMARY
INPUT
GRID
COIL
L-203
R-IO2
4.5 MC
BUZZ
CONTROL
TRAP
BOTTOM OF COIL -SECONDARY
V-4
V-6
V-7
3DK6 3DK6
1ST FIX
I -F
2ND PIX
12BY7-A
I -F
V-10.
2ICBP4A RANGE CONTROL
5CG8
2BN4
R -F OSC.
RF AMP.
& MIXER
4 0FRINGE
i
PICTURE TUBE
DANGER
LOCAL
FRAGILE GLASS PICTURE
TUBE IS DANGEROUS TO
SERVICE. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED SERVICEMAN
VIDEO AMP.
L -I00
L -I01
SOUND
QUADRATURE
COIL
4.5 MC
TAKEOFF
4.5 MC
0
V-3
5AQ5
V-2
3BN6
AUDIO DEC.
T-202
2ND PIX I -F d DET.
TOP OF COIL -SECONDARY
BOTTOM OF COIL -PRIMARY
V BA &V -BB
6CG7
SYNC. SEP.
SYNC. AMP.
AUDIO
OUTPUT
0
V-14
DAMPER
V -9A L V-9BrTh
IODE7
YOKE
CABLE
VERT. OSC.
VERT. OUTPUT
R-319
0
IF UHF
PLUG
R-314
0
VERT LIN. HEIGHT
CONTROL CONTROL
EQUIPPED
YOKE CABLE
SOCKET
C-417
R424
2AF4-A
IN82-A 'UHF OSC.
REMOVABLE
IIEH§111-giR
UHF
MOGUL WAvE FORM
TEST POINT
HORIZ.
DRIVE
0CONTROL
V-1 IA UV II B
CONVERTER
6CG7
HORIZ. AFC
HORIZ. OSC.
Fig. 1-Chassis Tube Layout and Trimmers
47
L
4021
HOR.
FREQ.
4L 403
HOR.WAVE
FORM
v-13
1K3
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MONTGOMERY WARD Models WG-5062A, WG-5067A, WG-5072A, WG-5077A,
WG-5162A, WG-5172A, Schematic Diagram, Continued
OSCILLOSCOPE WAVEFORM PATTERNS
The waveforms shown on the schematic diagram are as observed on a Tektronix
type 524D wide band television oscilloscope with the receiver tuned to a reasonably strong signal and a normal picture. The voltages shown on each waveform
are the approximate peak to peak amplitudes. The frequency accompanying
each waveform indicates the repetition rate of the waveform not the sweep rate
of the oscilloscope. If the waveforms are observed on the oscilloscope with a
poor high frequency response, the corners of the pulses will tend to be more
sounded than those shown on the schematic diagram and the amplitude of any
L..-4100
high frequency pulse will tend to be less.
SOUND
TAKE -OFF
COIL
DC SOCKET VOLTAGES
All DC socket voltages shown on the schematic are measured with a high
impedance VTVM and under zero signal conditions.
T-200
1ST PIX
ITRANS.
V-4
f OurPu
rf RArINA
ON R K Tula,
TO
SCHEMATIC IS DIVIDED INTO FOUR SECTIONS
WITH EACH SECTION HAVING ITS OWN
SERU S OF REFERENCE NUMBERS
RE SISTANCE VALUES IN OHMS ANTI I
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
AI l
1ST PIX
2 ND PIX
I -F
ov
730 v
-0.5V
R-200
R-231
2.2 MEG.
7.0 MEG.
C
RANGE
CONTROL
2021
C-206
IK
10 K
"
R1-52009
42070,08
50V
0
zw
500 v
68
I
R-203
w -C 203
R-201
56
106
C-200
R-232
COIL RESISTANCE VALUES LESS THAN
10 OHM ARE NOT SHOWN.
2
270
500 v
0
2262/.80
R-230
C -20I
I
ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES LESS THAN
1.0 IN MF. AND ABOVE 1.0 IN MMF.
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
I -F
INPUT GRID
COIL 41.25A,
TO 4GC TERMINAL
ON R -F TUNER
Alf
V-6
3DK6
r30 v
3DK6
130 V
L-200
250 V
70 /28 v
TERMINAL
ON R -F TUNER
K.1000
A 728v
R-300
270 K
.MM
R-304
.680 K
R-303
V -8A
1.5 MEG.
6CG7
_11_41_0
-7.0
4.7K
6
,I
.047
T0
400 0
22 K
MNS
6.86
"
C-304.18
500v
.0051
.002T
C-306
.01
.eoov
.005T
11
I
R-310
JTV P -p
60 CYCLE:
.d.!57,.ov
60 CYCLES
GREEN
2
IC-305A1C-305B-w C -305C
I
1:715
R -308C
8.2 K
IS
R-306
"
;.°11'
OV
R-308 B
8.2 K
FR -308A
sz
, F.- 110 v
15750
.01
4002
R-311
15750
,
CCL
YES
C-307.
470 K
30y - P -P
60 CYCLES
-
fri
BLUE
,
SYNC. AMR
C-303
5 PI
I
R-307
V -8B
6CG7
SYNC. SEP
C 3 -0I
YELLOW
T-301
VERT. BLOCKING
OSC. TRANS.
0.10
- P.- P
60
-P
crcLEs
1.0 MEG.
30- 0 P -P
75.750 CYCLES
I
VERT. HOLD
CYCLES
CONTROL
- HORIZ. HOLD +2500
L-401
C-400
0.22
4000
FUSIBLE
TUBE SAVER
/
RESISTOR
MSIST
I
I
R-424
7.5
,zevA
z V P.p
75.750 CYCLES
1206
ootlo
40n
11+
C -40I
140 ME.
150V
SELENIUM
RECTIFIERS
300 NA
INTERLOCK
ON -OFF
12
31200 5 MF.
3002
0
-48v
C-403 B
R-406
330K
3000
C -4041R-405
82
/500v
R-401
52
20 W
25V P -P
60 CYCLES
iC-405
'"
HORIZ. SWEEP AND POWER SUPPLY
2-3
5 AO 5
1.3 v AC
3 4
v-94 I v-98
IODE 7
76.6 v AC
I
5
I2BY 7-A
66 6 v AC
v-.6.4 4 2-88
6CG7
60 3 VAC
445
6
4
5
I
rA 0,60.4
8
0000 R-410
826
4
3
T -4 0,6o
I
7/V ro -21v
C-410
0.47
C 409qm
0221
2bov
,.
pool,/
R-412
3.96
3306
V-1
3DK6
31366
476 vAC44.6
50.9 VAC
5000 p -P
15.750
R-411
2206
v-4
v-6
3DK6
54.1 v AC
C-408
.047
# R 404
500v
1.50LAreo
811 ACK!" rs
8206
500v
41.0V P -P
60 CYCLES
4
V -11A
6CG7
HORIZ. AFC
I
-160 MF.
195 1.1,_
15,750 era
250 v
250v To
50V
-36V
/12VAC
C-424
470
506
4000
C-407
R-403
1550
C-403Aw-
aC-402 A
sLyIrcH
I R-423
470 K
CONTROL
R-408
R-407
Q
FILTER CHOKE
3
3
4
V -/IA 4 V-118
6CG7
V-10
2ICBP4
. 3 V AC
A
5
711
\C-510003,Br
NOTE-In UHF receivers ine filament voltages in the tuner and above the tun
48
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CHECK OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR AUGNMENT Turn the horizontal hold control to the extreme
counter -clockwise position. The picture should remain
ually reduced and when only 2 to 3 bars sloping
downward to the left are obtained, the picture will
pull into sync upon slight additional clockwise rotation of the control.
At the extreme clockwise position, the picture should
be just starting to pull out of sync.
in horizontal sync. Momentarily remove the signal by
switching off channel and then back. Normally the
picture may be out of sync. Turn the control slowly
clockwise. The number of diagonal bars will be grad -
T -I01
SOUND I -F AND AUDIO
AUDIO OUTPUT
TRANS.
.AAAN
680
38N6
10
BLUE
RADA
V-2
v-3
1506
5AQ5
500 V
AUDIO HT.
1051
921,
R105
500V
L-101
C -I03 A
z-10 I J- I
R-102
C-1021
T
5KI
Oro 500
500V
.0047 ww
6007
500
1.1
RED'_
47
+.2C -402C
11.5V
4.5 MC
K
r
R -I06
I MEG.
VOLUME
CONTROL
3306
K
1
2/27C 108
AUDIO
OUTPUT
(
5
IAPPROX,
320
MF.
00V
TI
QUA DR AT UR
COIL
*R-108
R-107
C-403 C
330
w
450° le F.
BUZZ
CONTROL
470
1W
O
+2507
A /my
T-202
VIDEO
2 ND PIX I -F AND DET. TRANS
L-206
30 MUM.
CK706 OR 1N60
CRYSTAL
C-210
-
C-5
5
5007
500 V
1
L-203
3.3
L-207
JO MU. H.
I
toDv
4.5 MC TRAP
1607
V-7
18007
C-2121
12BY7-A
I
521I
500 71
C -2I4
217
.047
2007
9
'',,,fcgcf-1; 6-214
226
R-216
47
R -2I2
sgv
I
R -2I3
MEG
R -22I
33 K
3.6R
4W
L-300
VERT. DEFL.COILS
1R-220
180K
R-224
470
OR BLR.
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
DEFLECT/ON YOKE
zoo7
RED
#1507
A0/28v
RED BLACK OR BROWN
VERTICAL SWEEP AND SYNC.
/507 P -P
V -9A
sv
ro
BLUE
10DE7
O
R-223
100K
16;YV
VERT. OUTPUT
160V ro
II 4007
0.1
6007
047
600'
OR
y
9
151(
? AMA
.1 C-312
390 K*
4.7 K 1
V -I0
R -3I9
1.5 K
I
R-322
R-315 *
R -3I3
YELLOW "" ORANGE
1100V P -R ---AP
00 NOT
3,
MEASURE
C-311
wC-310
R-323
2
507 P -P
60 CYCLES
CONTROL
180
TM",
R -4I8
C-402 BA
GREEN
RED
-zsov
1
SO
10
0
1W
K
20 MF.
2ICBP4A
U
RED
VERT. LIN.
R-317
2.2 MEG.
YOKE PLUG
#2507
T-302 It
VERT. OUTPUT wc,
TRANS.
Ir.
9-913
60 CYCLES
VERT. OSC.
0V
BOOST
,e AV
1250V P -P
)60 CeYCLES
2R. 3
,1C-3079
R -3I6
10 MEG.
HEIGHT CONTROL
T .04
600 V
C -4I3
11-241f.
4007
5357P-0
CG7
I2DQ6-A
HORIZ. OUTPUT
BOOSTo
2
OSC.
HORIZ.
OUTPUT
TRANS.
7-I2
WO V P -P
15.150 CYCL ES
15.750
CYCLES
0-1IB
"
L-402
R-417
1 MEG.ss
68
,
R-416* C,,4,15 / CI -740 -1
56K F
HORIZ . WAVE
FORM
TEST POINT
N.V. RECT.
I
'I RV
V -I4
I2AX4-GTA
ISO.,
.5V
Ft 4 2 1
700
410
*
HORIZ.,
C-419
DRIVE
4 MF.T
so
CONTROL
y.,4AMP.
29N4
I2AX4-GTA
4.8 ,4c
19.4VAC
7
I
C-425
I
500K 7
C-420
W
13-419*.
10K
2W
56
5 RV
02
<
I
YOKE SOCKET
C-422
.047
J
6007
1
BOOST
4.71'4C
6
HEAT EP
TERMINAL
the heater string will be slightly greater bemuse of the filament voltages of the tuner tubes
49
C-421
R-420
400V
'
R-418
100
3
1.047
MIXER S
5CG8
2437
DAMPER
4-250 VO
R -F 311N ER
2
off
/1g
5
13.5
R-425
220
500V
7
$gI
DO NOT MEASURE
R-415*
HORIZ. WAVE
FORM
HORIZ.FREO.
COIL 77.,
C-411
?VAC
V -I3
1K3-GT
40007 P -P
L-403
10K
V-12
12D(16 -A
561CV P -P
T-400
1]//---\11/jA,
.01
1857
I
GRN.OR TEL.
500 K
0.47
I
L-404
HORIZ.
OEFL.
COILS
CONTROL
C-213
10 CICLES
60 CYCLES
400V
R-218
500
CONTRAST
v
18076-P
40-140v P -P
C-218 .0.1
R-217
5.6 K
IA4
.730 man.
6.8K
G-219
L-20222:5/'SOOY
290
immositio
-1C-209
L-204
R-219
A 1287
APPROX.
114nu
30
0-217
VIDEO AMP.
/35
7
L-405
,CP,9,1,CE
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
43.5 MC 44.5 MC
MONTGOMERY WARD, Continued
Models WG-5062A, WG-5067A, etc.
42.4 MC
SERVICE SUGGESTIONS
45.75 MC
APPROX.50%
50%
BUZZ IN SOUND
1. Check buzz control setting.
2. Check sound I -F alignment.
3. V-2 defective.
43.5 MC AND 44.5 MC
MUST BE AT
SAME LEVEL
41.25 MC
BENDING OR S-ING
1. Check capacitors C -402A & C -403A.
2.
3.
Check V -8A, V -8B and V-7 tubes.
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
1.
Connect sweep output to 2nd I -F grid (pin
#1-V6), oscilloscope to diode load resistor (R213). Set output of sweeper so that some output is indicated on oscilloscope. Adjust 2nd
PIF transformer (T-202) primary (bottom) and
secondary (top) simultaneously for maximum
output and symmetry. Readjust sweeper output
for 4.0V P -P on oscilloscope. Touch-up to give
the waveform shown in figure 4.
42 4 MC
In
all positions, final
been adjusted, do not readjust with the sweeper
connected to another stage. For instance, after adjusting the output stage and moving the sweeper to
the 1st grid to adjust 1st I -F transformer, do not move
the slugs in the output stage, etc.
45.75 MC
In general, the position of the 45.75 mc marker should
be set with the primary and the symmetry adjusted
with the secondary. An approximate setting of the
input grid coil may be obtained by adjusting for
maximum amplitude of the 45.75 marker. This amplifier cannot be adjusted for bandwidth. It must be
adjusted for maximum gain, symmetry and position
of 45.75 marker.
PEAKS MUST BE
OF EQUAL HEIGHT
Fig. 4 -2nd Pix I -F Response
With approximately -7.0V bias on AGC line
VIDEO
(junction of R-212 and C-213) connect sweeper
to 1st I -F grid (Pin #1-V4). Reduce sweeper out-
put to compensate for additional gain of
1st
stage (4.0V. P -P on oscilloscope). Adjust 1st
I -F
With 4.5 Mc unmodulated signal into grid of the video
amplifier tube and VTVM on picture tube cathode,
tune 4.5 Mc trap for minimum response. VTVM on
transformer primary (top) and secondary (bot-
0-10 V AC scale. This adjustment can also be made
while observing a picture from a station. Tune trap
for least 4.5 Mc beat (grainy appearance) in picture.
tom) for maximum gain and symmetry with
45.75 mc marker.
43.5 MC
(See Figure 5.)
44.5 MC
AUDIO
1.
42.4 MC
APPROX.70 %
touch up should be made with
4.0V. P -P amplitude on oscilloscope. Once a stage has
APPROX.80%
2.
Set channel selector, to Channel 13. Connect
sweeper with very short leads through a 10 K mmf
disc ceramic capacitor to mixer grid (lead of a 10 K
resistor which is accessible through a hole located
on front of the tuner. Readjust sweep output for
4.0V P -P, adjust 41.25 mc trap (bottom of L-200) so
that notch is at marker, adjust mixer plate coil (L-9
primary) and input grid coil (top of 1-200) for maximum gain and symmetry with 45.75 mc marker at
50%. (Figure 6.)
V-12 or V -11B tubes defective.
circuits.
3.
Fig. 6 -Overall Pix I -F Response Curve
45.75 MC
Tune in a TV station and reduce signal strength
at antenna terminals by use of an attenuator or
similar device until a "hiss" accompanies the
sound.
60%
43.5 MC AND 44.5 MC
MUST BE AT
SAME LEVEL
2.
Adjust sound take -off coil (L-100) quadrature coil
(L-101) and buzz control (R-102) for maximum
undistorted sound and minimum buzz.
3.
If "hiss" disappears during step 2, further reduce
signal strength.
Fig. 5-Pix I -F Response From 1st Pix I -F Grid
50
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA
CHASSIS TS -430, LTS-430, QTS-430
ADDENDA TO MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
TV
Chassis
Type
Model
Table
Table
Table
Table
I7T32BZ
Y17T32BZ
17T33B
17T33M
17P5-1
Portable
Portable
Portable
Portable
YI7P5-1
17P5-2
Yl7P5-2
. TS -430
TS -430Y
LTS-430
LTS-430
TS -430
TS -430Y
TS -430
TS -430Y
17P5 -2C
TT -104
TT -104Y
LTT -104
VTT-89
TT -104
TT -104Y
TT -104
TT -104Y
VTT-89
Y17P5-2C
-
TT -104Y
17P5 -5A
QTS-430
TS -430Y
TS -430
TT -104Y
TT -104
QC MT T -102
TT -104Y
QCMTT-102
Antenna
-
Monopole
Monopole
Monopole
Monopole
Monopole
V TT -89 Monopole
Monopole
VTT-89 Monopole
None
REAR PANEL ACCESSORIES AND CONTROLS
These models are provided with conventional antenna
terminals for connection of an outside or portable -indoor
antenna of any type. The 17T32 & 17P5 models (chassis
VERT
OUTPUT
ONOFF
TS -430) are equipped for use with a custom -designed single mast type antenna called the Monopole. The Monopole an-
SRI TLM
CG
tenna requires a "counterpoise" which is provided by the
8B65/9EJ5
is provided by a female receptacle pre -wired into the receiver's back cover. The Monopole antenna is provided
with a male plug and when the antenna is plugged into the
back cover, the cabinet counterpoise is automatically con-
= SRD IF GRID
cabinet; required connection from the antenna to the cabinet
CimE
CON R TEST RECE
BI
2ND IF
s
Otdr°,
BZ6
/
nected. The conventional twin -lead from the Monopole an-
ON UHF
MODELS
ONLY
tenna must still be connected to the conventional antenna
terminals. Should the back cover be removed, make certain the ground counterpoise wire is secured to a cabinet
screw when cover is replaced.
6 AMP SH FUSE
SLOBLO LC TYPE
#65RT4425BITA+MI
UHF TUNER
F
HOLD
QCMTT-102
TS -430Y
QTS -43 0
TS -430Y
17T32WH
g5
"ngOt°
IS
TT -104
TT -104Y
VTT-89
VTT-89
QTS-430
Y I7P5-5F
VTT-89
Tuner
17P5 -3A
Y 17P5 -3F
17P5 -4A
Y17P5-4F
-
4
AUDIOIF
VERT OsC
TEST *ELEA
TS -430
TS -430Y
UHF
Tuner
Chassis
Model
-
LTT-104
VHF
TV
Tuner
Tuner
At\
BRITS 1ST IF SCREE
-
-
UHF
VHF
2AF4P
f IKA)
UHF OSC
12D Q6/A
HONIZ
ON
OFF
\R.H.TA
Model 17T33 is provided with a"built-irrantenna. The
OUTPUT
leads for the built-in antenna protrude through the back
cover, near the conventional antenna terminals. To use
VOL
MOTOROLA
5U8
M. OS
5BKTA A
I7CFP4 (TS -430)
17 BJP4 (Lrs -430)
built-in, connect lead-in wires to antenna terminals. Do
PART NUNBER
PICTURE TUBES
not use both an external antenna and built-in antenna.
N.A,yING POSITION
RF AMP
0
PER
TF'TEST POINT
Receivers equipped for VHF and UHF reception are pro-
vided with externally connected, 150 ohm resistors, be-
SELENIUM RECTIFIERS
SPE ANSI
tween the VHF and UHF antenna terminals. Such connection allows VHF and UHF reception from a single antenna.
When a single antenna is used as a combination VHF/UHF
antenna, reception should be checked with the antenna connected to the VHF terminals first and then to the UHF terminals. Since the 150 ohm coupling resistors can cause a
loss of signal strength, it is necessary to determine which
tuner input must be fed directly from the antenna and which
tuner will be least affected by the loss. Keep in mind that
the 150 ohm resistor jumpers are only used when VHF and
UHF reception is obtained from a single antenna. In fringe
areas, and cases where individual VHF and UHF antennas
OR EQUIVALENT
FIGURE 1.
TUBE LOCATIONS & FILAMENT WIRING
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
Lf the deflection yoke is not correctly positioned rotatationally, the picture will be tilted. if the deflection yoke
is not tight against the flare of the picture tube, the picture
may be de -focused, have non-linear distortions and neck
shadow.
are required...the resistor jumpers are removed and the
To adjust the yoke; loosen the metal clamp, push the yoke
as far forward as possible, then rotate until the picture is
straight. Loosen clamp and push tight against rear of yoke;
tighten metal clamp.
appropriate antenna connected to the appropriate input terminals.
The Monopole antenna is not recommended for UHF op-
eration and a special UHF loop antenna (TK-86) is available. However, the Monopole will often give satisfactory
PICTURE CENTERING
results as a combination VHF/UHF antenna in certain areas.
In such case, the Monopole lead-in should be tried in both
the VHF and UHF position to find the group of stations that
Picture centering is accomplished magnetically by means
of the centering device located on the picture tube neck. Use
the following procedure:
will be least affected by the loss of signal strength due to
the resistors.
Starting with the magnetic centering device arms together (for minimum field strength) and positioned in the
1.
FOCUS ADJUSTMENT
horizontal plane.
HEATER
(0 VOLTS)
2. Separate the arms of the centering device to center the
picture vertically.
3. Adjust horizontal centering by rotating the magnetic cen-
CRID#2
4;e4;
tppw,4
op.
di
(+260 V)-----""
tering device, as a unit, one way or the other. Readjust
vertical centering by slightly rotating the relative position
of the arms.
FIGURE 2,
51
FOCUS
ANODE
ADJUSTMENT OF SHUNTING STRAP LOCATED
ON PICTURE TUBE BASE PROVIDES OPTIMUM
FOCUSINC. TEMPORARILY CONNECT STRAP
BETWEEN PINS 6 AND 10, THEN 6 AND I.
LOCATE STRAP PERMANENTLY IN POSITION
FOCUS
ADJ STRAP PRODUCING BEST OVERALL FOCUS.
FOCUS STRAP ILLUSTRATION
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -430, LTS-430, QTS-430, Service Information, Continued
NOISE GATE CONTROL (Local -Distance) ADJUSTMENT
2.
3.
Replace yoke and picture tube sockets.
4.
Replace two screws holding top chassis brackets.
Replace two screws underneath cabinet holding chassis
bracket.
5.
Insert back cover into bottom well of cabinet, position
flexible shafts so they will extend out openings in back cov6.
er, then close cover making sure power interlock makes
proper connection. Replace the three screws in back cover making sure Monopole grounding lug is placed underneath
the right-hand top (as viewed from rear) screw.
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
Insert tuner leads into proper antenna terminals.
Check operation of receiver as well as making a check
to make certain the cabinet is not in any way making contact with wiring,creating a shock hazard.
7.
The HORIZONTAL HOLD control should have a sync
range of approximately 30 degrees. If the control is too
critical, adjust by the following procedure. (It should be
possible to adjust the horizontal oscillator coil with the receiver in the cabinet by using the appropriate pins of the
8.
SERVICE TEST RECEPTACLE.)
1.
Continue placing chassis into cabinet with top leaning
outward.
This control sets the receiver for the signal strength in
the area in which it is to operate. To adjust: tune in a channel that receives a satisfactory picture; turn the noise gate
control clockwise until picture becomes unstable (sync or
otherwise). Then turn the noise gate control counterclockwise until picture is again satisfactory. Check this setting
on all available channels. If any channel is unstable, continue turning noise gate control counterclockwise until it
clears up. Once set in this manner, the control should not
require further adjustment unless some condition occurs
that would change the signal strength to the receiver.., this
might include changing the receiver's position in the room,
changing the antenna type or location, etc.
TO REMOVE THE LTS-430 CHASSIS FROM THE CABINET
Set all controls for a normal picture.
2. Use apiece of wire, short the pin labeled "HORIZ AFC"
to ground,
3. Connect a .1 mfd 400 volt capacitor in parallel with the
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR COIL (L-501). Use pins #2
and 15 of the SERVICE TEST RECEPTACLE.
I.
Remove all knobs from the side of the cabinet.
2.
'Jnplug the tuner lead-in wires from the antenna ter-
3.
Remove the back cover of the cabinet.
minals.
4. Remove the two screws exposed by back cover removal
and located at the top edge of the cabinet. These screws
hold the brackets retaining the top of the chassis.
Adjust the HORIZONTAL HOLD control to the point
where the picture almost remains stationary...as far as
4.
horizontal sync is concerned. Also, make sure that the
5. Remove the two screws from underneath the cabinet that
hold the bottom chassis bracket.
Remove the .1 mfd capacitor shunting the HORIZ COIL
and without turning the HORIZONTAL HOLD control, adjust
the HORIZ COIL slug to the center of the range in which the
picture almost remains in sync horizontally. The slug of
the coil is located in the upper right-hand corner of the
6. Shift chassis to required position and disconnectthe
speaker leads,
picture tube socket and the yoke socket. Remove chassis.
6.
Remove the wire shorting the HORIZ AFC to ground and
adjust the HORIZONTAL HOLD control so that no fold -over
appears on either side of the raster.
After replacement, check operation of receiver as well
as making a check to make certain the cabinet is not in any
way making contact with wiring... creating a shock hazard.
TO REMOVE THE TS -430 (17T32 & 17P5) CHASSIS FROM
THE CABINET;
TO REMOVE THE SAFETY SHIELD FOR CLEANING
MODELS: I7T32 and 17P5
picture is synced vertically.
5.
TO REPLACE LTS-430 CHASSIS; Use preceding instruc-
chassis.
1.
Remove all knobs from the side of the cabinet.
2.
Unplug the tuner lead-in wires from the antenna ter-
tions in reverse order.
1. Position cabinet so the screws underneath the cabinet
front (bezel) may be removed.
minals.
NOTE: Special "holt head" screws were used on some
cabinets. A special tool, Motorola Part No. 66T742501,
will be required to remove these screws in order to remove
Remove the three screws from the back cover and remove the back cover by lifting up and out of the bottom retaining channel, then straight back from the cabinet.
3.
the safety shield.
2.
4.
Remove the two self -tapping screws exposed by back
cover removal and located at the top edge of the cabinet.
These screws hold the brackets retaining the top of the
chassis.
5.
Pull lower portion of cabinet front outward, away from
cabinet.
3.
Lift cabinet front upward until it is released from the
upper edge of the cabinet.
Remove the two screws from underneath the cabinet
MODEL: I7T33
that hold the bottom chassis bracket.
1. Remove the safety shield by removing the screws
located in the metal retainer strip at the top of the safety
shield. Remove the metal strip and allow the top of the
Tilt chassis so that left-hand side of chassis moves as
close to the left-hand side of the cabinet as possible: tilt
the top of the chassis outward from the cabinet. Now, disconnect the speaker leads, the high voltage picture tube
anode lead, the picture tube socket and the yoke socket.
6.
shield to move outward from the cabinet.
Grasp safety shield at right and left-hand sides and lift
up and out of the bottom retainer.
2.
The chassis can be removed from the cabinet by tilting
the top out first.
7.
PRECAUTIONS IN CLEANING PLASTIC -TYPE SAFETY
SHIELD (Models: 17T32 & 17P5)
TO REPLACE THE TS -430 CHASSIS
Clean the safety shield with water, mild soap and a clean
soft cloth. Dry the surface with a clean, damp chamois.
Never try to clean the safety shield by hard rubbing with a
dry cloth. This will only tend to scratch the surface and
produces an electrostatic charge on the plastic which will
attract more dust from the air.
Insert chassis with top tilted outward from cabinet and
the left-hand side inward so the tuner shaft may be inserted
through opening in side of cabinet. Before proceeding further, replace speaker leads and the picture tube high voltage
1.
anode lead.
52
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -430, LTS-430, QTS-430, Alignment Information, Continued
ALIGNMENT
4. Apply the negative lead of a 6 volt bias supply to pin #1
SERVICING THE IF SECTION
(IFAGC) of theSERVICE TEST RECEPTACLE and the positive lead to pin #3 (chassis ground).
Before alignment of the video IF section is attempted,
it is advisable to thoroughly check the system. If alignment
5. All coil core tuning positions, in relation to chassis, are
given in the procedure chart and in the illustration of Fig-
is started on an IF section in which a faulty -component exists,
successful alignment will probably be impossible and the en-
ure 6.
6. Set channel selector on channel 4113 and connect a 1500
ohm 50 watt voltage normalizing resistor from B4+ to chassis(use pins #5 (B++) and #3 (ground) of the SERVICE TEST
RECEPTACLE.
tire procedure will have to be repeated when the real cause
of the trouble is corrected. Preliminary tests of the system should include voltage and resistance measurements,
routine checks for bad soldering connections, and visual inspection of the circuits for overheated components as well
as for obvious wiring defects.
7.
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
Short across the tuner input terminals.
Remove the deflection yoke plug to eliminate RF interference radiation.
Set the noise gate control to maximum counterclockwise
position (as viewed from rear of chassis).
9. Maintain 2 to 5 volts peak -to -peak at the diode load
(Det. T.P.) except when specific values are given in the
procedure chart.
Disable oscillator by shorting point "L" located rear oscillator tube V-2 to chassis.
10. Refer to Video IF & Mixer Alignment Detail for component and test point locations (Figure 7).
8.
Pre -Alignment Steps
1.
Maintain line voltage at 122 volts with variac.
2.
3.
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
STEP
1.
SWEEP
GENERATOR
To 3rd IF grid test
recept thru a .001 mf
capacitor
ADJUST
INDICATOR
Scope thru a 97K
ohm resistor to
video det test
recept
Both cores of 3rd IF
coil (T-103)
44 Mc markers as required
To mixer grid thru .001
mf capacitor. Use opening adjacent to mixer,
point "Mr. Set sweep to
approximately 44 Mc.
NOTE: Temporary removal of bias or
increased generator input may
be required to see traps.
Scope connection
same as step #1
a.Both 47.25 Mc
traps (L-101 &
a. Minimum response (tune cores at
b. Set marker to 41.25 Mc
b. 41.25 Mc trap
b.
c. Set marker to 39.75 Mc
c. 39.75 Mc trap
c. Minimum response (tune core at
Mixer trans, lo-
See curve #2 for above responses.
Tune both mixer trans (T-2) and grid
a. Set marker to47.25 Mc
3.
Equal peaks and 45.75 Mc marker as
shown in curve #1.
NOTE: Core at crystal det end can be
reached by inserting tool through
unobstructed slug. Tune both
cores near the ends of their
respective coils. See detail
Fig. 6.
Set sweep approx to
2.
ADJUST FOR AND/OR REMARKS
Generator connection
same as step #2, except
set output for 3V P -P
on scope
L-105)
(L -102A)
(L-103)
Scope to "1st IF
screen test recept"
or "test point".
cated on tuner (T-2)
1st IF grid coil
(L -102B)
end of coils away from chassis).
Minimum response (tune core at
end of coil toward chassis).
end of coil away from chassis).
coil (L-10213) for curve shown in
curve #3. T-2 affects the center peak
and L -102B affects the two outside
peaks.
If a suck -out (trap effect) occurs, de tune 1st IF transformer (T-101) to remove.
Tune both coil cores at end of coil
away from chassis.
t.
5.
Generator connection
Scope thru a 47K
scope
ohm resistor to
video det test
recept
Same as step 4.
Same as step #4.
same as step #2. Reset for 2-5V P -P on
1st IF trans (T-101)
2nd IF trans (T-102)
Proper 42.25 Mc marker placement
(tune core at end of coil toward chassis)
Proper 45.75 Mc marker placement
(tune core at end of coil toward chassis.
See curve #4)
If a tilt occurs, readjust the mixer
trans coil (T-2, on tuner) and if necessary, touch up the 1st & 2nd IF trans
(T-101 & T-102) for the response shown
in curve 04.
53
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -430, LTS-430, QTS-430, Alignment Information, Continued
4.5 MC TRAP ADJUSTMENT
3. ADJUST...sound trap (L-110) to find the two points of
adjustment at which the sound beat is just noticeable on the
picture tube screen. Rotate the core toward center of the
two points. Use minimum amount of inductance (core out
of coil) that will result in no apparent beat interference.
Carefully tune receiver to local station and advance con-
1.
trast control.
2. Adjust local oscillator (with fine tuning control to bring
the 4.5 Mc interference strongly into the picture.
SOUND ALIGNMENT
(Station Signal Method)
into the noise level for proper tuning action.
The sound system used in the TS -430 receiver consists
of an audio IF amplifier stage, a quadrature grid detector
and an output stage. Since this type of sound system is extremely sensitive, relatively small input signal voltage will
cause grid current to flow in both the IF amplifier and the
detector stages. Grid current through the tuned coils will
Preliminary Steps
1.
Tune in a strong TV station.
load them down making the adjustment extremely broad and
Z.
Adjust all controls for normal picture and sound.
use a very weak signal when aligning the driver and the detector input coils. Actually. the signal should be well down
3.
alignment impossible. For this reason, it is necessary to
39.73 41.25
MC
39.77
47.25
MC
-Nki.
Refer to Video IF & Mixer Alignment Detail for coil and
test point locations (Figure 7).
STEP 3
CURvE413
41.15
plc
MC
MC
*\./.
47.25
3935
MC
14-
pc
CUR, -
CURVE .2
2-5 OP -P
AP PROF
CURVF1.4
DIP 30% MAO
10% MIS
111riC
42.2514C
10% DIP
45.75 MC
507.
1
CURVE MusT RE
SroluNTINcAL.
MAO
1
ST EP *1
STEP f4
STEP *2
3V P -P
4414C
47.23
ML
41.25
2-5 0 P -P
410-1591
.k7Lt
SO%
M.IS MC
1st IF SCREEN
2.
3816
15T IF
.,'
T220
Y4
VW'
SIX
1E1
1E1
L.
1ST IF
GRID
AUDIO
TP
0
PA
47.25
TRAP
3816
2143 IF
1.1025
240 F
isTIFu
14125 Alc
5118
TRAP
COP Com
CONE Far
nrArEsT To
MIXER
ox
CHASSIS)
ICI
Pri
11'
6CG
41.25
TRAP
CLIPPER
& AGE
BEES
VIDEO AMP
MOISEINS
1302
AUDIO
TAKEOFF
1ST IF GRID
3RD IF,
4L3 TRAP
Tmr
SWEEP & MARKER
VG
47.3
1.1
TRAP
GENERATOR
5118
10 IF
TOT ONE/
0
.001 TO. 00
T 301
SERVICE TEST RECEPT AUDIO
INTER IF AGC
.16111
1=1,11.
STAGE
1ST IF
SCOPE
AFTS
1ST IF TRANS
47.25 TRAP
2ND IF TRANS
To
DAMPER
12 DOG
$0512
OUTPUT
TPTEST POINT
isoo n
NORMALIZING
RESISTOR
f
1 303
QUAD
COIL
GCG7
$0012
05c
47.25 TRAP
39.75 TRAP
FIGURE 6. COIL CORE POSITIONS
FIGURE 7.
54
VIDEO IF & MIIRR ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -430, LTS-430, QTS-430, Alignment Information, Continued
SOUND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
STEP
STATION
1.
Strong signal
REMARKS
ADJUST
INDICATOR
VTVM to lug 404 of quad
coil (L-303) (see base detail on schematic). This
point is jct of R-307
Maximum deflection (coarse adj). Of two possible
maximum tuning points, use that giving the largest
voltage reading (DC). NOTE: Core located away
from chassis should remain fixed**
L-303
quad coil
(82K) & R-308 (560K)
2.
Maximum sound with minimum distortion (fine adj)
Listening test
PI
Weak signal*
3.
4.
T-301
Maximum sound with minimum distortion (maintain
hiss level)
L-301
take -off
Maximum sound with minimum distortion
interstage
rr
If sound is not clear at this point, repeat above procedure as necessary.
*NOTE: The signal must be weakened considerably either by disconnecting one side of the antenna lead, or connecting
low value resistors across the antenna terminals until a pronounced hiss appears in the sound. This hiss level
must be maintained for proper alignment.
**Second core is merely to increase inductance: if misadjusted by previous service work, merely set near end of coil and
proceed as stated.
IT -11111 Vlf
TUNER
Tans
12 40
FS
012
C16 470
10
14
T2
0011 5-
LIO
El
n`
VI
MIXER
STIKIA
TEST RECEPT
V2
CO ®
RF AMP
1118
ISK
508
MIXER -0SC
L3
r.;
T1
C21
I MAF Ci
C Id
F INE
TUNING
019) II5
a
-,TO1PL9
R6 220
a
C20
Auto! 0
V
A
V9
VIM
SOUND
VIO
8005
6
3DT6
1/2-51.18
AUDIO DETECTOR
AUDIO IF
oar
D OT
L303 CONN
1301 CONN
90F TI59
SCR V
L303
AUDIO OUTPUT
Ei.1) (.01
1301
5
2
OV
AUDIO
TEST 0
12
POINT
C31I01
R311 IX
0305 18K
T
C8060+
ICMF
Wires with arrows connect to correspondingly marked wires of main
schematic printed on pages 56-57, over.
55
SD.
ANS'
svr
B
tt7
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -430, LTS-430, QTS-430, Schematic Diagram
VIDEO
R
373
V4
38Z6
3126
ITT VIDEO IF
2NO VIDEO IF
IFL
65
38Th
3RD VIDEO IF
3RD VIDEO IF
TEST RECEPT
113F
L 028
5
T102
Fr
TuNER
a)
to
C106
.001
Ed
C1071 .,001_
a
O
a
1ST IF SCREEN
-c)
a)
cu
ca
s.
Ill. FOUR
ner 113CFPT/-
a
7.
"
TO TEST RECEPT
c9
7'0 4C'd
-as
zO
a)
A GC
Auoic.c
a. us
SYNC
V66
V78
I/2 -8E88
r.
3
I/2-6CG7
CLIPPER
NOISE INVERTER
2
I
RX45 4,70
R505 ISOK
SAM
001 CONP4
R402
NOISE
g
2
RON 1M
CATE
6
7W49
80v
0501
14
3E501
C505
.003
Z
IOC
(Tr
C
g -T-OC33
1
TlF
2
SERVICE TEST
WVHPP
L
RECEPT
/I9V PP
V
\
.01.
N
850 PP
WV PP
V
1301 00101
POWER SUPPLY
V13
VI2
12.73
120Q4
V3
31126
04
.26
L801
V5
362
V6
VIO
5M/5
VI5
VS
5/Q3
MI
5
VI6
MT
4
I
12
W
VII
KG]
OGG,
a
5
4
5
4
99
02
AFFF
SOS
5
S
VI
4
5
4
3E
EM+
L032
150
ClOW
10 VP
E803
CB093 0015
ON -OFT SWITCH
ION VOL CONTI
TS -430
Aw
5V PP
RIO 2.24A
V
MAXIMUM
BEZEL
SUPPLEMENTARY PRODUCTION CHANGES
Chassis
Coding
Chassis
Coding
A-07
Changes
A-08
added between pin fI3 of V-10 (8B05 or 9EJ5 -
TO REDUCE VERTICAL SIZE FLUCTUATION
WITH CHANGES IN TEMPERATURE: C-610
(02 mf) changed to .01 mf; C-612 (.01 mf) added
A-09
in parallel with 0-610.
No coding
change
Changes
TO INCREASE AUDIO OUTPUT: C-314 (20 mf)
DESIGN CHANGE: R-121 (7500) wattage rating
changed from 4 watts to 3 watts.
56
Audio Output) and ground.
CRYSTAL PROTECTION CIRCUIT ADDED3
C-129 (.005 mf) and R-124 (68K) placed in parallel and added between pin 1117 of V -6A (8EB8 Video Amp) and junction of L-108 di R-113
.1V PP
In/
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -430, LTS-430, QTS-430, (B-00 version) Schematic Diagram
4
I
3
II
6201 11(
111 1
63W
VGA
5
I
L110
Oa
mot stn.,
non
4. Ur TM,
LIII
Lim
LICIT
11
DOT
.01
VIDEO 6W
TEST RECEPT
11W CONS
C NEI
1/2-11EMI
VIDEO DEE
jelr,_.
COOT
301(
110V PP
C2.311(.1
11
"H"
row II
916
C117 1I
Jrvl
17CFP4
15-430
1/81P4
LTS -4310
MEN PP
VIA
112-6CCI
6
ACC
R115 1M
-MN
Iz
www
I's
't V
S
10
FOCUS STRAP - on pr lute
best connect from pin 610
1 or IS wftwhewer gees
best overall form.
UT
MI=
HORIZ SWEEP 8 H.V.
VII
HORIZ 0SC
152A
VI.)
r
HV MET
12AF3
DAMPER
120G6
HOR IZ OUTPUT
50V PP
YOKE
VII
VI2
6CG7
3.614V PP
18:84 PP
C509 7390
0512 .0Dp_
sow
R515 670
I
*MA
I
R5I9
boa
241
5
8
R520 7211
elA
I
3
4
8:
2451
0521 6.81(
R5I0
HOR 12 40.0
701(
IBOV PP
i "a
0518 (A2
c5I11(
I
27
'or
8
PP
VERT SWEEP
VB8
V15
1/2-508
5A05
VERT OSC
VERT
WT
COD)1.01
0603 22K
NAP
R607A
R605
I:
VERT SIZE
5M
-
0613 221(
i610)}.01
C1505(( 015
?He
LZAV PP
0
In no
VINE
AM /OM
VERT 1101.0
IM
117V PP
1425 PP
V
1116131 CONN
(2.2K). NOTE: E-102 (.0047 mf &
A-10
NOTES:
VOLTAGE AEASURDIENTS
68K),
I. Taken from mint irdedel to chassis with a VTVM. 4-100.
a
51K744975 Res -Cap is used in place of C-129
and R-124 on some chassis.
THIRD IF LIMITING' CHANGE: A -11Z (8.2K)
relocated; R-125 (47K) added; C-130 (.001 mf
added. See TS -430B-00 schematic diagram for
electrical application.
3.
Line roller rmintAind al 120V AC.
Voltages inChcated by an Wont will very with associated
control settings.
4.
0
5.
risen with contrast control at minimum are all /her
controls in normal operating position with ro Signal irotA.
Tuner on channel D or channel al least noise with antenna
terminals
startle.
WAVEFORM MEASUREMENTS
L Taken from pent ,recatel to chassis rain a wide IT / MILT
/00
cgr 01.1.k
,7,7Z
57
tend oScilioscom
030
Z Oscillosode sowed near seem rate lorkald.
T I 0111.';
3.
Tatty with straw signal; contrast control as
Morlieues, all She controls in memil operating position.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -430, LTS-430, QTS-430, Service Information, Continued
TO REPLACE PICTURE TUBE
TS -430 Only (Models 17T32 & I7P5)
11. Re -connect the speaker leads and plug in the picture
tube socket.
1. Remove chassis from cabinet (see chassis removal instructions).
2.
12.
Secure the chassis intoposition, apply power with ser-
vice line cord and check receiver operation. Adjust the
yoke position and centering device (see applicable sections
Remove the safety glass (see "To remove the safety
in INSTALLATION ADJUSTMENTS).
glass for cleaning").
After receiver has been adjusted for proper operation,
replace the front and rear covers.
13.
Loosen picture tube mounting bolts at upper right and
left-hand corners of cabinet.
3.
TO REPLACE PICTURE TUBE
LTS-430 (Model 17T33)
4. Carefully remove picture tube out front of cabinet and
place on dirt -free surface.
1, Remove chassis from cabinet (see chassis removal instructions for the LTS-430 chassis).
Remove the centering device and deflection yoke. The
deflection yoke is held in place by the yoke retainer clamp
....remove the clamp by means of the screw.
5.
Remove two bolts from underneath cabinet holding picture tube bottom bracket.
2.
Working with the new replacement picture tube, place
cloth tape at same points and of approximately the same size
as those on the original picture tube, then place two pieces
of gummed paper on picture tube to prevent yoke from slipping about. The gummed paper, preferably gummed on both
b.
3. Remove the two nuts at upper left and right-hand corners of cabinet securing top picture tube brackets.
Remove complete picture tube and mounting assembly
from cabinet.
4.
sides, is placed on opposite sides of the tube neck...at the
flare.
7.
in
cleaning" section).
8.
5. Remove the centering device and deflection yoke. The
deflection yoke is held in place by means of a wedge clamp:
To remove, compress both ends of the wedge clamp spring.
Clean picture tube and safety glass (see note on cleaning
plastic surfaces
the "To remove the safety glass for
Working with the new replacement picture tube, place
cloth tape at same points and of approximately the same
size as those on the original picture tube, then place two
pieces of gummed paper on picture tube to prevent yoke
6.
Replace deflection yoke and centering device.
9. Replace picture tube into correct position in front of
cabinet: tighten mounting bolts at upper right and left hand
sides.
from slipping about. The gummed paper, preferably gummed
on both sides, is placed on opposite sides of the tube neck..
at the flare.
10. Insert chassis into cabinet and position so that the
voltage anode lead may be connected to the picture tube.
V15
L303
V9 ip SERVICE
1301
7.
V8
Replace mounting assembly, deflection yoke and center -
L302
R121
V6
VT
T103
TEST
RECEPT
V5
R112
1102
R107
VIO
V4
L501
R311
122
V11
1101
E802
R103
-R201
E501
V3
L101
C805
R605
L102
V12
R309
L802
CHANNEL
SELECTOR
E803
FINE TUNING
V13
CRT GND
STRAP
C806
R801
R12
-'
E804
11
FIGURE 10.
CHASSIS TS & LTS-430A-00 PARTS LOCATIONS
58
T302
L103
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA
CHASSIS TS -434, MODEL 14P14-1
(Service material on pages 59 through 66)
FOCUS
The 14P14 receivers are provided with conventional an-
Adjust the centering device as required, then position
the shunting strap (located under the picture tube socket)
tenna terminals for connection of an outside or portable -
indoor antenna of any type. These models are equipped for
use with a custom -designed single -mast type antenna called
the Magic Mast. The Magic Mast antenna requires a"counterpoise" which is provided by the cabinet; required con-
for optimum focus.
FOCUS ADJUSTMENT
nection from the antenna to the cabinet is provided by a
HEATER
(0 VOLTS)
female receptacle pre -wired into the receiver's back cover.
The Magic Mast antenna is provided with a male plug and
when the antenna is plugged into the back cover, the cabinet counterpoise is automatically connected. The conventional twin -lead from the Monopole antenna must still be
connected to the conventional antenna terminals. Should the
back cover be removed, make certain the ground counterpoise wire is secured to a cabinet screw when cover is re-
cRio#2,,C1::C1;111.1.'47,
(+450V)
OltFRI/
ADJUSTMENT OF SHUNTING STRAP LOCATED
AHD
ON PICTURE TUBE BASE PROVIDES OPTIMUM
Focus
ADJ STRAP
FOCUSING. TEMPORARILY CONNECT STRAP
BETWEEN PINS 6 AND 10, THEN 6 AND I.
LOCATE STRAP PERMANENTLY IWPOSITION
PRODUCING BEST OVERALL FOCUS.
FOCUS STRAP ILLUSTRATION
In some cases, focus may be improved by rotating the
magnetic centering device 180 degrees and repeating the
placed.
entire procedure. Never position the focus strap in any
manner other than that specified: other connections can
AGC CONTROL (Local -Distance) ADJUSTMENT
cause damage to the receiver.
This control sets the receiver for the signal strength in
the area in which it is to operate by adjusting the average
value of the AGC voltage developed. Rotating the local distance control counterclockwise increases the AGC voltage to the receiver and will reduce the picture contrast.
Rotating the local -distance control clockwise decreases the
AGC voltage to the receiver and increases the picture sig-
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
The HORIZONTAL HOLD should have a sync range of
approximately 30 degrees.
adjust as follows:
nal. Too great a reduction of the AGC' voltage (by clock-
wise rotation) can create a condition of overdrive in the
video amplifier with attendant sync compression and sync
instability.
If
the control is too critical,
1,
Set all controls for a normal picture.
2.
Using a piece of wire, short SERVICE TEST RECEP-
TACLE pin #4, labeled "HORIZ AFC" to ground.
VERTICAL SIZE AND LINEARITY ADJUSTMENT
3. Connect a . 1 mfd 400 volt capacitor in parallel with the
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR COIL (L-501). Use pins 02
and f3 of the SERVICE TEST RECEPTACLE.
Vertical Size and Lin are concentric controls located at
the rear of the chassis. The inner control is Vert Size (HT)
while the outer control is Vert Lin, To adjust, proceed as
follows:
4. Adjust the HORIZONTAL HOLD control
to the point
I.
Center the picture and adjust vertical size until lower
portion of picture is normal.
Z. Adjust vertical linearity to normalize upper portion.
where the picture almost remains stationary...as far as
Readjust controls, if necessary, to obtain best balance
with minimum stretch or compression of picture.
NOTE: Re -setting of the Vertical Hold control may be necessary during the adjustments.
COIL and without turning the HORIZONTAL HOLD control,
adjust the HORIZ OSC. COIL slug to the center of the range
horizontal sync is concerned. Picture must be in vertical
sync during this adjustment.
5. Remove the .1 mfd capacitor shunting the HORIZ OSC.
3.
in which the picture almost remains in sync horizontally.
The coil adjustment slug is located just to the left of the
high voltage cage (receiver viewed from rear).
PICTURE CENTERING
Remove the wire shorting the HORIZ AFC to ground and
adjust the HORIZONTAL HOLD control so that no fold -over
6.
Picture centering is accomplished magnetically by
means of the centering device located on the picture tube
neck. Use the following procedure:
appears on either side of the raster.
SAFETY SHIELD REMOVAL
Starting with the magnetic centering device arms together (for minimum field strength) and positioned in the
1.
1.
front (bezel) may be removed.
horizontal plane.
2. Separate thes-arms of the centering device to center the
picture vertically.
3.
Position cabinet so the screws underneath the cabinet
NOTE: Special "holt head" screws were used on some
cabinets. A special tool, Motorola Part No. 66T 74250 1
will he required to remove these screws in order to remove
the safety
2. Pull lower portion of cabinet front outward, away from
cabinet.
Adjust horizontal centering by rotating the magnetic
centering device, as a unit, one way or the other. Readjust
vertical centering by slightly rotating the relative position
of the arms.
3.
Lift cabinet front upward until it is released from the
upper edge of the cabinet.
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
the deflection yoke is not correctly positioned, the
If the deflection yoke is not tight
against the flare of the picture tube, the picture may be defocused, have non-linear distortions or neck shadow.
If
CHASSIS REMOVAL
picture will be tilted.
To adjust the yoke, compress the ends of the yoke wedge
clamp and move clamp and rubber retainer away from deflection yoke. Position yoke as far forward as possible and
rotate until picture is straight. When satisfactory, replace
retainer and clamp so yoke cannot be moved in any direc-
1.
Remove all knobs from the side of the cabinet.
2.
Unplug the tuner lead -in wires from the antenna ter-
3.
Remove the screws from the back cover and remove
minals.
the back cover by lifting up and out of the bottom retaining
channel, then straight back from the cabinet.
tion.
59
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -434, Model 14P14-1, Service Information, Continued
4.
Remove the two chassis retaining screws located underneath the cabinet.
PICTURE TUBE REMOVAL
1.
5. Remove the bolt securing the top of the chassis to the
cabinet handle bracket. The bolt is located between the
Remove the safety shield (see "Safety Shield Removal"
instructions).
Service Test Receptacle and the Local Distance (AGC) control.
2.
3. Loosen picture tube mounting bolts at upper right and
left-hand corners of cabinet.
Tilt chassis so that left-hand side of chassis moves as
6.
Remove chassis from cabinet (see "Chassis Removal"
ins tr uctlons).
close to the left-hand side of the cabinet as possible: tilt
the top of the chassis outward from the cabinet. Now, dis-
Carefully remove picture tube out front of cabinet and
place on dirt -free surface.
5. Remove the centering device and deflection yoke. The
deflection yoke is held in place by the yoke retainer clamp
...see "Deflection Yoke Removal" instructions .
4.
connect the speaker leads, the high voltage picture tube
anode lead, the picture tube socket and the yoke socket.
The chassis can be removed from the cabinet by tilting
the top out first.
7.
Insert chassis with top tilted outward from cabinet and
the left-hand side inward so the tuner shaft may be inserted
through opening in side of cabinet. Before proceeding further, replace speaker leads and the picture tube high volt-
Working with the new replacement picture tube, place
cloth tape at same points and of approximately the same
size as those on the original picture tube, then place two
pieces of gummed paper on picture tube to prevent yoke
from slipping about. The gummed paper, gummed preferably on both sides, is placed on opposite sides of the tube
neck, at the flare.
Replace two screws underneath cabinet holding chassis
bracketand chassis retaining bolt.
7.
Clean picture tube and safety glass.
8.
Replace deflection yoke and centering device.
9.
Replace picture tube into correct position in front of
6.
CHASSIS INSTALLATION
1.
age anode lead.
2.
Replace yoke and picture tube sockets.
3.
cabinet: tighten mounting bolts at upper right and left-hand
Insert back cover into bottom well of cabinet, position
flexible shafts so they will extend out openings in back cover, then close cover making sure power interlock makes
proper connection. Replace the screws in back cover making sure Monopole grounding lug is placed underneath the
left-hand top (as viewed from rear) screw.
4.
sides.
10. Insert chassis into cabinet and position so that the
voltage anode lead may be connected to the picture tube.
11. Re -connect the speaker leads,plug in the picture tube
socket and deflection yoke plug.
Insert tuner leads into proper antenna terminals.
5.
Check operation of receiver as well as making a check
to make certain the cabinet is not in any way making con-
12.
6.
/
tact with wiring, creating a shock hazard.
STEP#1
DIP 30% MAX 45.75
2-5V P -P
VIDEO
3RD IF 8,
CURVE /1
DET TP
VI D DET 0
7103
10% MIN
42.25
VIDEO AMP &
AUDIO IF
MC
T301
L302
AUDIO
QUAD
PHASE DET
IF
COIL
& VULOSC
1107
41.25
MC
1-
25
2-5V P-P4MC
40%
Secure the chassis into position, apply power with
service line cord and check receiver operation. Adjust the
yoke position and centering device,
4.5 MCO
4EW6
3RD IF
47.25
TRAP
STEP#4
(38U8'
& AGC/
4V
HORIZ
OSC COIL
CLIPPER
10% DIP
MAX
1000 R 40W
1
NORMALIZING
HORIZ
RESISTOR
AFC
445
3BZ6
2ND IF
_t
VERT
OUTPUT
L301
TAKE -OFF
CURVE 114
/12W6CT/
SERVICE TEST RECEPT
AUDIO
MC
4-C1N
6CG7
HORIZ
OSC
47A -
12W6CT
1ST IF
MC
SCREEN
Tb
STEP#2
CURVE #2
Till
1ST IF SCREEN
( AUDIO I
TEST RECEPT
OUTPUT
STEP #3
1ST IFG(
o Sc.
3BZ6
1ST IF
GRID
L102
47.25 MC TRAP
L101
0
---------
-
1ST IF GRID &
CURVE MUST BE
SYMMETRICAL
41.25
4 .25
MC
MC
41.25 MC TRAP
(TRAP COIL & CORE ARE
NEAREST TO CHASSIS) if
12 DO 6A
STEP #3
HI -PASS
HORIZ
F LTER
OUTPUT
CURVE 1)3
3V P -P
42.25 MC
APPROX
44 MC
45.75 MC
5EU8
4ES8
MIXER
RF AMP
OSC
12AF3
DAMPER
SWEEP & MARKER
GENERATOR
TP = TEST POINT
SYNC
FIGURE 5.
VIDEO & SOUND IF ALIGNMENT DETAIL
60
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -434, Model 14P14-1, Alignment Information, Continued
HIGH VOLTAGE AND PICTURE TUBE HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
OPERATION OF THIS RECEIVER WITH THE CHASSIS
NOT NICK OR SCRATCH GLASS, OR SUBJECT IT TO ANY
UNDUE PRESSURE IN INSTALLATION. WHEN HANDLING,
USE GOGGLES AND HEAVY GLOVES FOR PROTECTION.
DISCHARGE PICTURE TUBE BY SHORTING THE ANODE
CONNECTION TO CHASSIS GROUND (NOT CABINET OR
OTHER MOUNTING PARTS). WHEN DISCHARGING... BE
SURE TO USE A WELL INSULATED PIECE OF WIRE.
ACCESSIBLE INVOLVES A SHOCK HAZARD AND NO WORK
SHOULD BE DONE BY ANYONE NOT FAMILIAR WITH
THESE HAZARDS.
EXTREME CARE MUST BE USED IN HANDLING THE
PICTURE TUBE, AS ROUGH HANDLING MAY CAUSE IT
TO IMPLODE DUE TO ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. DO
VIDEO & SOUND ALIGNMENT
PRE -ALIGNMENT INSTRUCTIONS
4. Apply the negative lead of a 4 volt bias supply to pin #1
(IF AGC) of the SERVICE TEST RECEPTACLE and the positive lead to pin #3 (chassis ground).
Before alignment of the v,deo IF section is attempted, it
is advisable to thoroughly check the system. If alignment
started on an IF section in which a faulty component
exists, successful alignment will probably be impossible
and the entire procedure will have to be repeated when the
real cause of the trouble is corrected. Preliminary tests
of the system should include voltage and resistance measurements, routine checks for bad soldering connections,
and visual inspection of the circuits for overheated com-
5. All coilslug tuning positions, in relation to chassis, are
given in the procedure chart and in the separate detail of
Figure 6.
is
Set channel selector on channel #13 and connect a 1000
ohm 40W voltage normalizing resistor from B+ to chassis
6.
(use pins #5 (B+ ) and #3 (ground) of the SERVICE TEST
ponents as well as for obvious wiring defects.
RECEPTACLE.
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT
Set the contrast control at minimum (extreme counter-
8.
Short across tuner input terminal.
clockwise position).
Pre -Alignment Steps
1.
7.
Maintain line voltage at 120 with variac.
2.
Remove the deflection yoke plug to eliminate RF interference radiation.
Maintain Z to 5 volts peak -to -peak at the diode load (Det
TP) except when specific values are given in the procedure
chart.
Disable oscillator by shorting point "L" located near
oscillator tube V-2, to chassis See Figure S.
10. Refer to Video & Sound IF Alignment Detail for component and test point locations (Figure 5).
9.
3.
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
STEP
SWEEP GEN
AND MARKER
Both slugs of 3rd IF
coil (T-103)
Equal peaks and 45.75.Mc marker
as shown on curve #1.
Note: Slug at crystal end can be reached
by inserting tool through unobstrutted slug.
Tune both slugs near the ends of their respective coils. See detail for slug position
Note: Temporary removal of bias or in creased generator input may be re quired to see traps.
a. Set marker to
a. 47.25 Mc trap
a.
b. Set marker to
b. 41.25 Mc trap
1.
To 3rd IF grid test
recept thru a .001
mf capacitor. Set
sweep approx. to
44 Mc: markers
as required.
Scope thru a 47K ohm
2.
To mixer T. P. thru
.001 mf capacitor,
(Use opening adjacent to mixer .See
Figure 5).
Set sweep to approx.
Scope connection
resistor to Video Det
test recept
same as step #1
44 Mc
(L-102)
47.25 Mc
(L -101B)
41.25 Mc
3.
Generator connection
Scope to "1st IF
cept set output for
3V P -P on scope
#6 of tube
same as step #2, ex-
screen test recept
or test point." Pin
Tune both T-2 & L -101A for curve shown
in curve #3. The pri affects the center
peak and the sec affects the two outside
peaks.
1st IF grid
If a suck -out (trap effect) occurs, de
tune 1st IF transformer (T-101).
coil (L -101A)
slug located
away from
chassis
Generator connection
same as step #2. Reset for 2-5V P -P on
Scope thru a 47K ohm
resistor to Video Det
test recept
scope
5.
Same as step #4
Minimum response (tune slug at end
of coil away from chassis)
b. Minimum response (tune slug at end
of coil toward chassis)
See curve #2 for above responses.
located on
tuner (T-2)
a. Mixer trans,
b.
4.
ADJUST FOR AND/OR REMARKS
ADJUST
INDICATOR
1st IF trans (T-101)
2nd IF trans (T-102)
Tune both coil slugs at end of coil away
from chassis
Proper 42.25 Mc marker placement
(tune slug at end of coil toward chassis)
Proper 45.75 Mc marker placement
(tune slug at end of coil toward chassis).
See curve #4.
If a tilt occurs, readjust the mixer pri
coil (T-2 on tuner) and if necessary
Same as step #4
touch-up the 1st and 2nd IF trans
(T-101 & T-102) for response shown
in curve #4.
61
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -434, Model 14P14-1, Alignment Information, Continued
4.5 MC TRAP ADJUSTMENT
Carefully tune receiver
1.
to local station and advance con-
trast control.
3. ADJUST... sound trap (L-107) to find the two points of
adjustment at which the sound beat is just noticeable on the
picture tube screen. Rotate the core toward center of the
two points. Use minimum amount of inductance (core out
of coil) that will result in no apparent beat interference.
Adjust local oscillator (with fine tuning control) to bring
4.5 Mc interference strongly into the picture.
2.
a
1ST IF
GRID
b
41.25
TRAP
47.25 TRAP
1ST IF GRID
1ST & 2ND IF TRANS
3RD IF TRANS
41.25 TRAP
FIGURE 6.
COIL CORE POSITIONS
tector input coils. Actually, the signal should be well down
into the noise level for proper tuning action.
SOUND ALIGNMENT (Station Signal Method)
The sound system used in the TS -434 receiver consists
Preliminary Steps
of an audio IF amplifier stage, a quadrature grid detector
and an output stage. Since this type of sound system is extremely sensitive, relatively small input signal voltage will
cause grid current to flow in both the IF amplifier and the
detector stages. Grid current through the tuned coils will
load them down making the adjustment extremely broad and
alignment impossible. For this reason, it is necessary to
1.
Tune in a strong TV station.
2.
Adjust all controls for normal picture and sound.
Refer to Video IF & Mixer Alignment Detail for coil and
test point locations (Figure 5).
3.
use a very weak signal when aligning the driver and the de -
SOUND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
STEP
STATION
1.
Strong signal
INDICATOR
VTVM to jct of R-306
(82K) and R-307 (560K)
located on L-302 (under
ADJUST
L-302
(quad coil)
chassis).
Listening test
2.
Weak signal*
3.
4.
REMARKS
Maximum deflection (coarse adj.). Of two possible
maximum tuning points, use that giving the largest
voltage reading. 41,
Maximum sound with minimum distortion (fine adj.).
T-301 (inter stage)
Maximum sound with minimum distortion (maintain hiss
level). **
L-301
(take -off)
Maximum sound with minimum distortion.
If sound is not clear at this point, repeat the above procedure as necessary.
*The signal must be weakened considerably either by disconnecting one side of the antenna lead, or connecting low
value resistors across the antenna terminals until a pronounced hiss appears in the sound. The hiss level must
be maintained for proper alignment.
**The purpose of the top pre-set core is to enable the adjustable core to make the tuning range required while reducing the physical length. If the pre-set core should be misadjusted by previous service work, merely re -set
near top end of coil and tune for maximum.
TUNER PRODUCTION CHANGES
CHASSIS PRODUCTION CHANGES
B thru C
TS -434A-00 thru A-02
Chassis
A-01
A-02
Tuner
Changes
Coding
Coding
TO IMPROVE VERTICAL SYNC STABILITY:
R-502 (100K) moved from ground to pin #1 of
V-10 (6CN7 -Horiz Phase Det).
DESIGN CHANGE: C-125 (470 mmf) removed.
The plate of V -9A (3BU8) is now connected to
junction of C-513 (150) and C-514 (.001).
TO REDUCE NOISE LEVEL: R-121 (390K)
Changes
TT -121B
TO MAINTAIN B+ ON RF PRI TRIMMER: A
buss lead is added to RF pri wafer. See Tuner
Schematic.
TT -121C
TO MINIMIZE RESPONSE CURVE TILT ON
CHANNEL 5: C-2 (470) changed' to .0022 mf.
This change reduces parasitic oscillation creating the tilt.
changed to 470K.
62
r
.81
E2
-I
OPENING
OBC SHORT I NG
TIMER CONNECTIONS
El
54V
13
NT ADJ
I000v
Cwv 13
2
L9
3
I
(301_
18
L7
r
er
-4-41
L6
19:C64/1 6
oat
wi-
C303 (2.4
13
V68
1/2 6AU8
AUDIO IF
kw.
A
E5.4
.001
CI
4
4
2
(am Still
T301 CONN
2
3
3.9
TUNER
6
110
9
VI
5
6
98V
AUDIO DET
7
2
1302 CONN
(BOT VIZ )
2
5
3
C310
IMVOLP
R309
L3I
CHAR
control settings.
k Taken with contrast control at minimum and all other
controls in normal operating position with no signal input.
Tuner on Channel 13 or channel of least noise with antenna
5.
terminals shorted.
7
V2
V8
1.24
3.9
L30
000
126
ADJ
1.25
Taken from point indicated to chassis with a wide band oscilloscope.
Oscilloscope synced near sweep rate indicated.
Taken with strong signal: contrast control al
maximum; all other controls in normal operating
position.
MEI
16
22
CAPACITORS - Unless otherwise specified, values less than
one in MF, all others in PAW.
3.
2.
1.
10
C120B-
.0:3cL)
C15
R6 47K
FINE A
TUNING
CIO
AUDIO OUTPUT
12W6GT
Z3
®
WAVEFORM MEASUREMENTS
%U8
MIXER-OSC
2-6
C7
CRAB 13
RP NEC NMI
00
-T --,-El
CHAN
CRAW 3
CRAB 4
CNA! 5
CHAN 6
CHAN 7
CRAW 11
.005
0121-1
.01
10
11
MN 9
ClIAN
CRAB
CHAN 12
CHAN 13
I. Taken from point indicated to chassis with a VTVM. ±10%.
2. Line voltage maintained at 120V AC.
3. Voltages indicated by an asterisk will vary with associated
0
:es
1302
_
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS
NOTES:
0+ 135V
20
JV
AUDIO
3DT6
V7
70
MAP
4
alt
8+ 135V
Do
( 01
TUNER PROD
CHANGE B
OF NAP
4ES8
El
e°2
Saw
eliwe 9 Mar
E
APB
041
D
az,
Cr)
Ott
0
(1)
rt
0
(13,
(-)
Cl)
0
,TJ
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -434, Model 14P14-1, Schematic Diagram, Continued
VIDEO
A
1/3
C101
I
4V
t,
i117-:77H1
ml__4(
4
ANV
C103'' 18
TEST
PECI PT
8102 56K
19
T103.
I34V
6101
C11
18
5.6
4
1.06V
1"61
C113
47
3
(CZ
1ST
Kn. VILVI
102
101
-MV/1
4
1
1103 CONN
3RD VIDEO IF
3RD IF TP
IF BANDPASS
470
3
5,
4E1V6
3BZ6
2ND VIDEO IF
3BZ6
1ST VIDEO IF
1244
1101
2
V5
V4
SCRLEN -
E:1
117
-LC102
6.8
8)T35 6C
!..3:+:
MP
8104 1K
R120 680K
AAA,
AW-
8+ 135V
HORI Z SWEEP & H.V."
SYNC
VSB
VIOA
1/2 3E018
SYNC SEP
8501
R404 47K
R402 12M
SERVICE
TEST RECEPT
llov
8
7.
166
5a
100K
9V
8505 1500
2
C74001.01
3
'`Gc
'SW
vEN/I
RIB 470K y
NOP IT 09C
IF
2/3 6CN7
HORIZ PHASE DET
50V PP
0506 4.7
H
C5011(100
C506
0033
:f
9
( 100
L501
SEE V94 FOR
VOLTAGES ON
ir2: HC8(112
PINS fl, /2&/7
I0.5V PP
6VvPP
97V PP
R504 3300
C5041(.001
E
p, 4-
B+ 1355
POWER SUPPLY
VHF TUNER
V12
1201368
2
va
VI3
12813
4
V9
V3
12116GT
V6
3128
68088
1/101
5
3
14
VP16
4
3
4
5
4
12116GT
12
1
E802
I.68
8042-35
2
5
ON -OFF SW
120VAC
C120D -+
200 MF ID
CIZOC
250 MF
C12107
30T8
9
4
4
31084w
3
4
5
VI
V2
I
5E118
5
4
4E38
5
4
BF 13W
2811
SLO-BLO
ION VOL CUNT
600
V9
0+ 135V
000
E801
4
V7
1802
81313_,_
R802 7.5
7
VIO
0015
N
2.2
BEZEL
64
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Schematic Diagram
V6A
112-6AUSA
TELEVISION CHASSIS TS -434A-00
-11L107
4, u4C
VIDEO AMP
41.4.
444
E102
.we".
Cl
40W
"
.u.11,
80V PP
IT
RII6 27K
vv
UN 3.3K
C202 a/.01
LIM
C2011(.1
11.r
RI17
CONTRAST
258
16.6K TAP
6 00
e
2
ce
us.
11
V16
141.04
PICTURE TUBE
WA
I/2-31308
AGC
21
R201
BRIGHTNESS
6
ILIUK
FOCUS STRAP - on pin tut*
base connect from pin 6 to
1 or 10, whichever gives
best overall focus.
64
RI
AGC
70K
70
C127
5 Alf
Si 1350
YOKE
1701
T501
VII
V12
120066
HORIZ OUTPUT
IOR Z OSC
.001
C510
015
152A
HP RECT
C5121
/3
4
2
R51117
R518 22K
NVO
3.1
I
R510
HORIZ HOLD
100K
I
180V PP
R519 220K
"NV
I2V PP
VERT SWEEP"
C6081(,11215_,
V1OB
VI4
1/3-6CN7
VERT OSC
0602
1601
681( 8
.002
R610 150K
MA*
R602 100K
1ZW6GT
.01
VERT OUTPUT
12ov
1.2KV PP
v
T601 ram
C6091(.05
111
134- 1350
§F**
3
350
R609
.62
VERT SIZE
5M
R6098
4 NIG VARIABLE
VERT LIN
2M
I NIG IIXED
R606
VERT HOLD
117V PP
V
10011
1420 PP
V
65
6+4
PP
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -434,
Model 14P14 -1
SElESTC
VI ER
VIO
V14
L302
V7
R118
1301
L109 V6
E301
L108
E102
L105
L106
1.104
RECEPT
T103
Service Information
V9
(Continued)
V5
1102
L501
R606
V4
V11
R201
C510
T701
V3
R801
R117
L107
R309
1 NE
UN ING
CHANNEL
FIGURE 9.
SELECTOR
PARTS LOCATIONS
V12
VID DET
AGO
TEST RECEPT LOCAL -DISTANCE
E101
V9
V6
1301
6AU8A
V7
SERVICE
3DT6
TEST
V8
C127
L102
L802
CAB GND
V10
POWER
VII
V14
6CN7
RECTIFIER
6CG7
12W6GT
1302
RECEPT
R125
3B U8
C120
V13
-
AP
T302
CAB END
CLIP
T103-,
V5
L501
41/V6
3RD
OSC
COIL
I
GRID T
NT
TERM INAL
RECEF
T102
DEFL YOKE
---RECEPT
8606
AC
VERT HOLD
INTERLOCK
-R6098
R201
BRIGHTNESS
L107
'
VERT LIN
V4
R609A
3BZ6
VERT SIZE
T101
(HT)
R510
R117
HORIZ
CONTRAST
HOLD
1ST IF
SCREEN
1S2A
ON -OFF
802
VOLUME
R801
3BZ6
T501
HV TRANS
L101
CHANNEL
SELECTOR
El
FINE
TUNING
1.6 AMP V8
07
FRIP
12146GT
VHF
V2
VI
HI -Pk_
V13
V12
TUNER
5EU8
4ES8
FILTER
12AF3
12DQ6A
66
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA
INSTALLATION & SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS
MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
VERTICAL SIZE AND LINEARITY ADJUSTMENT
TV
Center the picture and adjust vertical size until lower
portion of picture is normal.
1.
2. Adjust vertical linearity to normalize upper portion.
Readjust controls, if necessary, to obtain best balance
with minimum stretch or compression of picture.
NOTE: Re -setting of the Vertical Hold control may be necessary during the adjustments.
3.
VHF
Model
Type
Chassis
Tuner
A21K106B
A21K106M
A21T6OBG
A2IT6OCH
A21T60MG
Console
Console
Table
Table
Table
WTS-553
WTS-553
WTS-553
WTS-553
WTS-553
TT -I07
UHF Remote
Tuner Control
TT -107
-
TT -I07
-
TT -107
TT -107
-
TR-3
TR-3
TR-3
TR-3
TR-3
-
CHASSIS DESCRIPTION
WTS-553
SERIES
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
These chassis are horizontally mounted types
containing 16 tubes plus 21CBP4A picture
tube, dual selenium phase detector, and a germanium video detector. Features: cascode
tuner, gated AGC, quadrature-grid sound detector and Tube Sentry System.
If the deflection yoke is not correctly positioned, the
picture will be tilted. If the deflection yoke is not tight
against the flare of the picture tube, the picture may be defocused, have non-linear distortions or neck shadow. To
adjust the yoke, loosen the yoke retainer clamp screw until
the yoke is movable. Push the yoke as far forward as pos-
All receivers have projection -type channel -
tainer clamp screw.
All models using the WTS-553 chassis have a
motorized, automatic tuning system in conjunction with a remote control unit.
selector knobs (non -concentric).
sible, then rotate until the picture is straight. Recheck
Horizontal Size device; if satisfactory, retighten yoke rePICTURE CENTERING
RECEIVER MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
Picture centering is accomplished magneticallyby means
of the centering device located on rear of yoke cover. Use
the following procedure:
Starting with the magnetic centering device arms together (for minimum field strength) and positioned in the
1.
2.
Separate the arms of the centering device to center the
picture vertically. Keep arms as close together as possible
commensurate with proper centering; excessive separation
may result in de -focusing.
Console
Console
Console
Console
TS -553
TS -553Y
TS -553
TS -553Y
TT -106
TT -106Y
VTT-89
TT -I06
TT -106Y
-
VTT-89
Electrically identical to the WTS-553 chassis
practically identical to TS -553, except for power supply, audio section,
and type of tuner employed.
Raster corrector (pin cushion) magnets, found on each
side of the deflection yoke, are used to straighten the sides
of the raster. They are correctly set at the factory but, if
moved in shipping, or if the yoke has been replaced, they
may require readjustment. Adjust in the following manner:
MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
TV
Model
3.
Move corrector magnets forward, backward or tilt until
raster distortion is eliminated.
4.
2.1K107B
Chassis TS -552 and TS -552Y are
RASTER CORRECTOR MAGNETS(NOT ON ALL MODELS)
Loosen screws holding magnet mountings.
Tuner
separate fine tuning and channel selector knobs.
All receivers using the TS -553 chassis have manually operated tuners only.
vertical centering by slightly rotating the relative position
of the arms.
2.
Tuner
with the exception of tuner type and the addition of
tone compensating control. All these chassis have
Adjust horizontal centering bYrotating the magnetic cen-
Reduce raster size so that its sides are just visible.
UHF
Chassis
TS -553
tering device, as a unit, one way or the other. Readjust
1.
VHF
Type
Y21K107B
21K107M
Y21K107M
horizontal plane.
3.
TV
Model
21K104B
Y21K104B
21K104M
Y21K104M
21K104W
Y21K104W
Re -tighten screws holding magnet mountings.
FUSE REPLACEMENT
VHF
UHF
Type
Chassis
Tuner
Tuner
Console
Console
Console
Console
Console
Console
TS -552
TS -552Y
TS -552
TS -552Y
TS -552
TS -552Y
TT -108
TT -89
TT -108Y
TT -108
TT -108Y
TT -89
TT-I08Y
TT -I08
-
TT -89
FUSE - B++: 1.6 amp "Slo-blo, LC" type (E-802) located
on top of chassis just above vertical linearity
control.
Console
21K105B
21K105MC Console
21K105W
Console
TS -552
TS+552
TS -552
TT -108
TT -108
TT -108
-
SURGE PROTECTION RESISTOR - Thermal type unit,
R-801, located in filament string.
21K108W
Console
TS -552
TT -I08
-
21K109M
Console
TS -552
TT -108
-
21K110W
Console
TS -552
TT -108
-
Rating: 200 ohms cold. 6 ohms
hot.
(Material on these models continued on pages 68 through 78)
67
-
-
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -553, -Y, WTS-553, Service Information, Continued
CENTERING DEVICE
21CBP4A
5U8
-N.
MIX OSC
PICTURE TUBE
TUNER OUTPUT RECEPT
UHF MODELS
ONLY
5BK7A
AF4
F AMP
IF
TEST POINTS:
VIDEO
T31.3RD IF GRID
[C]=VIDEO DET
1.6 AMP FUSE
SLO-BLO LC TYPE
FM.SERV TEST RECEPT
*65K744238
T.P.(TV/0)
6
MP
VERT
350 MA
FOCUS ADJ.
HEATER (0 VOLTS)
AC
INTERLOCK
ANODE
FOCUS ADJ
STRAP
GRID NO2
(500 VOLTS)
F I GORE
VERT
SIZE
1
#
4
VERT OSC &
OUTrUT 2ND CLIPPER
*48K122479 OR HUN
ON OFF SW
ACC&
\Q...1251ST'
( 5AQ5) 6CG7
SELENIUM RECTIFIERS
IFirAUDIO GRID
3
4
0
VERT
LIN
YOKE
RECEPT
8+4
'CND
HEAVY LEAD
5 *488142698 OR
3A3/144A-01
EQUIVALENTV RFCT
4
6CP
"41 KEYING POSITION
HORIZ
HORIZ OSC COIL
EHORIZ AFC
LIGHT LEAD
HORIZ PHASE DET
OSC
IF AGC
g
HORIZ OSC
HORIZ HORIZ
HOLD SIZE
FOCUS
ADJUST THE CENTERING DEVICE AS REQUIRED, THEN POSITION THE SHUNTING STRAP (LOCATED
UNDER THE PICTURE TUBE SOCKET) FOR OPTIMUM FOCUS. THE SHUNTING STRAP IS DESIGNED SO
ONE CONNECTION ALWAYS REMAINS ON PIN #6 (FOCUS ANODE)...THE STRAP MAY THEN BE PHYSICALLY POSITIONED SO THE OTHER CONNECTION IS ON PIN #1 (CHASSIS GROUND) OR PIN #10
IN SOME CASES, FOCUS MAY BE IMPROVED BY ROTATING THE MAGNETIC
(BOOTSTRAP VOLTAGE).
CENTERING DEVICE 180 DEGREES AND REPEATING THE ENTIRE PROCEDURE.
1.
TUBE LOCATION, FUSE GUIDE, FOCUS INFORMATION & FILAMENT WIRING
Onautomatic tuning models (INSTA-MATIC) it is necessary to remove the INSTA-MATIC pushbutton by clockwise
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
The HORIZONTAL HOLD should have a sync range of
rotation, then the two screws holding the switch in place.
approximately 30 degrees. If the control is too critical,
Move the switch plate to the most convenient position.
On models having channel projection lights, it may be
necessary to temporarily change the projection light position to reach the slugs.
adjust as follows:
Set all controls for a normal picture.
Using a piece of wire, short SERVICE TEST RECEPTACLE S-4 pin #4 labeled "HORIZ AFC" to ground. See
Figure Z.
Z.
On UHF models, the plastic rocker arm may be repositioned by turning the fine tuning shaft past either end stop and then returning it so the fine tuner is at mid -range
as explained in the following instructions.
3. Connect a . I mfd 400 volt capacitor in parallel with the
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR COIL (L-501). Use pins #2
and #3 of the SERVICE TEST RECEPTACLE.
4.
/3BU84.4
12BY7
[A]=1ST IF SCREEN
c-.
8BQ
AUDIO OUTPUT
4
3
611 HOT
20011 COLD
-)16K146412
*-MOTOROLA PART NO.
1.
ES)
1ST VIDEO IF 2ND VIDEOIF3RDVIDE0
905
OR
RECEPT
c--)
VHF MODELS ONLY
(3Bzo r -*481(747548
TUNER
UHF OS
SPKR.
LEADS
XTAL (PLUG-IN)
CONTROL
RECEPT
Preliminary Checks (part of osc adj)
Adjust the HORIZONTAL HOLD control to the point
After receiver has had a few minutes of warm-up time,
check all available stations and observe sound and picture:
if sound and picture are not properly received within the
range of the fine tuning control on manually tuned receivers, it may be necessary to adjust the local oscillator. On
automatic tuning receivers, the indexed stations should be
received without the necessity of changing the fine tuning
control due to automatic re -centering of the control each
time the station is changed. If this does not occur, the oscillator slugs should be adjusted with the fine tuner at the
center of the range so reception will be correct.
where the picture almost remains stationary...as far as
horizontal sync is concerned. Picture must be in vertical
sync during this adjustment.
Remove the .1 mfd capacitor shunting the HORIZ COIL
and without turning the HORIZONTAL HOLD control, adjust
the HORIZ COIL slug to the center of the range in which the
picture almost remains in sync horizontally. The coil ad5.
justment slug is located just to the left of the high voltage
cage (receiver viewed from rear).
Remove the wire shorting the HORIZ AFC to ground and
adjust the HORIZONTAL HOLD control so that no fold -over
6.
TO ADJUST TUNER OSCILLATOR SLUGS
appears on either side of the raster.
Remove channel selector knob. See "items to be removed" for specific disassembly.
I.
LOCAL TUNER OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS
Tune to the highest numbered channel that is giving
trouble.
2.
The local oscillator slugs of the tuner are physically located at the shaft end of the tuner and positioned toward the
front of the receiver allowing adjustment from the front of
the cabinet without chassis removal. An insulated alignment
3.
Set the fine tuner to mid -position. This position is cor-
rect when channel number holes #2 and #13 are open as
viewed through cabinet opening. On automatic tuning re-
tool of sufficient length is required to reach the oscillator
slugs which are located approximately six inches behind the
front panel.
Items To Be Removed (part of osc adj)
The oscillator adjustments may be reached on manually
tuned models by removal of the channel selector knob and,
ceivers this position will automatically be correct if the tuner is switched off channel and then returned to the desired
channel.
NOTES:
in some cases, the circular metal insert hidden by the se-
To eliminate false tuning, use a non-metallic tool.
lector knob.
68
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -553, -Y, WTS-553, Service Information, Continued
INDEX WHEEL &
VHF TUNER
ACTUATING LEVER
(RETRACTS TWO KNOBS)
CAM ASSEMBLY
CENTERING DEVICE
YOKE WEDGE CLAMP
T501
GEAR MOTOR
V15
(INSIDE)
S7
REMOTE CONTROL
RECEPT
CONTROL
BRACKET
TO AUDIO
MUTING SW
S9
TO CHANNEL
SELECTOR SW
AQUADAG
ANT
;ND SPRING
E804
(AT FRONT OF
CHASSIS)
E803
TbuiE501
R505
HORIZ PHASE DET
E802
VERT
1-6/10 AMP SLO-BLO FUSE
LIN
TEST RECEPT
IF AGC
'"1----7,7tWirTITIORIZ HOLD
--Ai
R511
'I
SERVICE.--
Lxi
HORIZ
HORIZ OSC COIL
OSC COIL
HORIZ SIZE
B++
HORIZ
AFC
FIGURE 2, REAR CONTROLS AND ADJUSTMENTS
GND
Do not turn oscillator screw counterclockwise to the extent
of disengagement from tuner. To insure that the screw is
within the range of its threads... tighten the screw (clockwise) until it stops, then turn counterclockwise until the station appears. The maximum number of safe counterclockwise turns from the stop are:
7 -turns for channels: 5 -turns for channels:
13
5
12
11
10
4
9
3
8
2
7
6
4,
ceptacle to the cover and leave the receptacle with the cabinet. If receiver is equipped with a Monopole antenna receptacle (metal cabinets only), there will be a counterpoise
antenna connection to the cabinet. Remember this connection, so it will be correctly replaced when the back cover is
replaced. Remove tuner lead-in from back cover receptacle by unplugging.
2.
Remove all cables running from the control panel to the
chassis, including those of the tuner. Remove the yoke
plug, picture tube socket, highvoltage anode lead and speaker leads. Remove the four screws holding the chassis to
the horizontal metal mounting member (these screws are
accessible from inside cabinet). Remove the chassis.
Switch tuner to the next lower channel number available
TO REMOVE THE VHF AND/OR UHF TUNER
in your area. If station is not properly received, adjust
appropriate oscillator slug using the outline given in step
To remove the VHF tuner, it is necessary to remove
3.
the complete control bracket assembly to which the tuner is
mounted. Removal of the control bracket is necessitated by
the projection dial disc channel indicator (mounted to the
tuner channel selector shaft) on the inside of the bracket.
Repeat step #4 for the remainder of the channels. Always adjust channels in descending order, otherwise tuner
will be severely misaligned.
5.
1. Remove all front panel knobs except the supplementary
controls: brightness, vertical hold and tone controls.
TO REMOVE THE CHASSIS (MODELS HAVING CHANNEL
WINDOW)
Unplug all cables running from tuney and control bracket
from TV chassis.
2.
The chassis is mounted independently to the framework
holding the picture tube, and the entire picture tube and
chassis assembly are mounted independently of the tuner
and auxiliary front panel controls. The chassis uses plug
and receptacles for connections to the tuner and auxiliary
controls and thus may easily be separated from these com-
3.
et.
Visually locate actuating lever mounted to control brackThis lever is approximately one-fourth of the way down
from the top of the bracket, and on the right-hand edge.
This lever, when pushed upward, will retract the small
supplementar
ponents.
controls
of
the front panel (brightness and
vertical hold), so that they will clear the decorative front
panel. Push lever and make sure knobs retract properly.
Lever will operate easier if pressure is applied to push
Remove the back cover of the cabinet. If model is equipped with a "STEREO RECEPTACLE" on the back cover, it is advisable to remove the two screws holding the re 1.
lever towards left, as well as upward.
69
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -553, -Y, WTS-553, TS -552, -Y, Alignment, Continued
4.
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT
Remove the three mounting screws of the control brack-
et: two at the bottom and one at the upper right-hand
ner .
Pre -Alignment Steps
5. Carefully pull bottom (repeat, bottom) end of control
bracket toward rear of cabinet until tone control(s) is clear
of opening. When sufficiently clear, the control bracket
may be moved toward the right-hand side of cabinet, so as
to clear the cabinet flange retaining the top left-hand of the
control bracket. The control bracket and tuner assembly
may now be removed from the cabinet.
6. Remove the projection -dial -disc from channel selector
shaft of tuner by removing retaining spring. Unsolder lead
to dial light. Remove the four screws holding the VHF tuner to the control bracket: remove tuner.
1.
Maintain line voltage at 120 with variac.
2. Remove the deflection yoke plug to eliminate RF interference radiation.
Disable oscillator by shorting point "K" located near
oscillator tube V-2, to chassis.
4. Apply the negative lead of a 6 volt bias supply to pin #1
3.
(IF AGC) of the SERVICE TEST RECEPTACLE and the pos-
itive lead to pin #3 (chassis ground).
All coil slug tuning positions, in relation to chassis, are
5.
given in the procedure chart and in the separate detail of
ALIGNMENT
fig. 7.
Before alignmentof the video IF section is attempted, it
is advisable to thoroughly check the system. If alignment is
started on an IF section in which a faulty component exists,
successful alignment will probably be impossible and the
6.
cause of the trouble is corrected. Preliminary tests of the
7.
8.
Set channel selector on channel #13 and connect a 1500
ohm 50W voltage normalizing resistor from B++ to chassis
(use pins #5 (B++) and #3 (ground) of the SERVICE TEST
RECEPTACLE.
Set the contrast control at minimum (maximum resistance).
Maintain 2 to 5 volts peak -to -peak at the diode load (Det
entire procedure will have to be repeated when the real
system should include voltage and resistance measurements,
routine checks for bad soldering connections, and visual
TP) except when specific values are given in the procedure
chart.
inspection of the circuits.
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
SWEEP GEN
AND MARKER
STEP
1,
To 3rd -IF -grid testrecept thru a .001 mf
capacitor. Set sweep
approx. to 44Mc:
Scope thru a 47K ohm
To mixer grid thru
.001 mf capacitor.
Scope connection
resistor to Video Det
test recept
ADJUST FOR AND/OR REMARKS
ADJUST
INDICATOR
Both slugs of 3rd IF
coil (T-103)
markers as required.
2.
(Use opening adjacent
Note: temporary removal of bias or in creased generator input may be re quired to see traps.
same as step #1
to mixer, point "N").
Equal peaks and 45.75 Mc marker as
as shown on curve #1.
Note: Slug at crystal end can be reached
by inserting tool through unobstructed slug.
Tune both slugs near the ends of their respective coils. See detail for slug position.
Set sweep to approx 44
a. Both 47.25 Mc
a. Minimum response (tune slugs at end of
Mc
b. 41.25 trap
(L -102B)
c. 39.75 trap
b. Minimum response (tune slugs at end of
traps (L-101 & L-104)
a. Set marker to 47.25
b. Set marker to 41.25
Mc
c. Set marker to 39.75
coils away from chassis).
coil toward chassis).
c. Minimum response (tune slugs at end of
coil away from chassis).
See curve #2 for above responses
(L-103)
Mc
Generator connection
3.
same as step #2, except set output for
3V P -P on scope.
Scope to "1st IF
screen test recept
or test point." Pin
#6 of tube.
Mixer trans
,
located on tuner
(T -2)
1st IF grid coil
(L -102A) slug located
away from chassis.
4.
5.
Gen connection same
as step #2. Reset for
2-5V P -P on scope
Scope thru a 47K ohm
Same as step #4
Same as step #4
resistor to Video Det
test recept.
1st IF trans (T-101)
2nd IF trans (T-102)
Tune both T-2 &L -102A for curve shown in
curve #3. The"priaffects the center peak
and the"seeaffects the two outside peaks.
If a''suck-out''(trap effect) occurs, detune
1st IF transformer (T -I01) to remove.
Tune both coil slugs at end of coil away
from chassis
Proper 42.25 Mc marker placement (tune
slug at end of coil toward chassis)
Proper 45.75 Mc marker placement (tune
slug at end of coil toward chassis). See
curve #4.
If a tilt occurs, readjust the mixer pri
coil (T-2 on tuner) and if necessary touch-ur
the 1st and 2nd IF trans (T-101 & T-102) for
response shown in curve #4,
SOUND ALIGNMENT
(Station Signal Method)
The sound system used in the WTS-553 receiver consists
of an audio IF amplifier stage, a quadrature grid detector
and an output stage. Since this type of sound system is extremely sensitive, relatively small input signal voltage will
cause grid current to flow in both the IF amplifier and the
detector stages. Grid current through the tuned coils will
load them down making the adjustment extremely broad and
alignment impossible. For this reason, it is necessary to
use a very weak signal when aligning the driver and the de-
tector input coils. Actually, the signal should be well down
into the noise level for proper tuning action.
Preliminary Steps
1.
Tune in a strong TV station.
2.
Adjust all controls for normal picture and sound.
Refer to Video IF & Mixer Alignment Detail for coil and
test point locations (Figure 6).
3.
70
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -553, -Y, WTS-553, TS -552, -Y, Alignment, Continued
SOUND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
STEP
STATION
1.
Strong signal
INDICATOR
ADJUST
VTVM to jct. of R-309
(82K) and R-310 (560K)
located on L-303 (under
REMARKS
L-303
(quad coil)
Maximum deflection (coarse adj.). Of two possible maximum tuning points, use that giving the largest voltage
reading. Do not change top pre-set core**
chassis).
Listening test
2.
Maximum sound with minimum distortion (fine adj.).
Weak signal*
3.
4.
T -30I
Maximum sound with minimum distortion (maintain
hiss level).*
L-302
(take -off)
Maximum sound with minimum distortion.
If sound is not clear at this point, repeat the above procedure as necessary.
*The signal must be weakened considerably either by disconnecting one side of the antenna lead, or connecting low
value resistors across the antenna terminals until a pronounced hiss appears in the sound. The hiss level must be
maintained for proper alignment.
**The purpose of the top pre-set core is to enable the adjustable core to make the tuning range required while reducing
the physical length. If the pre-set core should be misadjusted by previous service work, merely re -set near top end
of coil and tune for maximum.
4. 5 MC TRAP ADJUSTMENT
1. Carefullytune receiver to local station and advance contrast control.
ADJUST... sound trap (L.-109) to find the two points of
adjustment at which the sound beat is just noticeable on the
picture tube screen. Rotate the core toward center of the
two points. Use minimum amount of inductance (core out
3.
Adjust local oscillator (with fine tuning control) to bring
4.5 Mc interference strongly into the picture.
2.
f1415 41.25
MC
1115
CA
39.75
4125
311
MC
4725
39.13
3v pis
of coil) that will result in no apparent beat interference.
11.25
1775
2-5V Y -P
10, MIX
50%
OM/
111
43 75
7
DIP 305. MAX
42.4505
%Pr
51,45 Mc
STEP "2
CURVE It
STEP '3
CURVE 3
STEP*4
ST EP"1
CURVE I
CURVE{
v,R4r,v,Ir
4
0TUNER
5118A
3119ER
05C
UII
0
MIXER
0
eiavM
0
Tu71,7,,,,INAL
3BZ6
1,1 IF
CONTROL
RECENT
GRtoc,,
(G)
(UK 7B 0
IIr AN1P
AUDIO
NTERSTAGE
T301
3176
A9010
ACC
LNIT
,,,,E701,
TUNER
3DT6
QUAD
AUDIO
303
ovp
1.109
4.524C
TRAP
(9)
Sr
QUM
VAmpIDEO
2.4 4 5
HIGH
VOLTAGE
vLRT 03C &
001 TO 005
2140 CLiPAIR
3A3A4 001;
CAGE
ACCT
GV 151A5
I'I
SERVICE TEST
RECEPTACLE
Ir
AGC
1
RORI4
05C COIL
HOIII$ Arc
TP-TEST POINT
FIGURE 6.
VIDEO IF & SOUND ALIGNMENT DETAIL
-TAYJ."`
Ifidi
1ST IF
GRID
41.25
TRAP
1ST IF GRID
41.25 TRAP
FIGURE 7.
2ND IF TRANS
1ST IF TRANS
47.25 TRAP
47.3 TRAP
COIL SLUG POSITIONS FOR ALIGNMENT
71
39.75 TRAP
MIXER
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -553, -Y, WTS-553, Service Information, Continued
NI ON
®o
1:101(1V2H
TO REMOVE THE PICTURE TUBE
Remove the back cover of the cabinet. If model is e-
1.
quipped with a "STEREO RECEPTACLE" on the back cover,
remove the two screws holding the receptacle and leave receptacle with cabinet. If receiver is equipped with a Mono-
pole antenna receptacle (metal cabinets only), notice the
counterpoise antenna connection to the cabinet so it may be
correctly replaced when the cover is replaced. Remove
the tuner lead-in from the antenna receptacle by unplugging.
SI 6t
Unplug all cables running between the control bracket.
the tuner and the TV chassis. Disconnect speaker leads.
2.
OLP
6I
6'0
Remove four bolts from underneath cabinet holding picture tube and chassis framework assembly to `the cabinet.
Slide entire assembly out rear of cabinet.
19
3.
Remove yoke plug, picture tube socket and high voltage
anode lead. Loosen the two strap clamp screws at the left
and right-hand sides of the picture tube. Remove picture
tube from the framework.
.34
4.
Mil 98
AA'Y
96f
NLI- 91
NV
TO REPLACE PICTURE TUBE
5. Place any insulating or other type tape found on the original picture tube on the replacement picture tube and insert
into framework.
6. Replace leads, plugs and components in reverse order
to disassembly instructions.
0,
a
Ei(2.0.
1(, 11
s'.
9:11 El'
OM
.,
I
II
IS:
_!. de'
,,,,,
:---'
In 2
'Thiil090/9001000
LZ
II7
TO REPLACE THE PICTURE TUBE MASK
1.
Remove the entire picture tube and chassis assembly
(see "how to remove the picture tube").
Remove the entire control bracket assembly and the
tuner (see "how to remove the tuner and control bracket").
2.
Remove the safety glass by removing the retainer strip
located at the top edge of the safety glass. The strip is secured to cabinet by screws having the heads downward.
Hold glass so it does not fall out. Allow top of glass to
move outward. Grasp at left and right-hand sides and lift
up and out of bottom glass retaining channel.
3.
An
4. Remove the circular push -on type retainers holding the
plastic projections of the mask to the top and bottom rails
of the cabinet (remove the retainers from the inside of the
MOOT 21
)1Z2
3WWS'IN0
Ia
ug
wv
cabinet).
Let top of mask move outward from cabinet until it is
clear, then lift up and out of the bottom channel.
5.
SAFETY GLASS REMOVAL
1.
Turn power off.
2. Remove the screws holding metal trim or glass retainer (depending on model) at the top of the safety glass
and remove the metal trim or retainer. Hold glass so it
does not fall out.
3. Allow glass to move outward at the top: Grasp glass at
left and right-hand sides and lift upward until glass is out of
lower retainer channel. Place glass in a safe place.
When replacing glass, make sure protective channel is
on glass before installation.
00
CAUTION: Do not attempt to change the tuner to the next
lower channel by manually turning the index wheel: motor
will be energized and begin automatic channel selection.
When aligning the tuner, it is recommended that you change
stations with the LNSTA-MATIC station selector button,
making as many complete revolutions as required to reach
the desired channel number.
72
BHI
(ROT VIEW
I
UNE
T..
1`.F
+0
reoR
Tu-C.)0
I.
/O©
HI / IL
I
4
OE
,
00
0
2
C302
CS
0
om
r;
wt.°
C 12
0
U
00
soon
RECEPr
5
.75
38Z6
AUDIO IF
vs
TUNER CONN
UNE IN
1302 CONN
L302 j3
3
3000 01O. INPUT
El
RE
10
2
3
=
,301
( SOT Yin)
T301 CONN
4
)
12
.D211
C21
T501 CONN
Fe
OE
V9
.4
DETECTOR
IN
51
,,t.
S2
( POSER
AW
8306 220
-T
-*
TWO PON 1,1011
REMO.
num.
6
MINIS SELECTOR MORN
L6
RE AMP
VI
3
I
I
I
C9
1.5
PAW
19
C309A
.18V
R307 22K
TROT Yin)
L3123 CONN
r
a
L303
031101_o_._
0
S4
EONS
RECEPT
sarrirciey
S.17
rn,
TEST SECEPT
TEST WEPT
1ST II SCREEN
DEC
0 "'RAW'
FRONT OF CHASSIS
TEST POINTS AND RECEPTACLES LOCATIONS
T 10 MF
2
AUDIO
C101(10:1
30
30
_001
TEST RECEPT
MIXER
.5-3 W*
110
I.5-3 AWE
E6
C12
aN1r
TUNER
+w
Ca
L7
'000
V2
5111
_
-
EIREC14
,
6805
RIO
-
03098
9
212y
_
CXRC
30 MF
T 20 ME
7
...__.
8I3 3.3K
C23
_
I
L
B
.11
T302
2
E302
'1
r
ei
1-..
(")
PE -32-
C)
CI)
P -E2
0
,
,..$
.
Q.,
En
)-3
1-..
Cn
cn
Ci2
P
0
ri
0
P:i
0
i-3
it
0
..-...
'I
(1)
0'
.--,
(1)
Oxi
1.1=,
.....1
CD
O Oti
o,-,-
CD
O0
O
a
0
En
cp
()
EDP
0
C)
rin
(RI
ago
'0 crq
0
CR
(I2
c0
(3
0
1.00.
,...,
ii.
....
....--.--.
1.. 1
i --
1
115
L16
:
a
3
L14
LI3
112
3
4
0
- - -n'A
c,,, ....rririv-(5 a
Taken from point indicated to chassis
with a VTVM.
2. Line Voltage maintained al 120V AC.
3. Voltages indicated by an asterisk will
vary with associated control settings.
4. Taken with contrast control at minimum and all other controls in normal
operating position.
5. tuner on channel 13 or channel of
least noise with antenna terminals
shorted.
I.
C22
CIS) 15
AUDIO OUTPUT
13.
_
L.,_1_ ,,,
.T._' !-.'
R82700
I TUNING
I
ar
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS
NOTES
125 410
IV
.on
-IV
j9
to
3
R/ I50
1::2
6i
1e 21 "
-
M IXER-OSC
New E7__
lJ
O
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis WTS-553 Schematic Diagram, Continued
VIDEO
A -t
'75
(i)
N
U
(Et
ci)
V5
V4
V3
3aZ6
3RD VIDEO IF
3914
2ND VIDEO IF
1ST VIDEO IF
3RD IF GRID
0I
(d
TEST REC [PT
c":1
1102
O 0
0
En
5
145
5
134V
1455
34V
001
a) -CI
0-
6
LI074
r -I
75
1 5V
C112) .1:4
2
2
5,
a)
C-1,
CI06
.001
tLr.
80
1ST W SCREEN
CVIST POINT
Z5T RECUT)
U
(1)
R106 IK
AAN
MM
R103 IK
Sti
0
Ea+
a)
0
c.)
D.`
o
SYNC
v,8
VII
I
I/2-6CG7
1/2-38 U8
151 CLIPPER
0402
2ND CLIPPER
I
2
3
F502
E501 CONN
-1
13V PP
H
0047
6401
0
.001
105V PP
220
.0033
V
8 2suv
002
--1(
Tn
27K
C401 ,.02
12
SN
MA/
130 PP -1'4.
461
470K
H
O
IZ
4.7M
8
.001
2
s.
Ed
56K
560K
4.-
130 PP
450 PP
Eil
i
-1 '-
04
SERVICE
I
1
TEST RECEPT
9V PP
I3V PP" .."'"-
IMENIM!M
H
POWER SUPPLY
FIL TP
FILL TP
0
V14
0I3
V10
V3
12, vi
1214,
61.45
46/6
7
7
4
S
8802 42
3
V5
V4
:19Z6
V6
128574
V16
VI2
461/5
6407
V8
3.6
VII
V17
6,,
/65
V7
V9
V2
VI
]851.
/015
sub
58655
1801
3
4
3
4
4
5
6
4
3
4
5
3
4
5
4
11
I
4
5
4
5
3
4
5
4
8
I
I2
(-4
265
MY
L802
0804 10K
000.'
1200
60 CYCLES
AC ONLY
R603 7.5
6801
ON -OFF SW
"
80
T
74
COOS
140 MF
NN
45./
E804
2 4.
o
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Schematic Diagram
VIDEO DET
V6
± TEST RECEPT
12BY7A
I-3_9 VIDEO AMP
1107
,"
R125 68K
000%-
7 var
TELEVISION CHASSIS ZITS -553A-00
,,,,
R2We04 IK
CODS H.005
-
To;
LII0
.4.
C2011(1_
TTIB
0
55V PP
E101
4-1
N.,
]s
S
L105
.....
:
Aw'
V
CI2811.005
5. K
R119A
250
CONE
..ZO
1
or
3.6V PP
1/17
°I ' C117)II.
21CBPIA
2
31-11
5
CRT
3
R201
0114 2.2M
10
250K
16
BRIGHT
3
1251
2
<7.
T 03 CONN
23
al-aQ
LOOT WI SW)
"
33-7
R 120 820K
VA1
FOCUS STRAP
On pix tube base; connect
C124
from pin 6 to 1 a 10, whkh-
.1
ever gives best ovate!! focus.
HORIZ SWEEP 8c H.V.'"
V3
HORIZ OSC
45VHPP
VI4
12206
12AF3
HORIZ OUT
DAMPER
0505 1680
.45V
155T
3A31144A01
g
HV RECT
Q
180V PP
6 ma
'YOKE'
015
012
.We
C5071 .1315
-II. ea
2
R514 8.2
R510 470 ,
.V.V
3KV PP
R5I5 27K
AW
.
H
74
§kt
HORIZ
OS
5J_5
T
R505
HOR I
HOLD
70K
DER. YOKE
aan TOTAL
516 6.8K
33-0
3V PP H
08020
10 MF
eL._151141._.
VERT SWEEP
0118
I/2-6CG7
V16
5AQ5
VERT OSC
VERT OUT
9607 22K
C6021(.015
R6I5 22K
C60111(.
-Sw
1.3KV PP
160V PP
V
.02
exu T601
a-1
ID
C601
;11
1-0
R601
VERT HOLD
R612
VERT
VERT LIN
114
OEFL YOKE
WAVEFORM MEASUREMENTS
I. Taken from point indicated to chassis
2M
261
1§
2.
1500 PP
130V PP
V
V
3.
401 TOTAL
with a wide -band oscilloscope.
Oscilloscope synced near sweep rate
indicated.
Taken with strong signal; contrast
control at maximum; all other controls
in normal operating position.
33-1
11
75
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis WTS-553, Automatic Tuner Information, Continued
AUTOMATIC TUNER SECTION
MOTOR TUNER SYSTEM OPERATION
The tuner is powered by a fractional horsepower, 120
volt shaded pole AC motor, coupled through a 3200 to 24
RPM step-down gear box, utilizing nylon gears. When not
energized, the driving motor is out of gear with the tuner
driving mechanism. The disengagement is accomplished
mechanically by a coil spring located on the rotor shaft between the armature and gear box. This spring suspends the
armature partially out of the field when the motor is de energized. When the motor is energized, the magnetic
field pulls the armature into the center of the motor housing. This action actuates the gear train which drives the
tuner and also the shaft and cam switches. The shaft switch
has four circuits whose individual functions are: blanking
TURN INDEX SLOT CLOCKWISE
TO INDEX STATION. TURN
SLOT COUNTERCLOCKWISE TO
BY-PASS STATION.
SLOT IN
INDEXED
POSITION
SLOT IN
CHANIEI
BY-PASS
POSITION
of the picture, removal of sound, removal of channel window
illumination and motor power retention. The cam switch
performs the function of allowing the tuner. to operate until
it is actuated by cams on the index wheel, stopping the tuner at pre-set channels. Once the tuner motor is energized
by the front panel Insta-Matic pushbutton or remote control
unit, it will continue to change channels until stopped by the
indexing mechanism at the next pre-set channel.
0
TIMER INDEX MECHANISM
SHOWN WITH CHANNELS 2, 5,
II INDEXED. INTO TIMER.
9
ALL OTTER CHANNELS NOT IN USE.
1,
ALWAYS INDEX Ulf POSITION ION
Ulf MODELSI.
FINE TUNING MECHANISM
The fine tuning capacitor is driven by means of a rubber
drive wheel and semi -circular drive plate. When the tuner
is switched from channel to channel, a corrugated detent
washer forces the drive wheel away from the plate. This
effectively disengages the drive wheel from the fine tuner.
The fine tuner is then returned to the center range by the
action of a "hair pin" spring. This system provides the
greatest versatility, since it allows complete manual control of fine tuning on all channels for purposes of interference -free pictures, while retaining the automatic fine tuning re -set feature when switching channels. The latter acimportant in the case of remote control
operation of the receiver, Of course, the tuner oscillator
must be in correct alignment for satisfactory operation of
the automatic fine tuner. However, with the provisions for
front panel, individual channel oscillator adjustment screws,
the matter is somewhat simplified.
FIGURE 10,
TUNER INDEX DETAIL.
TUNER INDEXING
The indexing mechanism is accessible from the rear of
the receiver after removing the back cover and consists of
a circular disc containing numbered, screw slots for each
channel. Each slot is limited to a quarter -turn rotation and
the position of the slot indicates indexing...slots pointing
toward center of wheel have indexed channels; slots at right
radius have bypassed channels.
TO INDEX... Turn set off and turn each desired channel's screw slot to point toward center of wheel -and -each
undesired channel's screw slot at right,angles to radius of
wheel. Apply power to receiver and check reception of all
indexed stations. If any station is not properly received
without fine tuner adjustment, it may be necessary to touchup the local oscillator.
UHF CHANNEL SECTION
The UHF tuner is of the continuous tuning type and,
therefore, cannot be indexed for automatic selection of stations except in cases where only one UHF station is available or desired. Once the motorized VHF tuner has been
switched to the UHF position (channel 11) all UHF tuning
must be made manually. During UHF operation, the VHF
fine tuner knob becomes the UHF tuning control. When only
one UHF station is available, tuning may be semi -automatic
by pre-setting the UHF tuner exactly on the station and then
refraining from changing the position of the UHF tuning control. Thus, the UHF tuner will remain tuned to the selected
station and when the VHF tuner is switched to the UHF position, the UHF station will automatically be received. This
is quite feasible since it should be unnecessary to change
the fine tuner setting during normal VHF station reception.
NOTES:
Should the condition occur in which all channel numbers
have been removed from the index system, the tuner will
run continuously when the INSTA-MATIC station -selector -
button is pressed. To stop tuner motor, turn set "off" with
ON -OFF pushbutton or remove the power plug, then index
any one channel.
To insure proper reception on each channel, regardless of
the fine tuning adjustment of the previous channel, the fine
tuner is automatically re -set to its nominal (center) position each time a new channel number is selected. The tuner
local oscillator is provided with individual channel adjustment screws that allow precision -setting of each channel
during the initial installation...and eliminates the necessity
of readjusting the fine tuning control from channel to chan-
SERVICE NOTES
CAUTION: Line voltage (120 volts) appears throughout
nel.
intercabling as well as at pins of the male and female
connectors. Do not permit power application unless all connections are complete.
When servicing "hot" chassis, always use an isolation
transformer (not autoformer or other non -isolating type) in
the power line.
the
"HAIR PIN" RESET
SPRING
CORRUGATED
SEMI
CIRCULAR
Before returning receiver to set owner, make certain
no shock hazard exists on any metal parts that can be contactea by the set owner. When making such shock hazard
tests, make sure all sections of receiver are operating
(motor, remote control unit, etc.).
DETENT
WASHER
DRIVE PLATE
RUBBER DRIVE
WHEEL
WARNING: IF TUNER IS SWITCHED FROM CHANNEL
OR ROCKED TO EXTENT OF OPENING CAM SWITCH,
TUNER MOTOR WILL BEGIN OPERATION.
TV receiver cannot be supplied with line power (turned
"on") unless remote control is plugged in, or a jumper wire
placed across pins #7 & 118 of receptacle S-3. (Warning:
Observe all "hot chassis" and "power" precautions.)
SIX -322._
FIGURE 11.
76
TUNER OSCILLATOR CHANNEL ADJUSTMENTS.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis WTS-553, Automatic Tuner Information, Continued
CAM SWITCH
iINDEX WHEEL
VHF TUNER
PROJECTION LAMP
DRIAL
IVESCALE
SHAFT
P7
03 PINS)
MOUNTED- 'f, 14 A SnECZ E LICE
BRIGHTNESS
S?
FINE TUNING
MOTOR
P6
(9 PINS)
VERTICAL HOLD
0
TRANSMITTER.
VOLUME CONT
HOLDER
a
ION BACK COVE R I
ON -OFF SWITCH
CONTRAST CONT
SHAFT
SWITCH
crREMOTE CONT
RECEIVER
ON -OFF SW
P
TUNER OUTPUT
CABLE
P2
15 FINE
-i
SOUND
SWITCH
PS
SPEAKER
(NOT ON ALL
II
Pu
III PINS)
11111
I
fi S5
P8
52
PROJECTION
LAMP
TV CHASSIS
TRANSFORMER
(NOT ON Al I MODELS)
MICAOPHONE-SMICROPHONE
PLUG
REMOTE CONTROL RECEIVER
FIGURE 12.
INTERCABLING & PLUG DESIGNATION DETAIL.
Disconnect all plugs between the remote control receiver and the TV chassis. Remove screws holding remote control receiver to cabinet (remove from underneath cabinet).
Position remote receiver so that microphone cable at front
2.
TO REMOVE POWER FROM REMOTE CONTROL CHASSIS
The on -off button on the remote control transmitter unit
removes power from the television chassis. however, this
button does not remove power from the remote control chassis. Power to the remote control chassis is removed by de-
unit may be disconnected. Microphone must remain
seated in control bracket due to a retainer on inside of
of
bracket. To remove or replace microphone, control bracket
must be removed (see step 4).
pressing the transmitter holder switch inside the holder
(back cover). It is recommended that the transmitter be
returned to the transmitter holder whenever it is not in use,
in order to conserve power. In the event the transmitter is
not available, place an object of similar weight and sine into
the transmitter holder or disconnect the plug and socket
connection between the transmitter holder and the remote
control chassis.
3,
After remote control receiver chassis is out of cabinet,
remove all plugs and leads between the control panel and the
TV chassis. Remove the TV chassis end the picture tube
as a unit by removing the four screws from underneath the
cabinet.
The complete control bracket containing the tuner and
all controls may now be removed as an assembly by following the instructions outlined on page 6 for "Removing the
VHF and/or the UHF tuner". One additional screw must be
removed at the rear of the tuner/control bracket which secures the bracket to the left-hand side of the cabinet.
4.
TO RESTORE SOUND WHEN RECEIVER IS IN MUTE POSITION
An auxiliary sound switch is located on the back cover
of the TV receiver. The purpose of this switch, which is
mounted to the transmitter holder, is to restore sound to
normal in the event sound should lock in in the mute position. Push switch to MANUAL position to restore sound to
normal.
MOTOR REMOVAL
Although it is impossible to remove the VHF tuner from
the cabinet without removing the entire control bracket assembly. to which the tuner is mounted due to the fact that the
channel indicator dial is inaccessible on the inner side of the
REMOVING TUNER -MOTOR ASSEMBLY AS A UNIT
Remove cabinet back cover: note connections of wires
and plugs running to the manual/mute switch and to the
switch located inside the remote control transmitter holster.
Tuner leads must be unplugged from the receptacles on the
back cover.
1.
control bracket...it is possible to remove the motor from
the rear of the tuner without the necessity of removing the
tuner.
77
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ON -0,,
MOTOROLA Chassis WTS-553, Automatic Tuner Information, Continued
we reN
(.4
CA.?
SreireAe
GAM
"14",;;11'
AV
S9
tzt
444,,,47
SLR
OUL. Vd4O4.)
K
ZQ
Ito,
raw
1,
r.r.a.
-0 ,19
si
,
BRIGNroveSS
ryor0,t
RFC
/44
'Vele
O
4,5,41"/C44
fe4
SO< 0
poor $4 0.4re oe
Dort,
40..v4r5c
GA'
con,r 4.4.s. 7-
SC
Rfce.r
64u
,A.¢ v,e,r)
Ba
LAW
57
,0
ROC 5-/,-
P. 4,
(4.5 ,,e-.4.4)
sa
CAM
mro-Kal
40/4r4nrr
SRN -poor
hl
4
Sp.470-0
iknamc
theorr cooerein acre, CS
ON-offR1t4/
1
6, 05C
V0/0
F0,0 4C /AI
e4.44,6E1
(04, 17; NS
CRO,v0
IWO, /A/
F.., 405,0
44,0
ox
con,TA:(0- Pc v.
0.#
4
FIGURE 13.
0 0 007
C04/100tS ReCeP,
(-146
C
CABLING CONNECTIONS
,i4/)
(A21K106 & A21T60).
AuuS m. re
RELAy
MOTOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE
Eau SR.o
1. Remove the two cam switch shield mounting screws at
the rear of the index wheel.
Z. Remove the index wheel setscrew located inside the shaft
opening and remove the index wheel.
Z. Position index wheel Son shaft so that its number at the
cam switch corresponds to the channel number tuned in.
3. Remove the rear bracket extending out from the gear
motor assembly by removing the four screws.
3.
With the motor assembly removed from the receiver
1.
Switch tuner to a local channel.
Replace setscrew inside the shaft opening and tighten.
a. See Cam Actuating Switch section for adjustment.
Remove the three screws projecting through the metal
bracket and securing the gear motor. Sufficient room should
now be available to disengage the driving member of the
motor from the rear clutch of the tuner shaft.
4.
5.
P7
PS"
b. Refer to Calibration section..
INDEX CAM ACTUATING SWITCH
(Replacement or Adjustment)
When replacing this switch, adjustment will be necessary before tightening mounting screws.
and placed in a convenient position, remove the wires from
the original motor and attach them to the replacement motor.
To Replace Switch
INDEX WHEEL REMOVAL
Remove the two cam switch shield mounting screws at
the rear of the index wheel.
2.
Remove the index wheel setscrew located inside the shaft
opening and remove the index wheel.
3.
1.
Remove the back cover.
Z.
3.
Remove the two cam switch shield screws
Remove two switch mounting =ream and switch.
4.
Replace switch
Adjust cam switch so it breaks contact on the side of
the cam moving into the switch. When set to the desired
position, the cam should stop with the contact arm riding
on the top of the cam; tuner should be solidly in its detent
position at completion of operation. Check operation of
tuner on all indexed channels until adjustment is satisfac-
INDEX WHEEL REPLACEMENT
Note that the index wheel can be replaced on the shaft in
two positions, one of which will be mis-rotated 180 degrees
from the correct position.
1. Set tuner to channel selected in step #1 of "Index Wheel
Removal".
tory.
78
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA
MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
Model
Type
21K97B
YZ1K97B
21K97M
Y21K97M
21K99B
Y21K99B
21K99M
Y21K99M
21T57BG
Y21T57BG
Z1T57CH
Y21T57CH
21T57MG
Y21T57MG
Console
Console
Console
Console
Console
Console
Console
Cods°le
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
CHASSIS TS -551 and WTS-551
VHF
TV
UHF
Chassis
Tuner
WTS-551
WTS-551Y
WTS-551
WTS-551Y
WTT-104
TS -551
TS -551Y
TS -551
TS -551Y
TS -551
TS -551Y
TS -551
TS -551Y
TS -551
TS -551Y
Tuner
A list of models using these chassis is
at left. Schematic diagram is printed on
pages 80-81 and 82. Much of the service
material for these sets is the same as for
TS -553 described in the preceding section
beginning with page 67. The tuner diagram
on page 82 is applicable to TS -551, while
Chassis WTS-551 uses WTT-104 type.
-.
WTT- 104Y VTT-89
WTT -104
-
WTT-I04Y
VTT-104
VTT-104Y
VTT-104
VTT-104Y
VTT-104
VTT-104Y
VTT-104
VTT-104Y
VTT-104
VTT-89
VTT-89
VTT-89
VTT-89
VTT-89
ADDENDA TO MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
VTT- 104Y VTT-89
Type
TV Chassis
VHF Tuner
UHF Tuner
Consolette
Consolette
Console
Console
Console
Console
Console
Console
Console
Console
Console
Console
Table
Table
Table
Table
MTS-551
MTS-551
MTS-551
MTS-551
MTS-551
VTS-551
VTS-551
VTS-551
VTS-551
VTS-551
VTS-551
VTS-551
MTS-551
MTS-551
MTS-551Y
MTS-551
CMTT-102
CMTT-102
CMTT-102
CMTT- 102
CMTT-IO2
VCMTT-102
VCMTT-102
VCMTT-102
VCMTT-102
VCMTT-102
VCMTT-102
VCMTT-102
CMTT-102
CMTT-102
CMTT-102Y
CMTT-102
-
21T62M
Table
MTS-551
CMTT-102
21T63B
21T63M
21T63W
Table
Table
Table
VTS-551
VTS-551
VTS-551
VCMTT-102
Model
ADDENDA TO MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
Model
Chassis
Type
Console
Console
Y21K99M
Console
Console
Y21K115BA
Console
Y21K115MA
Y21K115WA
Console
Y2IK11613A
Console
YZ1K116MA
Console
YZ1K116MCA Console
Y21K116WA Console
Table
21T57M0
Table
Y21T62MA
Table
Y21T63BA
Table
Y21T63MA
Table
Y21T63WA
Table
211(99W
Y21K99B
UHF
Tuner
TS -551
TS -551Y
TS -551Y
WTS-551Y
WTS-551Y
WTS-551Y
WTS-551Y
WTS-551Y
WTS-551Y
WTS-551Y
TS -551
TS -551
TS -551Y
WTS-551Y
WTS-551Y
WTS-551Y
Tuner
VTT-I04
VTT-104Y VTT-89
VTT-104Y
WTT-104Y
WTT-104Y
WTT-104Y
WTT-104Y
WTT-104Y
WTT-104Y
WTT-104Y
VTT-104
VTT-104
VTT-104Y
WTT-104Y
WTT-104Y
WTT-104Y
VTT-89
VTT-89
VTT-89
VTT-89
VTT-89
VTT-89
VTT-89
VTT-89
2 IK115W
ZIK116B
21K116M
21K116MC
211(116W
21T57BGD
21T57CHD
1'21T57CHD
21T57MGD
VTT-89
VTT-89
VTT-89
VTT-89
TV
Description
Model
Z1C9B
Y21C9B
21C9M
Y21C9M
VHF
TV
21C9BD
21C9MD
21K99BD
21K99MD
21K99WD
21K115B
21K115M
Chassis
TUNER
TUNER OUTPUT
RECEPT
RECEPT
1101
L102
V3
3BZ6
T101 TP
-
-
-
-
VTT-111
-
-
VCMTT102
VCMTT-10Z
MTS-551...Same as the TS -551 chassis except that the
new, smaller type tuner,. CMTT-102 is used.
VTS-551....Same as the WTS-551 chassis except that the
new, smaller type tuner, VCMTT-102 is used.
Consolette, blonde oak: masonite
Consolette, blonde oak: masonite
Consolette, mahogany: masonite
Consolette, mahogany: masonite
TS -551
TS -551Y
TS -551
TS -551Y
L105
1ST IF
-
T102 3RD IP
V4
3BZ6
TP
V5
AUDIO TP
ON SOME MODELS)
T103
3BZ6
V8 VIDEO
L301
E101 5U8 DET TP
R802
TUBE
SENTRY
306
V10
8BQ5
ON OFF
&VOL
T302
AUDIO
OUTPUT
V12
21E
VERT
'HOLD
13
12AF3
BRIGHT
L302
1103
V9
3 DT6
R801
T301
E803
E802
AC
INTERLOCK
V6
R803
V15
V7
114111KAS1 L802 BEB8 5AQ5 E80
V11
G7 E501 6CG7 L501
79
RECEPT
HI -VOLTAGE
T501
TRANS
CHASSIS TS -551A-00 PARTS LOCATION (TOP)
V14
3A3
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -551 and WTS-551 Schematic Diagram, Continued
VIDEO IF
03
3826
1ST VIDEO IF
V4
V5
31326
3BZ6
3RD VIDEO IF
2ND VIDEO IF
103 C
mor v
TIC
3RD VIDEO IF
TEST RECEPT
@
T101
T102
III
1F
()
.,4
.001
U
0
Op
1ST IF SCRE N
N
TEST P0111,......
TEST
C106
.001
RECEPT.I
b.0
z
0
TO TEST RECEPT
ca.
OO
ED
A
sg
S.
0
U
-SYNC
V6B
0
V7B
R506 4.7M
I/2-6007
1/2-8E88
NOISE INVERTER
R505 1500
CLIPPER
-MAP-
I
19V PP
U
3 E501
HA
C
50V PP
.0F5-33
cl)
H
I
R401
38
NOISE
0
GATE
03
R403 1M
(103
4M
2
0
U)
8
0
T
s.
l6
0501 CONN
(LEAD VIER)
HOR I Z AFC
cd
HORIZ OSC
SERVICE TEST
IF AGC
RECEPT
10V PP
Tn
0)
12V PP
120V PP
60V PP
V
B+'
+2b5
POWER SUPPLY
0
VIO
8805
V12
12096
V13
126F3
2
38
5
2
4
4
7
5
3
V5
ve
3826
SUS
V4
V3
3R26
4
3
'
4
I
F IL TP
F IL TP
L801
3
4
V15
V16
WS
CRT
V6
ERRS
5
5
4
4
3
1
VII
V7
6C57
12
5
4
SE/T6
SCGT
4
4
5
VI
V2
V9
()
SUB
1803
5
3
4
5
4
§
0801
.001
121
6
R801 35 -
R802
(801
1.6 AMP
C8013 140 MF
1802
R803 7.5
/VW
111
' 000
(804
ON -OFF SWITCH/co,
ION VOL CORD VC!
E802
T
8804 15K
166v
230
SLO-BLO
C809A
1150 MF
C8098
I00 MF
4'
C809C
10 MF
/
!
\
\
5V PP MAXIMUM
V
AM
1200 AC ONLY D
R805 2.2M
/777
BEZEL
80
190V
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Schematic Diagram TELEVISION CHASSIS TS & WTS-551A-00 SERIES
L108
«M,1
130,Vi PP
1110
4.51IC TRAP
----21107
R205 10K
R204 1K
V6A
1/2-8EB8
VIDEO AMP
VIDEO DET
TEST RECEPT
C2031/.01
IC
LIII
71
CI24
70V PP
27
5.6K
V
RI22
Fs-
CONT
30K
.2
F,
C2011/1
K
1
g
no
1201
5.5V PP
V16
21CBP4A
PICTURE TUBE
WA
1/2 -6C G7
700V PP
10
A GC
RII5 IM
we
L
8201
100K
BRIGHT
C 127x_
I2
FOCUS STRAP
11300
Connect from pin 1 to 6 or 10,
whichever gives best overall
focus.
3
12.5AV
I
NMI
-
INN IN=
HORIZ SWEEP 8. H V -
VII
OR IZ OSC
12006
HOR IZ OUTPUT
1501
12AF3
DAMPER
R521 8.2
C509
2
2.7K6 PP
C512 0.005
16I0
390
YOKE
V14
3A3/144A01
Hy RECT
V13
V12
6C G7
R522 27K
R516 470
AAA.
21
-IIV 1
L701
a
3
11
E502
120
170V PP
HORIZ
I
5
I
6
DEFL YOKE
420 TOTAL
R510
HORIZ HOLD
01
120
70K
T
-t-
6.mLit
20
VERT SWEEP
V813
R603
V15
1/2-508
5A05
VERT OSC
VERT OUT
C6051r5
22K
R613
22K
C610) 02
ONN
I.3KV PP
V
0601 68K
Mat
R602 I8K
604
I
C609
115v
2
7
8607 4M
0605
VERT HOLD
T601
.02
04
R616
VERT SIZE
VERT LIN
VERT
DEFL YOKE
am
on TCRAL
56
7.=.2
150V PP
1
150V PP
FOR NOTES
SEE PAGE 82
V
V
0
81
0
0
1301
0
03021,47
T501 CONN
I.
0
25
o
3:
I
RECEPT
AUDIO TEST
VBA
6
I
I
4
e -r
T4
I
R302 18K
Mir
10 W
C306A
3
211Z OUIL
1301
(SOT VIEW)
I
s
5
15K
We
U5
8
18
1
4
wrx
oOf 7 41.LT.
-
.01
s
r
oC)
0
0
0C)E,
z:).
'v.--
((ONLY
s
fi eiY f I
TI
I
2
TUNING
F INE
CIA
160V
-113
L9
TEE
7
9
138
220V
10
000
AUDIO OUTPUT
8805
VIO
COot-*
001
C20
1-
C16 (470
oVOclir _ _ 2
600E-
IM
9309
12
30 MF
C306C
T302
E302
3.20
)
I
El+Z(.5.
2
-<)(1
§.r7:41!_4(
R 1/10K
C22
col
co
co
co
Ott
O
1
51
CD
z
O
C)
1-
0+2.t.s
A
3.
2.
1.
Taken with strong signal; contrast control at maximum;
all other controls in normal operating position.
oscilloscope.
Oscilloscope synced near sweep rate indicated.
Taken from point indicated to chassis with a wile -band
WAVEFORM MEASUREMENTS
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -551, WTS-5511Balance of circuit, continued
I
TO oe) -
Via O 00.5f B.
0
O
V2
5U3
M KER.() Sr
-n TO -4V
TUNER CONN
C313
C312)(
forr,g
cc
2
1302
lYVV
R6 220
MIXER
1101 ULCERS
L302 CONN
(SOT VIEW)
/
0-
2
5
SOUND,
3016
AUDIO DETECTOR
Taken from point indicated to chassis with a VTVM. I 10%.
Line voltage maintained at 120V AC.
3. Voltages Indicated by an asterisk will vary with associated
control settings.
4. Taken with contrast control at minimum and all other
controls in normal operating position with no signal input.
5. Tuner on channel 13 or channel of least noise with antenna
terminals shorted.
2.
1.
I
T301 CONN
2
3
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS
05V
ssy
NOTES:
1/2-508
AUDIO IF
-41-411
TUNER
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
MOTOROLA
TV
CHASSIS TS -556 and TS -556Y
Type
21T64B
Y21T64B
21T64M
Y21T64M
Table
Table
Table
Table
(Material on pages 83 through 88)
neck. Use the following procedure:
horizontal plane, proceed as follows:
tion.
Separate the arms of the centering device to center the
picture vertically.
2.
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust horizontal centering by rotating the magnetic
No special adjustment is needed for the horizontal oscillator coil (L-501) as the coil is used for horizontal hold
lock -in purposes. Merely set for most stable horizontal
centering device, as a unit, one way or the other. Readjust
vertical centering by slightly rotating the relative position
of the arms.
SENTRY
TUNER
OUTPUT 1101 L102
sync conditions.
R301 (VOLUME - ON -OFF)
TUNER
R801
-
VTT-111
To adjust theyoke, compress the ends of the yoke wedge
clamp and move clamp and rubber retainer away from deflection yoke. Position yoke as far forward as possible and
rotate until picture is straight. When satisfactory, replace
retainer and clamp so yoke cannot be moved in any direc-
Starting with the magnetic centering device arms to
(for minimum field strength) and positioned in the
R802
TUBE
VTT-111
If the deflection yoke is not correctly positioned, the
picture will be tilted. If the deflection yoke is not tight
against the flare of the picture tube, the picture may be defocused, have non-linear distortions or neck shadow.
Picture centering is accomplished magnetically by
means of the centering device located on the picture tube
3.
UHF Tuner
LCMTT-102
LCMTT-102Y
LCMTT-102
LCMTT-102Y
TS -556
TS -556Y
TS -556
TS -556Y
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
PICTURE CENTERING
1.
Chassis VHF Tuner
Model
1ST IF
3RD IF
1101
RECEPT RECEPT L SCREEN TP
GRID TP
L
VIDEO
V6
T301
DET-TP 6AU8
V7
1302
3D16
29
V8
8f3Q5
R309
V12
12DQ6A
R203
TS -556A-00
CHASSIS
R604
PARTS LOCATIONS (TOP)
V3
3BZ6A
1ST IF
SCREEN
RECEPT
E803
AC
INTERLOCK
V5
V14
E804 3BZ6 R803 C123 1102 1601 R121 38Z6
VIO
V9
5AQ5 L802 1103 6CN7 3BU8
Vii
DEFL
5EA8
YOKE
V15
V13
OR 5U8 RECEPT 1501 12AF3 3A3
Jag LOCATIONS & SERIES FILAMENT WIRING
---7
T/17
PICTURE TUBE
CENTERING DEVICE
TUNER OUTPUT RECEPT
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A
CIRCUIT GUARD
B+ or power line overload. Its
prime purpose is to act as a 1.6
amp overloading fuse. In event of
an overload, the Circuit Guard
will automatically turn the re-
ceiver "OFF", thereby removing
any possibility of damage to the
chassis.
TEST RECEPTACLES:
IF SCREEN
IF
CONTRAST-
dIVM/
VERT HOLD
.3RD IF GRID
OUTPUT
TONE
LIGHT LEAD
V15s
®.SERVICE
14
VERT
FOCUS ADJUST.
NEATER
(0 VOLT
SELENIUM RECTIFIERS
FOCUS
OUTPUT
Immo,
*48K122419 OR EQUIV
350 MA
ANODE
Tag
GUARD
FOCUS ADS
STRAP
0.--)GRED
---
HEAVY LEAD
ON -OFF SW
IIST
VIDEO DET
Power may again be restored
should then be checked for shorts
or other sources of trouble.
LEADS
3RD VIDE
IF
J BRIGHTNESS
VHF MODELS ONLY
IN
by momentarily depressing the
red (Circuit Guard) button toward
the chassis and then releasing
button. If depressing the Circuit
Guard does not restore the set to
normal operation, the receiver
SPAR
2ND VIDEO
*66146412
The Circuit Guard is a pro-
tective device intended to prevent
damage to the receiver in event of
G-INI
#48614148
/VT\lat)OT
V5
4
2000 COLD
NO2
(55O -VOLTS)
HV
V10
\RECT.;
HORI2 PHASE
OET`l VERT OSC
iF NOTOROLA PART NO
'KEYING POSITION..
IF trjj,-0,-N.C4
SE
o
VPRT
UN
NORIZ
TUBE
TUBE STANDARD MOTOROLA
NOLO
LIST
TUBE STANDARD MOTOROLA
TUBE STANDARD MOTOROLA
VI
5BK7A
V7
3DT6
V2
5EU8
177A02
269A01
NUMBER
148A01
V8
8605
247A0I
V12
V13
TEMPORARILY CONNECT STRAP
V3
31326A
146A03
V9
145A01
VI4
BETWEEN PINS 6 AND ID, THEN
V4
146A01
V10
146A01
V11
SEAS or
273A01
270A0I
V15
V5
3BZ6
3BZ6
3BU8
6CN7
V6
6AU8
153 A01
518
150A01
vol
ADJUSTMENT OF SHUNTING STRAP
LOCATED ON PICTURE TUBE BASE
PROVIDES OPTIMUM
FOCUSING.
RAND 1. LOCATE STRAP PERMANENTLY IN POSITION PRODUCING
BEST OVERALL FOCUS.
REF
83
TYPE
NUMBER
REF
TYPE
1§e
REF
V16
TYPE
NUMBER
12DQ6A
162A02
264A02
101A04
3A3
144A01
21C BP4A 196T105A01
2AF4A
142A01
12AF3
5AQ5
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -556 and TS -556Y Alignment Information, Continued
41.25
47.25
MC
3V P -PT -
41.25
47.25
41.25
47.8
MC
MC
MC
MC
C
f
APPROX
2-5V P P
C
44 MC
IOTA
1
42.25 MC T
MARKER
45.75
41.25
MAX
MARKER
2-5V P -P
I P 20% MAX
IOTA DIP
45.75 MC
MLA
MC_
t,
10-15N
10-15%
RANGE
SEEP 13
RANGE
CURVE 3
CURVE MUST BE
SYMMETRICAL
STEP II
CURVE 4
CURVE I
LIO1A
11018
1711.A
5E118
1ST IF GRID COIL CORE IS
MIXER
O5C
STEP IX
FARTHEST FROM CHASSIS
TUNER
O
POWER
RE CEPT
SIGNAL° L102
RECE PT
58 7A
RF AMP
VIDEO
3RD IF
,.JJ GRID TP
TP
3826
BZ6A
TUNER
3826
2ND IF
1ST IF
TIO2
47. RAP25MC
T
3RD IF
I DEO IF AM
OLETWI
AUD101
(...1)
CAT8
2ND If
DOT COIL
INTERSTAGE
& AUDIO IF
I
12006A
T301
I
HORIZ
OUTPUT
L301
AUDIO
©TAKE OFF
VHF TUNER
COIL
/181--\.18
DEFL
AGC & NOISE
YOKE
N JNly../
L108
RECEPT
4.5 MC
SWEEP & MARKER
GENERATOR
TRAP
STEP 41. 2
4 & 5
WI TO 005 MF
O
HIGH
HORIZ PHASE
5005
VERT
DOT & VERT OSC
VOLTAGE
5U8/5EA8
CAGE
HORIZ
OSC
OUT
44"
SCOPE
SERVICE TEST
RECEPTACLE
NC
RP
HORIZ AFC
TEST POINT
FIGURE 6.
CROON
4
VIDEO IF & SOUND ALIGNMENT DETAIL
NORMALIZING
RESISTOR
All coil slug tuning positions, in relation to chassis, are
given in the procedure chart and in the separate detail of
5.
ALIGNMENT
e 7. selector on channel #13 and connect a 1500
F
6.channel
Setigur
ohm 50W voltage normalizing resistor from B+ to chassis
(use pins 15 (B+) and #3 (ground) of the SERVICE TEST
VIDEO IF & SOUND ALIGNMENT
RECEPTACLE.
PRE -ALIGNMENT INSTRUCTIONS
7.
Set the contrast control at minimum (extreme counter-
clockwise position).
Before alignment of the video IF section is attempted, it
is advisable to thoroughly check the system. If alignment
is started on an IF section in which a faulty component
8.
Short across tuner input terminals.
Maintain 2 to 5 volts peak -to -peak at the diode load (Det
TP) except when specific values are given in the procedure
chart.
10. Refer to Video IF & Sound Alignment Detail for component and test point locations (Figure 6).
9.
exists, successful alignment will probably be impossible
and the entire procedure will have to be repeated when the
real cause of the trouble is corrected. Preliminary tests
of the system should include voltage and resistance measurements, routine checks for bad soldering connections,
and visual inspection of the circuits for overheated components as well as for obvious wiring defects.
1ST IF
GRID
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT
sx
Pre -Alignment Steps
m'
Maintain line voltage at 120 with variac.
Remove the deflection yoke plug to eliminate RF interference radiation.
1.
41.3
2.
Disable oscillator by shorting point "L" located near
oscillator tube V-2, to chassis, See Figure 6.
4. Apply the negative lead of a 4.5 volt bias supply to
pin y1 ( IF AGC) of the SERVICE TEST RECEPTACLE and
the positive lead to pin 13 (chassis ground).
pri
TRAP
3.
-..21117MITal
=EMIL
1ST IF GRID
41.3 TRAP
47.3 TRAP
FIGURE 7.
1ST a 2ND IF TRANS
3RD IF TRANS
COIL CORE POSITIONS
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
SWEEP GEN
STEP AND MARKER
1.
To 3rd IF grid test
recept thru a .001
mmf capacitor. Set
sweep approx. to
44 Mc: markers
as required
IN
Scope thru a 47K ohm
resistor to Video Det
test recept
ADJUST
Both slugs of 3rd IF
coil (T-103)
84
ADJUST FOR AND/OR REMARKS
Equal peaks and 45.75 Mc marker
as shown on curve fl.
Note: Slug at crystal end can be reached
by inserting tool through unobstructed slug.
Tune both slugs near the ends of their respective coils. See detail for slug position
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -556 and TS -556Y Alignment Information, Continued
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE (CONT'D
SWEEP GEN
AND MARKER
STEP
INDICATOR
To mixer TP thru
.001 mf capacitor.
(Terminal adjacent
to mixer. See Figure 6).
Set sweep to approx.
2.
ADJUST FOR AND/OR REMARKS
ADJUST
Scope connection
same as step # 1
44 Mc.
a.
Set marker to
a. 47.25 Mc trap
(L-102)
47.25 Mc
b.
Set marker to
(L -101B)
Generator connection
3.
41.25 Mc trap
b.
41.25 Mc
a. Mixer trans,
located on
Scope to "1st IF
same as step #2, except set output for
screen test recept
or test point." Pin
3V P -P on scope
in curve #3, step #3 of Figure 6,. The
pri affects the center peak and the sec affects the two outside peaks.
1st IF grid
If a suck -out (trap effect) occurs, de tune 1st IF transformer (T -101).
slug located
away from
chassis
Tune both coil slugs at end of coil away
from chassis.
1st IF trans (T-101)
Proper 42.25 Mc marker placement
(tune slug at end of coil toward chassis)
#6 of tube
5.
Generator connection
same as step NZ. Reset for 2-5V P -P on
scope.
Scope thru a 47K ohm
Same as step #4.
Same as step #4.
resistor to Video Det
test recept
Tune both T-2 & L -101A for curve shown
tuner (T-2)
b.
4.
Minimum response (tune slug at end
of coil away from chassis)
b. Minimum response (tune slug at end
of coil toward chassis)
See curve #2 for above responses.
a.
coil (L -101A)
2nd IF trans (T-102) Proper 45.75 Mc marker placement
(tune slug at end of coil toward chassis)
See curve #4 of Figure 6.
If a tilt occurs, readjust the mixer pri
coil (T-2 on tuner) and if necessary
touch -up the 1st and 2nd IF trans
(T-101 & T-102) for response shown
in curve #4.
use a very weak signal when aligning the driver and the detector input coils. Actually, the signal should be well down
into the noise level for proper tuning action.
SOUND ALIGNMENT (Station Signal Method)
The sound system used in the TS -556 receiver consists
of an audio IF amplifier stage, a quadrature grid detector
and an output stage. Since this type of sound system is extremely sensitive, relatively small input signal voltage will
cause grid current to flow in both the IF amplifier and the
detector stages. Grid current through the tuned coils will
load them down making the adjustment extremely broad and
Preliminary Steps
Tune in a strong TV station.
Adjust all controls for normal picture and sound.
Refer to Video IF & Mixer Alignment Detail for coil and
test point locations (Figure 6).
1.
2.
3.
alignment impossible. For this reason, it is necessary to
SOUND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
STEP
STATION
1.
Strong signal
INDICATOR
VTVM to jct of R-306
(680K) and C-308 (.01)
located on L-302 (under
REMARKS
ADJUST
L-302
(quad coil)
chassis).
Listening test
2.
3.
Weak signal*
4.
11
Maximum deflection (coarse adj.). Of two possible
maximum tuning points, use that giving the largest
voltage reading.**
Maximum sound with minimum distortion (fine adj.).
11
T-301 (inter stage)
Maximum sound with minimum distortion (maintain hiss
L -30I
(take -off)
Maximum sound with minimum distortion.
level). **
If sound is not clear at this point, repeat the above procedure as necessary.
*The signal must be weakened considerably either by disconnecting one side of the antenna lead, or connecting
low value resistors across the antenna terminals until a pronounced hiss appears in the sound. The hiss level
must be maintained for proper alignment.
**The purpose of the top pre-set core is to enable the adjustable core to make the tuning range required while
reducing the physical length. If the pre-set core should be misadjusted by previous service work, merely
re -set near top end of coil and tune for maximum.
4.5 MC TRAP ADJUSTMENT
1.
3. ADJUST... sound trap (L-108) to find the two points of
adjustment at which the sound beat is just noticeable on the
picture tube screen. Rotate the core toward center of the
two points. Use minimum amount of inductance (core out
of coil) that will result in no apparent beat interference.
Carefully tune receiver to local station and advance con-
trast control.
Adjust local oscillator (with fine tuning control) to bring
4.5 Mc interference strongly into the picture.
2.
85
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
r
El
3,
E2
L4
E5
DJ
CHAN 13
C6
0004
CHAN 13
E6
I pRi ADJ
2-6
3.4
1.
5BK7A
RF AMP
U
cd
U
RAM 11
E
HMI 10
TTEST°POINT
1
b.0
td
)NL
oeVz
6A DJ
*L6
' L7
-4-.....----. Le
1(
t"7.--.72,2 IN
3 -V.' TUNERS
-41Witietril-NIFAD J
UHF ONLY
T.,
U WE
LII
fey
7
7
CHAN 6
L15
120
PAL25
118
CHAN 4
E8
41
L30
190V
CHAN 2
1K
V2
5EU8
MIX-OSC
CHAN 3
L21
CHA0 R
OSC
I -4V
15
(.E01
- IF INPUT
CHANNEL SELECTOR SHORN
.ViAr
R9 10K
V3
V4
3BZEA
1ST VIDEO IF
3BZ6
2ND VIDEO IF
wv
5
IF BANDPASS
L101
UHF ONLY
TUNER
IN CHANNEL TOO POSITION
Of 255V
II/Ne
Cl)
.001
CC
.vo
44
R8 2.2K
vHF
ONLY
1I
La
ONLY
.0
ORF AGC
13
ALJ
ClI "L2
I
SOLO
) (La:
111.2297870-4-°'-'
00
4
3
CNA
-11
L26P
-
CHAN 5
Ks
It
;
AD
L19
LIE o
01)111i...905
C21°5
CHAN
HAM -
L13 0
114 0
T
1
ciir -*-1-00041
.
1300
°-
;L9
--F.
I
CHAN 8
LI2
CHAN .4
ECMTT-102E
TUNER
>
CHAN 9
UHF
OVTPUT
0
2-6
CHAN 12
VI
TIDIER
C7
P
ANT ADJ
(3,9
C9
CHAN 13
3RD IF
250V
5
7101
180
TP
1102
7
126v
CC
110
50
RI
2.2M
RF AGC
13+ 255V
V1OA
TEST
RECEPT
E501
1301 CONN
PI12A S6EC DN 1
R401 8.2M
AAAI
R403 I8K
mot
140
20
C
CY
2400
C402
220.%
R404 56K
'
12402 470K
504 4.7M
Tif7
100
r1T11950 SIGDC NA
7
TRH
_I
.19
4.2V
00
9V PP
H
(NOISE INVERTER)
PART NO. 51K751096
[502
CC
.0033
V9B
112 3BU8
SYNC SEP
HOR I2 SWEEP MODULE (TOP VIEW
IS
I
471K
1
(SEE v9A FOR VOLTAGES
ON PINS 1, 2, & 7)
0
150K
VERT SWEEP MODULE (TOP VIEW/
PART NO. 5IK751097
E601
10.5V PP
SYNC
HORIZ
H
4.5V PP
NOTES:
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Taken from point indicated to chassis with a VTVM. +10%.
Line voltage maintained at 120V AC.
Voltages indicated by an asterisk will vary with associated
control settings.
Taken with contrast control at minimum and all other
controls in normal operating position with no signal input.
Tuner on Channel 13 or channel of least noise with
antenna terminals shorted.
VI3
V12
V8
V3
V4
12013 120(960 BOO 3BZ6A 3006
4
7
4
R802
I.
V5
30Z6
V6
HAVE
5
V14
SAO
V16
4
I
3
VI0
6CN7
I
VII
V9
3000 556 r
V7
I
3076
I
4
4
5
5
4
V2
VI
SEIM
5BK7A
5
VI7
2AF4A L8 04
5
I
I
C812
UHF
03 S:
1
20011 COLD
R801 52
sa tow
E804
R803
7.5
C810
35011.0
L802
1105-001.
Bra
E801
ON -OFF
SW
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
I.6AMP
120V AC
CAPACITORS - Unless otherwise specified, values less than
one in 1AF: all others in MMF.
344
1801
I
WAVEFORM MEASUREMENTS
Taken from point indicated to chassis with a wide band oscilloscope.
2. Oscilloscope synced near sweep rate indicated.
3. Taken with strong signal; contrast control at
maximum; all other controls in normal operating
position.
5
E803
350I10
CI0
BC +CIDD
II5OMF I 100MF
_1_ C809
8+ 255V
g i .cog
IsounoN
p ---.40W-- NETWORK
R804 2.2M
1777
.15
POWER SUPPLY
86
CRT MTG
FRAME
CHASSIS
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
AUDIO
4
1
2
4
3
T301 CONN
(901 VIEW)
V6B
1/2 6AU8
AUDIO IF
3
47
2
13
1
4I*
.1.
21
_sm(2.4
V8
85
7
.
1
I
A
Lux T302
IVL
-2.40
6001I 4 TAP
OV
-
--
,
3
AUDIO OUTPUT
3223(.01
110.,
T301
-C."-,
1
1302 CONN
(ROT VIER)
V7
3D16
AUDIO DET
E301
410
CHASSIS TS -556A -00 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
L.
R304 I5K
&I- 255V
5
V5
4
3BZ6
3RD VIDEO IF
5
.1
-u-
OV
CBOT VIEW)
T103
.04".
7
L104
1105
12
\
1/2 6AU8
VIDEO AMP
L108
9.5MC TRAP
VIDEO
Cl
DEPT
1106
1149,
FOCUS STRAP
(SEE FOCUS
,.,
INFO BELOW)
mm
255V RED
R203
L109
BRIGHTNESS
100K
R121
ri-
--
6
V16
17
2ICBP4A
ONTRAS
30K
R120 5.6K
PICTURE
18
II
C118
4.7
5.6
H
cm
V6A
-u-
5.5V PP
I
E101
2
17
.
3
T 03 CONN
r
70V
cc 8
2
1
TUBE
.L201
4,71
vH
1
C115
U Ire
7.c
4
o0
.001TN
R205 10K
C123
C20:11(,,a_
-.0ANe
10 ME_
1.l
11
tl
V9A
112 3 BUB
AGC
70V PP
994
Los
90V
2
.--.
V
100V PP
3
FOCUS STRAP -on pix tube
base; connect from pin 6 to
25 V
I or 10, whichever gives best
overall focus.
VIDEO
7
H
190V
111.7K
1:1
H
32 0
± 30 MF
B+ 35V
9AGC
VII
501
(16
HORIZ OUTPUT
YOKE
V15
3A3
HV RECT
V12
12DQ6A
5U8 OR 5EA8
REACTANCE 8 HORIZ OSC
1701
6
1500
R508
I
HORIZ
SIZE
3
I
4
5K
L501
-_
JR.:
7
HORIZ
OSC &VOLD
255V
8,9
V13
12AF3
DAMPER
2311:
0.9
me
U
c;
1 71211-"--
a
-.3.2KV PPRED
13
DLO
ORG
E502
WEEP a HV
50V HPP
1/2 6-
&I- 255V
cy-
VI OBCN7
C603
.003_1_
-1-8601 68K
.V.M
t
002
VER1LQ.5c_
2.--
4W.t
,_ _0
190V
R602 68K
,,1
1.1:15
'
I
II
I1696 I
VENT. S I ZF
i
4M
ii (I)
I 1=1
I
18K
1(.015 0 tr(
1
I
R609 22K
I
1-:
15K
R61
- 0
T601 RED
REX
mC
-21 5VI
I
2
ANY
12
E
1
I
I
__Jr 1
II
I
R608
VERTICAL SWEEP
VERT LIN
2M
I
II
°II
II
_ .!
_i
87
0
R6I0 150
I
=-
142V PP
2450
1
GI
R604
VERT HOLD
2M
V14
5AQ 5
VERT OUTPUT
AW
I
KI
C604'.02
--
1.2KV PP
SO
117
PP
BI- 255V 8
TEL
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -556 and TS -556Y Service Information, Continued
SERVICING CHASSIS IN CABINET is easy, since entire
RIGHT OUTSIDE
COMER CHANNEL
bottom panel comes off by removal of nine (9) retaining
screws in bottom panel. Voltages and waveforms can be
taken, and all chassis components are accessible. Observe
all electrical safety precautions when wor king on the exposed
chassis. For tuner servicing, remove entire cabinet, as
explained in following steps. (See Figure 3A.)
RIGHT SIDE
CAB IICT PANEL
0- REMOVE
KNOBS
"IT
TYPE
REMOVE THESE
SPEEDNUT
SCREWS AND
TO SECURE
THE THREE
BOTTOM
CABINET
FRONT FRAME
PANEL
SIMILAR SCREWS
ON OPPOSITE SIDE
OF CABINET
REMOVE THESE IWO SCREWS
FIGURE 3C.
tighten into the outside corner channels shownin Figure 3C,
which match the cabinet color. The cabinet -front -frame is
BEZEL
secured to the corner channels by four (4) screws: two in
each corner channel.
(See Figure 3D.)
-31111111114011111111".
PANEL
"1"111'
THESE NOTCHES HOLD THESE SCREWS
HOLD CAB FRA
TOP OF BEZEL IN
FIVE SCREWS
HOLD SIDE
PANEL TO TOP
TO INSIDE COR
POSITION BY
PROJECTIONS ON THE CHANNELS
BEZEL
.-TOP CABINET PANEL LESS BRACKET
FIGURE 3A.
177111
LEFT INSIDE
CLEANING OF PICTURE TUBE SCREEN and safety glass
RIGHT INSIDE
CORNER
is accomplished by removal of front bezel. Screw in upper
CORNER
CHANNEL
right-hand corner of cabinet locks bezel in place: After
locking screw is out and the three (3) retaining screws in
REAR COVER
CHANNEL
MTG BRACKET
LEFT SIDE
bottom panel removed(or the entire bottom panel removed,
if desired), pull off the front knobs; then remove the bezel
by pulling bottom of bezel out from cabinet and dropping
CABINET PANEL LESS BRACKET
bezel downward to disengage top retainers. WARNING:
When bezel is replaced during re -assembly, inside locking
screw must be replaced so untrained personnel cannot gain
access to front of set. (See Figures 3A and 3B.)
REAR COVER
MTG BRACKET
RIGHT SIDE
CABINET PANEL LESS BRACKET
REAR COVER
MTG BRACKET
CABINET
FRONT FRAME
DISASSEMBLY OF CABINET WRAPAROUND is continued
by removing the two (2) screws at upper left-hand corner
which holds tuner bracket to side panel. Speaker leads
should be unplugged at this time. (See Figure 3B.)
THESE TWO SCREWS SECURE TUNER
BRACKET & MUST BE REMOVED TO
RELEASE WRAPAROUND_
CABINET
WRAPAROUND
FIGURE 3D.
BEZEL LOCKING
PICTURE TUBE REPLACEMENT
SCREW
Remove entire cabinet wraparound, as illustrated in
Figures 3A, 3B, and 3C, then disconnect and remove the
deflection yoke, second anode connector, and the picture
1.
tube socket. Loosen the picture tube mounting bolts at upper
right and left-hand corners of the mounting strap, and carefully remove the picture tube.
2.
Working with the new replacement picture tube, place
cloth tape(Motorola Part No. 11M121682), of approximately
the same size, and at the same points as that on the original
picture tube. Stick two pieces of gummed paper (preferably
gummed on both sides), on the new picture tube neck, at the
flare, to keep the yoke from slipping about.
Replace picture tube into correct position: Tighten
mounting bolts; replace the deflection yoke, picture tube
socket, and the second -anode connector. Connect the deflection yoke to the chassis receptacle.
3.
FIGURE 3B,
CABINET WRAPAROUND REMOVAL is completed by pulling
off the side knobs and unscrewing eight(8)screws: three on
each side of the cabinet side panels, and two at bottom of
cabinet -front -frame. (When removing screws, avoid twisting
cabinet, since this will bind screws making removal difficult). The cabinet wraparound can now be slipped up and
off of the complete chassis assembly. (See Figure 3C.)
4. Apply power with service line cord, and check receiver
operation. Adjust the yoke position for proper operation,
and adjust the centering device.
Before returning a serviced receiver (of any type) to the
owner, the service technician must thoroughly test the unit
to be certain that it is completely safe to operate without
danger of electrical shock.
ASSEMBLY OF CABINET WRAPAROUND illustrates how
the cabinet side -panels are held to the cabinet top -panel by
five(5)screws in each inside corner channel: These screws
88
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
OLYMPIC RADIO & TELEVISION
V3
SOUND a VIDEO
AMPLIFIER
VERT.
LINEARITY
V7
V6
SYNC. SEP.
a
MODELS
4.5MC
V5
SOUND AUDIO
2n
0
TRAP OUTPUT
V4
SPEAKER
CONNECT-
SOUND
GT CHASSIS
12CU5
14TT91
14TT92
HORIZ.
FREQ.
O
4.5MC
O
DISC
COIL
V9
17TU93
17TU94
17KU98
HORIZ. AFC
a osc.
a osc.
VI2
12BH7AI
O
HEIGHT
CONTROL
GUU CHASSIS
DAMPER
TUNER
VI
FUNCTION
VHF
2CY5 R.F.
VHF/UHF 5U8 MIXER
17TU93U
17TU94U
17KU98U
Yto
12DQ6A
HORIZ.
DRIVE
GT,GU
GTU,GUU
14TT91U
14TT92U
GU CHASSIS
V8
VERT. OUTPUT
CHASSIS
GTU CHASSIS
}H.V. RECT.
HORIZ. OUTPUT
V2 FUNTION
SATS MIXER
5BK7A R.F.
TUBE
LAYOUT
*USED IN VHF/UHF TUNER ONLY.
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY ADJUSTMENTS
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
For best results height and vertical linearity adjustments should be made on a transmitted test pattern,
although satisfactory results can he obtained from an
If the lines of the raster are not horizontal, loosen
clamp on collar of yoke and rotate the deflection yoke
until the condition is corrected. If neck shadow is
evident or the corners of the raster are dark, move
the deflection yoke forward as far as possible and
retighten the wing screw.
active picture.
Both controls affect height AND linearity of the
picture and must therefore be adjusted simultaneously.
The Vertical Height Control has a tendency to affect
ADJUSTMENT OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR
the bottom of the picture more than the top and the
Vertical Linearity Control has the opposite tendency.
Note: It is advisable that both height and width of the
( 1) Allow set to warm-up for two minutes.
(2) Select channel with suitable picture.
(3) Short sync to ground at junction of C24 and
picture be adjusted to aisize slightly larger than
the mask opening, so that during periods of low line voltage adequate picture size is maintained.
C25.
(4) Short the terminals of the oscillator coil L12.
(5) Vary the Horizontal Hold Control R69 until
the picture is in frequency.
(6) Remove short from oscillator coil L12 and ad-
HORIZONTAL DRIVE (WIDTH) ADJUSTMENT
The horizontal drive trimmer C53 should be
screwed in tight (clockwise) and then backed off
(counter -clockwise) until horizontal drive bars appear. Then turn the trimmer clockwise again, until
just coil until the picture is in frequency.
(7) Remove short from sync.
Caution: It is important that the picture be centered
in the mask properly with the Horizontal
Hold Control in the approximate mid -position, otherwise the set user may attempt to
center the picture by means of the hold control which may then be on "edge" and impulse noise or change of camera will cause
the picture to fall out of synchronization.
Excessive drift of the horizontal oscillator
the drive bars just disappear.
Note: In some sets horizontal drive bars will not appear regardless of horizontal drive trimmer adjustment. In these sets the trimmer should be
set for proper width.
Important: The horizontal oscillator frequency must
be checked for proper range of horizontal
control after every adjustment of the hor-
circuit may be caused by a weak or defective
6CG7 tube. Some manufacturers types of
6CG7 may perform better than others in the
horizontal oscillator socket.
izontal drive C53. Adjustment of C53
usually requires resetting of the horizontal frequency adjustment coil L12.
89
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
OLYMPIC GT, GU (VHF) 8( GTU,GUU(VHF/UHF)CHASSIS
A
V3A
NOTE
1/2-641J13
SOUND IF AMPL
ALL RESISTOR VALUES IN OHMS AND ALL CAPACITOR
VALUES IN MICROFARAOS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
C4I
L301
82.18.1f
IE ADJ.
CHAN.2-I2
,...
T
;
1
-
I(
1
LI
g;
1
I45MC
I
L
oe ape, oc)
INJECPOINT
3301.1115 2.
1
1
r
POINT
OSC. ADJ.
X
110011f,10%
15U14
t-L-1?1
=, :
TEST
CHAN. 13
OSC. ADJ.
is
A
L2
4E
3
R 10;
44.5 MC
4.5 MC
1 R2
RI
22K
10%
I MEG
10%
Dr
C3
6.81./Uf
ANT.
°C)5C
300 D.
VI
V6A
V7A
I/2 -5B8
MIXER
IN ei----
R14
12K
10%
TUNER CL5593(GT),CL5594(GU)
C16 ?
9
C
4.7
-
1
C7
6\\
C14
Too
30
KD 1
Li3iO
uuf
15K
I
T--
c
18
L4
BLADOCK
CFM
T3
1N64
45.5 MC
iN ei
1/2-5B8
2ND IF
T2
43.5 MC
1ST IF
RF
=10% ,._.
10%
10>0K
CULL
m0
R17
330
1000
Pfif
RIO
1000
HAN 13
OSC. ADJ.
CI 5
1000
PUf
-
10%
AGC
T
C13
10% Cl2
10%
1060 122/200V
E OUTPUT
PPf
R34
150K
10%
T
X
A
C24 I
W
0-
C25
-1(
.002/
TUNER CL5582(GTU), CL5583 (GUU)
C27
1/2-5B8
R38
560 K JO% SYNC AMPL
35V
SYNC SEP
FIL
FIL
UHF OSC
ADJ.
V6B
V7B
1/2-588
X
530
150K,10%
01/1000V
O
I, R42
a)
1
3
pufoo;
600V
R45
22K
1
PCI
R43
8.2K
1
C28
I
R35
2.2 MEG
002T
C29
.00-51-
*
L
" FILAMENT WIRING FOR
a GUU CHASSIS
r
GTU
V2
V14
1
VI
5U8
2AF4A 58K7A
+I55V
R68
OFF -ON
SWITCH
0
470K
L
V9A
6CG7
A
R60
75
FUSIBLE
12BH7A
+ C39
300V
I2AX4A
C40
100/300V
12071-
4
8 7
10011Uf
10%
to
CO
V7
V6
co
cs,
tcl
4
4
5
43
R83
20,10W
4
3
54
C36 -11000
'
C38 --I-1000
'
JJJJJ*
11.1Jf
V2
VI
L14
RF CHOKE4o5 R84
20
IOW
- 10%
o
>
1
N
4
45
VI3
R 87
2200 wf
10%
C43
12
I
l000p uf
10%
17,10W
(VHF)
229
620H
=
R40
K
10%
R67,6.8K
C49
10%
.001/600V
IW
OIL
8
"1--046
- .005
Z C45
= 1/200V
#LHOE
I2
C48
39
uuf
10%
SILVER
MICA
C47
FREO
R70
R71
1MEG
10%
68K
R69
IMEG
HOR. HOLD
(47oupf, 10%
i000 V
R62
R65
R64
820
10%
330K
10%, IW
10,5W
6
-C4
-T0004of
10%
C42
5
HOR. OS(
\
R26
560K
Ogp---we
12D06A 5
V9 V5 V4 V3
R6I
82K
10% 7
IMEG
10%
c37 +
150/13 50V
9
R52
LII
SRI
____Jvvv)
V98
6CG7
HOR. AFC
+260V
330K
10%, IW
(UHF)
horizontally will affect the vertical position of the
picture and the tab which extends vertically will affect
the horizontal position of the picture. The two magnetic rings have their maximum effect when they are
farthest apart but, to avoid neck shadow, should never
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
The centering magnets are mounted on the back
cover of the deflection yoke. (See Figure 5.) Each
ring has a small tab and adjustment is accomplished
by rotating these tabs. The tab which extends
be more than 45' apart.
90
10%
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
OLYMPIC GT, GTU, GU, GUU Chassis Schematic Diagram, Continued
V4
3DT6
DISCRIMINATOR
V5
,
C
AUDIO OUTPUT
150V
C8
1009
DISC
COIL
7
CIO
5000
UP+ -
(L3
.U.Uf
R63
150K
10%
680
10%
0I
VOLUME
CONTROL
4.5MC
560K
L8
I2-6AU8
7%
C19
10%
3000/1
soim
2W
SRS
.047/
400V
L6
10-
R3
390
-=
t135V
DISC COIL
V38
V7B- PIN 3
35 V
7875 CPS
IMEG
10%
L
VIDEO
AMPL
-
-
R7
270K
R20
R4
tsTI
1)
---
C5801
5
0
I2CU5/12C5
50090 IJIJJ.
C22
.1/400V
000NR25
-
*CONNECT SPRING JUMPER
FROM PIN 6 TO PIN 1 OR
PIN 6 TO PIN 10 WHICHEVER
GIVES BEST FOCUSING.
VI3
...
KINESCOPE
R3I
)
I I..
10;
R30,
22K
0
R28
I
80V
216,
OUTPUT- VERT INT. NET (2)
BRIGHT- NESS
30CPS 50V
CONTROL
2W
L4
I
I
7875 CPS
1.5 MEG
10%
R77
33K
RI9
I
1
3.3K
2W
9.2 K
10%
I
I
...
V6B-PIN 3
I(
150K
.---..
174WESp44G(GT,u0puuTU))
(2)
5001.11-11
113
DOT --
R49
R66
4.7MEG,IO%
V8A
12-128H7A
VERT OSC 6 ""'''
C32
.0417
C31
LU
7
12
,A/N.
Q
C301
2 400V
1`.
No 0.).-
8
DO5
R47
1
I
474
47K
V138- PIN 2
30 CPS 80V
4.7 MEG,10%
r ir
I
C..,3®1
..1,400V
Qii
V88
V2- I2BH7A
VERT OUTPUT
0
.....
k le
V88 -PIN I
2200 N
30CPS 1000V
0%
2 MEG
VERTICAL
HOLD
R 82
1.5MEG
10%
\:\
10
2.5 MEG
VERTICAL
V
1B3II/GT
HEIGHT
HIGH
VOLTAGE
T5
VIO
RECTIFIER
12006A
HOR OUTPUT
.1
-055
10/450V
FEEDBACK FROM TOP OF
YOKE 25 VOLTS P TO P
7875 CP.S.
C5I
-
680JJW
10%1
_ - -1 C5ZT
R73
V12
R8I
12AX4A
DAMPER
3.3,1W,10% 3
10
N.
2 7 4.°5/TV00
10K
10%
R80
TL..4
C50
-----
8.2K,10%
COMPOSITE WAVE SHAPE
2W
AT JUNCTION OF RF5465
20 VOLTS P TO P
C537
R72
82K
10%
110-580
HORP+
=
DRIVE
"B" VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
The "B" voltage in these chassis is provided by a
half wave selenium rectifier doubler circuit. The B+
voltage is 260 volts. The tube filaments are series con-
If the filament of any one tube opens, the
entire filament string will be open; hence, all tubes
nected.
will be inoperative.
CENTERING
O
0
PICTURE
TUBE
YOKE CLAMP
45%
V10 -PINS I25VOLTS P TO P
7875 C.P.S.
91
FIG. 5
DEFLECTION YOKE
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
OLYMPIC GT, c/ru, GU, GUU Chassis, Alignment Information, Continued
BUILT-IN ANTENNA
The "rabbit ear" antenna is normally connected
Set the sweep generator to approximately 45 MC.
Set the Band Width to the proper setting.
Inject output of sweep generator at the injection
point on tuner through the 10 uuf condenser.
Connect crystal circuit as shown in Figure 6 to pin
9 of V6. Connect a 3 volt bias battery into position
with plus side to ground and minus side to junction
of R11 and CII (this point is AGC bias voltage) for
all alignment procedures. Connect the marker generator to point illustrated in Figure 6 and set it to
frequencies of 43.25 MC and 45.75 MC and connect
to the antenna posts and must be disconnected when at-
taching the outside aerial. When set is cperating with
"rabbit ear" antenna, reception can sometimes be improved by rotating the antenna.
.00Ipf
TO V6,__I
.0
11.1f
100K
TO VERTICAL
INPUT OF
PIN ,9
SCOPE
CEDISCRAMIC
100K
TO MARKER
GENERATOR
33011
1K
the scope as shown in Figure 6.
CONNECT TO
NEAREST
GROUND OF
Curve shown on scope should be similar to response
curve shown in Figure 7.
If markers do not appear as shown in Figure 7, adjust coils L301 and L4 for correct positioning of mark-
TUBE V6
CRYSTAL DETECTOR
FIG. 6
ers ±10%.
(Set tuner to channel that gives best
response curve without interference from a station.)
After completion of preceding procedure, remove
crystal circuit. The sweep generator still remains at
injection point with the 10 uuf condenser. Connect a
TO REMOVE CHASSIS FROM CABINET
( 1 ) Disconnect antenna from antenna terminals at
rear of cabinet.
(2) Remove cabinet masonite back.
(3) Remove both leads from audio output trans-
scope to the 100,000 ohm resistor which was connected
at L6 and C19.
former.
Inject the following marker frequencies into the
tuner by coupling the marker generator to the half
shield of the mixer tube.
43.25 MC
Marker
45.75 MC
Picture Carrier Marker
(4) Remove two mounting bolts from underside of
cabinet and one from the top of the handle.
CURVE MAY APPEAR AS SHOWN IN CURVE A OR CURVE 5
After alignment, if the wave shape is not the same
as shown in Figure 8, allowing 15% tilt, retouch coils
L301, L4, T2 and T3.
CURVE A
43.25 MC
SOUND DISCRIMINATOR (4.5 MC) ADJUSTMENT
Because the transmitted sound signal from a TV
station is probably the most accurate available for frequency, it is recommended that a working signal be
used for sound alignment. The set should be turned
on, allowed to warm up for five to ten minutes and
then tuned to an extremely weak signal. A vacuum
tube voltmeter should be connected to pin 3 of V3A
through a crystal detector probe and the meter set to
the -3 -volt scale. The Video Trap LI and Sound IF
L2 should be tuned for maximum deflection of the
meter (not to exceed
volt).
45.75 MC
CURVE 111
MAX 15%
OVERCOUPLED CURVE
FIG. 7
PIX IF COIL AND
1
TRANSFORMER ADJUSTMENT
The discriminator coil L3 should be adjusted for
maximum audio output, using the transmitted signal
from a TV station. Use 'an output meter connected
to the voice coil terminals, or adjust by ear since the
coil slug must be set carefully to eliminate buzz. L3
must he adjusted for maximum audio output and
elimination of buzz.
Set the tuner to Channel 12 when not operated by
a local station; if 12 is a local station, use Channel 11
or 13. Turn on power switch and proceed as follows:
Insert a 100,000 ohm I/2 watt resistor in series with
the "hot lead" of the electronic voltmeter and connect
it to the junction of L6 and C19. Set meter switch
to the lowest negative scale. Connect the ground lead
of meter to chassis.
Connect hot lead of the RF signal generator to in-
jection point of tuner (see circuit diagram) through
a 10 uuf condenser.
Adjust the following slugs for maximum output as
indicated on the meter at frequencies and sequence
indicated below:
L301.
L4
T2
T3
44.5 MC
44.5 MC
43.5 MC
45.5 MC
Remove hot lead of RF signal generator leaving the
10 uuf condenser and the 100K resistor in place.
92
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MODELS
Olympic
GD CHASSIS
TD102
CD108
CD109
CD110
KD118
KD119
KD120
KD188
PKD118
PKD119
TO REMOVE CHASSIS FROM CABINET
Remove: (1) Line cord from power outlet.
(2) Antenna lead-in from terminal posts.
(3) Masonite back.
GH CHASSIS
GDU CHASSIS
CH402
KH406
KH407
TD102U
CD108U
CD109U
CD110U
KD118U
KD119U
KD120U
KD188U
PKD118U
PKD119U
GHU CHASSIS
CH402U
KH406U
KH407U
ADJUSTMENT OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR
(1) Allow set to warm-up for 2 minutes.
(2) Select channel with suitable picture.
(3) Short sync to ground at junction of C50 and C53.
(4) Short the terminals of the oscillator coil L16.
(4) Speaker plug L-com rear of chassis.
(5) Knobs from front of cabinet.
(6) Deflection yoke plug from socket.
(7) High voltage lead from picture tube.
(8) Three mounting screws from bottom and
one from upper rear side of chassis.
In sliding chassis out of cabinet, be careful that it does
not strike against the kinescope tube.
(5) Vary the Horizontal Hold Control R83 until
the picture is in frequency.
(6) Remove short from oscillator coil L16 and adjust coil until the picture is in frequency.
(7) Remove short from C50 and C53.
HORIZONTAL DRIVE ADJUSTMENT
The Horizontal Drive Trimmer C67 should be screwed
in tight (clockwise) and then backed off (counterclockwise) until horizontal drive bars appear. Then turn the
CENTERING
MAGNETS
trimmer clockwise again until the drive bars just disappear.
Note: In some sets horizontal drive bars will not appear,
regardless of horizontal drive trimmer adjustment.
In these sets, the trimmer should be set for proper
width.
Important: The horizontal oscillator frequency must be
checked for proper range of horizontal control after every adjustment of the horizontal
drive (C67).
YOKE CLAMP
DEFLECTION YOKE
* v18
CHASSIS
TUNER
GD,GH
GDU,GHU
CL566I
V2
FUNCTION
VI
6U8 MIXER
CL5662
* USED IN CL5662 (UHF TUNERS) ONLY.
--- LINEARITY
6AF4A
CHANNEL
MIXER
6AT8
68K7
RF
6E158
FUNCTION
RF
V2
.-"IrSELECTOR
UHF OSC
B
FINE
TUNING
ANTENNA BINDING POST
HEIGHT
LOCAL
DISTANCE
SWITCH
V9,
4111)
BUZZ CONTROL
/
V3
)11
soVNCLK
vi
42% MC
INS I.F
4125 023
V6
4,9
0 ( 41IS) 0
250 I.F.
OFF -ON (PUSH)
VOLUME a
IS,
L2
4.5MC
CONTRAST
41 25
DISC.
V5
0
CD
4 5 MC
,Thz. sEF
SOUND TRAP
TNY
45.510C
4.5MC.
NOISE IND
0
sr./
C
VIDEO AMPSOUND I.F.
T5
LEVEL CONTROL'.
14
44.25
0
11
SPEAKER
SOCKET
LI
Sim] F
DISC
LI6
VERT a HORIZ.
AUDIO
OUT
CONTROL
V
V12
HORIZ.
VIO 12AU7
12BH7
FREO0 .
SYNC
CONTROL
co
RECTIFIER
0
VER1OSC
8
FUSE
VI6
DRIVE
CONTROL
HORIZ. AFC
V13
3/8 MAP
HORIZ.
TONE CONTROL
3D -CONTROL (PUSH)
OUTPUT
VI5
6AX4
YOKE
/GT
PLUG
VI7
2ICBP4 -GD, GDU
24AEP4-GH,GHU
DAMPER
OUT.
TUBE LAYOUT
LINE CORD
SOCKET
(Continued on pages
94 through 96)
WIDTH CONTROL
93
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
OLYMPIC GD, GDU, GH, GHU Chassis, Service Information, Continued
After disconnecting the test equipment and crystal detector circuit, connect the scope through a 100K resistor
to the junction of L7 nd C26. Inject the following
PIX IF TRANSFORMER & ADJACENT
SOUND TRAP ALIGNMENT
Insert a 100,000 ohm
watt resistor in series with the
markers into the set by connecting the output of the
"Hot Lead" of the electronic voltmeter and connect it to
marker generator a half shield of the mixer tube on the
tuner:
42.5 MC
Marker
45.75 MC
Picture carrier marker
47.25 MC
Adjacent sound traps Ll, L5, L23
If after alignment the waveshape does not appear as in
Figure 8. within the limits of curves A and B, retouch
coils T2, T3 and T4, if necessary. (Do not retouch
the junction of L7 and C26. Set meter switch to the
lowest negative scale. Connect the ground lead of meter
to chassis.
Connect an RF signal generator through a 10 uuf con-
denser to the injection point of the tuner. (See circuit
diagram.) Before aligning, adjust slugs in coils L5 and
L15 so that they are at their maximum counterclockwise
position, at the top and bottom of the can, respectively.
Adjust the following coils for maximum output: L301,
(Continued on page 96)
L15, T2, T3 and T4. Adjust LI, L5 and L23 for
SONO 1,101
minimum dip, but feed in a strong enough signal so that
a definite dip is indicated.
'44
Remove the signal generator and VTVM.
Connect the sweep generator through a 10 uuf conden-
6
L19
ser to the injection point on the tuner. Set the sweep
generator for IF/VF output, with IF/Video 'Control at
,;°,1
11111081
L23
'
GOA SONO
approximately 45 MC and the Band Width at the proper
setting.
Connect a battery in place with its positive terminal to
chassis and the negative terminal to the junction of R20
15. Z194,
and L4 (this is AGC bias).
Connect a crystal detector circuit as illustrated in Figure 6 to the plate, pin 5, of the 1st IF Amplifier V6, a
6BZ6 tube, and then connect the scope and marker generator to the points illustrated in Figure 6.
All coil slugs requiring alignment are available from
C72
MINA
r
LOCAL-DSTANT SWITCH
CBS11
PHI
GOTNT
LACAL
position.
R89
V
TO TUNER ANTENNA
(VHF) INPUT
tr,"
los
30011
INPUT
+140 V.
5U4GA
LINE CONO
0. -IGO4 NO
TO VERTICAL
INPUT OF
TO
PIN 5
5U4 -G
-D
C
T7
VI6
GOWN
MELVIN MP
MAMMON
L14
v
G OCNET COI
Ne0
N AGONiTt
ON -Off SWIM. ON
OOK
C5I
.._±,6WEGGIN4 WNW
CONNECT TO
NEAREST
GROUND OF
530 II
1K
2BOV
NEOPTIANN
NTERLOCK
DISC
TO MARKER
GENERATOR
000
ONO.
111A
GANNET MO.
SCOPE
CERAMIC
WS A
VHF ANT.
If they do not, readjust coils L301 and L15 until markers
100 K
R116
W
fall into approximate position. The tuner should be set
to a channel which does not give interference from a
.0010f
GO 111,12/
ew
C52
so ore/
$0
rti.LON
10A
V.I.NG
TUBE V6
10,
PE
6.34 A06.II
C83
CRYSTAL DETECTOR
C50
Avirtov.
YUJI
OA GILLEN
FIG. 6
+260V
R.F.
TEST
POINT
FRONT VIEW OF TUNER
1156
Ft90
and 45.75 MC (picture carrier marker). They should
appear as illustrated on waveshape shown in Figure 7.
.00tuf
DSO
iloossnof
Observe the waveshape on the scope. Inject markers
of 47.25 MC (adjacent sound trap), 42.5 MC (marker)
station.
OWL MOWN
R54
iNII5
NON
the underside of the chassis, except for L5 and L23 which
are on the top side.
Set the Level Control to its maximum counterclockwise
( off )
CM*
CI9
R114
OLYMPIC TUNER PART NO. CL 5661
94
UHF OSC.
ADJUSTMENTS
""-I
II VLT mrn,
TUNER PART NO CL5662
1
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
OLYMPIC GD, GH, GDU a
GHU CHASSIS
6DG6
6Wg/GT
6U8
Kum...Aron
R9
,W
Tt
I010
wwm.Not
VS
C9*
19
93A
sound If AlPLortr
5.0 .1
5,1?
CI
LI
....:13.11LTRAP
2
01
.1044
4280V.
MOO ONOC.
R3B
CRYSTAL OK.
6GB6
vs
V7
MIF
6AWBA
T4
4.11.
V9A
rIT'Fr
I.F.
VI 7
SONO
an
TEN uPor.
.c452.6e,
Go. oou -poen
41:4(1043
TS
OP
6BZ6
12
KINESCOPE
031
}
TM I
R51
+1409
o'ervVs
R55
OA/
049
es/T:72.1
sorb oa
C55
Wrw1ow
V3B
12AU7
608
910A
V 96
911A
12AU7
MCILLATOR
V108
RIPEPO,
erne
SEIMATOR
APSE IlivPATS.
T6
I2BH7A
128H7A
6AW8A
F
c
C43
,°41,,
65V.
SOON.°
VoR
RIPTs...s.0.314
COkr
NATICAL OTLEC
ru
C4ti
NM.
R73
MOM
N-
OPERIOPO
874
To114
UPPORTMCal
fa9
0.0043.
0C46
/0924!
R65 .0.p.r,
MCIEta
R52
Si
R
047
IT r,'
R77
R69
MOO NONE
NM
A.
pow
TB
HOMO ONTPUT RV.
PCP..
6D06
1B3/GT
6AX4/GT
VI5
V13
NOIONNTR. 0111.0CTI10 C013
ISPITA3 CPR.
TORE ROCHE
0105
084
los
R79 C74 T.,
rcr,
StalT
R80
R6
71
RP
MORO ORIN
MATRIN.
011 MOP
2805
0
CF...)
---
--,
IQ................._ \--N..
NOTES
rL mcsarws 20K mc02../. Kw, muss
O... SAC..
0.-PRI
v.-1.1
3011,14
435. RNA ono CCP.< COPRI.RS (MOIL
SO CPS
WASS CANNININ 1.01.0
3
0
0
CIPS...N.
c.ccnworoc votnaNs N.3
PTA AN "Pv
NOM( RPM... AWL,
voLraoc or Kr
ROMs
mu,. c 4KTK noc...
a.T. CONN. COM. S. Kr MOR.0
PeNt N (PROC.
NWT. INNIANAMITS POW NA CRC. OWNS.
PINen nem own. am me
APPROPRIATE,
RACLIN POP MC *NO *OLT RN.
serawnc
SO opTS PERA
CEPA. COOMPIONI. PARC STOW
THE Mt. OF NON CoMACITORI IN OM
OuTIL
PA SOAR NOSPRINS
1\ (/
..--'
00v
Mr
CEINN CH SAI
Ka. CPS Nv
my et "30)0 .49.11, ea 0022. .14.0. NTH IN.. MAT
T L.PL-NNTIM 01.1103 MOWN NO LOC.
,14 NINSCOPS POPIONNE CONNECT *PP. 4061. PROW PI.
TO PR On NOW POI TO PIN ICI, RNIC ..... NS UST NC.
95
on . CONTROL(
..... LS
30 SWITCH
(On TONS CON
MN CAS
IISV
SPEAKERS
.3P0ATIAON MOONS MILT
3D SWITCHTO
PA vOLTO TO I
CONOS. WAVE SNNE
-31. NT NT.
NS CM
\\.
NEM. NON TOP N.
1000v
0
0
a3s NosTABES WAIN. OliVILIN PONE NMCPCD
1.\\
son 33 01.11 A100.-
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
OLYMPIC GD, GDU, GH, GHU Chassis, Alignment Information, Continued
CURVE MAY APPEAR AS SHOWN IN CURVE A OR CURVE B
220 Kfl
1001-105
47.25 MC
I
I
CURVE A
70%
42.5MC
I
VTVM
0
0
0
re
I (YELLOW WIRE)
dI
cL
ci
11,134
o
'
NI
NI
-
45.75 MC
CURVE B
10 -
TO C.R. TUBE
I CATHODE LEAD
FIG.9
VOLTMETER AND CRYSTAL DIODE
CONNECTIONS
MAX 15%
mid -range, using the transmitted signal from a TV station.
Use an output meter connected to the voice coil terminals,
OVERCOUPLED CURVE
or adjust by ear since the coil slug must be set carefully
FIG.7
to eliminate Buzz. Both the Buzz Control R6 and L3
coil must be adjusted for maximum audio output and
47.25MC
elimination of Buzz.
TUNER ALIGNMENT
42.5MC
Note: Before making a complete tuner adjustment, it is
essential that all the IF and sound discriminator
circuits be aligned to their proper frequencies as
described in the preceding paragraphs. WHEN
45.75 MC
CHANGING THE CONVERTER TUBE
IT IS NECESSARY TO REALIGN THE
OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT ON ALL
CHANNELS WITH THE MIXER TUBE
15%TILT
SHIELD IN PLACE.
This tuner has been carefully checked and aligned at
the factory to give best possible performance. Do not
tamper with adjustments.
The following instructions are given for your information or in the event that adjustment may be necessary
after tubes or parts are changed.
A. Oscillator Alignment Check.
(1) Turn station selector to Channel 13.
(2) Connect signal generator (adjusted to correct
STANDARD RESPONSE
FIG.8
L301, Ll, L5, L15 and L23 after they have been
aligned.)
The 6DQ6 (V13) and 6CG7 (V12) tubes should be
removed when aligning the set.
4.5 MC TRAP ALIGNMENT
Connect voltmeter lead to the diode crystal rectifier as
shown in Figure 9. Connect diode crystal rectifier between
Cathode Ray tube cathode lead (yellow wire) and chassis
Channel 13 oscillator frequency of 237.5 MC)
to the antenna terminals.
(3) Connect oscilloscope to r -f test point through
10,000 ohms.
ground. Signal generator is connected at junction of L7
and C26. Set the contrast Picture Control at maximum
and voltmeter to 3 -volt scale (negative). Remove the
6CB6 tube (V8) from socket. Use maximum output of
generator at 4.5 MC. Adjust video trap L9 for minimum
reading on meter.
When it is necessary to retouch this trap in the field,
proper adjustment can be made by using the local station
signal and turning the Fine Tuning Control to bring fine
(4) Set the Fine Tuning Control in center of its
range. Check Channel 13 for zero beat on
scope.
(5) Repeat steps (1) through (4) using Channel
6 with a frequency of 103.5 MC.
B.
Oscillator Alignment.
If necessary to make oscillator adjustments, perform the following steps:
(1) Align high channels for correct frequency with
herringbone sound beat into the picture. The 4.5 MC
trap (L9) should then be adjusted to minimize this beat
the Channel 13 oscillator screw. A nonmetallic
screwdriver should be used.
(2) Align low channels for correct frequency with
the Channel 6 oscillator screw.
(3) Alignment of Channel 13 and Channel 6 oscillators adjusts all the channels. Do not back
up the screws more than eight turns from tight.
interference.
SOUND IF AND DISCRIMINATOR
(4.5 MC) ADJUSTMENT
Because the transmitted sound signal from a TV station
is probably the most accurate available for frequency, it is
recommended that a working signal be used for sound
alignment. The set should be connected to an antenna,
turned on, allowed to warm up for about five to ten minutes and then tuned for the best picture. A vacuum tube
voltmeter should be connected to pin 2 of V3A through
a I megohm isolating resistor and the meter set to the
At this point the electrical effect has ceased.
Further back-up will cause the screws to drop
out.
Note: Cover and tube shields should be on. Have rated
supply voltages fed to tuner. Allow a three minute
warm-up. Clockwise rotation of screws increases
-30 -volt scale. The bottom of the 4.5 MC sound IF
transformer (L10) should be tuned for maximum de-
frequency.
Rated Voltages:
flection of the meter.
The discriminator coil (L3) should be adjusted for
maximum audio output, with the Buzz Control set to
"B" supply
Heater supply
Grid bias
(When necessary) B++
96
+140 volts
6.3 volts
-3.0 volts
+250 volts
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Olympic
ADJUSTMENT OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR
Allow set to warm-up for 2 minutes.
Select channel with suitable picture.
Short sync to ground at junction of C27 and C28.
Short the terminals of the oscillator coil L16.
MODELS
Vary the Horizontal Hold Control R76 until
GA CHASSIS
the picture is in frequency.
Control approximately in the mid-pcsition;
C F400
CB106
CB107
KB116
PKB116
ICB97
C F401
GAU CHASSIS
GBU CHASSIS
GFU CHASSIS
TA100U
CA105U
KA115U
PKA115U
ICA96U
otherwise, the set user may attempt to center
the picture by means of the hold control, which
may then be on "edge" and impulse noise or
change of camera will cause the picture to fall
out of synchronization. Excessive drift of the
horizontal oscillator circuit may be caused by
a weak or defective 6CG7 tube. Some manufacturers types of 6CG7 may perform better
than others in the horizontal oscillator socket.
Note: In some sets horizontal drive bars will not appear
regardless of trimmer adjustment. In these sets,
adjust the trimmer for proper width.
Important: The horizontal oscillator frequency must be
checked for proper range of horizontal control after every adjustment of the horizontal
drive trimmer C75.
affect the
bottom of the picture more than the top and the Vertical
Linearity Control has the opposite tendency.
V2
6AT8
6CL8
TUNER
VI
FUNCTION
CL5659
6C55 RF
G
dF
CL5660
6858 RF
CL566I
6807A RF
GAU,G8U,GFU
CL5662
6U8 MIXER
*USED IN CL5662 (UHF TUNERS)ONLY.
\
6AT8
6BK7
* vI6
FUNCTION
MIXER
MIXER
MIXER
LINEARITY
AF4
CHANNEL
VI
RF
V2
1=1 '''g----SELEC TOR
UHF OSC
a
FINE
TUNING
ANTENNA BINDING POST
LOCAL
DISTANCE
SWITCH
CF400U
CF401U
KF405U
appear.
though satisfactory results can be obtained from an active
picture.
Both controls affect height AND linearity of the picture
and must therefore be adjusted simultaneously. The
GA,
TB101U
CB106U
CB107U
KB116U
PKB116U
ICB97U
The horizontal drive trimmer C75 should be screwed
in tight (clockwise) and then backed off (counterclockwise) until horizontal drive bars appear. Then turn the
trimmer clockwise again until the drive bars just dis-
For best results, height and vertical linearity adjustments should be made on a transmitted test pattern, al-
CHASSIS
KF405
HORIZONTAL DRIVE (WIDTH) ADJUSTMENT
VERTICAL HEIGHT AND LINEARITY ADJUSTMENT
Vertical Height Control has a tendency to
GF CHASSIS
TB101
(6) Remove short from oscillator coil L16 and adjust coil until the picture is in frequency.
(7) Remove short from C27 and C28.
Caution: It is important that the picture be centered in
the mask properly with the Horizontal Hold
GB CHASSIS
TA100
CA105
KA115
PKA115
ICA96
HEIGHT
T3
455 MC
240
OFF -ON
SPEAKER -ow
SOCKET
VOLUME 8
SOUND I.F.
SOUND I. F.
AMPLIFIER
CONTRAST
4 5MC
DISC.
BUZZ ----I-4.'2
CONTROL
V5
r
AUDIO
VERT 81 HORIZ.
CONTROL
GUT
4.5 MC
SOUND TRAP
HORIZ.
0
12AU7
FRED.
I2BH7
HORIZ. AFC.
a OSC.
FUSE
HOR.
CD
DRIVE --0"-C
3/8 AMP
CONTROL
6AX4
/GT
RECTIFIER
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
ERT OSC.
8 OUTPUT
VI5
YOKE
PLUG
2ICBP4 (GA, GAU,GB,GBU)
24CP4A (GF, GFU)
DAMPER
TUBE LAYOUT
LINE CORD
SOCKET
(Continued on pages
98 through 100)
97
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
V
OLYMPIC GA, GB, GF, GAU, GBU, GFU Chassis
W
UHF ANT
INPUT
ii...11F ANT
INPUT
+135V
INJECTION
®,
LP30INTLE
TO REMOVE CHASSIS FROM CABINET
Remove: (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Line cord from power outlet.
Antenna lead-in from terminal posts.
YSC.
VI6
Masonite back.
Speaker plug from rear of chassis.
Knobs from front of cabinet.
Deflection yoke plug from socket.
High voltage lead from picture, tube.
Three mounting screws from bottom and
one from upper rear side of chassis.
F.
COIL_.0
1/oR
VI
+275V
UHF OSC.
UHF OSC.
ADJUSTMENTS
OUTPUT
44.5MC
V2
U
OLYMPIC TUNER PART NO. CL5662
(GAU, GBU, GEU I
In sliding chassis out of cabinet, be careful that' the
chassis and any of its parts do not strike against the
FlUURF_NT
RF
kinescope tube.
R0
TEST
POINT
C301
V
ANTENNA
TERMINALS
VHF- GA
30011
so
CHANNEL SELECTOR
AOC FOR TUNER
INJECTION
POINT
(SELECTS AND INDICATES CHANNEL 1
OLYMPIC
VERTICAL LINEARITY
AGC
+130V
CHANNEL 7 TO 13
CSC. ADJ
755
T
+1305,
U0
275V.
OLYMPIC TUNER PART NO. CL 5660
FINE TUNING
(TUNES FOR BEST
PICTURE QUALITY)
C24Tr
SHAFT
f
0251
,000T 22T
VIDEO I.F.
CHANNEL 2 TO 6
OSC. ADJ.
HEIGHT
C26*
IIAAPAYf
INJECTION
POINT
FRONT VIEW
OF TUNER
T
*OFF -ON SWITCH AND VOLUME
TEST
POINT
I TURNS SET '014" OR 'OFF' AND ADJUSTS LOUDNESS
V
OF SOUND.)
Ova. 0 cow'
ANTENNA
TERMINALS
CONTRAST CONTROL
30011
(VARIES PICTURE CONTRAST
LIGHT OR DARK.)
W
ALTERNATE
INJECTION
POINT
OVERT ONORIz
HORIZONTAL HOLD
OSC ADJUST
CH 2-12
(STOPS SIDE TO SIDE
MOTION OF PICTURE /
X
FILAMENT
x
ALTERNATE
T
FILAMENT
ALTERNATE B+
130V
I 30V.
OLYMPIC TUNER PART NO. CL 5659
(GA)
VERTICAL HOLD
SHAFT
(STOPS UP OR DOWN
MOTION OF PICTURE)
5U4 -G
VI4
15
BRIGHTNESS
R69
LIO
Nhy
TRA=NAN
+290V
FRONT VIEW
OF TUNER
+2TSV
0000
'C49
C52. R70'
".
0
(SETS PICTURE BRILLIANCE,
BACKGRCVN01
*PUSH SWITCH USED ON GB, OF CHASSIS,
LINE CORD
105 - ,ROV C
INTERLOCK
.CSO
ON OFF SYR 7. ON
SOUND VOLUA
CO
C43
a tires
3V+1,2616 WINE
o
SOS
VAnsi
RIK
r
X
6
-
C
so
44
c.51
50
oso v
30A
PYELLOW
R 701
X
9 OA
PILOT
LIGHT
LOCAL -DISTANT SWITCH
G13,GF,G1111J,GFU- RUN 2
R9I
NOTES:
TO TUNER ANTENNA
(VHF) INPUT
ALL MATO. *ROIL TOLER/AM I/2 RAVI' uNufli
OTHERS... SOScionso
2 ALL RICA AND CSRANic CONDENSERS 6201 TOLERANCE,
RW.03 OTNERTTISI Vscielsis
ALL vOLTROIS 126SURSIT SCSAKEN POWS INDICATED
AND CRAMS, RSINO AN ELECTRONIC vOLTNSTSR ALL
VOLTAGE
RM.. ISS.INSASURSD *ITN AN MIRO
Ks,. or .17 vOLTS, PA tscLES, AC *ITN MCCOWN
MOIL
VHF ANT.
INPUT
stattm'AND Tram CONTRAST CONTROL MT TO ROODucs
SO vOLIII RAN TO REAM AT KINESCOPE
CERAMIC CONOCITSSMOISC TrOS
98
C72:
ktoo
qK
NTROL
GD.GF,G1111J,GFU- RUN 2
*C7I
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
a
OLYMPIC GA, GB, GF
GAU, GBU, GFU CHASSIS
6DG6/GT
0110
7-ist,H
68N6
1/2 - 6AW8A
V3A
6W6/GT
V4
LI
SOUND IF AMPLIFIER
OR
ez,
DISCRIMMIATON
514C
400
swoo uot
R?
DISC. COIL
wx. o,
1.24 sue
cz
vt*
;'u44
R
2500.
4C7/01.1111
151014
ee V
R4
kA.
C3
40011
RI2
1.12"8
Mot
9,000r{M
VIAL WOUND
tOR
uf
,r
DP.JIC
oto
-sown,/
R10
R2
11,9
120V
500116
roi2
V --
SPEAREN
01114
.tr.-+ R9 C8 FP
99ouut
RI
NPVT
TAORASFINEMEA
2400
p 13,
1A6
71
A1.4160
V5
Audi, cum,
C6*
c.P115
+130 V. 0
.+275V
LAG40
D(TFCTIM
GE NA IN. CA
6BZ6
V6
12
151 I F
.1'1'1
13
VT
2.0 I F
1350
455110
L5
113
Pil I
170,
125V
047/400V
R21
R23
I
4,4
420011.
I
J
R3I
R5
F133
14042,
SA
L11
e
11
A101
L6-VV1/S-0
.ww
R26
0011
.500
woo
R20rz71 ;
Ft28*
I
R36
L8
1..*c1
.066
Escomh
r-
V15
KINESCOPE
C211
I AA
6,4
24REP4 (OF GFU1
C23
5001
14
0.
L7
R25
R22
F16:f
210.8114 (Weft 081.0801
610,
VIDEO WAWA.
*f... CI 7
X
BEST FOCUSING.
w*
V38
C18
1-1471h
214 V.
15
1C14* *
SPRING JUMPER PROM PIN B TO PIN 1 OR
FROM PIN 6 TO PIN 10. MN1GNEVER GIVES
t of
=020
1/2 -6AW8A
SYLVAN. NI MOO
6C86
FOR EICAP 8 0400P4, CONNECT
R30
CRYSTAL DAM
1 MLA
VOA
R29
HV I5KV
.scrouh 104.041.0
...Yr:A 0140K040.0.10
22116
S101.
C2211
SS
CONTAOL
I
1
R32
oan.
111E4 11.10,
275V
+130V
L9A
50CP
50CPS
CPS
71175. CPS
4.000
ATiCAL %RECTA. CO,
MATED CIRCUIT
VENTLCAL
12AU7
12AU7
yen
VI3A
SYNC SCALAR,.
...... TOR
V9A
VENT osc0,0xon
SYNC AMPLIFIER
06
12BH7
R44
.oC32
osioow
AID
R52
ow*
R55
R4
R47
R43
400V.
1041
R63
66
5026 =C29
.woh000v
t AMA
R54
R61
C47
R38
-
2.2114,6
R41
42
II
'OM G
A VOL
I
R39
"*C34
*/900v
11
.12.100S
R50
5 MEG
C41
6500
6
W
9011
rli*CTA ;ATV
CONTROL
2 MAI 11
1.1111.101
45011
047/400V
41.16.
4.006
.005/400
R40
C40
2,700 1.10
400V
R46
C33
R37
R58
R59
OUTPV
moon
R
002/1100V.
4701111
T4
vew
10, 000OM -I2V
4.6
4101
R10045
*f -15V
R57
V98
VENT 01ITINIT
32V.
C28*
05°
C36
11
C35
00.T/Neopewn
30V
35V
C27
-1/-*-11
12BH7
7,T27,7*
C38
'It- /00v
leSNI0
5 1424
4014
* IOW
R64
146
2W
171
410V
T6
6CU 6 OR
/2 6CG7
NIG. VOLTAGE
6D06
1/2 6CG7
VIOA
1B3/GT
TARN FORMER
vi
V108
NOP.046
NOME. AL OUTPUT
V12
NOWISONTAL OUTPUT
11011.0110
C54
OIL
00LTAGE
0.11000. FALSE
*C56
DO NOT WASIAK
R82
112V
.001/500
R74
45451
13 F.
OL
R84
22
R77
R79
1725.
5T
R7
C58
R86
,>F187
roi
R94
LI6
.0A11
1S1LVEA1
R78
She+
R76
s
C75
,C57
ow*
1705
ora
27/
093
3511.1W
R73
181,101
27/
dIPPMME
7
GA- RUN 3
GB,GF,GAU,GBU,GFU-RUN 2
R98
330%.".
The GA, GB and GF models are equipped with a
If the lines of the raster are not horizontal, loosen
built-in antenna and the GAU, GBU and GFU models
are equipped with two built-in antennas for VHF and
UHF reception. These antennas provide satisfactory reception in many locations. In areas of weak reception an
outside antenna will substantially improve the perform-
clamp on collar of yoke and rotate the deflection yoke
until condition is corrected. The clamp will then hold
the yoke in place. If neck shadow is evident or -the
corners of the raster are dark, the deflection yoke must
be moved forward as far as possible.
ance of the receiver.
99
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
OLYMPIC GA, GB, GF, GAU, GBU, GFU Chassis, Alignment Information, Continued
plus side to ground and minus side to junction of R14
and L3 (this point is AGC bias voltage) for all alignment procedures. Connect the marker generator to point
illustrated in Figure 6 and set it to frequencies of 43.25
MC and 45.75 MC and connect the scope as shown in
Figure 6. Alignment- is done from the underside of
ALIGNMENT
Set the tuner to Channel 12 when not operated by a
local station; if 12 is a local station, use Channel 11 or
13. Turn on power switch and proceed as follows:
chassis.
.0010f
.001p f
TO v6..H
100 K
N5
CERAMIC
If markers do not appear as shown in Figure 7, adjust coils L301 and IA for correct positioning of mark10%. (Set tuner to channel that gives best response
ers
curve without interference from a station.)
100K
DISC
TO MARKER
GENERATOR
Curve shown on scope should be similar to response
curve shown in Figure 7.
TO VERTICAL
INPUT OF
SCOPE
After completion of preceding procedure, remove
CONNECT TO
NEAREST
GROUND OF
1K
33011
crystal circuit. The sweep generator still remains at injection point with the 10 uuf condenser. Connect a
scope to the 100,000 ohm resistor which was connected
at L5 and C18.
Inject the following marker frequencies into the tuner
by coupling the marker generator to the half shield of
TUBE V6
CRYSTAL DETECTOR
FIG. 6
the mixer tube.
Insert a 100,000 ohm Y2 watt resistor in series with
the "hot lead" of the electronic voltmeter and connect it
to the lowest negative scale. Connect the ground lead of
(GB, GF, GBU, GFU)
if
L301, L4, T2 and T3.
meter to chassis.
Note: It
Connect hot lead of the RF signal generator to injection point of tuner (see circuit diagram) through a 10 uuf
is
advisable to remove the type 6DQ6 and
6CG7 tubes when aligning the set. If the curve
does not appear as illustrated, because of a local
station or other interference, or if multiple markers appear, remove the RF Amplifier tube from
condenser.
Adjust the following slugs for maximum output as
indicated on the meter at frequencies and sequence inGA, GAU
Picture Carrier Marker
Channel Trap Marker
the wave shape is not the same
as shown in Figure 8, allowing 15% tilt, retouch coils
After alignment,
to the junction of L5 and C18. Set the meter switch
dicated below:
Marker
43.25 MC
45.75 MC
47.25 MC
PIX IF COIL ADJUSTMENT
tuner.
GB, GF, GBU, GFU
SOUND DISCRIMINATOR (4.5 MC) ADJUSTMENT
43.5 MC
44.5 MC
45.5 MC
44.5 MC
T2.........._43.5 MC 43.5 MC
45.5 MC
45.5 MC
T3
Adjust the following slugs (on the GB, GF, GBU
and GFU chassis) for minimum output as indicated on
the meter at frequencies and sequence indicated below:
MC
...............
L19 .....
47.25 MC
L18
Remove hot lead of RF signal generator leaving the
10 uuf condenser and the 100K resistor in place.
Set the sweep generator to approximately 45 MC. Set
the Band Width to the proper setting.
L301
L4
Because the transmitted sound signal from a TV station is probably the most accurate available for frequency,
is recommended that a working signal be used for
sound alignment. Turn the set on, allow a five to ten
minute warm-up and then tune the set to an extremely
weak signal. Connect a vacuum tube voltmeter to pin
3 of V3A through a crystal detector probe and set the
meter to the -3-volt scale. Tune the video trap L11
and LI for maximum deflection of the meter (not to
it
exceed 1 -volt).
Adjust the discriminator coil L2 for maximum audio
output using the transmitted signal from a TV station.
This is done with the Buzz Control (R4) set to midrange. An output meter connected to the voice coil
terminals may be used for this adjustment, or it may be
done by ear since the coil slug must be set carefully for
elimination of buzz. Adjust both the Buzz Control and
L2 for maximum audio output and elimination of buzz.
Inject output of sweep generator at the injection point
on tuner through the 10 uuf condenser.
Connect crystal circuit as shown in Figure 6 to pin 5
of V6. Connect a 3 volt bias battery into position with
CURVE MAY APPEAR AS SHOWN IN CURVE A OR CURVE B
47.25MC+
41.25 MC
41.25 MC
CURVE A
70%
4 3.75 MC
43.25 MC
CURVE B
MAX 15%
+(GB, GF, GBU, GFU -ONLY)
+(OEI, GF, GBU, GFU -ONLY)
OVERCOUPL ED CURVE
STANDARD RESPONSE
FIG.7
FIG.8
100
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL
1959
TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PACKARD BELL
Models 17VT3, 17VT4, 17VC1, 17VT8, 17VT9, & 21VT4
CHASSIS V8-2 (REVISED)
(Service material on pages 101 through 104)
CHANGES REQUIRED FOR 21 -INCH
MODEL 21VT4:
C-202 (.022 mfd/600 v) is used only on 21VT4
23141
R-88 (15K, 2 watts) goes to 12K, 2 watts on 21VT4
73438
R-94 (120K) goes to 82K on 21VT4 73048
R-95 (4.7 meg) goes to 3.9 meg on 21VT4 73068
R-98 (270K) goes to 150K on 21VT4 73051
R-99 (10K) goes to 22K/2'watts on 21VT4; also it
connects to the 260 volt line instead of the 135
volt line 73441
R-202 (1 meg) goes to 820K on the 21VT4
73060
R-203 (39K) is used only on 21VT4 73044
The values of certain components change for the
21 -inch model. Other components are used ONLY in
the 21 -inch set.
Complete list of these- components:
C-76 (.068 mfd/1000 v) goes to .033 mfd/1000 v
on 21VT4 23074
C-81 (150 mmf/2500 v) goes to 56 mmf/2500 v
23646
on 21VT4
C-85 (.01 mfd/600 v) goes to .022 mfd/600 v on
21VT4
23141
-
1
L4
L5
Tr)
GCG8A
C46
26-3
C4
15
g
Cs
/ __-.17
\
\
Tt
\a
CIO
1.0
Cl2
2.6
6BN4
LI
'
C 21,
47
6/
470
15
C20
.5- /0.
C/6 30
-> RI
7K
ICA
CI
LI
/20
soor
TP /Four
68N4
to +125
I
I
Y.D.C.
OCG8 A
4
/
r6CB6 IF-47
--i 1-1
I
AGC
F. TEST CIRCUIT
I
L
/000
-5-7\4
gdo'4.1
log
1000
I(
BAL. NPUT0
-2.5 V.D.C.
Schematic, Standard Coil "Fireball" Tuner
101
1000
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PACKARD BELL Models 17VC1, 17VT3, 17VT4, 17VT8, 17VT9, 21VT4,
Chassis V8-2 (Revised) Schematic Diagram
K? 6/V5
V3 hz
AL/D/0 4, 'IPL.
.504.447Z.) DE7:
5,0O/VG, t/F
/41./..7/0 c7L/TRL/ 7-
53 L2,5-41
4A/.7
1
1
SS/
L/
/6 TUNED V/7
(5 EE TEXT FOR
5 5V
/OT
NR0
3
/20
,c;;,
tIL
,C4
/011
./
R 22
11
22/1
r
L/4/4.
7
23
//I
2.2
2.2
3
/as
0.787
LSDA
50/41 SIDS
924
C26
IK
10K
V68 j 6A.5.
V6A f 6A.5&
44:00 MC
-
3
R313000
L
71
2v.
6
/735
a
-17301 59
+2
16
3126
DETECT/
4400/VC
-0-"_ .28
21E*. 58
/REV
08 V
C 23
35-01,
400V.
e4
s
22
'334
MC
4
-
2,2017
.0/
5 a" VOL
VS - '0E6
1T 2.2
.833
12K
/0*
9.73
47.25
57
327
-1.
351,
j
4200 /1c
800, 0,14-
44.
/.-.6
2K
OM 5002 6051
6
(72
57,0
4° rwe
3
_,...,....
C/4.4
/BOK
/0A'.
C20/
7RAR, 47.25
MC,
/20 v
5
/35-
cv
PC-
60e6
V4
0 _5 5
22
C6_
R/3
C //
R6 V
/0%
/2001
147, /eg
-SIVRO
F/0
_IC:a
820/
220
R/4
/24-
47.04.-
43-00
c --?o3
c26II
50V
O
/OK
'r C4
45:00 /1c,
.04-0
600/
52
.5/
/cfr-
1C/0
57e
Lk/
7
P7: NO. Y ru,se.51
L 46C
If
ib
C./
328
A-31
470
68
125
1K
827-.- R32
/0e--
(3/
R36
29
/20K
C32j_
R 37
';;3
/14/
/OK
R25
toll
en
MK
2601/ LW*
R613
R66
33K
.3.9K
VE3
_.7221/C
c40
.0c733
400V
P
68Y6
Jr.:we
A. F. C.
JW
C49
Teo AL/3
i!cf/c-A
R76
R74
/7/
5/04 ILK
NCA
-7v
5
8.54
855
200v
zc,56.1c.:57
54_
.9822
00
.9.4v
MR0
681/5 T3 yezz OW
24 Tv.
6CC7
SYNC AMPL.
/0/
/2
V/28. I 6C67
70
vs -.QT 05C.
i//3. 6,4Q5
VERroeire
4035
1
6
e
/09.
33W
.8662
H869
/
600/ .00/.r
Roe
/374
le -
R95
TN
R92
p,
4
4'
of
C 73
v.
/.53
5600
6REE4/4
RED
pC
R93
ra
C7/
.047
eOcw
Rios
R/00
224-
/00
220
K
/03
3-
47K
1.01/1
/05.
9/0/ R /2/07
3/1
4197
TOOK
vz-Rr HOLD
/00
d6
600/
025M
HE-/aNT
R/02
Vt-R
C 75.4.
.9508
L/AC
5/09
/
10.3
220
220
2W
R /06
470K
/0%
A571'
/07,
C 76 -*
.068, /of,
2.3 V. L/NR
C76..033, /00o Y. CA/ 2/V74
C 8/. 56/./11.." 0 /0% 2.5 ICY ON 2/V74
C85. .022, 600 V /071 ON 2/ /
C 205 on, 2/ vra ONL Y
3E
R
.4' 94
/2K,2W ON 2/V74
82K ON 2/ 117-4
-34
,Q
95- 3.9 MEG 04, 2/
R98-/5 0 A"
7-4
R99 -22K, 2W ON 2/ VT.
* AR 202. 8 20
A-,
04/ 2/ V7-4
,Q203iE ON 2/ T4
102
470
2
Re/
600*,
".0047
560
/0*
C 74
320K
Xe
7Y.
033 60047
fe
6
,4,79
/50K
20041
ZOO V
20
2200
EP.
c50
l/ 9
6 CG 7
NOR 05C. 0" AMPL.
.58 V.
,0%
6.94", .5%
/20.990
/265
R64
HOR. //OLD
53
177/07.
C52
C 5/
OCK
75
5//
R73
R72
22R
0 NG Y.
TO 260
ON 2/ V r4
4.5
/00
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PACKARD BELL Models 17VC1, 17VT3, 17VT4, 17VT8, 17VT9, 21VT4,
Chassis V8-2 (Revised) Schematic Diagram
5 7.,:'_-7/.C71.0
ke-2 .370/,4470
,3"4"/04TO CA 455i.5 '891/8
607-6
.1/2
50,/0 GE;_-
/5.1:N
I
L7
-
5-
V3
6AS5
i/_c21,
-2
LO
I
/0
33511
_J
k35-7
420
Toe
330
70/1"
4704 -
2 7800
,047
2001/
/35.,
2241'
0/35
V7 6C86
V/DEO AMPL
6' 60
ze,
i
L.12
T
II
__
Z/CE7/7CAP4-
UPS
"##
I
9
66,).
e42
I
I)
L
/500
/0
NP0,
C3&
444
1800 -.022
4006
c37_
.22
200Y
3-%
.266 6.
c45
./
.047 _ 2900_ _
Ra3200y L40
0,0N
4.
-±-16
-6 0 6
I
222 V
2205
{5/0
La:
,20x
C0167
t:-,
I
P)
/F53
R47
/000
Model 1 7VT3
Model 17VT8
(Porto -Bell Model)
1
R552 11:-
I
203
505.
39A-
Gi7wes
yOPEN C42Ce.??7- P7N2
GeVOCAVNEC72CLA9
a
FOR 2/1/7-4
C 202
84
220,
/5-0K
022
.9,9e4.
rG, 55
WO 6.006
HOR OUTP
463Pv
/128
,PELT
I///
PN
1
445 I'D
616
1,//714,
82014
c 60
Model 17VT4
Model 1 7VT9
2/{17-40/11Y
-36r.
O2C
Re?
8205
59 60062
.33c,
77/047
6
c/PC(..// TRY /Al
I-
99
c 6/
c 62
.0033
,,.00,
x,
7
c 63
0077E10 LINE
/./56-0 a,V rims
0,1"Lr
2.2 .12
C 64
,
600V
rar 90
/-371 /0%
HEA TEA'
,P .9/
N0 af/VE
FOCUS
c0mvev70.v.s.
5/7E-9
C 5'5
chvE YZovE
600
V2
T -O/
+260 vz,v
DAMPER
/5
("PEW C/.ECU/7
FOol.
C B2
V/4. er A X4-67
V/
V5
033
24. V.
3-
Y6
Y9
V/0
1//2
Y7
V/3
V le
/6
Y/7
3I TS v.
/0 A(
L/5
C 78
.74
- oTra
/0C 07/45 A-5
35-o
/09
ADJACENT -CHANNEL TRAPS:
/8
C 79
[451,6itE
Some sets contain three adjacent channel traps,
two at the grid of the first
and one at the grid of
RES/STOP
7eY
/2-665
/13-V
x301+
4.304."/P_
the second I -F. These are shown on the schematic,
along with the trap frequencies.
5",..,/ 7C/1
These traps, if present, must be adjusted to their
correct frequencies before proceeding with the alignment below.
500/TA
Schematic Diagram, V8-2 (revised)
(Alignment on page 104)
103
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PACKARD BELL Chassis V8-2, Continued
11.
Replace tube shield on mixer tube in tuner but
leave signal generator connected between shield
ALIGNMENT
and chassis. (Reason: removal of shield alters
response curve, hence signal must be injected
with shield in place.)
12. Adjust generator output to provide the markers
shown on the curve. Check position of markers
one at a time. A slight touching -up of the I -F
adjustments may be needed to make the curve
correspond to the illustration.
The PIX-LOCK control is normally almost completely counterclockwise. In fringe areas, if noise
affects the sync stability, the control should be set
as far clockwise as possible without pulling or tearing
the picture.
PROCEDURE:
Connect VTVM to point "A".
Lift tube shield on mixer tube in tuner (6CG8A or
6AT8). Connect signal generator between shield and
ground, keeping leads shorter than 11/2 in. Set generator output to produce from minus 11/2 to minus 2
13.
S-1 moves the 45.75 mc marker up or down the
curve (should be 50%).
S-5 controls the overall band width, and with
volts of AGC bias as indicated by the VTVM. NOTE ON
S-9, controls the 41.25 mc position.
TUNER I -F ADJUSTMENT: S-1 must be adjusted
S-7 controls the position of the 45.00 mc
through hole in tuner.
VTVM
Frequency
Signal Gen Connection Adjust
Signal Gen
Step
Connection
1.
Mixer tube
in tuner
45.00 mc Point "A" S-1
response curve.
MAX
S-9 controls the 41.25 mc position which should
S-5
MAX
45.00 mc
S-7
MAX
44.00 mc
ditto
S-8
MAX
S-9
ditto
43.00 mc
ditto
REPEAT STEPS 1 THRU 5
MAX
42.50 mc
3.
ditto
4.
ditto
5.
6.
marker, which should be at a maximum of 97%
response. S-8 controls tilt of bottom portion of
For
ditto
ditto
ditto
2.
be between 3% and 12% response.
IMPORTANT: The 45.00 mc marker must not exceed
97% response on channel three or picture may
smear on higher channels.
TRAP ALIGNMENT (4.5 mc)
1.
Connect scope to point "B" thru a 22,000 ohm
isolating resistor.
7.
Connect capacitor, 5 mfd, 50 volts, between
point "A" and ground, the negative lead going
to point "A". (Leave VTVM connected.)
8.
9.
Connect signal generator between point "C" and
ground thru a .001 mfd isolating capacitor.
2.
Turn contrast control to maximum.
3.
Connect RF probe of VTVM to point "D".
4.
Set signal generator to 4.50 mc, with output at
one volt or more.
Connect sweep generator to antenna terminal
thru the impedance matching network.
5.
Rotate tuner to channel 3, and set sweep gener-
Adjust trap, S-10, for minimum VTVM reading.
NOTE: If generator is not capable of a one volt output,
the trap may be adjusted visually while receiving a TV
signal. If no 4.5 mc beat is present in the picture,
then S-10 requires no adjustment. If a beat appears,
detune signal to exaggerate the beat and then adjust
S-10 for minimum beat.
ator to center frequency of channel (63 mc).
With a sweep width of 8 mc, adjust generator
output to develop about -2 volts of AGC bias
at point "H".
10.
The adjustments have the following effects:
Adjust AGC control at rear of set so that voltages
at points "H" and "A" are equal. Then, if necessary, readjust generator so that AGC voltage is
SOUND I -F AND RATIO DETECTOR
ALIGNMENT:
again -2 volts.
41.25 MC
1.
Connect signal generator between point "B" and
ground.
45.75 MC
4 3.0 0 MC
50%
2.
Connect VTVM between point "F" and ground.
3.
With generator frequency at 4.50 mc, adjust S-2
and S-3 for MAXIMUM VTVM reading.
42.50M C
4.
Connect VTVM between "E" and "G".
5.
Adjust ratio detector secondary, S-4, for zero between positive and negative peaks.
6.
Repeat steps 2 thru 5.
43.30 MC
Response Curve
104
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Model No.
Chassis
Model No.
Chassis
G -4242M
G-42421
UG-4242M
UG-4242L
G -4654M
G -4654W
UG-4654M
9L37.
G -4710M
G-47101
UG-4710M
UG-47101
G -4720M
9L38
9138
9136U
9138U
9L37
.9L37U
.9L37U
9L37
9L37
9137U
9L37U
.
UG-4654W
UG-4720M
G-47201
UG-4720L
9L37 and 9L37U, 9L38
9L38A
9L38AU
9L38A
9L38AU
and 9L38U CHASSIS
Schematic diagrams and certain other service information on these sets are
presented on the next ten pages. .Since these chassis are similar to 9L35, -U,
for the following information refer to Volume TV -15, Early 1959 TV Manual:
horizontal oscillator adjustment, page 124; alignment, page 121; video IF printed
wiring panel, page 123.
Chassis 9L38
Chassis 9L37
AGUADAG GNO
SPRING
VERT CENT
MAGNET
FOCUS
CONTACT
DISASSEMBLY OF CRT HOUSING-
AC. INTERLOCK
(JUMPER TO OPERATE
WITH COVER REMOVED).
CRT REMOVAL PROCEDURE
NOTE: The illustrations and procedure refer to the 9L37
HOR LM.
MAGNET
the 9L38 is similar.
-
Access to the yoke and its associated parts is obtained by
removing the small cover on the rear of the CRT shell. This
cover is secured by four screws. Removal of the cover exposes
the neck of the CRT and the yoke assembly thus permitting
adjustment of the yoke without removal of the complete rear
shell assembly. Removal of the cover also exposes the vertical
and horizontal centering magnets and the horizontal linearity
adjustment. In the 9L38, the interlock must be jumped when
the CRT rear cover is removed. The 2nd video amplifier, a
MOR. CENT
MAGNET
3CB6, and the focus connector are also accessible. See figure 1.
;
3C EMS
OKE ,,AMP
SCREW
2NL v.. AMP
I CRT SUPPORT
Figure 1,
ARM
Adjustment Access Cover Removed - 9L38
FRONT
76-10629-1(R)
SHELL
54-6691
SHELL
STRAP
76-10671
SUPPORT ARM
SUPPORT ARM
MTG BRACKET
MTG. BRACKET
tx
f-11"-)
54-6690
SWIVEL BASE
SUPPORT COLLAR
CRT ASST
RELEASE
28-12342-1
RE AR SHELL
MTG. BRACKET
REAR SHELL
SHELL
STRAP
I
STRAPNG
SCREW
W19883FA1
II
Figure 2A
Figure 2B
105
-
:PI
2 8 -1 2 6 1 6
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L37, -U, 9L38, -U, Service Information, Continued
To disassemble the CRT assembly, remove the small orna-
The pivot or swivel assembly can also be removed by re-
mental trim piece under the picture tube by removing the
moving the single screw at the rear and then lifting the assembly
off the cabinet or base.
two small screws from the lower front. Remove the plastic
trim around the CRT shell. This plastic trim is held in place
with a spring at the bottom of the assembly. Remove the two
screws at the bottom of the shell strap, remove the strap and
the front mask. Remove the end caps on the side support arms
and then remove the self -tapping screws which fasten the sup-
CHASSIS REMOVAL PROCEDURE
port arms and the rear shell to the picture tube frame. The
base of the support arms, which are keyed, are inserted into
sockets in the pivot assembly under the CRT. To remove the
To remove the chassis from the cabinet remove all control
knobs, pull the monopole antenna part -way out so that the base
section does not interfere with the chassis removal. Remove
support arms, move each arm so that the arm key lines up with
the slot in the socket and then pull the arm out of the socket.
The picture tube is still secured by the pivot assembly to the
the two lower chassis mounting screws and the two screws
holding the vertical support bracket. This bracket is a shipping
brace and need not be replaced in the 9L37. In the 9L38, remove the top bracket to cabinet screw only. The bracket must
be retained as it is part of the chassis assembly. Remove the
chassis by pulling it straight back.
cabinet.
Remove the two mounting screws at the bottom of the CRT
which hold the rear shell, then remove the rear shell. Figure
2B shows the assembly with the rear shell removed. Now the
CRT can be removed by loosening the bolts, one on either
The front of the chassis contains two plastic seats into which
are inserted two prongs or guides mounted on the cabinet and
which hold the chassis in proper position. When installing the
chassis in the cabinet these guides must be properly engaged
by the plastic seats before the chassis can be fully inserted.
side of the picture tube front frame, near the support arm
mounting brackets. In the 9L37 chassis the yoke and CRT
cables plug into receptacles in the center of the chassis. The
anode lead plugs into a jack at the top front of the 1G3GT
socket.
CRITICAL LEAD DRESS INFORMATION
A.
(2) The UHF tuner link cable must dress under lug on
To Prevent Lead Burning
UHF tuner.
(3) The VHF pilot lamp cable must dress as follows: 9L37,
on tuner side of SI socket and along with tuner power
cable, J 1, around B4 panel and under dress lug mounted
on rear of VHF tuner bracket; 9L38, between Si socket
and B5 panel, around B2 panel and under CL11.
(1) All leads must be dressed clear of WR1, WR2, WR3,
WR4, WR5, 2 watt width divider resistor and filament
thermistor.
(2) Brown filament lead from L3C to V.O.S. panel must be
dressed away from 12D4 and WR5.
(3) R7, filament thermistor, must dress away from wiring
panel, clear of all lugs by at least 1/2". Body of ther-
mistor must be dressed over tuner cut-out in chassis.
No leads to be run betweenpanel and thermistor.
(4) All leads must be dressed clear of SI-3, yoke socket,
or tie lugs carrying yoke or damper leads.
(5) WR3, filament dropping resistor, must dress along B5
B.
I.
R -F tube.
(2) Speaker leads must dress under dress lug mounted on
right hand (facing rear of cab.) speaker mounting stud
and be stapled approximately in center of bottom, side
wiring panel on tuner cut-out side at approximately 45°
angle with panel. No leads to be run between WR3
and B5.
To Prevent Pinched Leads
(1) All leads must dress between end of El and side of
chassis.
No leads to be dressed under El.
To Prevent Lead Burning and Pick -Up
(I) VHF tuner filament lead and UHF pilot lamp leads must
dress between the antenna taper line assy. and the 4BC8
cabinet rail. These leads connect to lugs L9U and L1OU
in the 9L37 and to L7N and L8N in the 9L38.
CHASSIS 9L37 & 9L37U
K.
To Prevent Pickup
(1) CRT and yoke cable (less CRT cathode lead) must dress
under long dress lug on left tube strap (facing rear of
To Prevent Breakdown
(1) 3KV disk condenser must be dressed at least 1/4" away
from all wires, lugs, components and chassis.
D. To Prevent Corona
(I) S3 socket must be kept free of points or sharp edges due
to wiring and soldering.
(2) Rotate S3 cap to absorb any excess lead. Lead must be
at least 3/4" from metal of high voltage cage.
(3) 9L38 only - Radiating fins on H.O.T. must be dressed
away from transformer winding and against side of H.V.
C.
tube).
(2)
(3) Fishpaper separator must be inserted in the support collar of tube assy. to keep the CRT cathode lead separated
from all other leads.
(4)' CRT and yoke cable (less CRT cathode lead) must dress
directly back from spindle to clamp mounted on top
rear cabinet rail. All slack to be pulled through clamp.
(5) CRT cathode lead must dress directly from spindle to
dress lug mounted on top, side cabinet rail, to L3U.
Excess lead to be banked under the dress lug.
cage.
(4) All unused lugs of S3 socket must be bent down toward
center of socket.
E. To Prevent Regeneration
(1) All leads connecting to the I -F panel must be as short
as possible and any slack pulled from under the
I -F
CHASSIS 9L38 & 9L38U
L.
shield.
To Prevent Depadding
(1) All leads must be dressed clear of the quadrature coil.
G. To Prevent Unstable Sync
F.
(1) The white AGC lead from the tuner cable, J1, must
To Prevent Component Damage
N.
housing is assembled.
Underwriters Requirements
(1) X3, on 2nd video amp. assy., must be dressed down
toward chassis but must be kept at least 1/4" away
from chassis; to prevent damage to coil when plastic
I.
El and chassis, to B1-1.
To Reduce Vertical and Horizontal Drift
(1) The following components on the V.O.S. panel must
be dressed perpendicular to the panel: Ni, N2, N3,
N4, N5 and C5U (C4N of 9L38).
To Prevent Parasitic Oscillation
(I) Vertical output cathode lead from L3N to E3-3, must
dress under V.O.S. panel between panel and chassis,
through hole in chassis, under El to E3-3, The lead
must be kept as short as possible.
M.
dress under wiring panel at end of E2, between E2 and
H.
CRT cathode lead must dress under lug on right tube
strap.
Underwriters Requirements
(1) Aquadag grounding spring must dress between C.R.T.
straps and must not touch either strap.
(1) VHF tuner I -F link must dress under lug mounted on
top, front of VHF tuner.
(2) Tuner power cable, J1, must dress under CL13, around
B3 panel on side away from R7, and between SI socket
and B5 panel.
106
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L37 Service Information, Continued
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS SHOWN ARE MADE WITH NO SIGNAL ON ANTENNA.
12006A
HOR. OUT.
3
eV
541-1
102 )1R5
WIDTH
H.O.T.
S4U
6CG7
DEC. L219
2800
25401
NOTE
VOLTAGE READINGS TAKEN
WITH A PHILCO V.T.V.M.
MODEL 7001 AND YOKE
PLUGGED IN.
NOTE (D) INDICATES AVERAGE
C.R T.
275V
READING.
25600
25100)
L2
AUX Out
CONTROL SETTINGS
VOLUME-FULL C.CW.
13V
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
WIDTH
265V
1
-6V
20V
600
2511101
/ 10
1501
20V
6000.
00
VERT. HOI.B-le MOW., 5(1,11,10
tin
DAMPER
2500
OV
1000
25Kua
I-3311
519E3
15 3160
FRINGE SW- NORMAL
1204
3v
S3C
SIC
100v
1350
FOR 1.10
HOR. HOLD
SOUN6
1900
25101
CW.
BUZZ POT
75
6U
38ND
DET
FULL Cw
I
VERT. LIN.
HEIGHT
2310O1
T VI. F
38Z6
210 VIE
340 V.I.F.-SET
, 140114
3826
S2C
54M8
SV
52
.av
3A
6009
SIU
1.
5
SOUND IF
6AW8A
VIDEO AMP
-6.60
1250
B NOISE WV.
1_1117,,
vAc
40
20410
3.
201101
L5A.1i3yi
120 -
0
9L37 Voltage -Resistance Readings-Top View
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS SHOWN ARE MADE WITH NO SIGNAL ON ANTENNA
L
3350
B3
CL1
/.
AI
5V
0/25
1=3
CL5
470
Do
3
B4
560v
)1)
1501401
VARIABLE RESISTOR
1204
DAAIP
IX
soon )coLoi
3
140V
3213 47 2
1.150AC
25_31
/65K.
400V
SETT INGS
63VAC
811
FULL C.CW.
VOLUME
CONTRAST
BRIGHT.
FULL CW.
W I DT
VERT. LIN.
HEIGHT
cw.
BUZZ POT
VERT. HOLD
HOR. HOLD
S
BOVAC
88vAC
21t).
1400
163GT
HY REC.
35K(D
B9
NOTE I CI) INDICATE
AVERAGE RESIST.
READING.
POWER
GK
251001
-440
NEC IN SYNC.
NOTE
VOLTAGE READINGS TAKEN
WITH A PHILCO VT.VM.
MODEL 7001 AND YOKE
PLUGGED IN.
C1,9
V
NORMAL
1
FRINGE SW.- NORMAL
35 ID
9L37 Voltage -Resistance Readings-Bottom View
107
J1
F.C.
32-13710-4
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L37 and 9L37U Schematic Diagram
r ---
PANEL
VIDEO
S3C
W15,750 CPS
OR 43.85MC
12ov
S2C
SIC
3BZ6
2ND VIE
7
4740 47.40 41.25 OR BL4a-r
Ti
T2
RD 42.7MC
12ov
3BZ6
1ST VIF
5
X4
TRAP TRAP TRAP
J4
T3
RD 45.75 MC
mov
NOTE:ALL SYMBOL NOS. ON THIS
PANEL USE THE SUFFIX "C.
SIC
1/2 5AMB
1/2 5AM8
3RD VIE
VID. DET.
2.50
7
VT
3
XcrD
vc,
X
Z
3cC
0
2
6801
680
2V
R9
R8
1000
T GMV
-4- C6
GMV _L
L5AC
/3-3
VC2
IL=_
5%1
R12 470K
L7C
110V P/P
RANGE SWITCH
5 LOCAL
1
Swi ?LONG DISTANCE
C3)1.15
RI
3.3
470K
60 CPS
VERT. INTEGRATOR 30-6030-7
10K
BOK
C51470
118K
4
-I 21
-1 3
R3
2.2MEG I W
60 CPS
vvv
VERT. OSC.
S2U
.004
33K
+
IOOMF -7--
S2U
1/2 100E7
1/2
62 V P/P
V ER
60 CPS
200V
2W
RII
125 0 PP
200V
-I-
B+ 140V
9V P/P
Cl
.22=
MEG
IF AGC
200V
8140v=
TUNER AGC
R7
CI IT
CB
470
47T lot
613
I 3S
C2 -
.av
1000T
I
j_GMV
RI
15K
CI4
330
R3
1-5
VC3
5- 3
6801
2
V
n
VC4
C10
(NJ
R DX -68 N
14C
C9
-rl000
)/C
1-5
X5
1.20
E3-2
r
B
820K
15K
15,750
246 PP
15,750
15K
8311
1500 ±1
VERT. FEED
BACK
15330
31
COIL
-4.-T
2
PHASE COMP.
30 6509-2
I-C ' 0
OR. RING.
S 3U
/2 9BR7
7
1.8 MEG
Cl
= 1._ N2
530 PP
CPS
15,750 CPS
3
R8
2200
I
3
5V P/P
-My
1
33K
R2
I
Bs.,
_
4
260V
ODE 7
OUT.
y
R1
I W 400V .0056
2
47 K
20%
4700 .0012
± 10%
C3
C2
2
6 80V
82
I
01
IV
RI
I
150K
Cle
.00C33 TI .068 ,
200
1200V
68K
123
I
R26
30-6034-I
=
LI5U
R2
400.0.
COLD
13
FUSIBLE
RESISTOR
1111 HOT
R8
5.60
-6.
THERM1STOR
=
R5
.1140±1 (CI4 C1411001
_E2+
GMV'
140MF
C
4
.m.1u-'
GMV
4
S2C
3,-. UHF
350V I 300V
= E1-4
-
S7U
S5U
StU
3
22u 3 4
;47C3/ 3 BN64
C5C
J3 5
SF2IA L
CRT
5
3
S 3U
.047
200V
400V
R16
2700
S47.17
4
IW
8/v4 1)L2OU
5
C13
01
1"1"
VIDEO, OSC SOUND PANEL
mr
C13A
T .001
Vertical Linearity -Adjust with a thin screwdriver through
the hollow brightness shaft.
Height -Adjust with a thin screwdriver through the hollow vertical hold shaft.
Horizontal Hold Centering -Adjust with a thin screwdriver through the hollow horizontal hold control shaft.
108
R18
100K
1W
R15
ezt6K98?
56K
mr
2;1071261K
J3 -4
RECEIVER SET-UP CONTROL LOCATIONS
3.
C12
100E7 9BR7 6CG7
6AW8A
600 MA
2.
2.2K
4
2.35V
1.
_ E1 -I
S2U
I2CAS 36u 3AU6
S3C
VIF PANEL 1000-1--
.140MF
400 + 0
- IOOMF
RIO
El+
I+
RECTIFIERSJREc
470K
_4.
20MF
300v
RD IHY OR
GERMANIUM 1
1
.001
3BZ6 38Z6
OR- gR
G1U
255V
AJ_ONLY
-- -=
=
.001- UHF ONLY SI
S2
12D4 12D06A
OR-GR
IC
300 MA
I
200V
F.C.
1 GM V
,[
L2iu°
A
VR5
170V P/P
15,750 CPS
4. Width -Remove back. Width control is at the side in
front of Range Switch.
5. Fusible B+ resistor -Remove back. Resistor is a plug-in
at left center of chassis, in front of high voltage cage.
6. Tubes -All tubes (except CRT) are accessible after removing back and partly removing chassis. IG3GT, high
voltage rectifier is in cage. 9L38 only-3CB6, 2nd video
Amp., is mounted with CRT; remove CRT rear access cover.
-
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L37 and 9L37U Schematic Diagram
ITIDEO, OSC, SOUND PANEL
NOTE: ALL SYMBOL NOS. ON THIS
PANEL USE THE SUFFIX U.
IOOV
I
I
SIF
=....
1
5
S6U
ov
6
- - 1001/
R24
R
330K
12 GAG
R33
A UD. OUT.
1
o
L
BLUE
C19
.001
T4
v
CONT.
L26U
L25U0
T C18
L1CU
sPKR.
.008
--
7
7.5 .004.7
T5 _152IC20
)
GMV 1.002
==
R24 180
VRI
BUZZ
600
R18
8200
B+ 140V
24
T8 !."'E-
P/P
OCK
L19
1/2 6AW84
SW
VIDEO
IL12U
53
1(
7
1/2 6AW8A
30-6519-2 SYNC. SEP.
L 2U
2200
R23
NAN
3 4.5MC 2
1
2200
680
7 85V
ib.L1
I_3..5
-
3BN6
SOUND DISC.
I
2
101,..
i
'
I j_
3Au6
C16
111)12111
- - -,i
1-
S5U
4.5 MC
SOUND
TAKEOFF
I
T3
41 INTERSTAGE
-NN
RI
220K
51
O
HV
L4U
R2I
I 5KV
37V P/P
1.5
15,750 CP
MEt
3 .1*1
2508
BRIGHT
R6
VR4
1500
8000 P/F
2W
60 CPU
L2U
28 V P/P
15,750 CPS
WR2
R5
3308
3900
7w
1.8 MEG 3
i-N/Vv-
I-4
2
9.
R22
WRI 1000 1W
C7
-1
270
.0056
400V
+
3y,
5
- 200MF
*OPTIONAL FOR
L160
LIU
R4
1.8 MEG
RETRACE
SUPPRESSION
vERT. LIN.
VR4
2 MEG
CONTRAST
!MEG
R2
1
30-6024-I
F241
.005
10K
ea_
.002
2
CONNECTOR
YS -10
400V
vE R T.
W
RD
YOKE
400
CIO
YS -9
x
HV RECT.
JI TUNER
CONNECTOR
J2 TUNER TO
IF CONNECTOR
-I P.---TE6I'2-4-Th-
[
S3
IG3G T
_ _J
39K
YS YOKE
CONNECTOR
J3 CRT SOCKET
oa c2.50
o3
R13
1.033
3
HEIGHT
2.5 MEG
VR3
BK
vO.T.
BL-WH
IFICcl
I
=
5
VR1
1
E3 -3I 25V
FOCUS
vvv-
J4 UHF TO VHF
CONNECTOR
275V
Schematic Diagram for Chassis 9L37 and 9L37U
X2
4 R21
YS
RFC
Lett
YS -7 2.2 K YS -3
R9
NOTES:
Si
1204
C
HOR.
YOKE
4on
5
XI
RFC
X
YS -8
1.50
13+ 275V
400V
All capacitor values greater than
are in MMF unless otherwise noted.
All capacitor values less than are in MFD unless otherwise noted.
All resistors are 1/2 watt, 10%, carbon unless otherwise noted.
Arrow through control indicates clockwise rotation.
Voltages are DC from point shown to chassis unless otherwise noted.
Voltages were read using a V.T.V.M. Voltages were taken with no
signal. The receiver was adjusted for a good quality picture; i.e.,
normal contrast, brightness, width, height, vertical lin. and sound,
picture in sync, then removed signal.
I
I
DAMPER
IOMF
450V
1 -t( --j_
E3-1 -
*Focus voltage optional for best focus.
Coal resistances read with coil
in
circuit.
Indicates a coil resistance of less than
UHF CROSSOVER NETWORK
A UHF -VHF antenna crossover network is available for use
with the 9L37U & 9L38U chassis sets. This network should
ohm.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR CLEANING WINDOW
If the transparent window in the front of the picture tube
occasionally needs cleaning, use only mild soap and water on
a damp cloth. Rinse, then dry with a soft flannel cloth.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN WITH ABRASIVES OR
be ordered through our Accessory Division by part no. 426-3034.
This UHF -VHF crossover kit is complete with mounting
hardware and installation instructions.
CAUTION:
I
CLEANING FLUIDS.
Use an isolation transformer for "on the bench"
For the 9L38 the interconnecting cable may be cleaned the
servicing as one side of the line is connected to the
same as the window.
chassis.
109
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L37, -U, 9L38, -U, Service Information, Continued
SAQ5
NOTE
T4
AUDIO
OUT.
TO ALL SYMBOL NOS. ON THIS
PANEL ADO THE SUFFIX N.
C19
I0
3AU6
T3
3BN6
SOUND
BUZZ
QUAD.
COI
CO
C0
C17
AMP
INTER -
STAGE
T5
S.I.F. POLE
C9
CI6
C5
T2
HORIZONTAL
Cl2
RINSING COIL
C8
C7
Lt4
i45MC
TRAP
-C2
6CG7
HOR.
OSC.
L13
ca
L9
t6
61
L3
L5
1,2
N5
IODE7
9BR7
a
6
.V/BA
isr6A/
vIDEO
VERT. OSC.
a OUT.
SYNC. SEP.
COMPARER
NOISE INVERT.
9L38 video -oscillator -sound perma-circuit panel
RUN CHANGE INFORMATION
V.I.F. Panel
9L37 and 9L37U Chassis
Main Chassis
Run 5-Green dot, first production 9L37 chassis.
Run 6-Blue Dot. Special lead dress of filament choke X9C
to eliminate channel 8 beat. X9C was raised up from
panel to give greater spacing between choke and copper
foil; thus radiation from foil to choke was reduced.
Run 1-First Production (used Run 5 of V.I.F. panel)
Run 2-Use of Run 6 V.I.F. panel to eliminate channel 8 beat
Run 3-Use of Run 2 V.O.S. panel to reduce stretch.
Y. S. (yoke socket) rotated 45° CCW. S1 socket (damper
tube) rotated 45° CW. C6 moved from yoke socket (Y.S.)
and wired across damper socket S1-3 to S1-5. Damper
socket lug S1-4 must be bent toward center or inside of
Y.O.S. Panel
Run 3-Orange Dot. R11U, vertical osc. plate load resistor,
changed in value to 2.7 megohms, 1 watt, part number
C4 moved from B3-4 and B3-7 to B3-4 and B3-1.
A two lug wiring panel (B4A) was added near E3. The
orange lead from J3-1 was changed from B8-8 to the new
panel B4A-1. A 47,000 ohms, 1/2 W resistor, R8A was
added from B4A-1 to E3-1. This places a 47,000 resistor
socket.
in
66-5274340.
To improve centering of height control.
Run 4-Yellow Dot. R7U, noise inverter cathode resistor,
changed in value to 3600 ohms, 5%, part number 662368240. To prevent blocking.
series with the CRT screen between the screen and
9L38 and 9L38U Chassis
Main Chassis
400V boost to prevent CRT damage by arcing.
Red lead from B10-1 (B+ focus connection) changed
from B3-6 (275V) to J3-1.
A dress lug was added between B3-7 and Si. The tuner
cable leads and pilot lamp lead must dress between B5
wiring panel and S1 socket and under added dress lug.
Run 4-Use of Run 3 V.O.S. panel. VR-3 height control
changed to 3.4 megohms, part number 33-5592-28. To
improve centering of height control.
Run 2-A two lug wiring panel, B4A, was added next to and
parallel to E5 on the chassis bottom. C5 was moved to
wire from B2-9 to B4A-2. The value of C5 was changed
from 250 mmf, 3KV, ceramic disk to 320 mmf, 3KV,
ceramic disk, part number 30-1246-24. A resistor, R6A,
Run 5-Use of Run 4 V.O.S. panel to prevent blocking of
socket and cable assy. lead lengths changed.
Two .01 ufd tubular condensers and a 10,000 ohm resistor
removed and a resistor -condenser network, Ni, added in
their place for retrace suppression. Part number of Ni
is 30-6037-1. NI wires to B8-3, B8-2 and B8-1. At this
time R15 changed wiring points from B4-5 and B4-6 to
B4-6 to B8-2. The blue lead from J3-14 changed from 1345 to B8-2. To improve wiring and to use retrace suppression network.
Run 4-R11, the 2200 ohm hor. osc. de -coupling resistor, is
removed from E1-1 and El -2. C4, .047 ufd tuner 8+ de coupling condenser, is removed from B2-2 and_B2-5. An
orange lead is added between E1-2 and B2-5.
Run 6-VR1, contrast/vol./on-off control changed to 33-5592-42.
This changes the contrast section from 2 megohms to 1
megohm and removes R22 from across the contrast control.
was added from B4A-2 to S1-3. R6A is 470 ohms, 2 watts,
part number 66-1476340. To reduce horizontal ringing.
Run 3-Pilot lamp socket and cable assy. and tuner power
noise inverter stage.
Run 6-R10, 2200 ohm hor. osc. de -coupling resistor, is removed from E1-1 and El -2. C4, .047 ufd tuner B+ de -
coupling condenser, is removed from B3-1 and B3-4. B7,
the three lug wiring panel is removed. An orange wire
is added from F.1-2 to B3-4. This makes E1-2 the de coupling filter condenser for tuner B+ and hor. osc. B+.
The following wiring points were changed with no change
in circuitry. R12 changed from B7-2 and B7-3 to B4-4
and B4-5. C8 changed from B7-3 and B6-8 to B4-2 and
B4-5. The black lead from SW1-3 changes from B7-3 to
B4-5.
Run 7-VR1, contrast/vol./on-off control, changed to 33-5592-42.
This changes the contrast section from 2 megohms to
1
megohm and removes R22 from across the contrast control.
110
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L38 Service Information, Continued
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS
14
J3
LC1
SHOWN ARE MACE WITH
NO SIGNAL ON ANTENNA
AND YOKE PLUGGED IN.
PHILCO V.T.V.M. MODEL
7001 USED TO TAKE
NOTE. ID) INDICATES AVERAGE
RESISTANCE READING.
SW1.
FRINGE SWITCH
1100
nr
so
820
50.01
620
80V
READINGS.
RAOIATIO.
180
POOK
VR5 TO
250V
150(0
] WIDTH 2.5(1
120063
OUT
0-27F
J
RE
"s.
7E-10391-1
U -S1
103E7
2AFLT'8'sc
NM.
300V
UHF. TUNER
14
3,1
1 tlm
101
VH.F.TUNER
LPN
DORI
STN
PHASE 036T
SAGS
213010 CUT
SS,. SEP a
N
B13
ILLYLILY
REC1
13V
SOK
L3N
nrseint-r.
S2N
teov
17,01
1-2"
VHF T-600 TS -11E50-7
UHF T-694 T6.11547-8
51a°
Ov
100E7
VERT OSC. a
S5N
VERT. OUT.
SIF
W.
LIEN
VARIABLE RESISTOR SETTINGS
0
1C.tDOvAC
SOLUME
BR
.IGHT
soO LTC
C
3826
1st vii
DET
9L38 Voltage -Resistance Readings-Top View
SW1
FRINGE SWITCH
J3
LCD
\\,
mmccmpmc.
V.H.F. TUNER
VµF. 1.0E1776.-11.450
WO. MODEL 76,15.4,R
ler
NOTE 10/ INDICATES IMERACE
RESISTANCE READING.
VPI2
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS
SHOWN ARE MADE WITH
NO SIGN. ON ANTENNA
AND YOKE PLDODED IN.
PHILCO V.T.V.M. MODEL
7001 uSED TO TAKE
READINGS.
VARIABLE RESISTOR SETTINGS
C CW
As
FVLI
VERT LIN.
.
1GMT
11.2 POT
VERT
NoR
".al. RI C 7.74!
FR,NGE SW- NOR.I.
IDEO AMPLIFIER A65EMELY.
9L38 Voltage -Resistance Readings-Bottom View
111
kt CMS
S4,14.1.nnir
FRINGE Sot-NORMAL
i
3826
2.1 viT.
r
BUZZ POT
>a51c
SAM8
361 V IF
FULL C.Cw.
(r FULL ,
BRIGHT
WIDTH
VERT. TI N.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L38 and 9L38U Schematic Diagram
P/P
VIDEO I F PANEL
SUFFIX
3
C*)
1ST VIF
5
7
6
X3cF3
1-5
2
(S.1
10
330
47 -r-
CI5
BN
VID DET
7
VT
3
X5
1.2C
15K
5
GMV _L
1000
2205 TGMV
330
10%
R8
CuT
CI3
R6r
R7
1000
10%
22
X2
2.50
3
RI
C4
1000-r
3.3
'"
"C
8VC14
R3 __C:70
1-5
=-
2
I
2
=R9
7V
-/ 0 0 X60
-÷7
5AC
5%-
R23
C7I ra-23
I
-r-1000
-r
680
C10 j_
Cs.1
RD-BN
VC3
120V
6
C9
VCI
O
7
1
0
Li)C,
1/2 5AM8
3RD VIF
5
IC
2, .1-1/2 5S AIC
SIC
3BZ6
2ND VIF
27K
15.750 CPS
OR 43.85MC
120V
F-
S2C
R5
3BZ6
.C".
42.7mc
RD
120V
4
S3C
TRAP TRAP TRAP,Z4n, 42.7
47.40 47.40 41.23 vn-BL MC
J2
RD 45.75MC
130y
NOTE: TO ALL SYMBOL NOS. ON
THIS PANEL ADD THE
Ti
T2
73
470K
2.2 K
RANGE SWITCH
,R16 LOCAL
6C
L7C
1100 WP
60 CPS
.15
LONG DISTANCE
600V
= .01
200V
B+ 140V =
470K
R3
TUNER AGC
3.3 .22
MEG 200VT
9V P/P
S2N
VERT. INTEGRATOR 30-6030-7
.005
10K
90K R3
RI
60 CPS
,=
3.3MEG IW
62/ RP
1/2 IODE7
-13
60 CPS
VERT. OSC
115V
150
20MFT
300V
IOW
.004 C2
33K
E3 -2A +
WR1
3000
7
N5
2
C3'
IIOOV
R6
1000
10V P/P
15,750
5,750 CPS
.11
S3N
8
-OFF
82
Oa
COIL T2
150K
600V --r
17/1
WR3\
C6
811
C2
3.641
8
7
3BZ6 3BZ6
5
4
ICC5C
3
1300 BR-GR
lVIF PANEL
'
_1
UF
_LONH LY
7
34
4-
_R E_C Tit E_R S
.001
C16
I; 5A05
=470 1 4
4
34
B+ 275V
o 4011 +
= E1-4
104DE75
3
54
300V
L2ON
4
47K
SM
94BR75
30K
3
12D06A
HOR. OUT.
5
44V
HOR
HOLD
IBOV
RI9
CPS
IW
2700 R20
1W
I_LCI9N 3BN6
fil
_I_
E VIDEO, OSC SOUND PANEL)I
2W
C171-.
15,750
2700
8
.01
.001i
250K VR2
S2
i_C14
1
560K
C13
1200V
a
I§
L-I
1311
2.2K
-I10
- ES -1
9
30-6512-7
H08. OSC.
50 VP/P
GIN
L13N
,r.100GMV0
6AW8A
3.9K
R2
390
56K
...,...47001
0
7
C4
L9N
F.1
140MF /100MF
I 350V
R3
111=
= L12
E_FA +
FC
_ 2OMF
H0YOR - 300V
3AU6
3
.0012E
4700
0033
330
470K
K
RD
s
500MA
SILICON
-12
200V
5AM8
4
140MF
C2
12D06A
12D4
OR- GR
WR 5
AC 1
C3
C2
15,7500'6V
R20
C7 -L
-=
C15)1--,47°
..E2,
HOR. OSC.
CPS
6
_I .068-r
FUSIBLE
RESISTOR
COLD
6CG7
15,750
.°°31-1 200
R7
40011
I9V P/P
68
N4
I
IBOV
S4N
R18
C3
R2
010%
2
30-6034-I
THERMISTOR
.001 zijtif
6
R3
200
L2,2_
VHF
1311
MEG
3rc, .001
18120%
IW 200V .0039
1
--CT1
RI
1111 HOT
60 CPS
39K
I5K
5
61316K
INTER OCK
411,
15 V P/P
1500
iR19
1
JI
CI
HOR. RING.
15 750 CPS
PHASE COMP
WI
6.3250MA
PL1
en%
1.$MEG
2200
LN2
53V
1/2 9BR7
7
VERT.
HOLD
LC1
C233K
150K
3
12K
5/8?L
VR3 30K
60(1/ 1400V
Y
(C6
CPS
2
IW
R2
11V&WaNMICT13V
.22
C4
VERT. OUT.
400V
L4N
CI
.047
1KV
10
1/2 IODE7
8
820K
270V
Cl
1500
4 30-6509-2
R18
117VAC
VERT.
FEEDBACK
I-
S2N
2
I2K
WIDTH 3VR5
70 I/ P/P
15,750 CPS
Schematic Diagram for Chassis 9L38 and 9L38U, Run 3
are in MMF unless otherwise noted.
NOTES: All capacitor values greater than
are in MFD unless otherwise noted.
All capacitor values less than
All resistors are 1/2 watt, 10%, carbon unless otherwise noted.
I
I
112
Arrow through control indicates clockwise rotation.
Voltages are DC from point shown to chassis unless otherwise noted.
Voltages were read using a V.T.V.M. Voltages were taken with no signal.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L38 and 9L38U Schematic Diagram
R25
VR
VIDEO, OSC, SOUND PANEL
2.5 MEG
NOTE. TO ALL SYMBOL NOS. ON TI -OS PANEL
T3
ADD THE
1000
4 INTERSTAGE
SUFFIX "N".
rS5N
3AU6
SOUND
TAKEOFF
2
eit 10
7
,...
_I
Ti
1
1
I...
7
!
3.5n
3
n==
GMV
AGC
VR1
BUZZ
R16
1.001
R25
600
Lgt
30101100
15,750 CPS
SIN
VIDEO
55V
R3
135V
2W
INAA-.27K,IW
32000MvF
SIN
=
31135V
1.5
-CO
".008
fl
I
45MC TRAP
68
0
150K
80V
RII
3
R4
22K
4700
15
R5
R23
MEG
.
68
600 V IC2 C3
500
RI2
I
180K
3
R4
R6 5%
3300
T1
RSO
.0022
4
R13
R
2201.1H
I
,
R14
120K
680K T6 2V
tan
XI
MEG
(C,
R2
R15
200V
2.2
180
R5
BRIGHT
140V
4700
330K
250K
.033
Ll5N
PO CP
22K
9
2
R1
680K
R21
R15
1/2 6AW8A
YNC. SEP.
RI2
L207N
NOISE INVERTER
1/2 6AW8A
C5
TNI
MEG
10
20 10 750 P/P
15,T57CPS
1/2 9BR 7
30-"."4'I
330
LI8N
3.9K
1W
S3N
41 0
r
8+140V
260V
E4ICAF
C16
150K
IF
LOBN
RED
15750 CP5
,,;4.
A 0 T.
MEG
R26
131/ PIP
LIEN
5f1
1000V
2 9V
a
SPKR.
LN
1014
047
6
1018
CIO
10
820K
L2p BLUE
55V
-.001
T4
.001
8200
B+ 140V
5
.008
48V 04
V
-
180
R24
C13
5
2
"/ )1"
.0022
AUD. OUT.
6
.0047 iv
T5,- 1115
5,53_
5405
680
VOL.
R26 CONT.
f
S7N
R27
v
i
L 3.5n
6 -100v
-
--,
3 BN6
j_v# SOUND DISC.
i _um
SI F
Cl2
---1
1
5
24
L24N
L25N0
S6N
R8
1W
3300
L2
280 PP
160 6
50 CPS
2W
OLI4N
LINO
V P/P
15.150 1 PS
45 TO 12
WR2
I
C7
E3-3+ 270 3
6
200+
mF0-r- 1000
25V.1_ VERT.
U7rO033
400V
LIN.
10%
1.0 MEG
tr
3R914K
1.8 MEG
3.4 MEG
B+ 275V
VR3 --s-m
Hoi-_-=n71 RETRACE
SUPPRESSION
-.
= I 1000V .01
I 0 K._
D33
I
IW
E5
300V 2
QQYjI
C -n OUT
TRANS
'="
C8
400 V
HEIGHTTA'c
5
*'2.5 VERT
IW
2 MEG
I
R22 CONTRAST
I MEG
BLK
BL
LIN
NO.R4
R2
VR4
VR-1
9
14
36 1,13
13
RDJY1
=
-F400V
VERT.
YOKE
I-
J4
_12
0
512
40M H
COTO
C18
R214
1.80'
3
R28
MEG
2
5
3KV R6A
10
7
320
1.5."X30
ORANGE
18011H
ACK
5,750CPS1
68R0029
3CB6
2W
VIDEO
100K
IW
R30
5 M H,9.4.0TOT.
GRAY
DARK BROWN
4,1
1
*OPTKAAL FOR
T FOCUS
BEST
72V
Y
4MF
47K
E6
O
<1 INTERLOCK
BLK
10 MF
450V=
400V
IW
C20
8
E3- I0+
21SFA
2 t EAP4
2 3KV
CI9
.22
47K
ND.
GRAY
Y2
IW
.7:f
R
120
2,6
163 GT
H V RECT.
RI7
100K
3
400V
HOR. YOKE
16
C12 400V
400V
2,50 PIP
S4
470
*c5 2W
.022
X3
4700
S1
12 D4
DAMP.
X2
RFC
250V
.022
O
3CB6
3r)4
2.35V
600MA
CRT
81"\ I
14-27
I
I
R32
300V
.2-1 I
T005 MEGI
--
LIGHT BROWN
Coil resistances read with coil in circuit.
ohm.
Indicates a coil resistance of less than
The receiver was adjusted for a good quality picture; i.e., normal contras+, brightness, width, height, vertical lin. and sound, picture in sync,
I
+hen removed signal.
* Run 2 change
t
113
Run 3 change
S
See Run Change Information.
X4
5 )IH
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L38 Service Information, Continued
SW1
J3
LC1
REMOTE CRT
SOCKET
FRINGE SAV.7.
I\
3
OMITTED
cx.ctx,
nec,nc,
7-27F
U.H.F. TUNER
76,0391'1
541,
57N
SON
VH.F TUNER
aA010
SYNC9F17 SEP
RIASE
9.4F
Yi
T.999
7611450')
Nif T.699 79 11.7
RECA
913
51N_
100E7
VERT OSC
VERT OuT
,tea F
v ant 1
TYNER I F
0,4
(0X0),
VRI
OFF...SOL
CONTRAST
33 SAW 42
MOONS
IN 9-14
Rowii
915
9L38 Chassis Component Layout, Top View
9L38 Chassis Component Layout, Bottom View
114
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO TELEVISION
PREDICTA TANDEM
TV MODEL G-4720
9L38A & AUDIO AMPLIFIER
CHASSIS REMOVAL
To Remove Top-Remove amplifier knobs (4), remove
the two top retaining screws at top rear. Slide
cabinet top back (approx. 1") to disconnect the
AC interlock and to free the guides at center top
of each side. Lift top off and set aside. The line
cord is held by two cable clamps.
DESCRIPTION
The entire TV and audio amplifier chassis are
Models G-4720 and UG-4720 are Predicta Tandem
now exposed for service checks, tube replacement,
TV featuring the separate picture tube and a 4 watt
etc.
audio amplifier. These models match, and are intended
to be used with, model G -1606-S, high fidelity phono-
graph consolette, for stereophonic reproduction.
The TV portion of model G-4720 uses a type 9L38A
chassis. See page 116 for description.
The audio amplifier section uses a 6AU6 as first audio,
a pair of 6AQ5's as audio output and a 6X4 rectifier.
The function switch has three positions: center is "Off";
CCW is the "Phono" position which turns on the amp-
To Remove Amplifier Chassis-Remove cabinet top. Re-
move the two screws from top edge of chassis.
Disconnect the TV a.c., phono input and speaker
leads. Pilot lamp removes from front clip. Unsolder the two leads from B21-1 and 2 that connect
to the CRT remote socket (J3) and the TV audio
leads connecting to TV V.O.S. panel lugs L7N &
L8N. The amplifier is now free to lift out. The
bottom lip of chassis fits in a groove of cabinet
lifier only; CW is the "TV" position which turns on
both the amplifier and TV, selects the TV audio and
completes the circuit from the amplifier output to the
remote C.R.T. socket for the extension speaker jack.
bottom.
To Remove TV Chassis-Remove cabinet top. Remove
knobs. Disconnect TV a.c. and antenna leads and
unsolder the two remote speaker leads from amp.
The speakers used are a 6" pm woofer and an "S" type
electrostatic.
chassis terminal panel B21-1 and 2 and the TV
audio leads. Remove the two front chassis mounting screws from cabinet bottom. Remove the two
screws from the top rear retaining plate. Remove
left hand back section; three screws, lift back up
and out. Remove the two screws from rear chassis
mounting strip; one screw at right top and one
R26
820K
screw from left rear.
TO
400V
Remove the 6AW8A (video amp. -noise inverter)
tube from its socket just to the rear of the speaker.
Lift rear of TV chassis up and out.
100K
2.2MEG
R25A
o
9L38A TV
R25
R24
L25N
,
94.=Tr
5A Q 5
AU D OUT
5
680
(Continued on page 116)
CHASSIS
A.O.T.I
L22N
BLUE
.008
R27N
TWO LEAD, BROWN,
TV AUDIO CABLE
TO WS7, FUNCTION
.001
118N
L7N
ov
SWITCH ON AUDIO.
AMP. CHASSIS.
25
MF
R26N
25V
E4
I MEG
9L38A V.O.S. PANEL
RED
L27N
9L38A Audio Circuit Showing Added Audio Divider Resistors
115
L8N
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO TV MODEL G-4720, Continued
STRAP WIRE
JUMPS SWITCH
B14
S7N
12CA5
AUDIO OUT.
VOLUME CON
SECTION NOT
CONNECTED
BC -3
ADDED
AUDIO
DrVIDER
Pri=l,
RESISTORS
R2 N
o4N
811
CION,
9L3HA Chassis
S6N-
Layout Differences
T 3N
,2
SAD3RNE,
DE7.
i
C 16N
cn
CD
ti_
0z
DJ
00
C.) 2 °
0 36
w
(Del
1- - P
C4
Z (7)
x'00-
0
\
9L38A TV CHASSIS
,4a00
1
The 9L38A TV chassis is identical to the 9L38
chassis with the following exceptions.
The on -off switch is shorted by a jumper wire,
the on -off action is accomplished by the function
switch on the audio amplifier chassis.
in I
In Ass z
1
CV
>
tr)
a'
10
siAllct.
The TV volume control is present but not wired
u_
u_
into the circuit. In place of the volume control two
0
resistors (R24A and R25A) have been added as a
fixed audio divider, see figures.
The secondary of the TV audio output transformer
is wired over to the audio amplifier chassis where
it is loaded by R49 and presented to the audio amplifier's volume control circuit. V.O.S. panel lugs
z,
wo A002
odl,m
(Do
to
z,-P
zco
2°
_1 0
0
I
r-
Cl-
L7N and L8N are the terminals for this two wire
cable.
The remote speaker jack, provided on the C.R.T.
base, is fed through the function switch and works
only when the function switch is in "TV" position.
J5
30-2575.47
350WV OR.
350WV RD
10 MFD. 350W V BL.
30 MFD
20 MFO
COMMON
NEG.
BK.
WH'
ill/
g t-; g
1c .F.,t
c,
-0.g. -
'1'C
40 r..z
.2 d
r. 2
e.
-e°
Ow
Z - I,il
x EN
We'
ur ;',
.1.1
,Q4 41
J
rowl->2
0.1.
Component Layout, Audio Amplifier Section, Model G-4720
116
'a
10
P..
ti
.5
, Et
5
I
2
0,4
45i
2 S",,,
.,'"' ,.;
%"T'd -
...:
s .x5 s E
.e
u°
".eO
,.
p, - s
u,
''''
:
2
- °,,." g
; i 2., :: 1.9fc::.
0
.
:"..
.
,-, . §
-E.
g
as
-cs
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
P H I L C O TELEVISION
9L60 and 9L60U CHASSIS
RECEIVER SET-UP CONTROL LOCATIONS
1. Vertical Linearity -Accessible from back of receiver. Lefthand control mounted on deflection PW panel.
2. Height -Accessible from back of receiver, left-hand side of
dual potentiometer on deflection PW panel.
3. Horizontal Hold Centering -Right-hand control of dual potentiometers on deflection PW panel, accessable from back of
MODEL NO.
CHASSIS
G -4240M
G -4240L
UG-4240M
UG-42401
G-4656SM
UG-4656SM
G-4658SM
receiver.
4. Width -Extreme right hand potentiometer on deflection PW
panel, accessable from back of receiver.
.7 Ampere Fuse -Remove back. Fuse located in plug-in fuse
holder on left side of chassis viewing from rear.
6. Tubes -All tubes (except CRT) are accessible after removing
0,16585W
5.
G-4658SL
U0-4658SM
UG-4658SW
back. 1G3GT, high -voltage rectifier, is in cage.
UG-4658SL
G-4660SM
G-466051
UG-4660SM
TUNER, CHASSIS AND CRT REMOVAL
1. Remove channel selector, fine tuning, volume and contrast
control knobs and cabinet back.
2. Disconnect speaker leads. Remove volume -contrast control
and pilot lamp assembly by first removing drive screw located
in well below knob.
3. Remove 2 screws mounting control sub assembly to cabinet
9L60
9L60
9L60U
9L6OU
9160
9160
9160
9160
9L60
9L60U
9L60U
9L60U
9L60
9L60
9L60U
MODEL NO.
UG-4660S1
G -4662M
CHASSIS
9L60U
9L60
9L60
G -4662P
G -4664P
UG-4664P
G -6628M
G-66281
UG-6628M
UG-6628L
G -6632M
G -6632L
G -6632W
UG-6632-M
UG-66321
UG-6632W
9141
9L41U
9160
9160
9L60U
9160U
9L60
9L60
9160
9L60U
91601.1
9L60U
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT
top.
4. Remove tuner and chassis mounting bolts under cabinet and
disconnect antenna leads.
5. Unplug tuner (IF link and power cable), yoke, CRT socket
and anode lead.
6. Remove chassis from rear.
7. Remove tuner mounting screw on side of cabinet, and remove
AM ALIGNMENT
CHANNEL SELECTOR: On VHF models (T-100) set to channel 4; on
removing tuner.
8. Remove top, front trim strip, protective window and mask.
RANGE SWITCH: Set to "NORMAL" position.
SCOPE: Connect to L3Y on video -sound panel, video second detector
tuner. On UHF models remove UHF tuning knob before
All 24" sets and the 21" "Miss America" models have rear
mounting CRT.
9. Remove 4 nuts and washers mounting CRT frame to cabinet.
10. Remove CRT assembly from front.
NOTE: CRT can be removed without chassis removal except in
21" "Miss America" and all 24" sets.
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
Allow set to warm up. Tune in a picture.
1. Short out the horizontal ringing coil, T1W, by placing a
jumper across C1W.
2. Set the horizontal hold control, VR2 shaft, to the center of its
range.
3. Adjust the horizontal hold centering control, VR2W screw
driver adjustment, to set the oscillator to the correct horizontal
UHF models (T -I01) set to UHF position.
SIGNAL INJECTION: VHF models (T-100) to tuner feed-thru, L4, in
mixer grid circuit. UHF models (T101) to UHF input cable plug on
tuner.
BIAS: -6.0 volts to I -F A.G.C., L6Y (on video -sound panel) and -2.5
volts to tuner A.G.C. L8Y (on video -sound panel).
output.
OUTPUT LEVEL: Not to exceed 2 volts peak to peak during pole and
sweep alignment. Not less than .2 volts peak to peak as null, during
trap alignment, is approached.
(1) 45.85 MC adjust tuner pole T3 for maximum.
(2) 41.25 MC adjust VC -3Z trap for minimum.
NOTE: Bias may be reduced as trap minimum is approached.
(3) 47.40 MC adjust VC -2Z and VC -4Z traps for minimum.
Repeat steps two and three.
(4)
(5) 42.70 MC adjust VC-IZ and T2Z for maximum.
(6) 45.0 MC adjust T3Z for maximum.
(7) 44.4 MC adjust T1Z for maximum.
SWEEP ALIGNMENT
CHANNEL SELECTOR: Set to channel 4.
line frequency (to stop the picture; it will not be stable).
SIGNAL INJECTION: To antenna terminals through an antenna matching network (generator to 300 ohms).
sloping up to the left).
4. Remove the shorting jumper from across C1W and adjust
the ringing coil (T1W) core for stable picture sync. Bring
BIAS, SCOPE and OUTPUT LEVEL: Same as above under AM Alignment.
Bring picture into sync. from high frequency side (black bars
picture into
sync.
RANGE SWITCH: Set to "NORMAL" position.
(1) Inject 65.75 MC AM, 30% modulated, into antenna. Adjust fine tuning control for minimum output. Do Not Disturb fine tuning during
balance of adjustments.
(2) Inject channel 4 sweep signal (69 MC with 6 MC sweep width) into
antenna. If necessary, adjust the following cores to bring the curve
within limits (see curve figure 2).
(a) Adjust 67.25 MC to fall at the 50% point with tuner core Tt.
from high frequency side.
CRITICAL LEAD -DRESS INFORMATION
To Prevent Damage to Lead Insulation
(b) Level curve with core TIZ.
(c) Position 70.5 MC at the 50% point with core T2Z.
(1) All leads from LI5W, L16W, LI8W, L13W must be
dressed down toward deflection panel, between NIW and
DO NOT DISTURB T3Z AND VC -1Z
N2W, under dress lug CL7. Lead from L15W must be dressed
between L 18W and VR2W, L16W and VR2W, L14W and
VR2W away from X2W and pin 6 of the damper tube.
(2) All leads from L7Y, L9Y, L4Y, LlY, L2Y, L23Y must be
dressed toward video panel, away from all tubes on panel.
(3) Leads from L1OW and S3W cap to H.O.T. horizontal
output transformer, must be dressed away from 5U4CB tube
with excess dressed over end of chassis. Orient S3W cap to
4.5 MC TRAP ALIGNMENT
(1) Inject 4.5 MC AM signal into L3Y or use station signal.
(2) Connect 4.5 MC detector (see circuit figure 1) to L17Y (pin 7 of
CRT).
NOTE: Preliminary padding of 4.5 MC test detector -Connect detector to an accurate source of 4.5 MC signal and pad core of trans-
former for maximum DC output voltage.
NOTE: When using generator, calibrate by zero beating with sound
I -F developed from station signal.
(3) Connect 20,000 ohms/volt meter, set to 2.5 volt range, to detector
dress lead away from 6DQ6A.
(4) All leads must be dressed away from Hot Resistors
WR1, WR2, WR3, WR4, WR1Y.
output.
(4) Turn contrast control fully clockwise (to maximum).
(5) Adjust 4.5 MC trap (top core of T2Y) for minimum indication.
(5) Leads from L19W and L6W must be dressed along
edge of deflection panel around G1W between 5U4GB heat
shield and edge of panel away from 6AU4 and 5U4GB.
117
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
IIMME
PHILCO Chassis 9L60, -U, Continued
I
411(
1E160
PART NUMBERS
CI
30-1221-21
OUTPUT
C2
PART CETI
TO
03
METER
RI
.301238-3
66-2418340
32-4449
C1
c
CS
001
MED
INPUT
01
-
ITAL
1,44tDtO
R. E IN MC
Tz:
rc-j-
I
.1
JI
J
34-8022-2
Fig. 1. 4.5 me Detector Tube
100
SOUND I -F ALIGNMENT
NOTE: The sound I -F alignment is based upon a properly aligned
80
video I -F strip.
(1) With a weak station signal (antenna disconnected) tune receiver for
best possible picture. Do not readjust fine tuning control during
60
balance of procedure.
(2) With a strong signal (antenna connected) adjust the quadrature coil,
T3Y, for maximum sound.
(3) Connect a VTVM to the audio test point, L14Y. Be sure voltmeter
probe contains an isolation resistor. (If it is required to add a probe
isolating resistor, use a value of 10,000 ohms or more.) Using a weak
station signal (antenna disconnected), adjust the sound take -off coil
(bottom core of T2Y) and the sound interstage transformer, T4Y
(both pri. and sec. cores), for a maximum. The station signal employed should not be too weak for this adjustment.
(4) If any signs of intercarrier buzz 'or noise interference occur, a VERY
SLIGHT adjustment of T4Y and/or the bottom core of T2Y may be
made to minimize the noise. Neither core should be adjusted more
40
20
0
I.E IN MC
(
1
1
8 000
q.
1
8n
02,28
cf
cr
c/
asst
oo o
tri
rr
.zr
Fig. 2. Overall R -F 1-F Response Curve,
than 1/4 turn.
TERMINAL LUG IDENTIFICATION - DEFLECTION PRINTED -WIRE PANEL
1.1W
L2W
L3W
L4W
L5W
L6W
L7W
L8W
L9W
Sync input lead from L4Y on video -sound panel.
Horizontal stabilizing coil test point.
L12W Vertical output 6DT5 cathode lead to electrolytic E2, lug 3.
L13W Lead (B+ boost) to electrolytic E2, lug 2, CRT pin 6 and
B+ lead (Hor. Osc.) from electrolytic El, lug 2.
to 1.113Y terminal on video -sound panel.
Filament lead input from filament transformer.
270V B+ input from electrolytic Et, lug 4.
Filament lead to chassis ground from 6DQ6A, pin 7.
Lead to vertical hold control VR1.
Lead to terminal L1SW from horiz. output screen grid.
Lead to hor. output trans. (B+ boost).
L IOW Lead to hor.-output trans. from 6DA4GT damper cathode.
L11W Not used.
L14W Lead to L23Y terminal on video -sound panel and arm of
brightness control VR3.
1.15W Lead to top of brightness control VR3.
L16W Lead to top of horizontal hold control VR2.
LI7W Black and white to lead vertical output trans. primary.
LISW Jumper wire connection from L8W to arm of width control
VR3W.
LOW B+ lead from width control VR3W to WR3 resistor.
S2W
S1W
6CG7
VERT. OSC.
C3 C8
N2
LI
Ni
R2
DS
C10
Cl
L5
6 DO6
NOR. OUTPUT
L2
T1
N3
S 3W
6CG7
NOR. OSC.
GI
C4
RI
R9
R8
C11
R10
C15
R16
S4W
VR3
WIDTH
VR2
VR1
VERT L IN
VERT. HEIGHT
6DT5
VERT OUT
HOR.
HOLD
CENT.
S5W
6DA4
DAMPER
Deflection Printed Wiring Panel
118
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L60, 9L60U, Service Information, Continued
TERMINAL LUG IDENTIFICATION - VIDEO I -F PRINTED -WIRE PANEL
Video detector output to video -sound panel terminal L3Y.
Filament input lead from terminal L15Y on video -sound
LIZ
L3Z
panel and CRT filament lead.
I -F input from tuner.
L4Z
140V B+ input.
AGC lead from terminal L6Y on video -sound panel and
No. 1 position of range switch.
Ground terminal for shield braid of i-f tuner cable.
L5Z
L6Z
G4Z
2ND IF AMP
6DE6
DET.
6AM8
XI
R3
R4
C4
RI
T3
C5
1ST
GRID POLE
TRAP
42.85MC 4740 MC
S3
1ST IF AMP
6DE6
L3
G2
S2
3RD I F AMP.
VC2
VC1
X4
C6
X8
G4
L4
R10
R8
G5
L6
C13
G7
VC4
R9
47.40 MC
C10
VC3
41,25 MC
TRAP
Video I -F Printed Wiring Panel
TRAP
TERMINAL LUG IDENTIFICATION - VIDEO -SOUND PRINTED -WIRE PANEL
L1Y
L2Y
L3Y
L4Y
L5Y
L6Y
L7Y
L8Y
L9Y
L1OY
LILY
270 B+ input to noise inverter, sync separator and video amplifier from L7Y terminal.
140V B+ input lead from L5Z terminal on video i-f panel.
Lead from LIZ, video detector output on video i-f panel.
Sync separator output.
Sync separator grid lead to contrast control (agc1.
L12Y
Lead to No. 4 position on range switch and to contrast
L13Y
Lead to audio output transformer primary and electrolytic
L14Y
L15Y
Filament lead to L3Z on video i-f panel and to WR4, CRT
control.
E2, lug 1.
Sound alignment test point.
filament resistor.
Video ampl. cathode lead to R5. Cl and WR2.
Video ampl. output lead to CRT cathode, pin 7.
L18Y 400V B+ lead to panel from electrolytic E2, lug 2.
L19Y Audio output cathode lead to electrolytic El, lug 3 and R6.
L20Y Lead from audio output grid to volume control arm.
L22Y Lead to high side of volume control.
L23Y Lead to brightness control arm.
Video i-f, agc lead to L6Z on video i-f panel and to No. 1
L16Y
L17Y
position on range switch.
270V B+ supply to panel.
AGC lead to tuner and to junction of RI and C6
Lead to C2, RIA, CI and No. 8 position on range switch.
Lead to audio output trans. primary and to C8 on tone
control.
Lead to No. 5 position on range switch.
SI
1247.7
S2
NOISE INV B
I2BV7
VIDEO
SYNC SEP
R7
R10
C2
G3
RI311
138
R4
L4
LI
R9
L2
R2
XI
R5
Ti
G2
L3
01
N2
R6
L6
L5
L10
L8
L7
C3
L9
012
L13
016
S3
816
AUDIO OUT
LI7
6805
X2
L19
L6
L20
L22
L21
G4
C7
LIB
N3 R17 T3
CIO
R22
C8
05
C11
N4
Cl2
C9
S4
818
6CS6
S5
ADD DET
6BY8
SIF B AGC
CLAMP
Video and Sound Printed Wiring Panel
119
R19 013
R20
R 21
L2 3
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L60, 9L60U, Schematic Diagram
RED
VIDEO I F PANEL
TO
6DE6
TRAP TRAP TRAP OR -BLUE 42.7
4! 4740 47.40 4525
MC
rir
0
X4
RD-BLK=
-I UR
X7
X8
47
C4
C13
.001i
22
-=' R9
33001
In-
IK
I C7
LIE
0
I".1 f."'"""
0.3 V P/P
L et 0
5.0V P/P
1.
L1W
ADD THE SUFFIX"W
CC
30-6008-2
M
I
to
.004
V.O.T.
677r7W
DEFLECTION PANEL
CV
+ 140 V
15,750 CPS
2EV P/P
VERT OSC
NOTE. TO ALL SYMBOL NOS. ON THIS PANEL
IC r--
scri
D
BL-WH
S4W
cps
6DT5
eov
56K
4'
2W
9
C15
.033
7$
co
00V
1
10K
1251.LF
25V
.01
Ni
R11
8v Ph
6.8MEG
220K
115,7
IW
+1
601 V
,60CPS
E2-3
L141
25
PS
ME
V2
VR2
HOLD
2
WH
00(
R16
VERT OUT
400/
VERT INTEGRATOR -I
VRI
VERT
7
C3
GMV
VC2
DET
nov
R2 _L C6
X6
1-5
VG3
V ID
680-r
=
I
1/2 6AM8
'
9
C
= 10
26v 6801
1-5
CO
21
V
I
VC 1
Oa
rT
1/2 6AM8
3RD VIF:7
2ND VIF ,er
I :t
I::
S1E
Ell
illo.
7
311
041
t.
6DE6
1ST VIF
191A4GE 44.4 MC
105V
31,1'2,Ft -
S2 t
X5
TUNER
JACK
RED 42.7 MC
Itov
110V
S3E
NOTE. TO ALL SYMBOL NOS. ON
THIS PANEL, ADD THE
SUFFIX -2.:
1/ DS
SEL
DIODE
STAB
TEST
100K
IW
c
75V PIP
it
5750
CPS
O
.002
OT
-
.002
I I.
R5
68K
C10
6
.068
30-6033-I
3
N Id
45V PIP
Ca
470K of
R8
.
e4°
HOR I HOR
4 AUX
YEL
L
.7A SLO-
RECT
,nlv MI
II I'VF7P3
15 750 CPS
32-8710-5-=+270V
ID
re 5V
X2 RFC
S5W
E1-4
5270V171
TM
64U4GT
-/..120UF
DAMPER
j_ 350V
=o
C7
T.047
C9 -
.0221--
600V I
350V -
WHITE
E2-4.3
L9w0
SOCKET TO
R14
6K
2W
OLinv
3
2.30, RFC
L1OW
+270V
TUNER
o
2.311
e_d_._t 0 0 0
0
FC
40A
YEL I
600V
WHITE
WIDTH R17
5K
7W
30K
06
1,c,
WIRE ON
PANEL
12.5K /213.31(
HOR HOLD VR2
4GB
JUMPER
1
400V
=400V Llsw
5511
115V _r1
CI6
C
30-6518-
'
15,750 CPS
WH
2
7
% C12
.01
ASE COMFA
I5K
1/25K VR
10
2
1011F
.11
350V
BROWN
PILOT
LIGHT
-
_1E1-2
2K WR1
IOW
201.1F
1350V
=
120
+140V
E1-1
WR2
12K
7W
JUMPER WIRE IN OR OUT
FOR BEST CENTERING
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 9L60, -U, Diagram
BLUE
GREEN
VR5
I MEG
NOTE, TO ALL SYMBOL NOS. ON THIS PANEL,ADD THE SUM X"Y.
32-4745-2
VIDEO SOUND
4
PANEL
S4Y
6C56
N4
1
711
,
-1-2I
1500
145V
5
SIF
T4
3
2
NO
I. 4v
co,
r-
0
6BY8
SIF AND
.
'Y C
I
,#O
C9
± 470
AGC
0 MLi CLAMP
[L
[LK,
d13_
-
S5Y
32-4688-6
4
2_L
=
6.8K 2W
RII
LY
lo,
.00156mvI 1W
R13
I5MEG
200K
AND 4.5MC
TRAP
3
CI 200V
R5
11
..:,7
R2
--.001
VIDEO DET
co
et
Kiw
4.7MEG
a
CI
MEG
1
0033 400V
,
1
- R5
3
VS NOISE
,!j5
R8
5
20V
L5Y
wI°
742 RIP
1'150
I NV.
'
CPS
1'4
L4Y
SYNC. SEP
10K
I
LBY
NI
2
0
LI1SY
GR WH
0
Fr1
l
1
440(1
C4
'VERT 6075
4
I
14.0.
,
7
I
HOR SAU4GT 6D06A1
4
5
=
DEFLECTION PANEL J
RED
--.--
L3
1
Y2
C
',511
a_u3
21
R-WHIN
P8
I4 5!I
1:)E6 6DE6
6AM8
y7
1
4:cc-1 3
iVID IF PAN ELI]
I
_
I
17
III1
I
HV
+270V
+400V
475V
I1"IF
A
47K
CRT Type Numbers
3
711
WR4
7W
8
SF2IA
SND PANEL=
I
6 PIOA_.,
P9
RED-WH
R14
I
IVID
OR
I
SF24A:
E2-2
I
11
SF21A, 1
I
6CS6 6805 12BV7 I2AZ7 I CRT
6BY8
D L1.5 4
4 OR-GR 4
,
R17
VERT YOKE
4
3
I
+
8
Y6
1.1
r 040
re Y5 Y4
1K 8151K
THERMISTOR
+270V
+400V
6CG7
1°Q.9 0
CONNECT FOR
BEST FOCUS
R16
TUNER AGC
1G7
.002
L127
loi_400A
IG3GT
HV
RECT
LD
ISUPPRESSIONIon
470K
,
_L
RETRACE
R3
12 AZ7
4.7K -I-
LOCAL
RANGE SWITCH IN
NORMAL POSITION
10% 30-6024-2
68
SlY
08
3
R9
4.7
6 40V
7=
200V1_
2.5MEG
RI
5
470
220K
-02_2.78V P/C'
5
C6.1
CO NTRAST 2
I
11:±110( K
R10
I.5MEG
MEG
VR5
R4
GM V
C3
.01
GMV
200V
R1
7W
I
C4
I.2MEG R2
0
220K
03.9K
-0-04
5
6
L23Y
.5MEG
.001co
30-6517-3
.0039
6
R3
1 MEG
VR
BRIGHT
100K
3.3K
22K
#3
275V
30-6516-2
2
SYNC
C2
200- 470K
0'c
L1077
WRI
R21
/ Ni
Alt tOHO
30
I
0 0 0 4,"A
33K
8
2
E2-1° +400V
LI0IT
R165.6K
R12
1.5K
2W
3.9 13ove
150
T 350V
+270V
1.1.H
R20
100K
W
27011H
S2Y
12BV7
7 1swvVI DEO
ADJ.I
1
XI.
BO
I
=
= E1-3
220
400V
TOP
.047
X2
C6
SOUND
IRK
K
2W
L9Y
5%
:II -
TAK E -OFF 1
R6
330
12 5V
L7Y I
R6 33K
12
T2
L27
SPEAKER
5%
200V
1K
0
RED'
-501IF
1.19y
=
= R10 = R7
C7
P
N! 820K
C8
330R15
GMV
ro.#v 3
0 LINT
'
01
C5 400V
I KV 031
250V
I-
10K
R18 - C12
,6, 1.008
- +140V
bl
11
TEST
MV
5.5
R12
_J
>AOJ.
.0047L1078LUL;
2
2.7
MEG
I
220
47K
SMEG
TONE
2
C8
7
VR4
0N I
9 C3
100
'-1
R14
3v
AUDIO
-20%
N.
2
9
68Q5
240V AUDIO
7 OUTPUT
+50%
N
\ill/
6.4 -5431:1
S3Y
.0047
I
icig ;
7
L
r- - -0-
R17
AUDIO
DETECTOR
1
30-6,032-2 6
!AUDIO _
VOL
.033 CS
- I i 600V
OL217 OL207
are
21EAP4/SF21A
24AVP4/SF24A
Focus voltage optional for best focus.
Coil resistance read with coil in circuit.
Indicates a coil resistance of Ins than 1 ohm.
C9, IN MODELS USING 24° C.R.T.,
IS 82 4/F, 5KV
Schematic Diagram for Chassis 9L60 and 9L60U (Run 5)
#10 1R. YOKd
121
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO
Chassis 9L60, 9L60U
(Continued)
-L1V
1 25V
vVERT
HOLD
TONE
B6
BRIGHT 1.4ov
M
VR3
30K
285V
3-5593
30-2590-34
8.7V
1400
270V
5uaCa
REG
P.T.
FUS
32-8445,
6V -1.2V 11M 270V
rpUTII3
...7111e;
1F-270 V.
CABLE
y
On
1u2V
4200CR T.S.
1
SM
AG
3
4506
VOLUME
2.3V. AC.
a
117 V. AC. (SW.)
- 0.6V
45K
40V
L1-
/
CONTRAST
5006
Lou
SSW
456
LAW
270V
0ER7OSG
63VAC
1650
0 A,
50x
O r,Cr)
3VAC.
LI* 254DOKV 63 V A a
Cur
SECTION
5
850rt
250
3
SH1E
I.
v
3
1006
2V
27V
SAW
60,5
vER Our
25K
66V
Li
fl90
E.)
63VAC 9
1506
LOW
rL 36W
19n1600
-350
IAw
120V
270v
DAMPER0
ALL RESISTANCE B VOLTAGES
MEASURED TO CHASSIS GROUND
VERT. L.
FULL CCW
FULL COW
CONTRAST
FULL
VERT HOLD
NOR. Au%.
NOR. HOLD
FULL COW
FULL
GM
VOLUME
BRIGHTNESS
WIDTH
HEIGHT
FRINGE SWITCH
FULL
FULL
,...______,
OW
GW
NORMAL
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS SHOWN ARE
WITH YOKE KLUGED INTO Y.S. AND NO
SIGNAL ON ANTENNA 117V AG
LI,
2.3%,.,
L77
245V
LaY
-4-8,/
CW
FULL CCW
FULL
CW
15M
P.T.
00..
V
..
jif.9f.''LL_
1
d070
.1,..._
----ctgy
S
250
C,1_21or
t
LI...,
2
6.M-'''
63VAC
4006 L350
/. p,
4, .., ',4
4
I,
LL'.
2-1.7
"V
128V7
v10E0 Oui 4M( 1.127
7RP
10
5 A 14K
av 004..
20
,
..-.--r- 4R
20.0v
:A,, zw,L,'
'n_75-,
. vi 4 g Kt Of 3'1X4'
63"C'
3vri 'W.,:'
LirrL24°' ' ' ""
56
130V
SYNC SFF
.
4,,
40K
'95V
V
,T.5;
'----Wc3fr
.
3 VAG.
5.BV
:;
004
27.6.v
..........4
S3Y
2'gr---'
/00
L" L"I5V(
LOY
I, !ili .,
\
!SYL
"
1,9,7,A6 4144
A.O.T.
32 8825-2
......-..,--
I'r800 ..
-
.
C'--- i
BOV L 237
11
st..,
1144-
-1450
,
,,
r-,).4_11
,,,Qcil
4'%.,
(
,
H.O.T.
zsa..o-s
AR
Chassis Layout Showing Voltage and Resistance Readings
RUN CHANGE INFORMATION
MAIN CHASSIS
VIDEO -SOUND PANEL
Run 1Z First production.
Run 2
Video -Sound panel changed to Run 2 (red dot). To
Run 1
Run 3
Run 4
sync. sep-noise inverter network,
changed to part number 30-6517-3. To improve AGC
improve AGC action.
Video -Sound panel changed to Run 3 (orange dot). To
improve sound detector stability.
Added a 47,000 ohm resistor, R14, from CRT screen to
action.
Run 3 (orange dot) CI 1Y, sound detector quadrature tank
condenser, changed in temperature coefficient to N330,
part number 30-1263-39. To improve sound detector
stability.
Run 4 (yellow dot) R14Y, sound detector cathode bias,
boost B+, see schematic. To improve CRT safety
factor.
Run 5
First production.
Run 2 (red dot) NIY,
Video -Sound panel changed to Run 4 (yellow dot).
changed from 1/2 watt to 1 watt, part number 663104340; R13Y, sound detector B+ de -coupling,
changed from 10,000 ohms, 2 watts to 6,800 ohms,
2 watts, part number 66-2685340; C1 1Y, quadrature
To improve sound detector stability.
DEFLECTION PANEL
Run 3 (orange dot) First production. Some early production
panels may have a horizontal oscillator network
(N3W) of part number 30-6518-1. Use the -2 when
tank, changed in temperature coefficient to -N750, part
number 30-1263-44; and R22Y, quadrature coil damping resistor, 180,000 ohms, part number 66-4188340,
added across the quadrature coil, M.
replacement is necessary.
122
\
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CHASSIS
REAR VIEW
VHF
FINE
RCA
VICTOR
TUNING
v14111
CHANNEL
SELECTOR
ORB BSA
v2
(BCS120E)
6E48
PORTABLE TELEVISION RECEIVERS
ARM 86A
OSC/ MIXER
(ACS120F)
MODELS
Pw 200
CIRCUIT
ASSEMBLY
(SEE BELOW FOR
DETAIL)
L102
WIDTH
COIL
140-P-020, 140 -P -020U
140-P-023, 140 -P -023U
HO I
FUSIBLE
0102
62106.4
SURGE
140-P-024, 140 -P -024U
L MITER
OR I
OUTPUT
T 104
POWER
vI00
6A X 40T
DAMPER
TRANSFORMER
L 01
NOR ID
UHF
TUNING
HOLD
CONTROL
-1
KRIX66H
UHF TUNER
(RCS 120F ONLY)
!
I
CHASSIS NOS.
VIOS
SAS4A
LV
RECTIFIER
KCS120E & KCS120F
`1_
f
DENOTES
KEYWAY (OPEN
PIN
LOCATION
FOR
(Material on pages 123 through 126)
MINIATURE TUBES)
300 ohms balanced
ANTENNA INPUT IMPEDANCE
FOCUS
Electrostatic
PICTURE SIZE Approx. 108 sq. ins. on a 14WP4 Kinescope
POWER INPUT
117 Volts AC, 60POWER RATING
140 watts
SWEEP DEFLECTION
Magnetic
ANTENNA INPUT
VHF Models
R CIRCUITPO
SEALED
ASSEMBLY
R274
VERTICAL
V204
CONTRAST
CONTROL
R259
VERTICAL
LINEARITY
VOLUME
CONTROL
SCUM
3R 1GHTNESS
L2I1
AVE
(7,;;"
6AUB
RD FIX I -F
SYNC. OUT
T
OF-OFFMUN
PIX
V207
RAW.)
VIDEO a
1ST
COIL
SYNC.
16,
CHASSIS REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
Take off the front safety window as outlined above. Remove the control knobs at the side of the cabinet by pulling
the knobs outward off their shafts. On UHF Models remove
the plastic guard behind the UHF tuning knob.
Take out the seven screws around the edge of the rear
cover and the screw in rear of the cover at the power cord.
Remove the rear cover, disconnecting the push -on antenna
leads. Remove the screw at the top rear of the cabinet holding the cabinet to the cabinet channel.
TO RE.V.R.
VHF TERMS.
Turn the receiver face downward on a protective cloth or
pad and remove the eight screws from the bottom. Refer to
illustration above. Spring the sides of the cabinet open just
enough to slide the case upward off the chassis.
TO COMBINATION
UHF/V11F ANTENNA
Reverse the above procedure to reassemble the chassis
TO
A
AUDIO
.112
SOingNIs- F
V206
REST,'
WINE,-
300 OHM
UHF -VHF
ANTENNA
tcra
ROTC
SOUND DET
T205
the UHF antenna terminals.
When a combination UHF/VHF antenna is to be used, having a single transmission line, a stub arrangement, such as
shown in -A" of illustration below, or a crossover network
(RCA Part #78444) as shown in "B", may be used to match
the single transmission line to the two inputs.
LINE
1Fi7)
-F TRANS
in from the external UHF antenna should be connected to
COMBINATION
AUDIO
,OUTPUT
SOUND DE T.
TIC2,1ii
END Plx -0
3R13
VHF antenna terminals.
When reception from an external UHF antenna is desired,
the loop antenna leads should be disconnected and the lead-
TRANSMISSION
.0, 1ST P1X IS
RT. OC.
B VERT.
....-',--,
T203
1ST FIX ---L. ...)
I -F TRANS.
V205
6036
2ND PDC PF
I -F TRANS
5102/R 25
ON -OFF S.VITCH
The KRK86A/66H tuner combination is designed for UHF/
LINE
RIAU
47 25MC
TRAP
6CUS
VHF reception with separate 300 ohm antenna inputs provided. A rod -type antenna is provided for VHF reception
and a loop antenna for UHF reception on all models.
When reception from an external VHF antenna is desired,
the leads of the rod -type antenna should be disconnected
and the lead-in from the external antenna connected to the
300 ONM
TRANSMISSION
V203
L203
COIL
RI20
UHF/VHF Models
73i
I
-F 01210 TO
0204
with a 300 ohm antenna input provided. A rod -type VHF
antenna is provided on all models. If reception from an
external antenna is desired, the rod -type antenna leads
should be disconnected from the terminal board and the
lead-in from the external antenna should be connected to
the antenna terminals.
TO RCVR.
-
HOLD
E SOOT
The KRK8SA tuner unit is designed for VHF reception only
UHF TERMS
L202
IST PI X
B
and kinescope in the cabinet.
123
xF
TO
L
I
j
L12
1.55
0
LI
33
149
Las
25
51
I
IS.
REAR
1,"
21D0
;t0
TRIP
Re
IN
CONT POSROITL
NO 2
UNE I.F ARPL
6 EV-AZ 8
osc 01.10,ER
FO SRHAFT
resistance value in ohms. K = 1000.
of arrows at controls
indi-
All
voltages measured with "VoltOhmyst" and with no signal input. Voltages should hold within ±-20% with 117
v. a -c supply.
cates clockwise rotation.
Direction
wise noted.
All capacitance values less than 1 in
MF and above 1 in MMF unless other-
AU
Theo
6FV6
R1,311,
3600 1- ;0 0
FRONT AND REAR SEC001.15
OF 51W15 AND C VIEWED FROM
MTN
FRON CATANNEL
L13
REAR
S
',TRAP
09
TO
312
Tel
c
R 101
470
0132
CPR 101
r
410
C133
500K
PASS
OF SAND
TD1
MIXER
MATE COIL
LSD
ARC
CPR 102
51-C
LI
UHF
TO
1-
L__
500K
R116
500K
R115
470
C 134
'
;
C19
82 K
R14
10
R II
771!
/147
L48
7146
1801
L802(
C801
C802
12
.
_
P801
7801
18
C805
A
0
,,
1N82A
CR80 t
L 804
L803
C803
/-C/r302-8
UHF
(ON SI-A)
SI- 0
e
.
e2
SI-A
13 . REAR
8.2 M._ _U-1
162
K'''
I''
C17
FINE TUNING
di*
R15
1808
C806
1000
v1
159
5 3 4
V2
V2
T2
8802
5600
100
R803
135
C808
0809
2 0.5-3
C810)1_1
MMF.
C811, , 0.5
C104
I -F
PASs
TPI
RF BAND
Y0
22 P802
too
J. C 16
CA
T 82
8.2
51804
8
l
e
r
alf
Bob
-
O
-1a 0
174
2
aP gmg
U
AGe
rs
2361/.
YD
C101
T 220
PLATE COIL
C121
R129
100 K
1020 K "I
AGC
1039
1470
"
3
2
7
1.11 L_ -J
TRANS.
0.5
I
R4
221<
0.56
1
14.F
1.56
MIXER
C27
INTERSTAGE
C81271 MMF
100
C35
12K
T"
IN 31'
5703
C30 1 4 270
1000
1000
C24
7000
C31
CIO
1000
CS
C5
10001
T
,G80
RI
228
(C807
R126 1000
6800
,.I2K El
to
R804
v.
o
4
0 SC.
6AF4A
V801
Ca
0.5-2 '-=
E,
6EA8
MIXER
osc.
UHF I.FAmPL
C813
5600
830
LOT
33K
RIG
4
LS8
11_61
VHF
220o
*Rrz
100K
R9
./'
RS
VI
6FV6
R -F AMPL
18 I R7
5
" L6
--
Cl2
8200
SI-B
REAR
330
.3 REAR
co
DO S1 -C
:5
°
74
L7
UHF
TRAP
VHF TUNER
KRK86A
Diagram of Tuners KRK86A and KRK66H
-J
Ili
II
I
CRR 703
-
(962047)
KRK66H
R8 9°
10*
330
C11
C7
4.7
C
L4
1-F TRAP
3900 se
I7
11.45 '
1211 1-F (NO I) POSITION.
UHF TUNER
9
L13
114
1.15
1.16
C2
5
2. I
10
C20
C28
1000
150K
R6
LOT
1.20
121
118
LI9
11_49
10
4
8
FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS
TOF 51A ,13 AND C VIEWED FROM
FRONT WITH CONTROL SHAFT
c811
LSO
L51A.
1527
1.531
L54/
FRONT
SI-A 155
... 13
1.5
C32
124
125
L27
126
- C25
-1
FRONT
SI -B
9°
ID'
TRANS.
129
128
FRONT
TI -ANT
HATCHING 1-F TRAP
100 K
R27
%2.4.
ANT
4
-I,
J
L___I
I
R102
111 S°0K
ANT
VHF
CA*0T
,
iiceo
r
R
VHF TUNER
KRK85A
KRK85A VHF TUNER
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
CI123}
SL 50
12 I
31
54/
F1101.N
1SOK
L 124
1.26
L27
TRANS
ENETcNwo
LA
140 -P -0201J, 140 -P -023U
140 -P -024U
140-P-024
All schematics are shown in the latest
condition at the time of printing.
4,10
MODELS
140-P-020, 140-P-023
I.F TRAP co
KRK86A
KRK66H
KCS120F
,,No
KRK85A
KCS120E
co2
TUNER
ASSEMBLY
CHASSIS
CHASSIS DESIGNATIONS
o
0<
-0 7P
007
-13O
a)
<
+2355.4
15261
15262
1202
L_
I
_j
R201
D
---
I -F
.01
47
R212
R24I
100KSOK
R264
825 .022
R263 C249
I
T.001
-0220
33
R282
+I 7. V.
1205
V209
YO
0
R269
47 K
L
0
YE
.7.1
0
K
5600
Fr
imm7
CONTR.
S
1130
.0039
R246 C238
AD
+19V.
15220
22K
206-4.
RIOS
27
+2.7v
R 107
10 MEG
7
WU
I ;ZO
YE
7
R274
155
R HO
T 103
9
OSC
0.1
Cleo
270 K
R 112
C 108
0.1
681<
RIII
2
04
5224
3900
BLU
1815
15255
V104
7
+B BOOST
DAMPER
2
1'34
1
1_
II,
I
YE:8"
3.9
cp 7
.11202
I20
55
ieR113
H.V.RE CT.
1 X2B
R251
1.8 MEG.
V 103
111.1
I
2215 015 .027
7.4.5
..:
680
2
1
.7n
2
VERT
1
L
111!I
56
33 K
T
7.6
'VV
ISO
J
150
100 MF. I
C125-8
I YEL
I
+2355.
150
BLU
L103
CHOKE
I
alpj
2102
VERT
OW-RIF TR.
1
0
C
5 I
80 MF.
C125-4
22 K
5118
i
I20
R128
.047
C128
RED
SUPPLY
115V. GOA.
INTERLK
SIO2
8205
R 127
54. 0 25'1.
5101
ON.
OFF
2 R 135
820
R134
+ 235 V.
1.104
.04.7
0213/4164 ERN.
r 131-5
Flo
ze.ww.
FK/2.
3000
3
CONTRST
CONTR
RIZO
'C1177
5A544
RECT. YEL
vios
56K
5104
10.39
I (--,
.022
1118
330
R233
s
+235V1
BRIGHTNESS
200 K
R737
180 K
YE
YD
I
P M.
SPEAKER
R238
1, 00 1
r- - TEL
-0U
R117
, GAN
R124 RI23 I
?Vv.
I
----1
HEIGHT
CONTR.
VERT. COILS
L107
7.107
I
I
6 I
F
5 MEG.
R253
T.00,
C247 E
MEG.
R26
R261
C230
52344
R235
5100
0.1
0229
if -
ISO K
R131
100 K
.444
5234
300 MU H
ORN- !ILK
BLK
68K
R231
4 7W-
t--11.--
9
1228
'TM
L209
120 MU -14
BR
+ 7355.
9
18 5 -5
R232
+18.,
DEFL.YOKE
+ 11,400 V.
11Z oo II04
C131 -
+234
.
R200 V
WV'
(-.AMA
C113
rco
IO
OUTPUT
TRANSD
11251, ,2 i
'(22°°
10CME
.0681
VIDEO
OUTPUT
1.214E6.
1.5 MEG
VERT. LIN.
R259
.44440.
O
y207-4
9
O
1815 OUTPUT
OY
C125
120 MF.
6AW8A
6AQ5A
V208
82015
R230
j. C.
i(0
8226-
R248 C739 C244 R257
560K
r.
1- >
.047
R644"
C22G
A.
0 TP
AD
(3-5V-
,.,
11341IIIMIERED
'BLiirK
+
ej
OUTPUT.15D89
R225
ERN-REDA/K..
L208
64X4 -6T
+232V
.c0131o9
COIL
01101
7.207
36
vEL-yEL
120 MD- H
C224 C225
5
ov
"" TIM
6CU8
VERT.
V 204.8
H.V. TRANS .
+2555.
F101
0.3 AMP.
2
C107
0.1
1295
61:00.6A
4
G8
MEG.
VERT. 14010
U0R.OUTPUT
V102
C223
-
2. ..- i
'AEco,.,° 6AGSA5203
R125
OAF
YELVV.17
Now V
3
I
C R 201
IND.DET.
TRANS. -0.15.
I.001
R250
7,
1.5 MEG
R2581
47 T
R273
220 K
+235 V.
1.1
265.
22K
R245
27K
5222
T205
1213
w.,
--)
3RD. PIA. I -F
+235V.
3RD. piX.
I -F AMPL.
6CU8
C23II
11241
+34.19.71
.01
.0047
5106
47
15247t
L101NOR 1
OCT.
O
114E6
I
)1
R26/3
I WAVE
r
52151.4
-L C252
1.001
)1
.001
0254
330 K
11750
58
R266
C236
82
147
C248
8
+0.15.
9
OUTPUT
+235V
.00471
.01
T 20 G
SOUND DET.
TRANS.
0208-.0471
C212
N +240V.
1ST AUDIO
*Measured with 1 megohm ih watt resistor in series with meter probe.
10.47
330
C251
.01
C253
U
18 5
R244
I MEG
+235V.
680K
41475.
C124
M
'°'
R242 t R243
+27.5V. jj
C235
6CU8
SYNC
505
5218
C22I
4 470
V706. Id
AE
232V
C2221-
2NO 1.1%.
I -F TRANS.
T204
COI
5 +2109
1-F AMPL.
V205
6CB6
2ND. PIx.
1015
R204
T0033
LI'
V207- B
1ST. SYNC.
6C67
+2.35V. 3
EU
'1 ;150.2:0: 0:
-C21B 5218
1219
1.001 -15015 1.001
2,5
18 K
HOR.05C. 4 CONT.
1 MEG.
-15.1V
27052
9239
(
102V.
T203
1---
v202
6DT6
SOUND OFT
12' :1 1220 9 0
100K
Rmcic,..........,1
+235 V.
15 K
R205
? 59
A D 470C
I ST. PIK
I -F TRANS
8Z
'
DRIVER TR.
6804 r_A;S_OU:Ci_ El
-11-1
T202
6AW8A
AD C256
4700
.8V.
,
7
R2023
+112 V.
I -F AMPL
isT. PIA.
1233 C234
3 330 330 _7"
*-1
V704- A
201
4.
-7--
6CU8
.001 s-
C231
220
R276
11444 OA
GRID COIL
R 267
4715
MEG.
,
1ST.P1*
000
R240
1.2
MEG
10
IT
I
I
39
56147 K 1"'
R272
272
PC 207
16
C2i7
TRAP
47.75NC
L203
0216
R 470
1i
1
1I f:=17C201 I C203
CZO2
-I(
..v.
1601.Fv.
AMPL.
1106
CHASSIS CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM KCSI20E or KCS12OF
Asc
I
I
0.47
C205L
C103
/5-14.5
P101 w103
1
SOUND
T201
C204 TAKE OFF
3
TRANS.
PIA/ 200
V201
SOUND
6AU 6
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA Victor Chassis Nos. KCS-120E and KCS-120F Service Material, Continued
A
B
E
CAUTION - LEAD DRESS OF
IS
ING WIRES
DRESSED AS SHOWN
IN TERC ONNE C
CRITICAL - LEADS SHOULD BE
AD r)
AJ
Ix
CPR
V201
47.
-
J
0243
V203
GJ
0202
RC 202
c 229
NJ
BROWN
BROWN
2
vE LOW
R2
2
0236
A
L1
V204
8
o
o
7203
o
o
3
3
C252 .
4
ARDEN
R253
R259
OJ
HELLO
e C2440
A
L
B
D
C
The printed wiring, on the reverse side of the
circuit assembly, is presented in "phantom" view
The assembly represented above is viewed from
the component side of the sealed circuit.
super -imposed on the component layout. This will
enable circuit tracing without removing the assembly
COMPONENT LOCATION GUIDE
from the chassis to see the printed wiring on the
reverse side.
0
REMOVE AMY AT
;IV
:I'LL
C203
C204
C205
C207
C208
C210
C212
C213
C214
C215
C2I6
C217
C218
C219
C220
C221
C222
C223
C224
C225
C226
C227
C228
C229
0
*EMOTE
MOT SCAMS *GLOOM
CAS*
TO SASE
0
A.OVE SCAM AND LIE T
E
...D2
...E2
...DI
...D2
...B1
...CI
...BI
...B1
...B1
...Al
...A2
...A2
...B2
...82
...C2
...C2
...C2
...D2
...E3
...E3
...E2
...F2
...F2
...F2
C230 ...F1
OFF
MASA AOC WINDOW SSSSSS LT
C231
C232
C235
KINESCOPE AND SAFETY WINDOW CLEANING
C236
C237
C238
C239
C240
The front safety window may be removed to allow for
cleaning of the kinescope faceplate and the safety window if
required.
To do this, remove two screws from under the front edge
of the cabinet. Pull out at the bottom and lift off the kinescope mask assembly. Refer to step 1 in illustration above.
C241
C242
C243
126
...A2
...B3
...El
...F3
...C3
...B3
...C4
...B4
...B3
...A4
...A4
C244
C245
C246
C247
C248
C249
C250
C251
C252
C253
C254
C255
C256
C258
C259
.
...F3
...E4
...E4
...E4
...E4
...D2
...82
...A3
...DI
CPR201
CR201
L202
L203
L204
L205
L207
L208
L209
L210
L211
L212
PC201
PC202
.D4
.C4
...84
...E3
...D3
...F2
El
..E3
...A3
...A2
...A2
...D2
...E3
...D2
...F1
...F1
...E4
...B2
..E2
..F1
R202 ...D2
R203 ...D2
R204
R205
R206
R207
R210
R211
R212
R214
R215
R216
R217
R218
R219
R220
...C2
...C2
...81
...CI
...B1
...Al
...A2
...B2
...B2
...B2
...C2
...B2
...C2
...C2
R221 ...D2
R222 ...F4
R223
R224
R225
R226
R230
R231
R232
R233
R234
R235
R236
R237
R238
R242
R243
R244
R245
R246
R247
R248
..E2
...D2
...E2
...E2
...E2
...F1
...F2
...F2
...F1
...F1
...F2
...D4
...C4
R249 ...A3
R250 ...A3
R251
...A3
R254
R255
R256
R257
R259
R260
...B4
...B4
...C4
R261
R262
R263
R264
R265
R266
R267
R268
R269
R270
R271
...E4
...A4
...A4
...F3
...E3
...F3
...E3
...F3
...F4
...F4
...E4
...E4
...A2
B4
.
R272 ...A2
R273 ...84
R276 ...A2
R280 ...DI
R281 ...FI
R282
..C3
...El
...El
...C3
...F4
...C3
...F3
.84
T201
...El
1202
T203
1204
T205
T206
...83
...C3
...D3
...B2
...CI
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CHASSIS DESIGNATIONS
CHASSIS
TUNER
ASSEMBLY
KCS124C
KRK8OE
TUNER
Sub-
assmbIles
KRK7OD
RCA VICTOR
MODELS
214-9265
21-T-9266
21-T-9267
KCS124D
KCS124E
KRK8OF
KRK79T
KRK71D
KRK66J
21-7-9265U
KRK72L
21-1-9345
21-T-9346
21-1-9347
TELEVISION RECEIVERS - MODELS
21 -T -9266U
21 -T -9267U
KCS124F
KRK79U
KRK73L
KRK66A
21-7-9345U
21-7-9346U
21-7-9347U
KCS1241-1
KRK81H
KRK7OD
21-T-9122
21-1-9125
21.T-9127
KCS124J
KRK81J
KRK71E
KRK66P
21-7-9122U
21-T-9122 & U, 21-T-9125 & U
21-T-9127 & U, 21-T-9265 & U
21-T-9266 & U, 21-T-9267 & U
21-T-9275 & U, 21-T-9276 & U
21-T-9277 & U, 21-T-9345 & U
21-T-9346 & U, 21-T-9347 & U
21 -T -9125U
21-7-9127U
KCS124K
KRK8OH
KCS124L
KRK80J
KRK46AA
KRK47AA
KRK66J
21-T-9275
21-T-9276
21-1-9277
CHASSIS NOS.
21 -T -9275U
21 -T -9276U
KCS124C, D, E, F, H, J, K & L
21-7-9277U
(Material on pages 127 through 134)
FOCUS
ADJUSTMENT OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR
An electrostatic focus type kinescope is employed in these
receivers. The receivers operate with fixed focus, having a
fixed voltage applied to the focusing electrode.
If in the above check the receiver failed to hold sync for
one -quarter of a turn of counter -clockwise rotation of the
control from the pull -in point, it will be necessary to make
CHECK OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
the following adjustments.
The width and drive adjustments should be properly set,
as explained in the paragraph below, before adjusting the
Turn the horizontal hold control to the extreme clockwise
position. The picture should be out of sync, with a minimum
of eight bars slanting downward to the left. Turn the
control counter -clockwise slowly. The number of diagonal
sine wave coil.
Connect a short jumper across the terminals of the sine
wave coil L601 through the opening in the chassis. Also
short the grid of the sync output tube, pin 2 of V501, to
black bars will be gradually reduced and when only 11/2
to 3 bars sloping downward to the left are obtained, the
picture will pull into sync upon slight additional counter-
ground with a small screwdriver or jumper,
clockwise rotation of the control. The picture should remain
in sync for approximately one quarter of a full turn
Adjust the horizontal hold to obtain a picture with the
of
sides vertical (picture may drift slowly sideways). Remove
the jumper on the sine wave coil L601 and adjust L601 to
additional counter -clockwise rotation of the control. Continue counter -clockwise rotation until the picture falls out
again obtain a picture with the sides straight. When the
sine wave coil is properly adjusted, alternate shorting and
no short should not cause a change in frequency, only a
of sync. Rotation beyond fall out position should produce
a minimum of 2 bars before end of rotation or a minimum
of 7 bars before interrupted oscillation "motorboat" occurs.
When the receiver passes the above checks and the picture is normal and stable, the horizontal oscillator is properly aligned. Skip "Adjustment of Horizontal Oscillator" and
slight sideways shift should occur.
Remove the short on the grid of the sync output. The
horizontal hold should now perform as outlined above under
"CHECK OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT."
proceed with "Centering Adjustment."
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
CENTERING
LEVER
Centering is accomplished by means of two levers on the
back of the yoke. By alternately rotating one magnet with
respect to the other, then rotating both simultaneously around
the neck of the tube, proper centering of the picture can be
KINESCOPE
YOKE CLAMP
(LOOSEN TO
POSITION YOKE)
obtained.
WIDTH AND DRIVE ADJUSTMENTS
POSITION YOKE
AS FAR FORWARD
AGAINST BELL
AS POSSIBLE
Set the horizontal control at the "pull -in" point. Set the
width coil maximum counter -clockwise and adjust horizontal
drive trimmer counter -clockwise until a bright vertical line
appears in the middle of the picture then clockwise until the
bright line just disappears. If no line appears set the drive
trimmer at maximum counter -clockwise position.
At normal brightness adjust the width coil L102 to obtain
3/4" overscan at each side with normal line voltage.
Readjust the drive trimmer C109 as was done previously.
KINESCOPE
SOCKET
CENTERING
LEVER
YOKE
ASSEMBLY
Figure 3-Yoke and Centering Magnet Adjustments
127
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA Victor Chassis Nos. KCS-124C, -D, -E, -F, -H, -J, -K, -L, Service Data, Continued
outer edge of the disc as shown in Figure 4B. With the gears
in this position, the fine tuning capacitor will automatically
position to its mechanical center for each channel. On some
models, the channel selector must be rotated to bring each
VHF R -F OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS
On all models except 21-T-9345-6-7 & U, adjustments for
channels 2 through 12 are available through the holes on the
front of the tuner. Adjustment for channel 13 is on top of the
tuner chassis. Remove the channel selector and fine tuning
knobs to make adjustments. Pull knobs outward off shaft.
See "A" of Figure 4. Set Fine Tuning to mechanical center
of its range.
gear into view through the opening in the tuner mounting
plate.
Switch to channel 13 and, if necessary, adjust the channel
13 slug on top of the tuner. Progress counter -clockwise from
channel 13 downward to channel 2, adjusting the oscillator
slug, if required, on each channel. Do not change the setting
of the fine tuning cams during adjustment of the oscillator
slugs. The proper slug for each channel will become accessible through the opening in the front disc as the channel
selector is switched to the desired channel.
APERTURE
CHANNEL
13
FOR
CHANNEL
ADJUSTMENT
CHASSIS REMOVAL
CHANNEL NUMBERS
100
II
SHOWN IN
CHANNEL 13
POSITION
ADJ UIST MEN T9
90
e
6
5
To remove the chassis from the cabinet for repair, remove
the channel selector, on/off volume, contrast and fine tuning
knobs, remove the cabinet back, unplug the speaker cable,
the antenna cable, the pilot lamp, the kinescope socket, and
the yoke. On Models 21-T-9345-6-7 & U remove the "on -off"
volume and contrast control knobs at the cabinet front and
remove the screws holding the "on-off"/volume/contrast control mounting bracket.
Remove the knobs from the controls in the control case or
TURRET
SET INDICES ON
GEARS FACING
COUNTER -CLOCKWISE
AROUND FRONT
TURRET DISC.
at the receiver front on Models 21-T-9345-6-7 & U and remove
Figure 4-VHF Oscillator Adjustments
the screws holding the control bracket. Unplug the I -F link
cable and the tuner power plug on front tuning models.
Models 21-T-9345-6-7 & U incorporate the "One -Set" fine
Remove the two nuts at the top of the chassis and the
tuning feature which requires the following procedure for
two screws at the bottom. Move chassis out slightly to enable
the H.V. lead to be disconnected from the kinescope. Clear
all wires from lances and retaining springs. Remove chassis
from cabinet.
If it is necessary to remove the tuner assembly on Models
21-T-9345-6-7 & U, remove the nuts holding the tuner mounting
plate to the cabinet. The tuner and control brackets may be
fastened to the chassis for transporting.
oscillator adjustment.
Remove the channel selector knob by pulling the knob
outward off its shaft. There are twelve gear and cam assemblies around the disc on the tuner face, one for each channel
from 2 through 13.
Depress the fine tuning knob and set each gear with the
index mark on the gear facing counter -clockwise around the
SPEAKER
LEADS
SIOI / R10121
ON/OFF SWITCH
N VOLUME CONTROL
CONTRAST
CONTROL
VHF TUNER
(ALL MODELS/
(
ROTS R -F AMP
(KRKTOD PRK710/E
61107A R -F AMP
VHF
CHANNEL
SELECTOR
TI OI
AUDIO OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER
# ror.;f:.
IKIIK4SAA, KRK4TAA,
KRK221. B KRKT3LI
PINZOO
I
VHF
E
FINE
TUNING
L301
Pv0300
SEALED CIRCUIT
PIK
I ST
I -F GRID COIL
V30
O
6DE6
\...A11y
LIMN 0
V203
6035
1
AUDIO
PICTURE I -E ASSEMBLY
IN PIO I -F
C102
SEALED CIRCUIT
SOUND ASSEMBLY
OUTPUT
vy.,73;?\
1301
I ST PIO
V303
6 0E6
ZmIPIP I -F
A1\..L./1P
I -F TRANS
6CON
332 PIP I -F
y302
\...t......
11P..1
T303
I
3RD Rix
2ND Pi%
1-F TRANS
1-F TRANSJ
*UT
(r/702..\
L302
47.25MC
60T6
SOUND SET
AUDIO
TRAP
s It
t-PW00
SEALED CIRCUIT
VIDEO
UHF
TUNING
DRIVER
TRANS
1ST SYNC
ASSEMBLY (;;
SAMBA
VIDEO AMPL
(Ir201..\
& IT SYNC.
PW600
NAYS
I -F
SEALED CIRCUIT
HORIZ. OSC
ASSEMBLY
SOUND
;1/4.41./0.
(7070.1.4\
SCOT
HORIZ OSC
Ri46
OR HOLD
CONTROL
e
AGC
SYNC. SEP
TRANS.L
L601
<24?
SsNE WAVE
COIL
- RION
St/ HETE T NEP t1112
0109 rTh
e
LION
FILTER
DRIVE
CHOKE
se/
.110Z
11u0
/
ST02,24.
TA K -OF F
& CONTROL
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
I
(-7
NUS
VERT. HOLD
YOKE
T102
SOCKET
VERT
OUTPUT
TRANS.
N13
CONTROL
V501
NCO?
TRANS.
I
RIDS
I
SYNC OUTPUT
11
VERT. OSC
AOC
I
CONTROL .
PW500
SEALED CIRCUIT
VERT. SYNC. OUTPUT
1
F101
FUSE
/
ASSEMBLY
V102
11G3G1,113ST,
I
H. V
RECT.
Chassis Rear View
128
(1712.\
HEMS
VERTICAL
OUTPUT
TIO4
POWER
TRANSFORMER
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA Victor Chassis Nos. KCS-124C, -D, -E, -F, -H, -J, -K, -L, Alignment, Continued
PICTURE I -F TRANSFORMER AND TRAP ADJUSTMENTS
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY
SIGNAL GENERATOR
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER
Apply -6 volts to I -F AGC bus at terminal "r' of PW300. Ground positive lead to chassis.
Connect to mixer grid at strap on SIB, in series with 1500 mmf. capacitor (see below).
Connect to 2nd Detector output at terminal "A" of PW400 using direct probe. Ground
lead connected to chassis.
STEP
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
ADJUST
1
Peak 3rd pix. I -F transformer
44.5 Inc.
T303
2
Peak 2nd pix. I -F transformer
45.5 mc.
T302
3
Peak 1st pix. I -F transformer
43.0 mc.
T301
4
Adjust 47.25 mc. traps
47.25 mc.
REMARKS
Peak T303, T302 & T301 on frequency for maxi -
mum output on meter. Adjust generator output
for 3 volts on meter when finally peaked.
L302 & T2 (L65)
Minimum output Indication on meter.
(top core)
+
E
0
.1RM
s2,D
C
6
T303
11
5
C313.
308 1. C3
.c6314
1301
2
L304
4
PW300 PICTURE
A
I.
3
L303
307
30
L302
C301
/I
-F ASSEMBLY
C3 Q3
H
G
GEM
2
5
4
L305
L306
6
1302
3
4
I
14
R310
44.5MC
43.0MC
45.5 MC
O
47.25 MC
T2
OR
1.402 =I
-71
403
-Li
L65
CORE)
PROBE
C40
5
R403
( TOP
DIRECT
R409
7
1
8402
I -F
R 311
0306
0310
-6V.
AGC BIAS
32
=IR 30511A
4
NIP
7
R428 L407
YJ
R4I2
Mf
LI
43
4
R417
el
H
12 OR L65
GND.
R419
R406
(
PG401
R426
PW 400
2
0402
VIDEO ASSEMBLY
GND.
-L406
MED
405
L404
6
5
NI
18
74
SIGNAL
R424
I
E..
0
GENERATOR
421
<R422
R423
4405
0411
Figure 9-Picture I -F Transformer and Trap Adjustments
PAD FOR
USE 1/2 WATT 5% COMPOSITION RESISTORS
87 OHMS
5011. COAX.
PAD FOR
1211 COAX.
PAD FOR
300A BAL.
INPUT
87 OHMS
11211
4131.
13011.
13013
15 OHMS
47
300 ft
BALANCED
OUTPUT
30011
BALANCED
OUTPUT
Figure 8-Sweep Attenuator Pads
Figure 6-Sound Attenuation Pad
129
41.11
300 A
BALANCED
OUTPUT
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA Victor Chassis Nos. KCS-124C, -D, -E, -F, -H, -J, -K, -L, Alignment, Continued
SWEEP ALIGNMENT OF PICTURE I -F
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY
Apply -6 volts to I -F AGC bus at terminal "J" of PW300, and -3.0 volts to tuner AGC
OSCILLOSCOPE
terminal.
Connect 180 ohm resistor across pins 5 and 6 of V301 1st pix. I -F amplifier. Connect oscilloscope to pin 5 of V301, using diode probe.
Connect in series with 1500 mini to SIB at mixer grid. Use shortest leads possible.
SWEEP GENERATOR
SIGNAL GENERATOR
Couple loosely to sweep output cable to provide markers.
Connect to 2nd Detector output at terminal "A" of PW400. Use DC probe.
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
SWEEP
GENERATOR
STEP
Set channel selector to channel
Adjust mixer plate
transformer
1
REMARKS
T2 or L56
(bottom core)
12-P on scope. Adjust for max.
4.
42.5 mc.
45.75 mc.
40 - 50 mc. (I -F)
ADJUST
Sweep output set for 0.5 v.
gain and response "A" below.
L301 &
42.5 mc.
40 - 50 mc. (I -F)
Max. allow. tilt 20%.
C102
input
45.75 mc.
Remove 180 ohm resistor and scope from V301. Connect scope to terminal "A" of PW400 using direct probe.
Adjust I -F
2
Retouch I -F
3
42.5 mc.
45.0 mc.
45.75 mc.
40 - 50 mc. (I -F)
transformers
T303
T302
T301
Adjust for response "B".
Use 5 v. P -P on scope.
Remove sweep from mixer grid. Couple signal generator to mixer, in series with pad shown in Figure 6. Set generator to
45.75 mc. and adjust output for exactly one and one-half WM volts on the "VoltOhmyst". Remove the pad and conned
generator direct to SIB. Do not change generator output in step 4.
Adjust forV 1.2 to
voglts on
Set 41.25 mc.
4
-
attenuation
T301 &
T303
41.25 mc.
VTM mainainin
t1.5
response "B".
Connect sweep generator to antenna terminals using pad shown in Figure 8.
5
Check overall
PW300 SEALED CIRCUIT
PICTURE I -F ASSEMBLY
,,,D
. ;
4 34
S: ::Z/]
311
10
R302
I
L'i C304
Lr'l
01 +
5
0313
C)
L304
3
c 30 7
U
4
180
A
0 CM.
di
OHMS
0
L306
314
R 10
-6V. I -F AGC BIAS
-
+
4.--.,
.0130514
7
Retouch slightly to correct any
overall tilt. Maintain response
T302 &
T303
QM5
GEM
c3
+3091.
IMIIII
C 301
42.5 mc.
45.0 mc.
45.75 mc.
Chans. 13 to 2
OSCILLOSCOPE
CONNECTION FOR
STEPS 3,4, & 5-
0
C140
USE DIRECT PROBE
0102
11
5
C3
t°,,
I
©o 0 0
0
0
OSCILLOSCOPE
DIODE
PROBE
0
0
1
/
GROUND
A
16(71
Ri
'L ' ."L TU''
OM
'
AGO
_,_
0
.10
,0
1,
108E TUNERS/
8403
aill
MIMI
0
ATTENUATOR
PAD
T2 OR L56
(SEE TEXT)
(BOTTOM)
Lialnih.
8426
1
6412
007
'
MI
R4
.-1
Eli
PC401
0402 2
C402
7
6008
5
1
C
----mib
07 7514C
Mitl. I.
45%
SIGNAL
. --
GENERATOR
0
-'r,I
`;_I
41/4
Figure 10 -Sweep Alignment from Mixer Grid
130
PW400
PD
STEP 4
ISEE TENT)
R019
C4
413
05.0 MC
F.
1
6405404
p R 18
518
IP41111116"°1111
Ilk,
RESPONSE 'B"
H .-1
-L406 I=1
c21:570;r.o
90%
C406
.
0018ii64 64
9
73%25%
C
6T
5
R4g,
RESPONSE "A"
42 5
00
7
14402
Ti
I.
C403
CWIR4OP
1
I
05 75MC
SWEEP
GENERATOR
I..402 vi
-TI -LI
403
TO
SWEEP
70%
GROUND
I,
- 3.0 V.
-R. F.
.0.
02 SMC
I
1
M..
SEALED CIRCUIT
VIDEO ASSEMBLY
R420
.
21
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA Victor Chassis Nos. KCS-124C, -D, -E, -F, -H, -J, -K, -L, Alignment, Continued
SOUND I -F, SOUND DETECTOR AND 4.5 MC TRAP ALIGNMENT
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY
Apply -10 volts to the I -F AGC bus at terminal "J" on PW300.
Connect across speaker voice coil.
Connect to terminal "A" on PW400.
Connect to output of diode detector shown below. Set meter for negative voltage readings.
Connect test diode detector, as shown below.
OSCILLOSCOPE
SIGNAL GENERATOR
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER.
MISCELLANEOUS
.
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
STEP
ADJUST
REMARKS
Set contrast control maximum clockwise.
Adjust Driver
Transformer Primary
4.5 mc.
Adjust Sound
Take -Off Trans.
4.5 mc.
Adjust T202 top & bottom for maximum on
meter. Set generator for 1.0 to 1.5 volts when
Peak cores at open end of coils.
Adjust T201 for maximum negative DC on
meter. Set generator for 1.0 to 1.5 volts on
and Secondarypeaked.
1
T202 (top
bottom)
&
T201
3
4
5
meter.
Disconnect the diode test detector. Turn off signal generator and tune in strongest signal in area adjusting volume
control for normal volume (approx. 1/4 turn from c.c.w.). Turn core of T203 flush with top of coil form.
Adjust Sound
Observing oscilloscope and listening to audio output adjust 7203 clockwise to a peak.
Continue clockwise to second louder peak and adjust for maximum on this peak.
Detector Trans.
4.5 mc., A -M Mod.,
Adjust for minimum 400 cycle indication on
Adjust 4.5 mc. "trap
L404
400 Cycles
oscilloscope.
Alternate Method Using Generators With F -M Modulation Provided.
1
Same as step 1 above. Modulate 4.5 mc. signal with F -M 400 cycle signal with 7'/o kc. deviation.
2
Same as step 2 above. Modulate 4.5 mc. signal with F -M 400 cycle signal with 71/2 kc. deviation.
Adjust Sound
Detector Trans.
3
4.5 mc., 400 cycle
Adjust T203 for max. 400-' output on scope
using max. amplitude peak. Set volume con trol for .70 v. p -p on scope when peaked. See
T203
F -M Mod., 7,/z kc. Dev.
response below.
Decrease input to minimum usable signal. Re Sound Take -Off. Trans. F -M Mod., 71/2 kc. Dev.
touch T201 & T202 for symmetrical breakout.
for breakout
Response below.
Move the oscilloscope to terminal "D" on PW400. Use the diode probe. Set the contrast control to maximum clockwise position.
5
Adjust 4.5 mc. trap
Same as step 5 above. Adjust for minimum 400 cycle indication on oscilloscope.
Retouch Driver and
4
4.5 mc., 400 cycle
PW 200
T201 &
T202
- 10 y. I -F
-----1
SOUND
CIRCUIT
' ''
0
PW 300
PICTURE I -F
CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
ASSEMBLY
., .,
E
-IR3Q7).
"
-I
., .;:-....e.'4' 7203
1
tili
fi
°
=
'
DETECTOR
(CIRCUIT
,
.
.
VTVM
I.
.11-c----,
..,i
y Ya°' 0
,
c
li310
DIODE
?-\
A
aza
.1n3091-
3,,
ca,2D ..
.
7" R2°7 *
L.111----__-,
AGC BIAS
+
o.
4.301
a
o.
,
e
1.303
C 'M ,I . -
E 8+
...
III
GROUND
77
--, T 202
T202
( TOP
.o,
_2i.
i! L02 pl
IT L'i__I
a
BOTTOM
CORES)
PW400
V
No.
VIDEO
CIRCUIT
V
0
0
1
'''
1
4,404
R207 AT
.001
XTAL
4.5 MC
TRAP
560K
PIN 7
OF V202
560K
B+
AT
TERM
.
IOK
..9
-7,1
.412
)
DETECTOR RESPONSE
1
ZI:IEIZA.
TO
KILO NE
Ca2
i
IC=
CATHODE
PC.4101
.
CM.
2
ONO
DIREC
PROBE
MEI
mon
'
MIS
,.)1
c%
CIIKEIMII
I
LIN
0
`'''''
"
C06
',
TO
VTVM
-_
,.
GROUND
s Tan
''
III . ' .
1
4...t...,,,
`j}we 7 L
"In.
-
A...
DIODE
PROBE
OSCILLO::
SCOPE
d7
DIODE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
Figur, 15-Sound I -F, Sound Detector and 4.5 mc. Trap Alignment
131
CONNECT SCOPE
ACROSS
COIL
VOICE
ANT
UHF
TO
TI
3,5
C17
iSK
1000
C2
K
L52
LSI
LAS
LEO
IN
i-F PoSiTioN
OF 31.A.B.C.0 VIEWED FROM
FRONT wirm CoNTRoL SHAFT
I
470K
R501
C801
coos
5801
O 1805
O
v
1
Lb10ao
Ci313
0805
1
R1032
osc.
'6AF4A
15306 1
11462A 250
cR 801
1805
C603
602-B
(ALTERNATE CIRCUIT)
114
et
4147:5,...,
81
C506
1000
0.5
UHF
ANT
To
7
C15
*125-1
82
KG
1600
V2
To -5-5V.
Let
._,
6008
3
C21
1000
C2311000
-
5
R7
271.
IICT2.. i
0414
R21
100 K
2
RIO
100
I
.11
*501
LIGHT
51050
C801
A
0802
IS.
0505
C805
C606
1000
03C.
6AF4A
v2,01
0813
-)
507
1000
135
R1303'
100
coos
OVS3
I.5
MMF.
MMF
0.5
At'
RIDS2
2
ID
112
0 .5
C802 -C
C
52
ED
5LK
PIN
VIEW
**
8 cua.
LIGHT..
ces
I Ito
CI6
470
-3
CID -R26
4/0 T 410
0.34
ct4
1
TI
115:ii
.1
I
1
1
1.1 R.R.°
0-86
+1225.
""rc25--71
IC2SIV....
51
gy
C37
..,z2 V.
1.F INTER-
i
GRN
19
u
.
TANT
',V
31.0
sHAF
C32
0.22
65
C2
L42`
14.4
143
L46
L451
147
L9
FRONT H.
LI/
115
116
5
.4
RI30
5 T560
C15
6800
R14
6008
.5.(*A
V2
Rat L
100N
FRONT ND REAR SECTIoNS VIEWED
FROM moo' ANO SIOWN IN CHANNEL
NO
POSITION.
CHANNEL SELECTOR SW. SI
s.,f
REAR
SI-13
2
R8
T 470
CI3
Circuit Schematic Diagram for Chassis KCSI24E
KCS124K
GR.
**
JI
OMITTED IN KRK8OH
PI050-1.1 AND
CHANNEL LIGHT
RED
Y
VIEW
PIN
WA
252 V.
R -F A.G.0 P105044
o.47R 1053
C21 1 RM0
0.136 3436. -
1000
L8
I
C2.3TIC1051
1000
RI
loK
ov.
6507A
,
KRK 79T/80 H
KRK72L/46AA)
VHF TUNER UNIT
Figure 18-KRK79T Fi KRK8OH VHF Tuner
1152
L51
.
LOS
112(
LI3
33
1-4
C4
-_s_47-
LE
51-D
REAR
S
14
F
cz TRAP
137
L34
153
Lae
139 RH 132
140
3300
141
100K
IR9
,0
R10
100K
SI. B
TR,*
FRONT
126
-V
122
LOS
L24
Is
51-D
TRANS.
MATCHING
CI
TRAP
I -F
LI
*Measured with 1 megohm, Ve watt resistor in series with meter probe.
FRONT LOS
=
voltages measured with "Volt -
v. a -c supply.
Tt
100K ANT
R27
- 100
1
All
Diagrams of some of the tuners used
with these chassis are printed on these
pages. Reference to models and .tuners
is made in the table on page 127.
Ohmyst" and with no signal input. Voltages should hold within ±20% with 117
r 711 e+252V.
3
.2.T* Y
!
34
REAP
VIEW
RF AGC P105" 3103 -F
I.S.ZI i,, R.1:613 a
I
1000I **
,
1000
C22
VI
6807A
STAGE TR.,,-
T3
6
K
RI
.'N
t
Dv.
C 214 VALUE IS .0033 IN KCS 124 Nil
P1050 -M AND VHF CHANNEL LIGHT
OMITTED IN KRK 605.
C 212 VALUE 13 .0022 IN KCS 124 H /J.
R.103 ,C122 AND C141 OMITTED IN KC51240/J.
3103-F OMITTED IN KCS 124C/D/H/J/K/L.
UHF TUNER-KRK66A/J(962047)
e
1
UV 1.F AMR.
Ow 8 MOCER
6Cv0.26
5
.A.A.p.it
F
R12
100
RS
I MEG
220
16
.2355. R -F MARL.
6607A
KRK 73 L /47A A
H1-3
RS
100K
C 10=
VHF UHF
REAR
51-A
127
L28
L29
L30
04
r --
FRONT
SI-A
Itmg
L48
1.33
L34
133 L35
RI, L32
3300
1.31
IS aCt8
FINE
.
REAR
S1-13
L36
LID
LII
114
112
117
113
51-0
REAR
TRAP Ty AP
L16
LIS
5
cz
TUNER UNIT-KRK79U/80J
L4
VHF SECTION
FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS
11
C28
0.91MMF.
-
51-0
C
FRONT
LAL54,2..
Last
L44
146.
C27 IT
FRONT
0-9:42F.
T
AV
z41 AAA
MMF 100
0P2 RIBL22
L24
L23
FRONT u
SI- C
1000
C30
TRANS.
MATCHING
100K ANT.
R27
TRAP
LI
UHF TUNER- KRI(66A/J (662046)
C602
ANT.
VHF
To
P104
T
33
330K
[=C401
,w_
'. 5602
05
27044
18004
F 46C
.022
C605
R607
3300
65 O
-13V.
11
10.33
220
1.602
.0, (604
AA.
3
R303
82
3
V 601
-C303
1.0047
6-r611,
PRINTED
1303
R302
too K
004
4 470I
H IOZV
i-F AmpL.
I
I
4
1201
uev.
.01
-
MK
R30
1347
0305
150 K.
1
I
.001 /-
4
T
c308.1.
243+
-C307
.+T
.
C304
7
00
14
42
,,,N.
5503
s,
540K
RS04
1 56K
3
^Mt - 0.5 VI
RSOt
I
API
4844
.
7180
7,
4:
K
C3I 1
470
+150V.
644-111.4
1.305
ill mu. 4
0
4
I
I
Y.
13403
2200
1403
,
nag ','7
11121-601.15L.
V
4
K
62 141-14
.&.
j 820
5428
9
L4c4-1,4
ekuzeozs
iw .
6
120 WE
6.8
R507
I
04756
H
_
5509
C. 05. 0.4,
115 I(
R504
01
R.,..
-
-
3
2
4 +185 V.
05C.
VERT.
-'- C505
.039
"1
C508
I.
cs0A
I
Izn
/ 04. 221(
-CS 11
0.15
..R,t°
c....vi
179,K2
L
-,
.
330
330
1 R4061
f R4I6
22K
L _ _.1 !..72,!,..]
1
1
4
9
23
5
3
OF
I..
BO
NO
920K
5417
.....Y.-
R419
rop
M
of
DO
R424 R422
470K 820K
MEG,
R24.i23
+-H--4.---
470 3.220 la
.40,0 i.,
,
6
:v.v6 K
12418
C4I1 & R421
+045V.
R405
611U8 1. 39 K
SYNC SOP
AG0c40A2.05,
------e----.--t---)
8200
1
I
C4093
0--.-)
0.1 1 C408
C402 ,I
,
CI21-B
1 10 41..
RE
=
'
Y
--
OK
.
6
3
2
.ftee
56 K
R611
,r,,
COTR.
140R.HOLD
Ao K
R 1AG
e t"
COIL
WAVE
R109
820 K
390
D
1855
R612
E
-11--0
C60,
820
44-I
C4025
68K
pRGIO
R"'
10 arEG
ID
JR*. DRIvE
/10-160
+,
1.2
MEG.
7
y
2
.0
4 +17
III
0.1
C113
C108
0.1
V.
?a."
68 K
/Rue
.068
0159
I
1
-
7103
_ H.V.
/R-'1.VVLS":"'
R Ii7 ,e
220K
II
0.1
C112
07
5 MEG.
H 1GHT
CONTR.
R
A
5
+
RI16
100
0.27 1
+13V
C 110
470
M11.14
4-7
U°7
4.--1
sr
+
DAM
t
5
a
255 V.
6AU46TA
V103
1
5513
I
3000
V501
,R,
.
9
OuTPuT
IMK -0
_,,,,
115.181,
Z
2'
vERT. SWP.
I
I
N
0
22.0
R114
247 V.
.C.5113
820
R105
150.5
vsoz
in
' GEMS
CONTRA,/
L102
A
TI02
L-
1
1
g
220
I
VOL
R132
0J
-/"V"-.2 I
/
+150V.
0104
2
-t
I
7
I
r'
t
4
1Iyip
RI221_C1I6 0
2201
T.0047
(
CIIS
3300 .047
5I29
5RIGHTNESS
200 K
'3 P36
114.--W1-3%40.2_1(
VERTICAL
OUTPUT
TRANS.
1
!KU
7
3
waTil
141.14
4.7
Lill
R 113
Qd
,
AGC
vgl,Qs
CONTR
2,40,0s,.,
1a
r
Z
o
I-3
,--,
1_,
0
103
`
I
<
-3
tri
4
r
o
.
I
-17104
KINESCOPE
21C E P4
V105
+252V
1.132
C120-13
20 MF.
WV.
V 102
-.
;
4
CISI
91
C115
120
COLO
I
1
.
I4411
5124 6133 R125
ISO
3.5 ISO
t418
s
VERT. COILS
L103
11041
IP
'4
I
NNT.140.
:
VIEW
PE
4102-14
. 21
T61.
.
D
L__20111.1(
I
1
I
I
+252 V.
2
.
2
4
+252V.
,
3
-7
3107
VIEW
REAR
.1102-F
c ISO
0.54.
F101
620
R
12
4700
126
145
--'
'
,
F.L,,
04
a
+252V.
L108
i1/41
.,
51214
YEL
150V.
041"4.04
F,o1
+ism*
F102
1.120-A
x
.
T
4
1 100
mr.
,,,
CI27 ..-.00
1-4
560
R0
6484.711
I
131.14
r--,
3104-
82044
RI27
SW.
004 -OFF
11
_
,
.
SUPPLY
11576
102
INTER.
LOCK
THERM. S1V.
T.03,1.107 T T.,;, I,1;'t
;c,.
0
..
12
i30'
RECT
5U4G 5
Z
1.-.1
H
4
Pi
0
Z
04
0
CI
11
0-4
Pd
tri
ci)
Z
0
Cip
1-4
<
1-1
rtri
til
1-3
CO
CO
CO
WV. RECT.'71
+14 70o V
6847K
f -Ai
- - - -YOKE
- -1
r--DEFLECTION
0.35
3
4
0 120 16
RI21
1000
CoNTR.
VERT. 1101
12112
2
0K
1.5 MEG.
---..
13900
.4140 4
470 K
12108
0. j 01191.
.,
OUTPUT
vioi
+2520.
CONTR.
VERT. MOLD
,,,.
...-
8110
1.5 MEG
2
11E0.
60G6
A
NOR. SWEE P
3
-20V
C log
47
R115
S R '04
710 NM
f
C135 .
470
4-10-
0.417
C105
PW 500
re--"v----b
4
+252V
L 401
SINE
C606
"ATE'S
470
L602
760
1.610 C407
680 .0
+ 160 v.
NOR. OSC.
6CG7
+1500.
7
i
2
I9
CI
0
+252V
'-5
0
4-1-
c.)
n
I0
15185K12
)1.-..--1
RS08 C507 c512
.01
.027
5027 ;°056
6-1(
V501-136
6CG7
4'107,i
PW400 P101.4 8
810: -5403-4110.4K
1101
477474F7401
:45:(Ft:.
270 K 1.514E61
J
L404 _
C407
Jrlot'
KU - 0.22
R4I3
680
8200
R411
f
1800
OR304.080-111LN''W-611.1(
1.404 014 L 405
9 59 C40
o_-
4
270
6211
I9
C1214 D 5 10 2
+
L, .-
4.1.--...R5ANFC.
C.
.01
40.*
47K
+44V.
+401
I
14 i*
12103
156T0sANCW0.AA8,1APLD
R34904
o
I
8200
I
Ce...013
82 K
5426
250 141.11
A
-
14401
I®
I
4'
C3I3
I5
L
I
1
IL 402
la 66.",
1110
0
R.
VOL. 4
MEG.
3
2
OUTPUT.,
+62
-7
NOV.
981, w102
.. I
1
560 Kf Rai- b
5209
wioi
1ceo , :001
."1T1. CW .2'412
v203
AUC50
6 DSS -.OUTPUT
TR.
AUDIO
,---..,
X
C504
.C.3097.1
R505
SYNC.
OUTPUT
c50,766"
=.033
O0
V501-4.
6CG7
+2520.
T.0047
.11104110
DE/.
240.
1 .01
.--1- C209
1.12 301
0211
C200:1
a :1
DO/.TR.
7203
SOUND
47014 1047
+R208
E.'
12044
6 6207
4+2ISV.
VOL
*00. -0.20--.
VE1
R311
44.5 MC.
.F TRANS.
2
0111111E
C312
.001
3
7303
3R17. PIK
...717-4-
I -F AMR.
V303
6C136
3RD. puf .
+"3
R206
nay
oy ,
7
AUDIO AWL.
4,(%1_,,, R
C208
V202
6DT 6
SOUND DET.
.01 I 540
-
_
C207
11
1304 R310P-C310
A0041.
f '1 V
45.5 04C.
5
I -F TRANS
4 +228V
I -F 404PL.
1000
R2o3
a
061-1:
2
4. :1
.1
+150V.
o
c
0.
_____.______-__m_....-
-5/VP
1-j,
OF
_
20414. P1X
I .00 1
2700 / I0K
CI
1344
R205
R204
1000
C6111680
+252V.
E
I
C20411C215
Tt
6 D E 6 2U.0eTx.
0302
-
4 3
z
C
i/
cs" _ _
II 0
13,01,
22
5314
1250'
R312
PS°2
1-:
0
.001
6-I
MG T
1
.01
44+114V
R306
1-F TRANS
43.0 MC.
r 301
"E-Pl 20 1
56
C202
Cr .1
R202
82
_ _1
1
CZ.,,,011C203
'07
Is, pia
I- -
47 X
RU1
1_,.._
+4.8
F- -1
4s Mc.
"..
'A- *00
SOUND
TAKE -I21V C205
OF f
4.511C.
DRIVER
TRANS.
T202
-01L.V.
, .+2,20: ;S
1
c302
..i,.:
ra
I 2200
1306
33K
5301
A.
GRID COIL
PW 600
18 I
C101
4AP. I
1302,
I -A
..=AG.
120
8131
10-160
C102
II
W103 470
C lao
'
15T P1X. 1.F
L301
PW 300
r-
60E6
1ST. Ptx .
v301
----1
Cai
3
.FAMPL
SOUND
6AU 6
PW 200
v201
CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM KCS124C, D, E, F, H. I, K 6 L CHASSIS
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA Victor Chassis Nos. KCS-124C, -D, -E, -F, -H, -J, -K, -L, Service Data, Continued
Figure 24-PW300 Picture
MD
as
R612
II.
Circuit Layout
ON
o
C403
R610
nC6091
0606
G406
R412
2
R428
.6. R6031..
8607 }4
4L4074.1
LI
1
R 60 2
(it
el
C604
R4 Al
14,3.010$1,9,
.114407
R419
C4
R406
C 601
MI
R417
R4041.
PC401
1
6
C402
Figure 25-PW600 Horizontal
Oscillator Circuit Layout
44
6
7406 44F74 0 5
The assemblies represented above are viewed from
the component side of the assemblies and are oriented
as they will usually be viewed on the chassis.
The printed wiring, on the reverse side of the
assemblies, is presented in "phantom" views superimposed on the component layouts. This will enable
circuit tracing without removing the assemblies from
the chassis to see the printed wiring on the reverse
side.
-71
18
405
8413
5
NI
o 11
R424
* L405 0
421
22
20
423
C407
F
425
0411
K
Figure 26-PW400 Video, Sync and
AGC Circuit Layout
Figure 27-PW200 Sound
Audio Circuit Layout
and
Balloons 0 0 etc., shown on schematics
indicate points of observation of the
waveforms shown below the individual
schematic.
100 V.
P- P
1:1'4%,
75 V.
P -P
22 V.
P -P
203 V.
P- P
45 V.
P- P
190 V.
P- P
Figure 28-PW500 Yell:cal and Sync Output Circuit Layout
192 V.
P -P
1380 V
P -P
435 V.
P -P
134
135 V.
P -P
240 V.
P -P
130 V.
P -P
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
CHASSIS DESIGNATIONS
CHASSIS
TUNERS
KCS126A
KRK85B
170-P-048, 170-P-049,
170-P-060, 170-P-061,
170-P-063, 170-P-064
KCS126B
KRKB6B
170 -P -048U, 170 -P -049U,
170 -P -060U, 170 -P -061U,
170 -P -063U, 170 -P -064U
MODEL NOS.
KRK66U
PORTABLE TELEVISION RECEIVERS
MODELS
170-P-048, 170 -P -048U
170-P-049, 170 -P -049U
170-P-060, 170 -P -060U
170-P-061, 170 -P -061U
170-P-063, 170 -P -063U
170-P-064, 170 -P -064U
CHASSIS REMOVAL
To remove the chassis from the cabinet, if necessary for
repair, remove the front and rear panels of the receiver as
previously outlined. Remove the three screws holding the
small control bracket to the bottom of the receiver case.
Take out the two nuts holding the top of the chassis to
the top of the cabinet. Remove the 'two large chassis bolts
under the bottom of the cabinet and remove the chassis and
CHASSIS NOS.
kinescope assembly from the cabinet rear.
KCS126A & B
(Service material on pages 135 through 140)
KRK 858 (KCS 126A)
KRK El6B (KCS12681
TRAP
1.1.
PIX
I -F GRID TRANS.
V203
6 BOB
AUDIO
VI03
/
66 6
ist PM I F
S101/R102
MP
17CM (VS?
ON -OFF SWITCH
8 VOLUME CONTROL
60T6
ji.isTECT
SOUND
i
411h721
VI
TRAP
0
5127
CONTRAST
CONTROL
V20
6E88
WIDTH
COIL
,
6206A
T 206
Ist PIX
I -F TRANS
HON. OUTPUT
7207
I.I.PIX
"P
I -F TRANS
TRANS.
5 MC
6FV6
R -F AMP
/
L101
6AX4GT
DAMPER
n36\5 A*
End. PIX I -F
DRIVER
V2
SEAN
OSC MIXER
7204
T205
47.25 MC
T101
AUDIO OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER
(123i..\
T102
CENTERING
MAGNET
6AU6
SOUND I- F
dr %Amp.,
N.V.
TRANS.
SOUR
7.7q
TAKE- OFF
VIDEO AMP TRANS)
81.1. SYNC
DEFLECTION
R509
YOKE
6AF4AFIC9 CONTROL
C101
NOR.
HF. OSC
DRIVE
11252B
HEIGHT
CONTROL
V501
GEAR
AGC
KRK 66U
(KCS 1268
ONLY)
SYNC OUTPUT
R531
UHF
TUNING
VERT. LIN
T 103
T104
VERT. OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER
CONTROL
POWER
TRANSFORMER
V104
V501
5ASA
6C G7
HOR.OSC
CONTROL
RECT IFIE
L501
SINE WAVE
COIL
F101
FUSE
D -f3,431
R104
VERT. HOLD
CONTROL
R120
NOR. HOLD
CONTROL
R112
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
CHASSIS REAR VIEW
135
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA Victor Chassis Nos. KCS - 126A and KCS - 126B Service Material, Continued
PW200 SECURITY SEALED
CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY
B
R232
PC202
V205
;
PC201
T202
T207
CPR203
230
R227
1!"
L205
PW200 COMPONENT LOCATION GUIDE
C201
C208
C209
C210
C212
C215
C216
C217
C2I8
B5
C2
B2
61
B4
B2
Al
CI
Cl
C219
C220
C221
C224
C225
C226
C227
C228
C229
Cl
C2
D2
D4
C3
C4
C5
D5
C6
C230
C232
C234
C235
CPR201
CPR202
CPR203
CR201
C5
B5
C6
A5
C5
B5
C4
C6
l
L201
L202
C3
C5
L203
L204
L205
L206
L207
L208
D6
84
PC201
PC202
PC203
D3
A5
06
D6
A4
A2
C6
R203
R209
R210
R212
R213
136
.
.64
C2
C2
B3
B2
R214
R215
R216
R217
R222
R226
R227
R228
R229
DI
Cl
DI
C2
D3
D5
C6
A4
A3
R230
DI
T201
B6
R231
R232
R233
R234
R235
A2
A2
A6
B6
A4
A6
1202
T203
T204
T205
T206
T207
T208
T209
C4
B3
R236
R237, R238,
A4
R239
DI
Cl
D3
D4
D6
A5
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA Victor Chassis Nos. KCS-126A and KCS-126B Service Material, Continued
PW500 SECURITY SEALED
CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY
V 502
6 DR 7
V. OSC B OUT
V501
6EA8
R541
IIt
AGC
SYNC. OUT
C520
V504
6 C G7
NOR DSC.
PW500 COMPONENT LOCATION GUIDE
C501
D3
C502
C503
C504
C505
C506
A5
A5
C3
Cl
C2
C508
C510
B3
D5
C511
C512
85
C5I9
C5
C520
C513
C514
85
D5
C515
C518
DI
CPR501
CPR502
PC502
PC503
C3
Cl
L501
D5
R501
C521
D4
A3
A4
A3
81
C523
Cl
PC501
A2
R502
R503
D2
C2
D2
The assemblies represented above and at the left
are viewed from the component side of the circuits
and are oriented as they will usually be viewed on
the chassis.
82
R504
R505
R512
R514
R515
R516
D3
.
.
.
03
C2
A4
C4
84
R517
R518
R519
R520
R521
R525
C5
C5
B5
C3
C2
R526
R534
R537
R539
R541
A2
A3
83
R542
84
.
DI
.
The printed wiring, on the reverse side of the
circuits, is presented in ''phantom" views super-
imposed on the component layouts. This will enable
circuit tracing without removing the assemblies from
the chassis to see the printed wiring on the reverse
side.
137
C5
A4
AN
TOT
WOE
/0
0127
t LAS
400
ER2 0
R10
10K
V1UP
560o
R8
7
WITO
FRO C,
HANNEL
17
u1xiF
CONTROL S.AFT
NO2 POSITION
of arrows at controls
voltages measured with
"Volt-
indi-
'Measured with 1 megohm, Vs watt resistor in series with meter probe.
v. a -c supply.
Ohmyst" and with no signal input. Voltages should hold within ±20% with 117
All
cates clockwise rotation.
Direction
wise noted.
AU capacitance values less than 1 in
MF and above 1 in MU unless other-
All resistance value in ohms. K = 1000.
,00
PR
,F AM
6EA8
MIXER
s/2
Rf AMPL
6FV6
LOG
MIXE
-r
R501
470 K
82I
L49
L48
/ L 46
/0 L47
It LAS
J801
0802
1519
C8071
1000
8128
80STC154/5
2507
C808 05C
6AF4A
V801
1810
0813
1000
C806
g
2-6
C809
1.5
1.5
C8I0
MMF
C811
0.5
C, 802-C
C8I7
(
8°.,f
51-4
17161'1
I
C130
JR147
500 K
500K
R 146
C 129
CPR 103
1470
ANTI
UHF
06
I
1
1
UHF
R30
5600
)1
TRANS.
TO 1-F
INTER STAGE
O
J2 P902
T.100
LCIG
8./I'8 24 I R7FPPA SA SN
I
OOOJt
)1% .I.
L
L56
4T71,
MIXER
PLATE COIL
MMF I
0.56
Z°
CA2
03
on
JI
c,f,"P1R
C 80 I
P80
5801
IN82A
CR801
Laos
L803
r /1;02-8.
1
0,
R-
10
OSC
4
6AF4A
V801
R802
5600
AGC
+2615.
'1
TOO K
R2
14C7I031
R121
cz7 1 1039
2
R41
4,
56K
4-VVV,-
R3
16'82010
1000
'3°
680
C9
_5
__Too1
-3.5V.
1
100
8803
135
pm
C808
UHF TUNER- KRK 66U (962047)
100
C35
RI
2214
1000
R
AMPL
6EA8
V2
_1
5
OSC it MIXER
C18
0.56 KW.
LOT
L6
R7
is r 56
C12
c26
0 UHF **VHF
022_
C
o3
4
330
51-C
REAR
C4
FFFAMPL.
vt
6FV6
VHF TUNER
KRK86B
(ON 514)8-1 o---
8.2 MU -H
51
L7
UHF
TRAP
IS ,!4REAR
L62
B*
100
R9
°
100K
CS
27
FINE TUNING
C19
L4
1-F TRAP
9°
RII
82K
3900
R8
-i 7
31
-C17
30
L26
125
L247
32
LOT
L13
LI4
2
115
L16
r
L3
L19
12
L20
LIS
CI
16
5
LI
I -F TRAP CZ
FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS
OF SI A. AND C VIEWED FROM
FRONT WITH CONTROL SHAFT
IN I -F (NO. 1) P0511'1014 .
IN82A
CR801
L803
C803
CI301
L601
L19
128
R27
100K
TRANS.
(ALTERNATE CIRCUIT)
/.C802-8
L802
TI- ANT
MATCHING
TUNER- KRK66U (962048)
ENIV
AG0
CSoz
UHF
PAlS
TP1
470
C128
0SR001 401
R144
0127
4-70
J
CPR 1.1'2
II
I
0.111
PLATE CRO,
.2 1
1680
I
ANTIL
Q,
ICS
I.
VHF TUNER
KRKS5B
FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS
OF SIA,E, AND C VIEWED FROM
,F TRAP
1016 '/'"
TRANS
LI
All schematics are shown in the latest
condition at the time of printing.
CPR 102
L RI44
'
I
L9'
KRK85B VHF TUNER SCHEMATIC
FOR KCS126A CHASSIS
TO
VHF
N
O
indicate points of observation of the
Balloons 0 0 etc., shown on schematics
,Z.
-o <
17 (7/./
I
-0
,<
17 NI
?<
0
-0 0
-0 .<
10
v<
7
a
10
T
-v
t;P
SR
ozo
,F
CA
1-,
ND
CD
11
C/)
P
P Crq
1 1)
P
a
P
CO a)
011
P
fal
Oa
O0
CD
C)
< a)
I
O
cn"
ta
0
CD
02
02
11
cn
ti)
1--!r
.1 0
WIOI
10
I
I
z,.28t
)74 7.1 On0
47K ,..
I250 9
A.G.C.
I
330 K
5516
C504
33
tOOK
R502
1 -RED
PW SOO
P007A
1
1200K
,
13
$1OB
3300
5501
C503
022
.01
+122
1501-A
54/14
5114
No
V502
565
5518
I
C8 52 1.2
I MEG
R519
C5I3
390
E
47
DRIVE
Hog
10-160
0101
5 105
1105.1401.0
40
CI02
IC,. 15
0.1
0103
2
V206
W902
70 1
+180 V.
--II
C527
4.261V
F 101
R109
820K
8
5
I -I
7
8.2 OKI-K
L102
V502-4
3
4.7
DAMPER
64X4 -GT
5
7
R119
r
L2208
R-14101
2200
15K
p.6
, it
I
I
6533 1
1.5 MEG. 500 KJ
470K
71
PC50 I -C
5532
r- -
II
X
1.0015
C 108
..-41
.n1190
C
141
7"
w
5115
470390
T
0109 10112
+13,100V
HEIGHT
6
1105
Lio6
°EFL. YOKE
T VERT. COILS
m:1
0 119-C
1800
RIII
1 RED -BL K
IT BLu
20
1
2700
R110
1.107
I
1
41
P
R229
1800
R23I
6800
0215
220K
1
CTRST. SIM
CONT..
6
$.2 712
1
SECT
5LK
TEL
I
1
25-C
120
ISY.SSLL
SUPPLY
INTLK
$102
R116
8201(
bus
R123
+26IV. +145V.
VP 102
TB. 108
A
54544 T103
VI 04
+261V.
2
R232$
50 K
14.'5127
.30K 5112
200K
2
47 1_19 cONT.
C111
L207
300 MU -H
055-154.6-1KX 0.22
co -oD GO 5114
SPX R
0119-44ic,,m
1....
(tOCLOOILIS50
'RIM cilj04174 L108
HoR.
I_11
Y01 6117 5124 R118
1 .1GRN 150 3.5
-
.00271.
CPR501
7
+25014
6537
3300
.068
--LM. VERT LIN. - C524
4 MEG
5528
V502 - B
6D R7
VERT.OUTPUT
R539 -39+
1000
1206
51011.144
TRA P. 6RN- BRA
BLIX
R5361 C521
T
6531
I0047
__i9
'922
RE560
S MEG. 922
5542 5514
22K
1.2
I
8541 03181. 0520
.00271.003
+142v
pc503
R540
13K 82021
R523 R544
to INF.
C118-13
1209
4.5mE
+261 V.
AMPL.
V207-4
6EB8
viD
..--4-CE.L-17
ANC
T 10 MF
304 9
77
Z.23400471
r33K
.
1.1111714
T 101
AUDIO
RN
87:1.175
..I.. CR179
+ 261 V.
$.122020"59Mv.Ft4
+
c50811c526
r
3900
12 227
15LK
PC501-Be."-i
V103
8.2 MU -14
+251
COIL
WIDTH
1101
L205
YEL-YEL-BLU
VERT. OSC
8
R
+218V.
36VIDEO
,
6D R7
+26,1 V. V102.
1
I
77-1,
N.V. RECT
C7R
,
.0022_1
l525
11.- 4:72::
5 T 250 Mu -11
1 RED-GRN
0230 C229
IX 2 B
L 103
C107
0.1
4
ttv TRANS
102
2
K
j
°5
_t C21--'0
.5
2CR
7011204
ND. DET
5
7
0509
.0011 -77V.
. 1 40
V E. 0R5 TtMEG.4°4
10K<-1- 220
8
.17.0 502
I
I
5520:10506
C,1
1,05..
R106
10K
loo
8126
157 v.
;
,
R513$
27K I
r- 7
502
CPR
9
I
LEAS
SYNC
v501 -
Y
oL
1.001
3
60JVB
AUDIOT2pG0
OUTPUT - R943
,,, -,-- 90K II-.+53V
5522
125
6225
4
C228
I -F TR.
3RD. FIX.
T208
vVs.
56014
R209
178*. 1203
4+161V.
1-F AMPL
3RD. FIX.
41.3'43
600.6A
NOR. OUTPUT
7
ol
-
-C.208
I .001
6E W6
5212
0505
V101
' i
1
31 I
+ 145V
R233
+70
820 K
CSI
--LI 5107
220
(-*-1
6517
°
P
1
2.2 mt6
3
V207- B
C226'
.0047
01`
I -F TRANS.
7207
6E
58
1ST. SYNC
R242
560K
5512
Vvv
PC2032E6
15240
2.7
270 K
12241
R120
L501.B
<470.
Jam551
511.16 WAY
F
°'
C510
33K
.0033715031
--/Vs--4
4V
R2
C236
PW 200- B
R237
131J C235
,247 K
r
_
.047 I 470 K
C215
L
10
FF
vORL'A Coul T
0-)120- v
I20K t1 0209
12211
TRANS.
7203
SOUND 061.
C214J.
245. PIX.
7
*230 V.
I -F AMPL.
2ND. MX.
+261 V.
PC 202
5238
csis CT COIL
COIL
>-I I--
680
C514
7 -60V.
*128v.
I -F TRANS
97
I
R5051
470
,
CSO1
...123v
HoR. 0SC
56K
rAex
R526
C502
1 0.33
220K
5503
MEG,
R504
2.2
R
I.001
C220
I 80 K
1.
C225
.0047
4
34
*4-118V
I -F AMPL.
T206
-
3 _C213J
I
4 13
V205
1ST. PIX,
1ST. PIX.
PC201
5205
4700
t-41LW-
1K
GBZ 6
II
2
r +2.6V 2
R204 C207.R207
2200
.01
560
s
V204
I
1
L._
12
0206 Ov.
6BZ 6
V504
5
C212
.00 27
V501
3300
K
6C67
+ 50 v.
-0.2*
R514
I
+
-~t-79.4
6 +20V
6E
A8
A.G.C.
+
7
5;2:81
V501 -A
10.47
0521
3300
A0-0
R511
rE-7-17--.1
;039
82
34V.
SOUND DDT
157 AUDIO
V202
6DT6
rDRIVER
- -I TR.
-- se 52 v.
1202
SOUND
713-1
CPR 202
_
5210
1200
?.
0117
PW 200-A ot4
.0011
100
R202
* +124 V.
AMPL
-1 3
+22V
* +19 v.
c2:6215
-
c
IC116
.0104
CPR 201
47K
0--
0219.-
47-25 44C
TRAP
T205
217
9
(
15K
6214
1+
+0.6*.
-7
LR201
I 1 100K1
1
+261V. --c.
+145V
+261
AGC
1.5-0
C120 fr'
CL:1:9-7
P101
39
0202
* -0.6V
1.2J C2
7204
_
15T PIX.
F
GRID TRANS.
L
C203
56
I
02011
3
TRANS
TAKE -OFF
7 201
SOUND
v201
64 U6
SOUND 1-F
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA Victor Chassis Nos. KCS-126A and KCS-126B Service Material, Continued
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
If the lines of the raster are not horizontal or squared with
the picture mask, rotate the deflection yoke until this condition is obtained. The yoke clamp must be loosened to allow
TO
RECEIVER
VHF
VHF TERMS/
e
the yoke to be rotated. Make sure the yoke assembly is
300 OHM
"4 -TRANSMISSION
300 OHM
pushed forward against the kinescope bell.
TRANSMISSION
LINE
LINE
TO
RECEIVER
UHF
UHF TERMS
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
The electrostatic focus kinescope is provided with special
centering magnets. These magnets are in the form of two discs
mounted on the back of the deflection yoke. When the mag-
-COMBINATION
UNF-VHF
A
of the magnets with respect to the other. To shift the picture
in a desired direction rotate both magnets simultaneously
in the same direction on the neck of the kinescope. By
alternately rotating one magnet with respect to the other,
then rotating both simultaneously around the neck of the
tube, proper centering of the picture can be obtained.
ANTENNA
B
UHF/VHF Models
The KRK86B/66U tuner combination is designed for UHF/
VHF reception with separate 300 ohm antenna inputs provided. A rod -type antenna is provided for VHF reception
and a loop antenna for UHF reception on all models.
When reception from an external VHF antenna is desired,
the rod -type antenna should be disconnected and the leadin from the external antenna connected to the VHF antenna
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY ADJUSTMENTS
Adjust the height control located on PC500 (remove rear
terminals, as explained above for VHF Models.
When reception from an external UHF antenna is desired,
panel) until the picture overscans approximately Vs- at
117V.
the loop antenna should be disconnected and the lead-in
from the external UHF antenna should be connected to the
Adjust vertical linearity (located on PC500), until the test
pattern is symmetrical from top to bottom. Adjustment of
either control will
TO
COMBINATION
UHF/VHF ANT.
TO
nets are rotated so that the levers are together, maximum
centering effect is produced. To shift the picture, rotate one
both top and bottom with normal line voltage of
7Ij
34.
UHF antenna terminals.
When a combination UHF/VHF antenna is to be used, hav-
require a readjustment of the other.
Recheck centering of the picture within the mask.
ing a single transmission line, a stub arrangement, such as
is shown in A of the illustration above or a crossover network (RCA Part #78444) as shown in B of the illustration,
may be used to match the single transmission line to the
WIDTH ADJUSTMENT
The width adjustment is located on the chassis rear. The
rear panel must be removed to perform this adjustment.
The width of the picture should be adjusted to fill the mask
two inputs.
with a line voltage of 105V. With normal voltage of 117V, the
cr'
picture should overscan the tube at each side by approximately 1/4 inch. The adjustment should be made with the
Brightness control set at normal operating position.
REMOVE
4:71,,v17""'
ANTENNA INPUT
VHF Models
The KRK85B tuner unit is designed for VHF reception only
with a 300 ohm antenna input provided. A rod -type VHF
antenna is provided on all models.
The antenna rods are connected when the straps on the
VHF terminal board are connected between the outer and
inner terminals.
If reception from an external antenna is desired, the rod -
type antenna is disconnected by loosening the screws on
the terminal board and swinging the straps back away from
the inner terminals. The external antenna should then be
connected to the inner terminals on the terminal board.
Tighten the screws on the outer terminals to prevent the
straps from shorting to the inner terminals. Push the rods
all the way down when using the external antenna.
QD
LULL.
RONNE
3
SCRIVIS
WT LIOU.Or
S
.40(60.747
16%3K u. AND OF, .11110L
HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING
OPERATION OF THIS RECEIVER OUTSIDE THE CABINET OR WITH THE COVERS REMOVED, INVOLVES A SHOCK
HAZARD FROM THE RECEIVER POWER SUPPLIES. WORK ON THE RECEIVER SHOULD NOT BE ATTEMPTED BY ANYONE WHO IS NOT THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH THE PRECAUTIONS NECESSARY WHEN WORKING ON HIGH
VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT. DO NOT OPERATE THE RECEIVER WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE COMPARTMENT SHIELD
REMOVED.
KINESCOPE HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
DO NOT INSTALL, REMOVE OR HANDLE THE KINESCOPE IN ANY MANNER UNLESS SHATTER -PROOF GOGGLES ARE
WORN. PEOPLE NOT SO EQUIPPED SHOULD BE KEPT AWAY WHILE HANDLING KINESCOPES. KEEP THE KINESCOPE
AWAY FROM THE BODY WHILE HANDLING.
140
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Sylvania TV Chassis
1-542-1, -2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -7, -8
Models 21C414, 210519, 210524,
210616, 210621, 21T218, 21T305
(Material on pages 141 through 148)
1-542-7,-8 CHASSIS
1-542-7,-8 is similar to the 1-542-5,-6
DESCRIPTION: Ch
eh sss ix except that the picture prompter assembly is not used.
MODELS 21C818, 210621, 217305
DESCRIPTION:
Models 210616, 2IC621, 21T305 incorporating the 1-542
-5,-6 chassis are all similxr.
KNOB REMOVAL
I. Channel Selector and On/Off Knobs
A. Remove by pulling straight out:
See Figure 2.
2. Volume, Contrast, Brightness and HaloLight Knobs.
A. Remove Channel Selector and On/Off Knobs.
Remove escutcheon.
B. Remove screws (2) securing escutcheon to cabinet.
C. Remove knobs by pulling straight out.
CHASSIS REMOVAL
1. Disconnect AC power cord and antenna connections.
2.
Remove interlock cover.
Remove screw securing vertical hold knob assembly to cabinet.
3. Remove screws (2) securing picture prompter knob assembly to cabinet.
4. ON UHF MODELS ONLY, compress sides of UHF coupling to disengage it from
See Figure 3.
slots in arm on tuner.
5. Disconnect speaker leads at speaker, high voltage anode lead, picture tube
socket and ON/OFF plug.
NOTE: To operate ch
with this plug removed, a
See Figure E on Sheet 2 of basic envelope assembly.
jumper must be used.
'
6. Remove deflection yoke retaining spring.
7. Remove two screws locking ch
sliding chassis to rear and up.
feet and disengage feet from slot, by
8. Remove chassis and deflection yoke from cabinet.
NOTE:
Secondary control
shafts dhd VHF channel selector shaft will disengage when chassis is removed.
9.
um,
To replace ch
trols by p
I --
TONER
mT
the above procedure, engaging secondary cong ends of shaft assemblies over control shafts.
See Figure
2.
ow
r
1/7 55R5
MOSLEMS
in 575
RATIO
SOUNO
DST
5A05
1/2 578
AUDIO
AMP
JO'
OUTPUT
SPERM
we CLAMP
ANP
yone
PEER
VNrO
UN, NO0EI.3 001.0
L
J
V COP .6
--
RI AMP
OSC OMER
IND 010
W
350
AMR
VIDEO
AND
ve295
i2B77A
hero
VIOSO
AYR
err.
RI AGC
t/251305
v2
7
TO
AGO CLAW
GC
AM
;
SYNC
NOISE
SEP
GATE
morn,
Arc
MSGR.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
141
6567
12006A
NOME OSC.
NOIRE OUTPUT
TORE
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
SYLVANIA Chassis 1-542-1, -2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -7, -8
PICTURE TUBE REMOVAL
1. Remove chassis as outlined under "Ch
2.
Removal"
Lay cabinet face down, supported so as not to damage knobs or cabinet
front.
3
Remove hold down bracket screw located top center of picture tube.
Unhook
both lower hold down strap brackets from slots in light shield and remove
straps.
See Figure 4.
4. USING GOGGLES AND GLOVES, reach under face of tube and lift from cabinet.
DO NOT GRASP NECK OF PICTURE TUBE AT ANY TIME.
FIGURE
5. To install picture tube, reverse the preceding steps.
to scratch face of picture tube.
2
Exercise care not
MODELS 210526, 210525, 211310
DESCRIPTION:
Models 210525, 2IC526, 211310 incorporating the I-542-7,
Data peculiar to these model. is given below.
For all other data refer to the remainder of this page.
-8 ch sss i s are all similar.
KNOB REMOVAL
1. Channel Selector and On/Off Knobs
A. Remove by pulling straight out.
2. Volume, Contrast, Brightness and HeloLight Knobs. See Figure 2.
A. Remove Channel Selector and On/Off Knobs.
B. Remove screws (2) securing escutcheon to cabinet. Remove escutcheon.
C. Remove knobs by pulling straight out.
FIGURE 4
CHASSIS REMOVAL
1. Disconnect AC power cord and antenna connections.
2. Remove screw securing vertical hold knob
Remove interlock cover.
bly to cabinet.
Nee
eaellilean
FIBER WASHERS
1111111111111111111111
441.1110.1.4111.
3. Remove clips securing rear ch
E. WASHER
4. Compress sides of fine tune coupling to disengage it from slots in arm on
tuner.
See Figure 3.
SHAFT RETAINING
LIGHT SHIELD
feet to support rail.
6 -CLIP 554-0019
UHF CHANNEL
SELECTOR EXTENSION
SHAFT
5. Disconnect speaker leads at speaker, high voltage enode lead, picture tube
To operate chassis with thin plug removed,
socket end ON/OFF plug. NOTE:
jumper must be used.
Ile Figure E on the following page.
VHF COARSE TUNE
AFT EXTENSION
6. Remove deflection yoke retaining spring.
ANTI - BACKLASH
SPRING
7. Remove chassis and deflection yoke from cabinet. NOTE: Secondary control
shafts and VHF channel selector shaft will disengage when chassis is re-
1496-0148
UHF CHANNEL
moved.
SELECTOR
7
4C4U;00"
90
S. To replace chassis,
COUPLING
490-0011
trols by p
PULLEY
/94-0034
he above procedure, engaging secondary. conda of shaft
blies over control shefte.
GLASS AND MASK REMOVAL
111
DRIVE
'
1. Remove escutcheon End knobs es outlined under Knob Removal Procedure.
2. Remove two screws securing ratchet bracket to light shield. Remove bracket.
S
1111,11110.
FIGURE 3
3. Loosen set screw securing wheel end dial essembly to shaft. Remove assembly
end fine tune knob.
1-542-5,-6 CHASSIS
Ch
S42 5, 6 is similar to the 1-542-3,-4
DESCRIPTION:
except for the addition of the picture prompter mechanism as
For
For all other data, refer to this page.
as shown below.
replacement parts, refer to the replacement parts list.
4. While supporting glass, remove screws (2) securing glass clamps to cabinet.
1
5. Pull glees and mask out slightly at top and then up.
before cleaning glaze.
Remove trim strips
6. To replace glee and mask,
he preceding steps.
Note that trim
strips must be flush to cabinet with bevel facing front. Make certain top
edge of escutcheon fits into groove in escutcheon trim.
P.'
CD,-
1
'47'0111;71:'--®
0
PICTURE TUBE REMOVAL
/
1. Remove chessis es outlined under 'Chassis R
1'.
2. Loy cabinet face down, supported so as not to damage knobs or cabinet
front.
3. Remove hold down bracket screw located top center of picture tube.
Unhook
both lower hold down strap brackets from slots in light shield end remove
straps.
See Figure 4.
4. USING GOGGLES AND GLOVES, reach under face of tube and lift from cabinet.
DO NOT GRASP NECK OF PICTURE TUBE AT ANY TIME.
5.
To install picture tube, reverse the preceding steps.
to scratch face of picture tube.
Exercise care not
MODELS 21C4I5, 2I1220
Models 21C415 and 21T220 incorporating the 1-542.3,-4
DESCRIPTION:
ch sss i s are similar to Models 21CS24 and 2IT218 respectively.
142
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
VIDEO
SYLVANIA Chassis
IF,
IF
SOUND
11 .5MC TRAP ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
AND
I. Connect "1 isoltion transformer
between chassis rind power line.
1-542-1, -2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -7, -8,
2.
(Continued)
3. Keep marker generator coupling to
"lu, check.
et
response curve.
4. For optimum receiver alignment,
intervals for
line voltage should be mein
reined
volts.
power
possible sweep generator overload-
ing by temporarily varying signal
input level and noting any change
(excluding amplitude) in response
Receiver and test equipment should
emirm up for approximistely 15 min
5.
curve shpe.
T
utes before lignment.
SMlwO - TENSION
VIDEO
494 -0023
\1/4
22.0V21141.1.
1.
14.41.. Leer
494 - 0023
F9( TURK MY
UHF DIAL STRINGING
Set VHF tuner to
free chan-
ALIGNMENT
IF
TEST EQUIPMENT HOOKUP
ALIGNMENT SETUP NOTES
STEP
3112 TUMWS
ST
minimum to avoid distortion of
a
Use high scope gain and keep sweep
generator output at lowest usable
SWEEP GENERATOR
ADJUST
through
-
nel.
.0047 klfd DC blocking capacitor
Connect -5 volts DC source (-)
term to junction of R203 (1001)
erator to 43.5 MC with 10 MC
to pin
of L201. Set
I
loosely
-
coupled as a marker to sweep
plate
coil by turning core fully
counterclockwise.
of 30. peak to peek.
Adjust 7200 (top c.re)
for minimum 41.25 MC maroker
SIGNAL GENERATOR
De tune tuner converter
put to produce response curve
b.
sweep.
and R204 (100K) nd (a) term.
to chassis.
gen-
. Adjust +seep generator out-
generator lead.
OSCILLOSCOPE
-
c. Adjust L202 for "sits",
response t 44.0 MC.
connected to
junction of R2I9 nd L205.
331 resistor.
through
amplitude.
d. Adjust T201
for "Kitson
response at 45.3 MC
Adjust T200 (bottom core)
.
for simximule response at 42.7 IC.
42 .
SMIC
45.75MC
8
tr.
Adjust L202 to remove tilt.
4
60%
-
Adjust T201 to position 45.75
marker.
Adjust T200 (bottom core) to
41. 2541C
RACKET AND BRACKET ASSEMBLY
FIGURE
2
RATCHET
ASSEMBLY
493-0336
this step.
ONTROL PANEL
3.
Connect after
-
step 1.
adjuting trps.
OSCILLOSCOPE
Leave -5 volt AGC voltage con-
SWEEP GENERATOR
netted as in step 1.
position 42.6 MC marker.
(See Fig. 1).
Adjust L200 and L201 (top
core for inimum 47.25 MC
marker mplitude.
For optimum rirsults,
SIGNAL GENERATOR
Same its
step I.
- Sam step 1.
-
to
jig
shield on mixer tube (V16).
Adjust tuner convertet plate:
and L201 to give response shown
below.
RETAINER
Set VHF tuner to a high band
VHF channel which sssss min.
,mum distortion of response
curve fine tuning control
FINE TUNE
COUPLING
INSULATOR COUPLING
through a
-
par," to VHF IF cable
chassis tie point (No. I).t
a
SHAFT -EXTENSION
VHF COARSE TUNE
493-0137
SWEEP GENERATOR
I
.0047 Mfd DC blocking c-
mind 2 on board to inc sssss
respt-nse curve height for
CLIP - RETAINER
SHAFT -EXTENSION
VHF FINE TUNE
1.
NOTE: Tuner IF output led
may be disconnected at ter-
-E. RING
FIBER WASHERS "-A'
Si," s step
I. Repeat steps C to E until
45.75 MC marker is at 60%
and 42.6 IC marker is at ROW.
is rotated.
490-0007
SIGNAL GENERATOR
-
satee as
step 1.
For optimum results, repeat
OSCILLOSCOPE
I.
"me step
e 2 e Pe
1
& 3 but do not detune
tuner.
45 .75MC
42.61[
490-0011
FINE
TO%
40.
7.2514C
..
Al .25MC
..m
4.5MC TRAP, SOUND IF AND RATIO DETECTOR ALIGNMENT
TUNE ARM
STEP
TUNER SHAFTS ASSEMBLY
MODELS 217218, 210524
1.
SHAFT -EXTENSION -VHF
COARSE TUNE
493-0134
FMER WASHERS
TEST EQUIPMENT HOOKUP
ALIGNMENT SETUP NOTES
ADJUST
Set contrast control to maz-
VTVM- Ground or coamon. lead
imum and brightness control to
minimum.
to junction of two matched
TIO0 (Top core)
100E sss i s tors connected in
Connect -30 volts DC source
1.) term. to junction of 1203
(1001) & R204 (1001) and (+)
term. to chassis.
sss i ss acros R106 (27E).
T100 (Bottom c re)o
1202 (Bottom core)
DC probe through 1001 sss is for
to terinal of de -emphasis
plate (PP100). Isolate VTVM
from ground.
Note:
Connect a 4.5 1/C ss i ss tuned
circuit between yelslow, cthode
lead of picture tube sod ground.
SIGNAL GENERATOR
For MAXIMUM nee reeding:
1202 (Top core)
1
Use peek resulting in
greatest sepratIon of cores.
connected
-
to junction of R215I mind L205.
Set signal generator to 4.5
MC preferably crystI cl-
ibrted or controlled.
-MASK
"E" WASHER
2.
SHAFT-EXT
VHF FINE TUNE
Sam step I.
RETAINER
493-0135
VTVM
-
RF probe connected
coss coil of sss i ss tuned
4.5 IIC circuit.
SIGNAL GENERATOR
CLIP -RETAINER
step 1.
FINE TUNE
COUPLING
490-0007
3.
Same as step I.
INSULATOR
COUPLING
Slime as step I.
-
same
For MINIMUM rding:
T202 (Bot to core)
Using lowest signal gnertor output level. re pest
step
1
core).
escpt 1202 (bottom
For err° reading:
T100 (Tog. core)
Set VTVM to zero reding using
490-00H
lowest meter scle. At cor
rect setting for T100 (top
cre), slight turn of core
ioll give
FINE TUNE ARM
TUNER SHAFTS ASSEMBLY
MODELS 211214, 210114
reading either
up or down the scale.
ALTERNATE 4.314C TRAP ALIGNMENT
good "tenna to the receiver and properly tune tn strong sttion. Adjust (1202
bottom core) for minimum 4.5 kC interference in the picture. This interference takes the
form of a "grainy" appearance or
fine line pattern throdgh the picture.
Connect
143
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
SYLVANIA Chassis 1-542-1, -2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -7, -8, Continued
r
R109
470K
R 108
C110-.01
R 108
C110
10 MEG
I
.
3
10 MEG
C108
109#p
C
-ix
250
DOWD
.0068
ALTERNATE PP 100
CI08
.00
C109
12
ALTERNATE PP100 IS
L
6
......010 7
/
4
Aftmm
i
02
0
1
0
I
C 201- .001
06-27K
1
ma
BI
It44 ,J
2
5
\
am
\
0
SHOWN.
PP 100
ALTERNATE
ALT PPICX
03
4
7
L0
PP100 EXCEPT FOR THE
MOUNTING POSITION AS
1
4
5
OD ICI
-...
ELECTRICALLY SAME AS
2
C113
O
/R 221- AK
i-Nvv---
PP 101
0
9t1
I'
.0068
jtill
V7
5 AQ5
AUDIO OUTPUT
gi
\
I:
6 N\
t%
R222
C107- 2 MFD
,
5,t
I
C 223
022
22
45,
3/
'
18MMFD
3-56K
0047
V6A 8 V6B
RATIO DET
270
25K
tPPIOLkt
6-1 IF-.
STO ----___,---"'
R III
CONTRA'.
CONTROL
ALT
r a-
2
-s
AUDIO AMP
AGO CLAMP
a
la
R 204-100A
8.---,vvv.......
a-
R 112
470
C112
R203
100K
C202
_L
.47
220K
%!(:k!
5eRe
L 206
0215-.001
0204
)/ 22
C205-.001 rcip
R216-IK
R208-470
0
0-1\/\.A./C208-470MMFD
2
-
40-.0 MI WI
67MMFD
1
4711"..___
47MC.25
1-4113
°
\
0
...la 0
L503
/ ,.... 6\
..
-----muata--
REASON:
2
1201
- -
.74/
44M0
cu
.,__.,,, ., .
\
ISO
L504
V2
3626
e'c7i
\V2,6
4 .7 MMFD
fp-a
L
V3
31326
3RD VIDEO
2ND VIDEO
IF AMP
IF AMP
PRINTED BOARD ASSEMBLY
REASON:
COS REVISION (SERIAL MO. 542104-, 542204-, 542304-,
542404-, 542504-, 642804-, 542704... 542804-).
Frequency compensation at low contrast control settings.
DESCRIPTION:
2 watt resistor le changed to R321-1, 270 Ohm,
(Co-ordinatee F-8).
144
The following revision has been wade.
1. C225, 14 liwfd. capacitor is added to the contrast circuit. One
aide connect. to the junction of C223 and C224 and the other side
(Co-ordinates
connects to the wiper of R222, Contrast Control.
C-9).
218
10 MMFI
L202
0-1000---0
To increase life expectance of I0DE7 tube.
150 Ohm,
.
R213
SUBJECT:
vett eee i s tor.
i
43, 3MC
R210-
Revision. have been made es follows:
(-4
CC
VIDEO
.II
T
F-
6507-.001
watt reeistor is changed to 8314-1, 820,000
I. R314, 1.2 Megohm,
(Co-ordinates 8-7).
Ohm, Si watt eee i ss or.
R321,
,
CO3 REVISIONS (SERIAL 110. 542103-, 542203-, 542303-,
542403- 542503-, 542603-, 542703- 542803-).
DESCRIPTION:
2.
O
.., - -- .-- 4 --i - - -
[7"
'
.
O
3/
VI
3B Z6
1ST VIDEO
IF AMP
TOP DECK -
/
1 III K
S
1
\
1200-42.7W!
C506-.001
C 505-.001
L
1,oi /
10 MMFD
SC200
X212
---- ..s.
PJ
1.
T RA
C 213- 800 MMFO
0
t-
r
C247
C211 -560P FD
LL
--1 (-- ___ -1E4c206 4..
1.2,5
7---
.-Enitr\-
C 214-.001
R2I 5 - 470
Ilk
SUBJECT:
_J
AGO AMP
SOUND IF AMP
ADC TP L R 205
L 201
C220
4/MMFD
V5A fiV58 CI00-100MMFD
3.9 MEG
TRAP
I.>
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
r
FOCUS AND CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
R306-3303
SYLVANIA
1
3i
3
kr
R307
C 301
I-
.001
1
vs0 0
2
2
far forward es possible on the
neck (egeinst the flare) of the
picture tube.
(Continued)
XA
I MEG
R307-IMEG
1. Position deflection yoke as
I
2. Rotateentering adjustment
C 301
I
rings (located on yoke cover)
individually or together until
15.
.00I
I
picture is centered. Turn brightlow level and
ness control to
71
-J
G314-.01
I(
check that no corner cutting
exists in the picture.
ALTERNATE PP 300
3. Focusing is accomplished by
connecting the focus jumper
PP 300
between either pins 6 and 7 or
6
and S on the
picture tube, which ever gives
between pins
the best focus.
A 674X:t
C226-.33
C103
Re26
470K
13310-10K
4,
1
L107
\
Ar-MM,
/w- 113\\
1,300,..' 17484
4/
R224 -46K
II
V8
MN
0
14
M
\
-1(C219-.01
A
V4
VIDEO AMP
.
11814-39K
1
rilk\
\'\
\
\
\
'\
'3\
\
0
R 401-1MEG
.__,.
o
.8
(:)!
v
R 313
I
68K
PP 3011
I
tI
r *5
...-
//
\ pool.
\
401.
T'e4
.,.
4,6.
0
F
controls to maximum.
4. Reverse rotation of the AGC
VIO
control (counterclockwise) until
SC G7
picture is horisontelly and
t ROM OSC
vertically stable.
S. Reduce contrast 6 brightness to
normal setting, rotate fins
to correct tuning
Normal picture should be
If this condition cannot be met, rotate the AGC contuning control
.......11.....,./
O
Rotate AOC control (R300) clock-
wise until picture 'bends' or
' jumps' eideways.
point.
(scam -mown
...,
R 408 -10K
SC 400
..
ob
d.
trol
smell smount further in
the counterclockwise direction.
AFC DISORIM
For optimum performance,
this adjustment should be made
NOTE:
0
o
2
2
2. Set contrast and brightness
3.
4M
F
Set channel selector to stronge st channel in area end adjust
fine tuning control to correct
tuning point.
1K
\
as Es
I
L 400
under acIual operating conditions
(in the owner's home).
HORIZ FR EQ
0
I
8406
__.- --.,.....
CC
N
'fir
100-.001
x
IC
(
\
a
R408-5.11111
m
/%0Nr''.
r Pf301
te
;1..,
0
I
71_
t.111
N
1
1211Y TA
4
-1-(2781
S
Tg2
o
+T
o4
r..
1
t -A
R4031-47 K
8
.8.T
o
i
1.
gs
.O 9
8.-
N
0
11308.-18K
3
v
AOC ADJUSTMENT
BR1GHTNeSS
CONTROL
I MEG
SYNC SEP
NOISE GATE
Y
fb-A.AAr.
R308 - IPIEG
Fe \
,F.....-rc F---- ''
.....,
R 225
r 191
3CS6
/ALT
/ PP 300\N..s.e...,
%JP
1
W iw
RI A
//
(a
4
_L 2
Tc!,
HORIZONTAL AFC ADJUSTMENT
Before performing the following
procedure, cheek AGC adjustment
es described in 'AGC Adjustment'.
IT0
1.
.,-);
to
To
C300-.047
Set channel selector to strong vet channel in area end adjust
fine tuning control to correct
tuning ;rant.
2. Adjust vertical height, vertical
linearity, and width control for
normal picture.
.-"AAP".
R301-188
3.
Rotate horizontal frequency control (L400) in either direction
until picture fella out of hor-
isontel sync.
(If picture is
not out of sync at the end of
the control range, momentarily
switch tuner to 'free' channel
and then return to original).
R326- 47 K
4. Reverse rotation of frequency
control
slowly until picture
falls into sync.
NOTE:
S. Rotate channel selector to
ON 1-542-I,-2 CHASSIS ONLY,
position on which no signal is
received; then return to the
The picture
original station.
8225 -BRIGHTNESS CONTROL IS
CABINET MOUNTED. EXTENSION
LEADS CONNECT IT TO PRINTED
BOARD TERMINALS AS SHOWN IN
ILLUSTRATION ABOVE.
PP 301
should immediately fell into
ALTERNATE PP 301
L
145
sync.
If not, elightly readjust horizontal frequency control (L400) and repeat this step.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Sylvania TV Chassis 1-542-1, -2, -3, -4,
I.
Voltage measured to chassis using
2.
3.
Sylvania Polymeter ( YOSW).
AC power source 117V. 60 cycle line.
Voltage readings in brackets Wien with
no signal input; channel selector set
Antenna disconnected.
Antenna terminals shorted together and
grounded to chassis.
4. tolled. readings not in brackets taken
with a strong signal input: tuner set
IN II
R504
C541
70
R506
I MEG
9
0512
470
MIND
MEG
MIND
chassis using Sylvania type 404 oscilloscope.
(Other type Oscilloscopes
yv, 5
e)0
CPR 600
OCR 501
may alter waveform ehePes or amp-
bus
litudes).
or .7676N
TO TUNER
ANTENNA TERMINALS
refer to
.cope asses frequency used.
10 2'4_1.0047
0100
100 NANO
GENERAL SCHEMATIC NOTES
readings.
Variations say be ob
due to normal production tolerances
lam.1 C101
B
1
The terms .30N
4.
5. Contrast control set to maximuu.
Brightness control set to mmum.
6. Voltage values shown are *******
6102
1. Voltege
sources
are
indicated
2.0017
by
encircled eymbols:
or
symbols without circles indicate
SPECIAL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
CONDITIONS:
voltage tie points.
2. aaaaa ge resistances of coils and
I
transformers are shown and are eeeeeee d
*Picture tube anode voltage measured
with component connected in circuit.
3. Encircled numpers on edge of printed
with VIVA high voltage proove et line
voltage of 117V. under cnditions of
,normal signal.
O.
11
3. Waveforms iseasured with respect to
to strong local station developing
1
.0.15
Channel selector set to strong channel.
Contrast control set for signal of 60V.
PP et yellow lead of Picture tube.
2.
V5A
,/25808
SOUND IF AMP
VII ANTENNA TERMINALS 9.
WAVEFORM MEASUREMENT
CONDITIONS:
1.
to free channel.
appro., imetely
IV. on IF AGC
(junction of R-203 i R-205).
r
Shaded areas indicate
code changes.
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:
-6, -7, -8 11=
5
el
VI
47 25
circuit indicate tie points corresponding with those shown on parts layout of
No brightness and
correct scan site.
top board.
4.
4116 Nigh peak voltage of short duration
may damage meter used for this lessors-
5.
ment.
3026
(:),12ND VIDEO W AMP
42.7 MC
VIDEO IF AMP
V2
3
TROO
3026
'1.4?
6:T
TRIP
RA
Ct07
capacitors are rated in mirofarads unless otherwise specified.
Coil and transformer terminal views
are shown as seen from botton.
All
MMMWM
I
111
6. Arrows on controls indicate direction
of clockwise rotation.
7. Schematic coordinates are for reference
USE POWER LINE ISOLATION TRANSFORMER WHEN
SERVICING THE CHASSIS.
PICTURE TUBE HIGH VOLTAGE ANODE LEAD MAY
HAVE A POTENTIAL OF 16,000 VOLTS.
OBSERVE ALL HIGH VOLTAGE PRECAUTIONS WHEN
SERVICING THE CHASSIS.
DO NOT OPERATE THE
in locating components, for example.
R106
located is coordinates
A-7 .
To
TUNER
IF
OUTPUT
PARTS CODING
RECEIVER WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE COVER
Tuner Section
Sound Section
Video Section
REMOVED.
USE SAFETY GOGGLES AND GLOVES OMEN HANDLING THE PICTURE TUBE.
1
L.V.
6
Sued
y.
fil,
99
100-199
200-299
300-399
400-499
500-599
Sync Section
Rorie. 6 NY Section
Vert.
Halo
?:
COI REVISIONS (Serial
542501-.542601-)
i
244",'
II
COOS-
L200
4725
el
No. 542101-,542201-,542301-,542401-,
1. R216,
resistor.
2.
1K,
Revisions have been made sa follows.
K
See' Figure 5.
Ct04
.0011
.22
+140V
C203
15504
.15
100K
MC
TRAP
2
IR303
5
5
Watt reel stor i changed to R216-1, 470 Ohm, % Watt
2
2.2K,
R214, 39K resistor is removed.
8306
ar
R20i
ROO!
ITON
3. 9 MEG
IS Watt
TS vss
30,0
AGC AMP
TO P N 6
OF 516
(Co-ordinates D-5).
"15?;
6500
L 502
R503
390
MFDe.
300,,
RED
T
300V..
enN
10W -W
3011
C5024.
OW.1.
IR
5W
05020
20 IND
3000
.
I
3826
AT
ww
FILAMENT SEC.UENCE.
;co«
9,0cd
F0111%
w 3000
V GREEN
CWMFGE r--=.71.71.ER =1
7 REFER TO U14::
5
4
I
A\
...
Al. 12al AI
I
SC400
L503
C505
;.00I
.1
C507
"DIST
5526
v2
.001
SW500
ON/ OFF
.
IppNN
L504
j-itg,j. 4 CHASSIS.
1
'-a.
R507
1
00K
4
1
z,
acoy
3
0513
3
65
2507A a,
0514
0047
R 504
5
004
4700
.ALL CHASSIS
146
010
4
5056
014
1_0152224
L505
001
11
WITH SPEAKER LEADS DISCONNECTED.
CABINE- T
9402
2.70
C509
100
1-542.5,-6 CHASSIS
VS
1-r
550K6
L
R401
I MEG
Gr
HALO
TUNE
5
CAUTION: WHEN SERVICING CHASSIS OUT
OF CABINET, DO NOT OPERATE RECEIVER
32 - 64096.1
AOC
®.+1120v
SC500
!CHAIM
CSOO
1.047
1NEG
pp 300
SYNC. TAKE 00
1900
v2505.
BUSS
c -64t-1,2
.001
R307
L2
6 300
(:) °+250V
200V
swaoo
ON/OfF
C301
CONTROL
INTERLOCK
CON
150 UFO
I
j16R
C
The line which formerly connected R214 to R218 end L205 is now
disconnected end C302-1 is now connected to the junction of R216.1
and R215-1 as shown in Figure 5.
5.
AC
TS
53 01
133,
To's" ow mow
R306
.2000
aisle
v
4. C302, .047 MEd. paper capacitor Is changed to C302.1, .01 MEd.
paper capacitor.
(Co-ordinates F-5),
FIGURE
0314
008
17
resistor.
3.
5304
560
R302
1500
S R203
TAOCC
AOC .
(Co-ordinates 13-6).
R215, 470 Ohm, % Watt resistor is changed to R215 -I,
(Co-ordinates D-6).
560100C
RRO5 4111
/(25 4.2sov
DESCRIPTION:
;C211
470
4.1
MM FO
CODE CHANGES
SUBJECT:
Rill
I in:IFIT
RA. 1
UMW
VT
5A05
3
4
VS
516
4
5
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
V7
V68
V6 A
5A05
In 518
I/O 578
RATIO DET.
AUDIO OUTPUT
AUDIO AMP & AGC CLAMP
r
T 101
1.:MI 5
+61V
1+0V.
MODELS
WEE
810414
211215
5 3/4
217300
-233
7100
O
If
0 1:
I
C107
I
2 MFD
:
0
PP0 AUDIO PLATE 7
I
Ot
e5
03
504
I
0--
oT'20
.J
+2500._-
107
2
VOLUME
CONTROL
L203
L204
I2BY7A
21051111
210166
2100222
21C01
-J
0
C12:11±To
:
0
T 202
120
.22
41
f
R222
25K
C224
I
10 MMFO
I
CONTRAST
+ ttov
CONTROL
TAP
58221
y 7K
T202
4.5 MC
184
0213
180
4708
64 STOP
7W
SOUND TAKE -OFF
L 002
44 MC
30112
3002
( C 011
0213
I
DE
dOVIT
L 207
1
150
C 22t
1. 0030
33 IWO
tg..;
000
3
:
4 "44.-MIKOOTTOM
2VIDEO AMP
1
1.205
R212
MODELS
3003
68 IAMFD
2
V4
1
C216
4.7 MIND
I
1
DE -EMPHASIS PLATE
r
60 MOD
L
V3
3BZ6
3RD VIDEO
IF AMP
C1128
140T1113
250
PP MO 132.8605-11
-
b
MINFO
I5
C105
T 004
C104
001
1
NY2
TRAP
7 .33
+ 250V
FOCUS
JUMPER
8011
7+
8325
220
R324
6213
SOO MMFD
071
t 0323
2
t
J
I.
7I
:2 330
II
. 544
11,13
C310
7716
.0048
794.
0225
1
I
3245945-2
2
1.N4j
+8509
MEG
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
V
V8
3C S6
SYNC. SEP & NOISE GATE
C)173111
JO,
4.7 MEG
IODE7
:Wt.
+2204
30v11.2
:
0330
1115
V9
3094+
3022+
VERTICAL 05C. & OUTPUT
224A
8318
+250v
0318
334
5004
8327
2.5 MEG
HEIGHT
CONTROL
V
V
-22,2
I -2920
C 302
.047 514
4v
=.I0303
02.4.
04411111,
T
So
8316
2 MEG
123011
MEG
VERTICAL
HOLD
+140V
rt
;
1.404
ISO
3611
03)
316
MEG
L 400
3004 STOP
VERTICAL LIMEARITy
VI3
0417
124X4GTA
DAMPER
OR MIAFD
-.6402
;0047
OUP WOK LEAD
TO ...ISOLATION
04051
530 iimFDNov
,30T,
7400
Issv
22121
71407
120
1!:07:
631
3
12
20 VP,
C1.075
TOT514
182 IWO
SOH,
cmo
660 NIKKI
12 1111751.
lob
6
4413
TA 4
R406
5.64
. C404
.001
01 11
.;.001
VII
13.2K
OW
12006A
HORIZ. OUTPUT
-C
1.047
I
147
L405
--fgri--42-fligrTe
WTI
5321
224
wORIZ FREQ. COIL
IMEG
1.300
1 +931
8317
MEG
(C
#403
1
DEFLECTION YOKE
O T300
IW
214
v
soon
g.11/111TE
tit=
;2104
11309
104
I
.0068
AMP
1
154
2W
-7
y 270
254 I
W5
C10
PLATE CIRCUIT
AGC
PM SMARMS
.R111
C1124217+
25 MOOT
OF
r
CIO
TO
104
FY PCM1111
wWvi
12501WD
0103
- '2
SRIIO
470
37
00
`14
I
6/3/4' :
I\
7174
- 2210
R104
5.
1293
MEW
I
001
L 403
m 15n
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Sylvania TV Chassis 1-542-1, -2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -7, -8
MODELS 211214, 21C4I4
1. Channel Selector, Fine Tuning and
On Off.
A. On UHF models, remove UHF fine
tuning knob and shaft assembly by
pulling straight out.
B. Remove channel selector, fine
tuning end on/off knobs by pulling straight out.
Make certain
that fiber washer is replaced in
well of fine tune knob when reinstalling knobs.
2. Volume and Contrast.
A. Remove plastic coupling from
control end of cable assembly by
applying heat from
soldering
iron to plastic crimp.
APPLY
ONLY ENOUGH HEAT TO LOOSEN
PLASTIC COUPLING FROM CABLE
ASSEMBLY TO PERMIT REUSE OF
Remove tubing.
COUPLING.
B. Remove retaining clip located
behind mask, which secures knob
and cable assembly to cabinet.
Then remove knob end cable assembly through cabinet front.
C. To replace knob and cable
he preceding
Exercise care when
steps.
3. Loosen picture tube strap tightening screw.
Remove screws (2)
securing hold down strops at the
upper corners of picture tube.
Pass strap over neck of picture
applying heat to secure plastic
bly.
coupling to cable
APPLY ONLY ENOUGH HEAT TO CRIMP
PLASTIC AROUND CABLE ASSEMBLY.
400.000
See Figure C.
4. USING GOGGLES AND GLOVES, reach
under face of tube and lift from
cabinet.
DO NOT GRASP NECK OF
PICTURE TUBE AT ANY TIME.
LENS REMOVAL
care not to scratch face of
picture tube.
SMUT not FINE TUNE
COUPLING -NNE NM
4110 - 0007
IINIA7 MINE
1. Channel Selector
-7.1L07 IN NW
A. Remove channel selector knob
by pulling straight out.
MON
2. Brightness, Contrast, Volume
A. Disconnect AC power cord and
remove backcover.
B. Remove channel selector knob.
C. Remove escutcheon by removing
one (1) screw behind channel se-
INSULATOR - COUPLING
490-00n
COARSE TUNE INAPT
Fee TUNE 01651701IC
ITUNGIN
lector knob and one (1) screw
inside right hand top corner of
cabinet.
Remove knobs by pulling
straight out.
See Figure D.
LENS REMOVAL
2. Remove screws (2) securing lens
retaining clomp.
1. Remove lens clamp cover located
e t bottom center of mask.
3. Remove lens by pulling out
2. Remove screws (2) securing lens
retaining clamp.
the bottom and then
NOWT -0010111UNE
MODELS 211218, 21(524
KNOB REMOVAL
I. Remove nameplate located at bottom center of meet.
down.
FIGURE A
5. To install picture tube, reverse
the preceding steps.
Exercise
D.
slightly at
1%.0110 04101.11.0
tube and stow in bottom of
cabinet.
See Figure
A.
assembly,
PICTURE TUBE REMOVAL ICONT'DI
to damage or scratch the lens.
KNOB REMOVAL
FIGURE
B
N
3. Remove lens by pulling out
4. To replace,
he preceding
steps.
Exercise care so as not
to scratch lens surface. To clean
lens, use
soft, lint free
mild liquid
cloth, water and
detergent.
CHASSIS REMOVAL
1. Disconnect AC power cord and
antenna connections.
Remove
Interlock cover.
2. Remove screw securing vertical
hold knob assembly to cabinet.
slightly at the bottom and then
down.
4. To replace,
he preceding
steps.
Exercise caution so as
not to scratch lens surface.
To
clean lens, use a soft, lint free
cloth, water and
mild liquid
detergent.
CHASSIS REMOVAL
1. Disconnect AC power cord and
antenna connections.
Remove
interlock cover.
FIGURE C
3. Compress sides of fine tune
coupling to disengage it from
slots in arm on tuner.
See
Figure B.
4. Disconnect speaker leads et
speaker, high voltage lead and
2. Remove crew securing vertical
hold knob
ly to cabinet.
3. Compress sides of fine tune
coupling to disengage It from
slots in arm on tuner.
See
Figure B.
picture tube socket.
5. Remove On/Off brightness knob.
Remove hex nut securing On/Off
brightness control to cabinet.
6. Remove two screws locking ch
4. Disconnect speaker leads at
speaker, high voltage lead.
picture tube socket and on/off
NOTE: To operate ch
with this plug removed, a jumper
plug.
must be used.
See Figure E.
feet and disengage feet from
slots by sliding chase's to rear
5. Remove two screws locking ch
feet and disengage feet from
end up.
7. Remove deflection yoke retaining
spring.
slots by sliding chassis to rear
and up.
8. Remove chassis and deflection
6. Remove deflection yoke retaining
yoke from cabinet.
NOTE: Secondary control shafts will disengage
7. Remove chassis and deflection
from control, when chassis is
removed.
9. To replace ch
he
above procedure, engaging secondary controls by inserting control
shafts into plastic couplings.
'
,
PICTURE TUBE REMOVAL
I. Remove chassis an outlined under
'Ch
Removal' procedure.
2. Ley cabinet face down, supported
on the corners ONLY, so es not
spring.
FIGURE D
d.
8. To replace chassis, reverse the
above procedure, engaging secondary controls by pressing ends of
shaft assembly over control.
See Figure D.
PICTURE TUBE REMOVAL
148
Sowers Ptu4
1420-00041
yoke from cabinet. NOTE: Secondary control shafts will disengage
from controls when ch sss i s is
Same es Model. 21T214 end 21C414.
11001.1110 M001 MOM
FIGURE E
PP
6DG6GT
210,
O 701
U.- 1
19,50
WO
T20i
280v
X 401
NOR A. F C
V 103
VOLTAGE REG.
0.311
VIDEO I -F
V 201
6826
270V
Rf
NO 2-1, 411808
TAT
T
c
2.
V/U18-06DC ONLY.
11320 OMITTED IN V/U18-06DC.
18150%
!DOW
1.1-Lr
250 PIP
iST503.
I
vVI2DE012
2
6826
2ND
401
T
.047W WT
MOW
nor r
CAW M
*010183
I. L205 USED IN V/U18-05CB, V/1.118-05DC,
NOTES:
O AS
Wf
WITT
L2
LO
ON 13V
V102
56
V101
701
AF AMP
SOUND I -F
6DT6
FM DU. a
6AU6
1004020
C
1-6
I
r
in PPP
Sid
II
NMI
tg1I
ET
TI°1-1
12780,
VW,
3400
MOD
270V
LP Mr
C1011
vVI2D0E03
6GB6
6750,
60VPIP
tc
3Ra
270V
I -F
MEG
O8
.2
V 103
KW
388)
2280
V 402
NOR OSC.
6SN7GTB
2700
L203
KVA -
11220
881001TWSS
Y
S,19
21.08 1111.0800
1/1101)
V 405
.firg
NP
2IATP4CR
V 205
I7AVP4
nov
2370 VW TOWN
111302
DAMPER
ge0
2403
211103
6A X4GT
WI *8
001111107
SOP
DO POT
V 404
N.V. RECT.
IB3GT
AO%
13001,1.
I.
V 403
6006
V402-0 PI CI GOWN
140V IN DC CAOSOID
COO
AW
Teo
5U4G
L.V RECT
V 501
NOR. OUTPUT
82-11010-08
V 3028
cifft
V 204
500K
1. 5MEG
1MEG
1. 25MEG
VERT OUTPUT
160V P/P
n
1261'7
VIDEO AM
100
68
11114
11311
CHASSIS
DC
CB
C102
V 302A
11121
15. ----Ls
12030
0112
ITEM
VERT. OSC.
WO7
___T101 _
A
00W
60020
MEG
1.809
Gm
11111t*IZZA
irEa
0110
A -F OUTPUT
6DG6GT
"CB & DC" SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
SPARTAN Chassis 18 Series, Spartan Division of the Magnavox Company.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Chassis No. 943-38, 947-28,
953-28, 975-48.
aa Wt Ea
C-58
30
706
V-13
IC.
L -3
1 2-6
215144
C-64
7
T-
C-44
2.11
R -70
_L
N3K
C-63
R-63
R-67
I
4-69
K
5.6
(.
4.7 N
C-62
600
C-71
30
R-65
C-72
.5 MFG
10
C-73
0-61
0-14
3:02 SCG8
10
800
_L
a
TA - 43
FINE
TUNING
L13.
.26 V
25 9
R-74
10K
BOB
OR
L -6
TA -47
35 V
C-21
SR -8
T -22
FC130 V
"TIT'
- C-22
C-23
250
I 200 WO
EC- 79
CC -95
PC -263
C-24
.25 MED
R -34
NFO
R-2
330
0-27
0'47
47
FUSE
F-10
TA -47
TUNER
20N4
SCAB
P.26
C-25
C-32
.002 MED
68 ^0
14-5i
I2
B-'6
c.3
B20
42588
C-30
220
I .1 MED
I
2
73
TA -43
25
001
2.2 MEG
:586
W60T
C-34
R-30
TUNER
194UGT
C - 35
390C
16F0
see -
7
7
25006
C-40
3
470 K
12CA5
R-41
leo
K
(DOTTED HEATER STRING FOR
CHASSIS NO 947-281
H
L-132
C-49
-4737091,--
6.2
100
2 MECI
v0- 43
METAL CABINET OR
C-75
-11
C-46
8-56
PICTURE TUBE ASSF3.0,
R-57
oNMED
C-9
47 K
5600
2
*-1
VERT. LI
410
22V
110V
V
R-48
V-107
6567 GTO
3.6
I MEG
0-73
4700
2
330
9V
-49
001
C.47
00) MED
0-50
0-51
MEG
47n
C-50
R-60
3900
R-55
I MEG
SR 13
I.
C-.15
FAFD
-
-52
82
82
56
R-33
0-44
1200
I .1 NED
5%
R-38
2200
1A/V
150
1/2W
R.54
750
NOR. HOLD
VC -144
47K
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
TRAV-LER RADIO CORP. Chassis Nos. 943-38, 947-28, 953-28, 975-48
Schematic Diagram, Additional Information on page 152.
9-24
680 K
165 V
L-129
C -I8 1
V-102
9T6
O
.01
L-124
IS
118
I
15-20
270'
0-22
2
35 V
001
650
1. C-17
"
TUNER AND
178.1051
CHASSIS NO 943-38 USE! T-43
TUNER ANTI 21C8P4
6-25
270
25
120
C-26
R-6
MFG
0-19
150
2200
3311
CHASSIS NO. 947-29 USES TA -47
T-32
5v
vOL.
860 KT
5uPPRES500 ARID INTERNALLY
CONNECTED TO CATHODE 16191
Of TRIODE SECTION.
C-20
01 MFD
CONTROL
01
00
0
VT'45
0.
660
*
V,; 1,0A3.
NFD
6
NOTES
25 V
C-110
.001
SOT,
C-7
22
IN -295
OR
L-123
C-6
CK- 706 A
L -I33
R-12
1--T11:1-71
21N
0-10
C-0
.047 MFD
0.1 MFD
10
76 v
6668 A
L -I26
9
C-9
68
ISO V
R-13
0-9
E1L-127
111-15
39N
209 Y
3.3 M
0-14
0-577
10
R-10
1500
R-11
0
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
CONTRAST
CONTROL
5 920
VC
-
5 mED
0.,AV
CO
.01
45
K
VvN..
V -I00 6
568
Cf3-'`-
C -3 M7
SEIGHT
4-37
BR40
VF
140
R-36
250
00 K
21C
16
150 v
.-35
179.1P4
00
V\X5A--
15 K
vC-142
FO
1000 V
125V
L -I35
V-106
R-32
-45v
T
0.36
TN -36
082 mF0
R-03
600
v
360 V
0-38
000
0-39
1.5
C-38
.047MFD
220
C-19
vER T.
NOLO
C-
122 MFD
R-5
R-
279
5 MEG
WO
APPROX
0-112
1028
12
TR -37
2 -ION
50 %
25096
L -I35
0.63
1200
129
42.75 MC
IN
C-100
C-52
9
I MFD
005
365 V
escus
V-109
C-30
P-64
I
45. 75 MC.1
56
19151749T
C-55
I.IS MFD
9-62
3900
5N/Ne6
FIG.
151
OVERALL
I
I.F. RESPONSE CURVE
1.
- 7.5
from the chassis.
4.5 M.C. SOUND TRAP ADJUSTMENT
d. Reduce the air signal by disconnecting antenna and/or detuning fine
tuning control until audio distortion occurs.
e. Adjust L-125 sound take -off coil and L-129 interstage coil for maximum
undistorted audio output.
f. Further reduce air signal level and reset L-125 and 1-129 for maximum
undistorted audio output. Final adjustment of these two coils should
be made at that minimum air signal level at which undistorted audio
output is just obtainable.
9. It may be advisable in some cases to repeat above steps to make
certain that the alignment is accurate.
select the peak which gives the maximuni voltage. This will normally
measure approximately - 5 V.D.C.
c. Adjust 1-124 quadrature coil for maximum audio output. Note during this adjustment, two peaks may occur. It is important to
point (3).
b. Connect output meter across voice coil of speaker and VTVM to
a. Tune in strong air signal.
ALTERNATE SOUND ALIGNMENT USING TELEVISION
STATION SIGNAL AND OUTPUT METER:
just obtainable.
top to bottom. These two controls interact and are usually adjusted together
to obtain good vertical symmetry and proper picture size.
Adjust these controls so that the picture fills the picture opening from
Removal of the cabinet back cover is necessary in order to reach these
controls. Refer to the tube layout drawing for correct location.
h. Further reduce the 4.5 Mc signal until the audio output signal breaks
up again and reset L-125 and L-129 coils for cleanest maximum
output. Final adjustment of these two coils should be made at that
minimum signal level at which undistorted audio output signal is
VERTICAL SIZE AND LINEARITY CONTROLS:
clamp and adjusting the deflection yoke.
If the picture is not centered in the picture opening, it may be centered
by removing the cabinet back and adjusting the centering device, on the
neck of the tube, at the rear of the deflection yoke. Turn the whole device
to the right or left. To increase the amount of picture shift, move the two
tabs, which project from the device, farther apart. If the picture is tilted at
an angle, it may be straightened by loosening the deflection yoke locking
CENTERING:
1. Connect a signal generator (4.5 M.C. unmodulated) to point (1) shown
on schematic. Ground side to chassis.
2. Connect VTVM A.C. probe to point (2).
3. Adjust L-125 coil slug for minimum reading. The correct slug is furthest
2.
g. Adjust L-125 (bottom) sound take -off coil and L-129 interstage coil
' for cleanest maximum audio output on the oscilloscope.
output signal on the oscilloscope starts to break up.
f. Reduce the 4.5 Mc signal from 200 millivolts to a point where the
This will normally measure approximately - 5 V.D.C.
e. Adjust L-129 quadrature coil for maximum audio output on the
oscilloscope. Note - during this adjustment, two peaks may occur.
It is important to select the peak which gives the maximum voltage.
d. Adjust generator for a high level output approximately 200 millivolts
or greater and set volume control of receiver for an audible level.
c. Connect VTVM to point (3). Set meter to read at least - 10 V.D.C.
b. Connect oscilloscope across voice coil of speaker.
a. Connect FM signal generator set at 4.5 Mc center frequency
Kc deviation to point (1) shown on schematic.
AND OSCILLOSCOPE:
SOUND ALIGNMENT USING FM SIGNAL GENERATOR
7. Adjust slugs in coil No's L-7, L-103, L-131 and L-123 to obtain pattern
shown in Fig. 1.
6. Loosely couple the sweep generator (40 to 48 m.c. to 5CG8 tube envelope.
to chassis.
5. Connect vertical input of oscilloscope to point (1); connect ground lead
4. Connect synchronized sweep voltage from sweep signal generator to
horizontal input of oscilloscope for horizontal deflection.
side to chassis.
3. Connect the negative side of 3.0 volt battery to point (4); connect positive
2. Set the contrast control to maximum clockwise position.
1. Tune receiver to channel 12 or 13, whichever is not assigned.
VIDEO I.F. ALIGNMENT
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
TRAV-LER Chassis Nos. 943-38, 947-28, 953-28, 975-48, Continued
CO
Co
OD
Co
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Westinghouse
MODEL, CHASSIS AND TUNER INFORMATION
Models
H -17C287 - tutone
H -17C288 - mahogany
H -17C289 - walnut
H -17C290 - limed oak
H -17C291 - fruitwood
Chassis
Bands Covered
V-2365-11
VHF
Tuner Tubes
Tuners
V12-2CY5
V13-5AT8
470V057H01 & H02
H-17CU287 - tutone
H-17CU288 - mahogany
H-17CU289 - walnut
H-17CU290 - limed oak
H-17CU291 - fruitwood
V-2365-12
VHF
VHF -UHF
A01/4 1=0
or
470V059H02
V12-2BN4/2BN4A
V13-5CG8
VHF- 470V060H02
V12-2BN4/2BN4A
V13-5CG8
UHF- 472V034H01
UHF Osc - 2AF4A
-r
N.I -r
QUIETING
DEFLECTION YOKE
The QUIETING control is located at the rear of the re-
Loosening the deflection yoke clamp allows back -and forward and rotary movement of the deflection yoke with
respect to the CRT. The deflection yoke should be as far
forward as possible (touching the bell of the CRT). Rotation
ceiver. This control determines the AM rejection character-
istics of the sound system.
It
is adjusted as part of the
procedure given under SOUND ALIGNMENT and will not
ordinarily require further adjustment. In very weak signal
areas, however, a reduction in noise or hiss in the sound may
be obtained by slightly readjusting this control.
of the deflection yoke is used to level the raster with respect to the mask.
CENTERING
OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
The two centering rings are located at the rear of the
Oscillator adjustments nay be necessary after replacement of the mixer -oscillator tube because of different tube
deflection yoke. The centering rings are provided with adjustment tabs. Centering the raster in the mask is accom-
inter -electrode capacitance.
plished by rotating the centering rings individually or together, as necessary.
The oscillator coils for channels 13 and 12 are in series
and are tuned by a single slug. The same arrangement is
used in the pairing of oscillator coils for channels 11 and 10,
9 and 8, 6 and 5, and 4 and 3. Channels 7 and 2 have
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY
individual oscillator coils, each with an adjustable slug.
The HEIGHT control and V. LIN control are located at
the rear of the receiver. The HEIGHT control is used to adjust the vertical size of the picture. The V. LIN control is
used to remove vertically cramped or elongated areas from
the picture. Alternate adjustment of these controls is nec-
channel will appear in the oscillator adjustment hole. This
adjustment hole, located on the front of the tuner(Figure 15),
By turning the channel selector to the channel to be
adjusted the proper oscillator slug for adjustment of that
is shaped so that the proper adjustment slug is available
for each setting of the channel selector.
essary to obtain a picture of the proper height which has
Oscillator adjustments can be made without removing
the chassis from the cabinet. Remove only the channel
good vertical linearity throughout.
selector and fine tuning knobs. Make adjustments with a
non-metallic screwdriver. Be surer the screwdriver fits the
HORIZONTAL RINGING COIL
slot properly to avoid damaging the coil or coil form.
The horizontal ringing coil (L402) should be adjusted
as follows:
1. Short out the ringing coil with a jumper wire.
2.
Set the HORIZ hold control to the center of its range.
3.
Do not change this setting during the steps that follow.
or to pin 7 of
Connect a VTVM to point OF
V2 (HMV). The VTVM is used to measure the DC voltage
between this point and B-.
4.
Using an air signal, make the oscillator adjustment as
follows:
1. Allow five minutes for receiver warm-up.
2.
3.
With the receiver tuned to a 'station of normal signal
4.
strength, adjust C417 for +.5 volts DC on the meter.
5. Remove the jumper connected across the ringing coil.
6. Adjust horizontal ringing coil L402 for +.5 volts DC on
the meter. Check the adjustment by switching to another
channel and back again. The receiver should pull into
horizontal synchronization on all channels.
Set channel selector on channel to be adjusted.
Set the fine tuning control at the center of its range.
This point must be estimated because of the 360 degree
continuous fine tuning.
Adjust oscillator slug for best picture.
RF TRAP ADJUSTMENT
The RF trap, L1 -C1, is normally factory set at 44 MC
The trap may be adjusted to attenuate any inter
±.5 MC.
fering signal between 40 MC and 46 MC.
(Material continued on pages 154 through 160)
153
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2365-11, V-2365-12, Service Material, Continued
WARNING -- PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
1. Always use an isolation transformer between the power source and the receiver line input when servicing.
2. Discharge the high voltage lead to B- before working near high voltage.
3. When handling the cathode ray tube (CRT):
a) Completely discharge the CRT capacitance by means of a jumper between the high voltage cavity and B-.
b) Use protective shatterproof goggles and heavy gloves.
4. After receiver repair, check resistance between the B- side of the receiver line input and the chassis cold
rail (line cord disconnected). A resistance of less than 300,000 ohms indicates a short circuit (or leakage)
to metal parts which are accessible. Remove the cause of leakage before the set is released.
472V034 HOI
20'5
5AT8
RF
MIXER
AMP
I
OSC.
SW 400
OFF -ON
VI3
V12
SWITCH
2BN4
V12
FIL.
FIL.
OUT
IN
R 401
DROPPING RESISTOR3
5CG8
V13
470V057M0I-H02C
470V059H02 -vH F
(VHF ONLY)
470V060H02-VHF/ uHF
VERT.
UHF
ONLY
OUTPUT
,L401
LT'
-t
HORIZ.
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
0
T200
VIV A -B
VERT. D1SCH.
HORIZ.
AFC
F INPUT
TRANS.
QuADRATuRE
COIL
SYNC. SEP.
2401
L 101
9-,
FM DET.
6AU7
HORIZ
6AU7A OR
M.V.
7Au 7
5
QO L 100
L 203
j
L402
RINGING COIL
VIDEO
T 20e DETECTOR
4.5 MC
TRAP
TRANS.
T203
)
(?)
C417
0
HORIZ. OSC.
TRIMMER
3,4. I.F
II7V.
AC ___
VERT.
VERT.
L IN.
HOLD
L_.
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
QUIETING
HEIGHT
CONTROL CONTROL
HORIZ.
HOLD
Figure 4. Top view of chassis. Tube location, heater string, and adjustments.
17. Orange wire to C412A (B+, 115V)
18. Black wire, filament return to ground
19. Black wire to pin 1 of CRT
20. Blue wire to T300 primary.
21. White wire to tuner AGC.
22. Orange/white105v). wire to junction R402 and C411A (B+,
KEY TO BOTTOM VIEW OF PC BOARD
Shielded lead to tuner IF output
2. Brown wire to pin 7 of 12D4
3. Green wire to pin 2 of CRT
5. Brown wire to tuner (filament VHF/UHF receivers only)
6. Brown wire to tuner (filament VHF receivers only)
7. Blue wire to PICTURE control R219
8. Brown wire to pin 11 of CRT
9. Yellow wire to T300 secondary
10. Green wire to arm of PICTURE control R219
11. White wire to pin 6 of CRT (B+, 115V)
12. Gray wire to lug 3 of T400 (B+ +, 425V)
13. Red wire to pin 10 of CRT
14. Red/white wire to C410A (B+, 135V)
15. Yellow wire to lug 2 of T400
16. Green shielded lead to arm of VOLUME control R105
1.
23. Blue shielded lead to top of VOLUME control R105.
24. Shield of green coax to lug 12 of TV-Phono switch.
25. Center conductor of green coax to lug 11 of TV-Phono
switch.
26. Brown wire to lug 3 of TV-Phono switch.
27. Black wire to Phono base.
28. Blue wire to TONE control R108.
29. Yellow wire to C109.
30. Yellow wire to lug 2 of TV-Phono switch.
31. Red/yellow wire to lug 5 of TV-Phono switch.
154
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE
Chassis V-2365-11, V-2365-12,
Service Material, Continued
R403
C420
R418
R419
R401 y
V3:12DQ6A
Figure 7 - Chassis
removed from
cabinet, front
view.
v8, 12EN6 OR 12W6GT
A 1- I G N NA
NT
IF ALIGNMENT
TERMINATION OF EQUIPMENT:
EQUIPMENT:
1.
Generators - Except where otherwise noted, all signal
generating equipment should be terminated as shown in
2.
Oscilloscope and VTVM - Use direct probe terminated
with decoupling network shown in Figure 11.
1.
2.
Sweep generator - Output frequencies of 40 MC through
60 MC. Output voltage level should be adjustable.
CW or marker generator - Output frequencies of 4.5 MC,
41.25 MC, 43.1 MC, 42.5 MC, 47.25 MC, and 215.75 MC.
Generator should he accurate and stable; crystal calibration preferred. Output voltage level should be adjust-
able.
Oscilloscope - Ilickock 640 or equivalent.
VTVM - RCA Voltohmyst or equivalent.
Bias supply -'A negative 3 volt bias.
6. Alignment tool -- The alignment tool shown in Figure
Figure 10
SHORT
3.
4.
5.
LEADS
TUNER
R2
300 OHM
8
should he used to adjust all slugs having a hexagonal
RI
INPUT
bore.
O
150 OHMS
.099" ACROSS FLATS
0
Zo
zo
RI
R2
R3
GENERATOR
OUTPUT
IMPEDANCE
52
56
120
150
72
85
110
150
PART NUMBER V-8623
Figure 9. Impedance matching network.
Figure 8. Alignment tool; .099" across flats.
47K
.001 MF
VALUE
EQUAL TO
GENERATOR
OUTPUT
GENERATOR
OUTPUT
IMPEDANCE
CABLE
470
MMF
VTVM
T
OR
OSCILLOSCOPE
Figure 11. Decoupling network.
Figure 10. RF generator cable.
155
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE IF Alignment for Chassis V-2365-11, V-2365-12 (Continued)
Step
Generator
Freq.
(MC)
Indicator and
Connection Point
Generator
Connection Point
Adjustment
a) Connect a -3 volt bias to test
.
point ®
.
Short out the receiver antenna terminals with a short jumper wire.
c) L2 (tuner). Turn slug fully counterclockwise (all way out) to detune
tuner output.
T203. Bottom slug for maximum out put at 43.9 MC; top slug to check that
response will "rock" about 43.9 MC.
If necessary, readjust bottom slug
slightly until top slug will "rock"
responie about 43.9 MC. Finally, adjust top slug for flatest response.
a) Remove generator connection from
control grid (pin 1) of 3rd IF Amp.
b) Remove sco e connection from
test point
T202. Adjust for maximum negative
voltage.
b)
2.
Sweep
43.9
Connect sweep generator output to control
grid (pin 1) of 3rd IF
Scope. Connect to test point
Calibrate for 2V PP.
®.
Amp.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CW
CW
CW
43.1
Connect CW generator
47.25
CW. Leave connected
45.2
as in step 4.
VTVM. Connect to test point
Use range suitable for
measuring -1.5V.
VTVM. Leave connected as
in step 4.
CW. Leave connected
as in step 4.
VTVM. Leave connected as
in step 4.
output to test point 0.
®.
7,
L200. Adjust for minimum negative
voltage.
T201. Adjust for maximum negative
voltage.
a) Remove generator connection from
point © .
test point ® .
test
b) Remove VTVM connection from
.
Sweep
44
Connect sweep generator output to test point
Scope. Connect to test point
® . Calibrate for 2V PP.
9.
Response curve should be as shown in
Figure13. Slight readjustment of T201
and T202 should be used, if necessary,
to obtain the proper IF response curve.
a) Remove generator connection from
test point © .
b) Remove scope connection from test
point (D
10.
CW
41.25
Connect CW generator
to Mixer grid point on
tuner. (See Figure 15)
VTVM. Connect to test point
.
Use range suitable for
measuring -1.5V.
0
11.
12.
Sweep
215.75
Connect sweep generator
to antenna terminals
through impedance
matching network shown
in Figure 9.
VTVM. Leave connected as
in step 10.
a) Remove jumper wire shorting out
antenna terminals.
b) Set receiver channel selector to
Ch. 13.
Fine tuning. Adjust for lowest point
in trap dip.
point ® .
Sweep
Ch. 13
(210216)
Connect sweep generator to antenna terminals
through impedance
matching network shown
in Figure 9 .
Sco e. Connect to test point
BB
.
Calibrate for 2V PP.
CW
4.5
Connect CW generator
to test point ® .
a) L2 (tuner). Adjust for maximum
output.
b) T200. Bottom slug to check that
response will "rock" about Ch. 13
center frequency (213 MC). If nec-
15.
16.
or reduce IF bias if necessary,
a) Remove VTVM connection from test
13.
14.
.
T200. Top slug for minimum negative
voltage. Increase generator output
VTVM. Connect to point © ,
low side to B-.
156
essary, readjust L2 slightly until
bottom slug of T200 will 'rock"
response about 213 MC. Finally,
adjust bottom slug of T200 for overall response curve Figure 12.
a) Remove generator connection from
antenna terminals.
b) Remove sco connection from
test point
.
L203. Adjust for minimum positive
voltage.
42.25MC
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TV
41.25 MC
I
45.75MC
47.25MC
43MC 44MC 45MC
WESTINGHOUSE Alignment
Chassis V-2365-11, V-2365-12
(Continued)
2 VOLTS
PEAK TO PEAK
PICTURE
CARRIER
211.25
BAND WIDTH
3.2 TO 3.5 MC
MC
2 V P -P
SOUND
6 DB
CARRIER
215.75 MC
1.5 DB
50% OR 6 DB
Figure 13. Video IF response curve.
Figure 12. Overall response.
SOUND ALIGNMENT
The sound section may be aligned using either a locally
generated signal or an air signal.
4.5 MC DETECTOR PROBE
Construct probe from quadrature coil assembly (part no.
230V007H02) and 1N64 (part no. V-10916-3) or equivalent
crystal diode. The crystal diode should have a back resistance of at least 500K ohms as measured by VTVM.
The probe should be adjusted for maximum response at
4.5 MC as follows:
Connect detector probe (Figure 14) to control grid
(pin 2) of 3BN6. Use VTVM range suitable for measuring
small negative voltages.
2. Tune receiver to strongest of available channels.
3. Set the QUIETING control R100 to mid -range.
4. Using a low VOLUME control setting, adjust quadrature
coil L101 for maximum speaker volume.
1.
5.
VTVM.
ting receiver.
7.
2. Tune quadrature coil slug for maximum indication on
VTVM.
8. Adjust
This is possible because the probe does not significantly
load or detune the receiver circuits.
setting until a -1.5 volt VTVM measurement is obtained.
IN
4
TO PIN * 2
IGRI:111-4r-
10.
CHASSIS
GROUND
COIL
If the -1.5 volt measurement cannot be obtained using
the fine tuning, then adjust the tuner oscillator to
obtain -1.5 volt.
Adjust the QUIETING control for minimum intercatrier
noise (buzz).
V TV M
QUADRAT URE
Reduce VOLUME control setting and further reduce
signal strength at the antenna until -1 volt is measured
on the VTVM.
quadrature coil L101 for maximum speaker
volume.
9. Rotate fine tuning control away from "best picture"
The use of this probe in the AIR SIGNAL ALIGNMENT
procedure will insure exact tuning of the sound section.
3 ON 6
step 9, the tuner oscillator was adjusted, this
oscillator should now be returned to its original adIf, in
11.
justment condition.
ASSEMBLY
PART NO. 230V007H02
V12
LOCALLY GENERATED SIGNAL
ALIGNMENT EQUIPMENT:
1. FM generator - Output frequency of 4.5 MC with approx-
imately ±7.5 KC deviation.
2. AM generator - Output frequency of 4.5 MC, modulated
C7
2CY5
Figure 14. 4.5 MC detector probe.
3.
RF AMP N
2.
3.
4.
V13
5AT8
MIXER
C16
IF TRAP
OSC.
VHF ANT.
300
IF
CABLE
approximately 30%.
VTVM or oscilloscope - Use with high impedance probe.
OUTPUT MIXER
GRID
V COIL
Connect across VOLUME control as AC voltage indicator.
Connect VTVM or scope across VOLUME control.
Set QUIETING control R100 to mid -range.
Apply strong 4.5 MC FM signal to test point 0
144.
I f
AGC
Adjust quadrature coil L101 for maximum output.
5. Using lowest signal level that will produce an indication, adjust coil L100 for maximum output.
6. Apply medium strong 4.5 MC AM signal to test point C)
7. Adjust QUIETING control for minimum AM output.
8. Repeat steps 3 through 7.
AIR SIGNAL ALIGNMENT EQUIPMENT:
4
FILAMENT
IN
147.-
7 iv
B+ 130V.
1. VTVM - Use with special 4.5 MC detector probe.
Detector probe, 4.5 MC - This probe may be easily con-
2.
RF
TRIM
MIXER
TRIM
Ll
PROCEDURE:
1.
This may be
Reduce signal strength at the antenna.
done with an attenuator pad or by loose coupling.
6. Adjust coil L100 for maximum negative voltage on
1. Connect probe input lead, in series with a 2 mmf capacitor, to control grid (pin 2) of 3BN6 on properly opera-
SHIELD
PROCEDURE:
FILAMENT
OUT
structed from a quadrature coil assembly and a crystal
diode. See Figure 14 for construction details.
T. P.
Figure 15 - VHF tuner 470V057H02 (Mark VI)
157
OSC. ADJ.
HOLE
i-(Vp AZ`g.)
1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CHASSIS REMOVAL
1. Remove the external antenna leads, back cover, antenna
terminal boards, control knobs, speaker leads and nut on
speaker -holding clamp.
SCREWS
2. Disconnect the following: AC plug to phono (Amp-Lok);
blue phono coaxial lead to terminal board under phono;
black wire to terminal board under phono.
3. Remove six screws from the bottom of the cabinet (four
1/4" screws and two 5/16" screws).
4. Remove three screws located inside the cabinet (two
above the CRT and one at the side of the chassis).
;ECTION I SOUND 1E AND AVOlg
NOTES:
V6
I.
DC v OLTAGES MEASURED WITH vTvM FROM POINTS INDICATED TO B- ANL TERMINALS SNORTED
2.
PEAK TO PEAK WAVE FORMS WERE TAKEN WITH CONTRAST CONT. SET FOR
A 25 VOLT PEAK TO PEAK SIGNAL AT THE CRT CATHODE, ALL OTHER
CONTROLS SET FOR NORMAL PICTURES.
6102
IT
ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES LESS THAN I ARE IN MFD AND VALUES GREATER THAN
1 ARE IN ArAFD,wHILE ALL RESISTORS ARE V2 W UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
4.
4 INDICATES VOLTAGES TAKEN WITH PICTURE ADJUSTED FOR NORMAL RASTER.
TV pHoN0 SWITCH ACTUATED BY PICTURE CONTROL. (R219)
6.
TV puONO SWITCH SHOWN HI TV POSITION.
7
6
9.
80 V
I.
a
16 MMF WITH 47C/0571402
27 MMF WITH 470V0591402
elt
clot)
800
8101
3.4711IP
ARAR
vI
T42,012
TFc OUTPUT
LINER TER..n
10221
ROOT
3.911
3
14 v6
URN'
DOT
C222
5
47
2.2
L2
D.V.
47.25Me
68
C204-1680
55 V.
1
kL2
55
R206
C203
82028203
boo I
3.9K
IOCA
DC
8208
470
13.2K
C201
470K
0Y6 OR 3C56
SYNC SEP VS
SECTION 3 SYNC. AM) VERTICAL
R304
56K
= .0047
IC 301
61 V PP- 60%
2 300
R303
270
R505
6914
I
605 PP -15750'4
-
143I9
"KS
31
47K
.150
68
...K. -vv.
R3061
- C303
R 302
27K
27
R2I3
47K
T.0047
1.4KV
R301
470K
Adv.-
IC202
1500
0302
.01
1.0015
470
C207
660
C300_
268°Kv
C208
8212
680
R10..01
_2 T c227
147 TO
R210 C404 Rbi
ISO
1470
IC202
R204
470
221-7-/223
22
2
C206
.0015
C205
RW7
47
47
R201 T
TUNER
4.7
IRK
1
RUC
43.914
R20
1105.
IS
CRYSTAL
11645 OR IN295
I
I
HOW
2.2
TIT
C228T-
7203
30116
r43,11F2 6
201
DoiN
IW
SECTION 3 VIDEO LE AND VIDEO
VIO
GA.
_
OtRE7186
CON71101.
45.241/4
1 -SEE NOTE'S
O047
R100
ii5V
470V058H02 TUNERS.
470V060$402 TUNERS.
3526
I. LF AMP
A,C
1) TUNER
0-3V.
T
MONAURAL CARTRIDGE IS NORMALLY SERRIED) THE STEREO CARTRIDGE WILL BE
A FIELD INSTALLATION.
ON CHASSIS V2365-11-12 USE 17CFP4 CRT B ON CHASSIS V2365-13-14 USE 17AVP4A CRT.
4,5M4
1:]
I `lo'
C101
150
A
C 228
r--1
1101
6
3.
S.
470
30-3005
FM SET.
18K
w
60,4
ITS V PP -601.
115 V.
iVPP- 60'1.
IS v
40
C4126 MOO
40 AF
1.4KV
ag2
140 V
FUMBLE
A.C.
RESISTOR
L75V PP -GOA,
ACINIOND1
-G7:0,c-ArEs
a
r-
J\N.
VVl
20V PP -157501.,
11 3,-
T..
.
C4IOA
20068
Tzoome
Ns V PP -SON,
2400
v2
VI
I
2te
LL4K_V
8
I
DAMPER4
INDICATES CHASSIS RAILS
8401
4LA
20w
LEK
vw8
U26C747
NORM AFC
135 V
C4094
1
24 V PP - 15750%
L400
23W
A400
0401
"Irv' r
2W
SW 400
-A
6005
/VV \
AUDIO 13
OFF ON
- C400
7w
i25V.
C408
7.5
.BECT/ON 4 MORIZ. AND POWER
180
60148
R400
non
R403
7
0401
.033
v5
MLR
v3
120!
V8
OR
v6
3C56
38146
FM DOT.
SYNC. SCR
OK
oR
!UM
VERT. OUT.
5
.1600V
Schematic diagram; chassis V-2365-11 and V-2365-12
158
12K
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2365-11, V-2365-12, Schematic Diagram
SW 2024
PMONO 6 STEREO PRONSIOttS
SECTION
STEREO
CARTRIKE
BLACK
TWEETER
..,
Do--,
5W3004
CZ
2239
r-I-Lr
-.1-
-
GREEN
L.1,,......1
rlc.; ONLY
ON
7100
12C5
128
C105
:
AC
a
1109
I
K/
1.0047
63.
VOLUME5004
CONT.
11
STEREO.
0-
I
STEREO
7rjOUTPUT
JACK
RED
,PHONO
RASE
BLACK
I
+60 .TE
RECORD
SFKR.FRAME
V
PHONO CARTRIEGE
TO AUDIO8+
SEE NOTE N0.7
TO 0224
TO AC 17140NO
SEC
IN SECTION 4
L203
46V PP - 60'1./
202A
-4.1211.7-
6
517c
25V PP - 60'1.
212
L 201
100mh
41
S6
609.
1.7200+:
IR42TrFr
I/ 44:1:
1
E. Lsgt
CZIT
.22
.i.54
I(
38 V PP- 60'1.
30.115 V.
PIN .2 CRT
wakR6
VIDEO OUTPUT
8219
PICTURE
LS V
6C219
= 0215
047
I(
669.
C ONT.
R224
PHONOw-d
224 S
8223
INPUT
R214
3.9K
5%
V78
_LC213
-1. 27
"'I
'SW
10 211
11216
TO PHONO BASE
0022/ 2014
150
4 R22I
R222
2.76
8227
5.64
C214
6-1 120
174
R25i
100K
BRIGHTNESS
CONT.
11225
[2M5
I Cje4
OK
SOME
-
11--
0220
0047
6228
1.4K1
IS V.
26V2 916A
'06v PP - 60'1.
VERT. DISCHARGE
J_C 309
5
C 304
.004T
.
5
8311
8315
U.KSW 3004
4.714
17-507.04
ISO
R307
1.5m
38V PP -60'1.
vERT
1
6+
R 316
TO TUNER
HOLD
g3g,
HEIGHT
684
vERT. LIN.
J
SM
IR 314
CONT.
V278
/-FF R417
824
.22
S :roll
R407
VZ
GAUT OR 64974
OR 7497
HORa.. MULTI.
C420
11411
lw
349,X
15.
A
3304
F7---
R.V. RECT.
1400
r
C 419
R409
6419
1004 1
.047
VS
12
0A
HOM2. OUTPUT
125 V.
VI
1204
W
NA
DAMPER
5
4 .33 V
R62
R404
2204
5%
6800
R405
474
C0i3
.01
us.
LE.
910
2nd LF
VII
3.4
L401
1680
1680
L
680
P168.
3.11 Mw
.56.
nvR r - 7.
3
I'Ill'I
C 405
680
3
I
I
I
4
v., 7,4E,
1-040
=660v
v164-8
1 11215°I.
SCGI10 RI
SATS
t74C475
IT
34
0404
7361:13
Am.
26OR
32L_TE.
3
c403
5,.
1.1+1.
11413
-
1
Liu+
C402
T =, I
18.
n
ONLY
3826
r
42i
4
R 420
2.2K
C
V.
1.54
nal v PO - 157501J 0,
v9
I00
R406
0414
3626
IC
Rai('
-299.
1
'I'::' C OS
CRT. NE - .0
2 AF4A I
4'
s1
.3
10
uo.F
I ONLY
I
1
-It
,
17s.CS5174 'Ft:VE:1T. D1SCH .
HOR. AF. C.
I
1-
4
5
i
-1
-
159
I
017---1
1
COLOR 007 CM
TONE
CONTROL
1
CARTII
SW 500
GREEN
3 w7.4
Poll
C.Ir
5P4 R.
--'9tr ----1(-0 a TERMINALS CMOS%
R105
4
SW 50,i1 rpm,
CART
I50CK
MONAURAL
F.
300,a
IC K56
7
TO
1.,_4.R.300sEcRIRRT2
MONAURAL
1
OUTPUT
TRANS.
812014
aupo OUTPUT
--0
1
-
I
CERTAIN MODELSl
R104
0)-1
RED
WHITE
1
4254
8252
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2365-11, V-2365-12, Service Material, Continued
i
1-
T200
0
i ..,,3
®121 41)
vei
R3I1
0
4
o
®
®
1
R
I
L4
e ® -0
V9 .(5)
0 3BZ6 0
R207
Iicao TE,220
si
1-*
R227
C2 I
--11-
0229
0
V.1./ XI6
I
R225
Ave_
® 6"7(1)
306
31
0
SPKR.
T 100
VERT.
HOLD
"-...nr
111
R107
R315
R230
R300
R22 2
-11/1/0-.
- --1
R103
C213
0-011,
C309
CIO 21
71 .1/ 0 CD
Te
T®366166®
j% ®®®
A
40-1W-4 -11/%40R2Z0
R221
c101
L1011
L
R 231
C217)I
C107
I
11
BRIGHT.
41"""n-".
.RVA4."*228
C100
TO
N.
f12%
C105
C302
0
-A/
R2I8W1-
L100
QUIETING
R100
C301
o -MN-- -11--4
m
C106
CD AO (1)
0
R101
to-AW.....
II.,
14303
ap40...-.......
R416
C422
0.41...
SW
13)
0 V3 ®
12DQ6A ®
13)
R4I4
7
C 418
111=AMIL.0
R232
220
R4Il
R410
5
NI
elew
HOR12.
HOLD
R412
C4I5
CD
Q®
618.17
1i
ea'
ED
A 1111
11%7 me
R406 `'
--aVv0_413_45
Bi
R417
r4119
-VvV,-
R4I5
40-4
R3I6
-VvV.--
4m............... z 401
(6 6 4 2
,.
HEIGHT
11_43
[email protected] 0
4.--11-41
CO33
-4- ,
II5V.
4111.11Mile
410.11-0
R319
(1)
R305V5
®3116
(8) V4
C103
300
R301
R306
R106
LIN.
R313
11-11-.
OD
.
o-41-- WORpit01024
-11-4- 1
VERT
.2156
Ap,CD
-
--
R 307
4117
r.-2
COLD RAIL
C219
R308
C304
\4-2214-wvR 314
Laoliq
CM
O
+7.1 C2 27
1/4.
R224
R 308-1A-4
3
C210
7
C305
C307
L
roe AA
-41- if" 4)40
WO
6
R233
S
I
4435
I1
L 201
R212
-ws,r-
01
®
T
ltieL 200
R216
R8I3
@VII ®
3DK6 0 --ic
1C2OP
41 -075
130V.
0
T202
210
R211*
R 206
C3
C 2061
C203
12(70cZWl
4 01
0 V 10 ® ts/i I
C202 0. R204
-
c209.1
0 R209
T201
0 38Z6 cD
i
i
12EN 667
0 _jot 2
R2( 3
C404
C 403
C402
C4I4
C417
R408
Ar-AAAA-
R409
R4I3
.
C4161
R407
16.--11-
6404
C4I3
-eVvV1.0
C224
BOOST
450V.
Bottom view of PC board showing top components as schematic symbols.
160
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Westinghouse
MODEL AND CHASSIS CHART
Chassis
Models
H211262
H211263
H211264
H211265
H21T266
H211267
H211268
H211269
H211270
H211271
MODEL AND CHASSIS CHART
RF Amp: 2CY5
470V057H02 Osc-Mix: 5AT8
V-2374-1 VHF:
RF Amp: 2BN4/
or
470V0591102
2BN4A
Chassis
HT -3500
HT -3501
HT -3502
V-2377-1
HT -3500U
HT -3501U
HT -3502U
V-2377-2
Tuners Used
470V057H02
VHF:
or
470V059H02
Osc-Mix: 5CG8
RF Amp: 2BN4/
H21TU262 H21TU266
VHF: 470V060H02
2BN4A
H21TU263 H21TU267
Osc-Mix: 5CG8
V-2374-2
H21TU264 H21TU268
472V024H01
Osc: 2AF4A
H21TU265 H21TU269
UHF: 472V024H03
Xtal: 1N82A
472V034H01
Rel. No.
Model
Models
Tuner Tubes
Tuners Used
V-2374-1
H -21K271 - limed oak
H-21KU270 - mahogany
RF Amp: 2BN4A
Osc-Mix: 5CG8
UHF: 472V034H01
Osc: 2AF4A
Xtal: 1N82A
Chassis V-2377-1 & 2 are identical to chassis V-2374-1
& 2 respectively, except for the items listed below.
Part No.
Description
754V035H01
Receptacle, AC cord, polarized
C420
R2CC61Z5Z681P
680 mmf (added between B- and point © on PC board)
R107
R221
270V069H01
Volume control, 500K ohms
Multiple control: Brightness control, 100K ohms
On -Off switch
270V070H01
Contrast control, 15K ohms
SW400
V-2374-2
H-21KU271 - limed oak
RF Amp: 2CY5
Osc-Mix: 5AT8
RF Amp: 2BN4A
Osc-Mix: 5CG8
VHF: 470V060H02
Chassis
H -21K270 - mahogany
Tuner Tubes
R217
R312 } 270V069H02
R409
Multiple control: Vertical hold, 2 megohms
Horizontal hold, 60K ohms
ALTERNATE MIXER
SCREEN GRID CIRCUIT- USED WIEN TUNER
CHANNEL (.113111 POSITION (UHF)
REAR COVER ASSEMBLY (470v060H02-cnn; 305)
470V059H02
8+ TO
CHANNELMIUHF)
SAND PASS ADJ.
TO -JilaCTICH
C 25
R2
UHF
0 VVEt4 T. 0
F26
C27
L13
000
001
I
IC1-111
IM
i
1
IM
._1470
ONLY
L
L
5000
OSC. ADJ.
MIX: OSC
TO JUNCTION
C9 -R7
R2
IK
R3
I5K
---,sr
L5
ICIS
120
1 .7
C2
30
R5
j4060.,
220K
21354
L.TER'
2BN4A
°FOG
RF AMR
L3
CI3
000,-I(
*CO
CS
5CG8
0
Mrx,OSC.
TEST POINT
4L4
44 MC
I.F.
2=
2
FIL..,
IN
A
CUT 3( \,girb
100E1
-C18
-"`
;1000
5CG8
C9
1000
2200
I(
1000
33
,_5(
1000
°U
8+1130)
Schematic diagram for tuners 470V059H02 & 470V060H02.
WARNING -- PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
1. Always use an Isolation transformer between the power source and the receiver line input when servicing.
2. Discharge the high voltage lead to B- before working near high voltage.
3. When handling the cathode ray tube (CRT):
a) Completely discharge the CRT capacitance by means of a jumper between the high voltage cavity and B-.
b) Use protective shatterproof goggles and heavy gloves.
4. After receiver repair, check resistance between the B- side of the receiver line input and the chassis cold
rail (line cord disconnected). A resistance of less than 300,000 ohms indicates a short circuit (or leakage)
ible. Remove the cause of leakage before the set is released.
to metal parts which are
161
-
R7
....,.Y.....,.Y..C16
C20 OU 0T
A
4,C23
(--27
V2385 -2r 8,-12
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE
V
SPEAKER
a
SATO
'O'SP
AMP.
013
Chassis V-2374-1, V-2374-2,
V-2377-1, V-2377-2
472V0341 -10I
LEADS
VI2
i
ler4
04 (!)8
OC 66
OE OG
5CG8
47050573102
v12
VHF ORLY)
L.
3
47000593102 -VHF
470V0603102 -VHF/ UHF
TO 412 OF
VIS
L.-
FROM
VII 3
vs
120531
R4014 DR
T
0401
AUDIO
OUTPUT
6408
f
r
1
FIL. CROPPING 1
DIODES
SESSTOR
T202
V6
CRYSTAL
3DT6
VIDEO
V4
313Y6 Ds
L101
DETECTOR
3056
DETECTOR
v9
co)
3066 on 3086
sr ,D
sER
T ICO
3,4 r.E
A-8
66.5
1201
2r. LE
VIDEO
3
-'
1400
L 100
1200
L 401
L 203
C409
VII
(fL
8200
400
400
OFF ON
C 112 A
C 402A
C403A
FUSIBLE
C404,3
200
L200
12W6GT os 12005
VERT OuTPuT
17V. AC
HEIGHT
Figure 2. Top view of chassis showing tube locations, heater string, and adjustments.
SOUND ALIGN MENT
Remove the jumper wire used to short the control grid of
EQUIPMENT: VTVM
6.
PROCEDURE:
7.
1. Select the strongest station available (preferably with test
pattern and test tone) and adjust the FINE TUNING for
best reception. Adjust the VOLUME control so that the
station sound is audible.
2. Adjust the quad coil (L101) for. maximum sound from the
speaker.
3. Use a jumper wire to short the control grid of the 3rd IF
amplifier to B-.
4. Connect the VTVM to TP 0 .
5. Adjust interstage transformer T100 far maximum negative
the receiver and the picture is barely visible. A pronounced
noisiness (hiss) should accompany the sound.
8. Adjust 4.5 MC trap L203 for maximum negative voltage on
the 3rd IF amplifier.
Disconnect the antenna input and place it close to the
antenna terminals so that the signal is loosely coupled to
VTVM.
9. Adjust the limiter input coil (L100) for maximum negative
voltage on the VTVM. If the VTVM 'indicates a broad
response while making this adjustment, the receiver input
signal is too strong. When the signal coupling described
in step 7 is at the necessary low point, no limiting takes
place and the VTVM will indicate a sharp response to the
limiter input coil adjustment.
voltage on the VTVM.
IF ALIGNMENT
EQUIPMENT
1. Sweep Generator with a 10 MC t-ide sweep at center fre-
quencies from 10 MC to 90 MC and 170 MC to 216 MC.
which accurately produces the IF
and RF frequencies from 4.-5 MC to 216 MC.
3. Oscilloscope with good low frequency response character2. CW (Marker) Generator
istics.
4. VTVM.
5. Bias Supplies of -4 volts and -2.5 volts.
6. Standard Alignment Tool with a 3/32" hexagonal tip.
All test equipment cables and leads should be as short
and direct as possible.
Oscilloscope and VTVM - Use a low -capacitance direct
probe terminated with the decoupling network shown in
Figure 10. Keep the oscilloscope calibrated for 2 volts
peak
to
peak (P -P). Use a VTVM range suitable for
measuring -1.5 volts.
Generators - Except, where otherwise noted, all signal generating equipment should be terminated as shown in Figure
9 . Connect the signal cable ground near the ground of the
stage where the signal is injected.
TERMINATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF EQUIPMENT
Adjust the CW generator output so that: (1) When the VTVM
These instructions on termination and adjustment of
equipment will apply throughout the IF Alignment procedure.
quencies do not distort the response curve.
is being used its reading remains near the -1 volt point.
(2) When the oscilloscope is being used the marker fre-
162
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
SHORT LEADS
WESTINGHOUSE (Continued)
Chassis V-2374-1, V-2374-2,
V-2377-1, V-2377-2.
TUNER
2o
RI
R2
R3
52n
120n
56n
150n
72a
I lOn
85n
150n
RI
R2
300n INPUT
We
R3
o
?o GENERATOR
OUTPUT
IMPEDANCE
Figure 8. Impedance matching network.
GENERATOR
OUTPUT
47K
ripr:1---mAr-----
CABLE
.001 ME
mine,g11,
TO VTVM
TO TEST
POINT
470 MMF
OR SCOPE
RI . OUTPUT
=
IMPEDANCE
OF GENERATOR
Figure
9. 9.
Generator cable termination.
Figure 10. Decoupling network.
I F ALIGNMENT
Test Equipment And Connections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connect a
to TP J.
Adjustment
-4V bias to TP ®and a -2.5V bias
Connect CW g n. (45.25 MC) to TP (1. Connect
VTVM to TP B .
Same equipment and connections as step 2.
Adj. gen. to 41.8 MC.
Remove gen. and VTVM connections.
Connect sweep gen. (43 MC center) to TP J.
Loosely couple CW gen. (44 MC) to sweep gen.
output cable. Connect scope to TP Q3j.
Same equipment and connections as step 5.
Adj. CW gen. for 44.75 MC.
7.
8.
9.
10..
Leave scope connected as in step 6. Connect
sweep gen. (43 MC center) to "TEST INPUT"
on tuner (see tuner picture). Loosely couple
CW gen. (41.25 MC) to sweep gen. output cable.
Same equipment and connections as step 7.
Adj. CW gen. first to 44 MC for adjustments,
then to 45.75 MC to check that the Pix Carrier
is at the 50% point on the curve.
2200: Detune top and bottom slugs.
T202: Detune top slug only.
T201: Adj. for max. neg. voltage.
T200: Adj. for max. neg. voltage.
T202: Adj. bottom slug for max. peak at 44 MC.
T202: Adj. top slug until the high frequency peak falls at 44.75 MC.
Retouch bottom slug to obtain a symmetrical double -peaked response,
as shown in Figure 11.
L200: Detune in clockwise direction.
L200: Adj. to place trap at 41.25 MC.
Same equipment and connections as step 8.
Mixer Output coil: Adj. for max. amplitude of response curve at 44 MC.
Z200: Adj. bottom slug (in conjunction with Mixer Output coil) to
obtain a symmetrical response curve which "rocks" about 44 MC.
45.75 MC marker should be at the 50% (6D13) point on the curve. See
Figure 12.
Z200: Adj. top slug to place trap at 47.25 MC.
connected as in step 9. Connect sweep gen.
to antenna terminals through impedance
matching network shown in Figure 8.
Ch. Selector: Check the overall response of each channel. These
curves should he similar to Figure 12. If the alignment procedure has
been followed closely, any major variations from the idealized
response can be attributed to the RF portion of the tuner.
Adj. CW gen. to 47.25 MC.
Remove CW gen. connections. Leave scope
41.25 42.25
MC
1
MC
I
I
45.00
MC
I
45.75
MC
I
41.25
47.25
MC
MC
1
1
I.F. FREQ.
2 VOLTS
P -P
(MC)
41.25
50%(6013)
45.75
47.25
I
NAME
45.75
SOUND CARRIER
PIX CARRIER
ADJACENT SOUND
2 VOLTS
P -P
50%(6DB)
I
408
10B
44 MC
i
MC ji
TYPICAL RESPONSE CURVE
MIXER GRID TO VIDEO DETECTOR
TYPICAL RESPONSE CURVE
1st. I.F. AMR GRID TO VIDEO DETECTOR
Figure 12.
Figure 11. Video IF response curve.
163
Overall response curve.
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Schematic Diagram Chassis V-2374-1, -2
SECTION I 1.0,./NLI.F. AND AUDIO
v54
T 100
1/2 5CLBA
NOTE51
38V
C VOLTAGES MEASURED FROM B-, NO APPLIED ".SIGNAL ,USING A v Tvm
2. ALL PEAK TO PEAK WAVEFORMS AND D.C. VOLTAGES I e I TAKEN WITH ALL
CONTROLS SET FOR NORMAL PICTURE.
3. ALL CAPCiTANCE mALuES LESS THAN I ARE IN rFD AND VALUES GREATER THAN I
ARE IN Web, WHILE ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/2 WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
I.
4.7
It
000
* USED WITH TUNERS 47000591402 AND 47000605402.
LATER PRODUCTION
4 5 0.5c
91
i
'
I
I
4
R100
470K
i
CIO3
ie
6
0101
I
I
313y
I
I
I
6
J
L _ 23. Si_hc
I C102
0047
---
0100
RaDi
3.3
56X
120 V LO
SECTION 2 VIDEO LE AND VIDEO OUTPUT
31'62
TO IF OUTPUT
TIMER TERM
/
-
- -1
C.: ft....!
is, I.F. AMR
Loll
_I
I
I
y:
BOO
TuraCR
TUNER
I
113V
I
620 7
2, 5V
C202
61(UHF
R 300
11301
100K
1614
-4. C300
1.22
31
470K
1
I 800
470
f
6.9Ch77,
1.004 7
E - -- - -
ECTION 3 SYNC AND VERTICAL
R 3043
56 K
22K
I
55 VPP 60 U
8339°94
8 2K
22K
1
-.0047
I
005
600
3 CT
C303
I.01
27K
0 306
I
L.D11
300 PP 60,1,
OK
W
1400.
120V
LOB
SCSI,' IN 4
1442
NORIZ
AND POWER
C40 2A
.2VPP
2401
C401
.0015
R400
7.5
PUSH-PULL
1.4 Kv
1015.
OFF 054
L400
5W400
8400
FUSIBLE
C400
RESISTOR
.15
IT V
AC
1450.427,_____#
%401
SEL DIODES
HOR12 AFC
"i 200 mF
iciaiNF
4
r-
4Z.-, C4044
1
/
15v PP 603,
I 3v PP 603,
Schematic diagram; V-2374-1 and V-2374-2.
INDICATES CHASSIS RAILS
"4
V 10
V3
12k_64
V2
HI
120064
1204
KOR1Z. OUT.
DAMPER
7
C 414
_.3.,
OR
OR
8
36Y6
VERT OUT. SYNC SEP
I
7
1.
2
V9
V4
4
5
054- 13
5CL84
LIMITER
VERT. DISCH
V6
3DT6
,,,, DE-,
V 7A -B
VITRO
VIDEO
V8
arw2
3.1256
OR
AUDIO
362F,
2,41i
4
3
45
4
3
C415
680
1.033
164
43
05C.
RI
AMP
I UMI 2 14C1315P421
05C.
CRT.
I
I
144
I
I
H
I
45
43
C64A
45
V16
vri
3826
C6.3
45
I
11- - 1-C418 j
=
; .,11:::.,
BCG7
00812 M.V.
(^1 Lj...._n______n_a_
43
RE TUNER
10.304y
ij
-
-
8.2X
-L .0047
I
I
R 304
2300
1206
R209
.50
18 507
R303
47K
IS
csoi
82011
C302
1.
I.22
.0015
7 T202
1000
v4
270
Iv
0204
3CS6 OR 31306
SYNC. SER
1
0205
C2I5
680
P302
4TOK
44,4,
6.8K
I
470
C203
R203
470
ONLY) C
ION
R305
I
R205i27
R204
8.2K
800
-0 *
R224
T6
113v
IIOV-
I
7/
C201
tI R2C°
8.2K
040h
2,d,
R201
47
ARC TO
R
/DC
CRYSTAL
14,r7).7i
432 T
I
8.10
4475 Mc
8202
7 ,-
rt
I
45.Z01
25 Mc
.rIEa 0 110V.....1
1°
I
TUNER
5,4 1.1, AMR
T
41.80 Mc
44, GREEN
_g. DOT
-
V9
3DK6 OR 3C661- -
2nd I.E AMR
T200
2200
II
RE
V10
38Z6
12
j_ C419
; 2%
1
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Schematic Diagram Chassis V-2374-1, V-2374-2
V6
58
.3216
F.M. OE T.
T 101
C109
022
250 V
AUDg COUTP
Ic,08
OUTPUT
TRANS.
BLUE
.30 V
001
005
.756.
8107
Cl0
V
-
820
R105
C107
5.6 K
047
1W
5606
5601(
560 RII0
C 112A
0110
R108
150
20MF
C113
R106
R103
8102
-
135
160
Cl.p5
T.Ou47
T
ED
109V
VOLUME
CONT.
101
C104
.001
265
5001(
680 2KV
SW
30 MF
EH I-
TO 14I EI
.40 V
.400V
203
580 V
4.5 Mc
'01101
55V PP 60H.,
.LnL
1
L204:
C 210
140.1 e
56
C 208
-.047
L 202
10040
.22
VL 6868
205:,
VIDEO 4146
33
IRK
20 V.
3.96
2
30-110V
I
V 7B
C212
R2%
,5
21CBP4B
C 213
V 343
75
2.0
0/
45 V. PP 6011,
120V
154V
VIDEO AMP.
R222
220K
C214
1
6
8211
IN
II
(.41i
8213
3.95
2W
V
.1
3
8215
,OK
R225
C 209
6212
50
ZERO
TO
By PP 909,
PEAK 60
6223
10050
BV
CONTRAST/CONT
-.0022
0050
R221
1g1;
5 VOLTS
#220
0219
'ST
TUT
11111
.22
70 V
IBK
BRIE.HTNE55
CONT
IH1
R 218
100
C2)6
.0047
V 5B
v3
scup.
V2
VERT. DISCHARGE
12E1+6 OR 12w66T
VERT OUTPUT
500VAC! 601/
R 325
R32I
2.25
3
IW
514
HEIGHT CONT
C307
60 v*
.033
BLUE
4
135VK
°RANGE
YE L.
RED/
ISO
77VI7P 601/
300
11
#318
93,6
0305
.0027
I
27K
8
VV1(
1W R3.6
"4
.1.45vPi... 601/
R3I9
.50K
185.6
II
4
6323
560
6329
560
6774
BLK./ WI
s8
R320
4.7M
HA
-6317
'N
2302
[EFL. YOKE
TEL.
1
I
5006,VERT. LIN.
1
-"111.141112)-2.
1
Invivrari,
3
VIT
B
IB3GT
RECT. A
R411
50406
V 16
1W
6067
5395
C
220K
I
, R4071E407
82K T.001
55067.57509,
125,4
HORIZ.muLTi.
1
C408
5b
-14 V6
5404
475
\
4409
IV- 160
408
8
2.51.
04°,6, R405
IS
R413
4701(
22(1K
1
5605.
31
2
R412
3305
8409
R417
B
,,t410
2.2K
C413
100
Ae
*B
I5K V
I
B. . 4005
1W
44115
C4ii -
60K
R018 2. ,01.0
90v.PR 157509.
156
.22 I
1256.6 15750'1.
CENTERING
The centering rings, located at the rear of the deflection
yoke, should be rotated to center the raster.
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY
The HEIGHT and VERT. LIN. controls, located at the
rear of the receiver, should be adjusted alternately to obtain
a picture of proper height which has good vertical linearity
throughout.
DEFLECTION YOKE
The deflection' yoke should be as far forward as possible
(touching the bell of the CRT). Rotation of the deflection
yoke is used to level the raster.
HORIZONTAL RINGING COIL
The ringing coil (L401) should be adjusted as follows:
2. Set the horizohtal hold control to the center of its range.
Do not change this setting during the steps that follow.
3. Connect a VTVM to TP F for measuring the DC voltage
between TP F and B-.
4. With the receiver tuned to a static:, of normal signal
1. Short out the ringing coil with a jumper wire.
strength, adjust C409 for 0 volts DC
the meter.
5. Remove the jumper from the ringing coi..
6. Adjust the ringing coil for 0 volts DC on the meter. Check
the adjustment by switching to another channel and back
again. The receiver should pull into horizontal sync on
all channels.
165
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2374-1, V-2374-2, Service Material, Continued
-
Z 2,00
cnl
0C 215T
±-4,
C301
c 202.1
(V vto
- -;-- i'
t C201
/
1 © VII (--) /4201
i
3DK6
R205
ia611'61 I IIP3E2R
- \6,,,,,
e.er..................;
C41.60,
Ript.t.t---
4202
T200
..). C4.1.7
CO 1
.,(,C214 0 L --,...._J
.--j0"7 "M."6203
k ---c
R
C2°01
V-0
R220
L202
8218
p?J
4.
R302
R211
rORZ1% --3
rW11.
R225 .-
I
R102
R.
I
rI
COT
4it
k
/WI
l'4067
Rik".17
i
t
101
\
,
100
®
I
:4NN4D
6M
(5)
31
141
RAJ
R321
HEIGHT
CONTROL
NW
.--AAAe-
R325
R3I5
R313 -wµ--
VERT. LIN.
CONTROL
C304
4TI
R 4123
1
I
I.C410
-ti-____,
44I113.
C405
V16
IT
la
R3I7
1 CM/
iR
316
306
C407
0
I51
.--wv-
301
1/
c4,03
®(!)
R4I4
-
L401
C36
RI
2
R3I0
Aram.,
.-RSr
I'
I3
e-MOi11
111* -11-.*
X401
16.
(vaD®
J. 311R
® 5CL8A 0
1
----='
Cr'
t.,*
IM2
r
I
:111
R326
L100
C101
®
.7
cicia
(74
I
R3041
30T6
I to6
C 308
C30.21
ICI05
CIO?
-4VR222
Io
R103
C411
C2I3
111/WW-
1C104
0
C210
®,1)
Z 300
R213
R2113
1,a3
2
E3
NW-
C2I1
6E018
C109
0
.C_4214.
72"4:a019
CQO
I
I 1100'. 1
R2I9
R301
ii
I:
14:0
7201
3!
I
R204
.
C204
1,20, 2)
IT YR 283.1
.
2
R
C 203i
1C4Qa1
R406
6C07
V3
e tzw
0,, 0
R405
I
Bottom view of PC board showing top components as schematic symbols.
The leads identified by number in the
figure connect to the following
above
points:
1. T101 primary
2. Junction C112A and R110
3. Tuner B+ point
4. T101 primary
5. Chassis rail
6. Tuner IF output point
7. Tuner "Heater In" point
8. Pin 2 of CRT
9. Low side of BRIGHTNESS control
10. Lo B+, 120V
11. Pin 6 of CRT
12. Arm of BRIGHTNESS control
13. Pin 11 of CRT
14. Pin 10 of CRT
15. Pin 12 of CRT
16. Tuner "Heater Out" point
17. Low side of VERTICAL hold control
18. T300 primary
19. T300 primary
20. Pin 7 of V3
21. Arm of HORIZONTAL hold control
22. Pin 1 of CRT
23. B-
24. Pin 5 of V2
25. Lo B+, 120V
26. Lug 3 of T400
27. Hi B+. 140V
28. High side of VOLUME control
29. Arm of VOLUME control
30. High side of CONTRAST control
31. Arm of CONTRAST control
32. T300 secondary
33. High side of VERTICAL hold control
34. B-
; AGC for IF
©I Video detector
C CRT cathode
1st IF input
F
Horiz. MV
S FM detector
T AGC for tuner
166
TEST POINTS
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
V-2375-1: VHF ONLY
Westinghouse
V-2375-2: VHF/UHF
MODEL AND CHASSIS CHART
Chassis
Models
H21K272
H21K273
H21K274
H21K275
H21K276
Tuners Used
Tuner Tubes
470V057H02
VHF:
V-2375-1
or
470V059H02
H21KU272
H21KU273
H21KU274
H21KU275
H21KU276
RF Amp: 3CY5
Osc-Mix: SATS
VHF: 470V060H02
RF Amp: 2BN4/2BN4A
Osc-Mix: 5CG8
RF Amp: 2BN4/2BN4A
Osc-Mix: 5CG8
V-2375-2
UHF: 472V034H01
Osc: 2AF4A
Xtal: 1N82A
CHASSIS REMOVAL
1. Remove control knobs, external antenna leads, back cover,
antenna bracket, and speaker leads-.
2. Remove front escutcheon. It is held by screws 1, 2, and
3 (Figure 1). Remove thumbwheel knobs.
3. Remove screws 4, 5, 6, and 7 (Figure I) which hold the
control panel to the front plate.
4. Remove the bolts, od the bottom of the cabinet, which hold
the chassis.
5. On UHF models: Remove screw holding UHF tuner -support
rod to cabinet. Remove screw holding UHF tuner -support
strap to cabinet.
Figure 1. Location of screws.
CRT REMOVAL
1. Remove chassis from cabinet.
2. Remove CRT socket, deflection yoke, and HV anode lead.
3. Loosen the CRT -strap bolt at the top of the CRT and
remove the CRT. Observe CRT handling precautions
472V0341101
$NIN
e"'s
2CY
SATS\
0400
1$111101
OSC
R11:P
1
vit
v13
SPEAKER
TERMINALS
I
,
r
34
I
'3
I
/2,
28N4
012
470V0571402
Wm, ONLY/
470V0591102 -VHF
WT
470V0601102-VHF/UHF
W-1
0402
am"
SEL
1202
DIODE
0100 CUTOUT
A&
00R11. AFC
3C.36
6028
100FM
M
C
121114
OR
f M.V.RECT.
DAMPER
3816
S.T4C sFp
101
1213
HORIZ.
OUTPUT
j
L204
72010
6CG7
3826
218
T400
rLOA
LIMITER L
ANT MGT/
1200
L201
ll
t
_
ITC4 1C4te
1.203
VERT
3826
OUTPUT
I
2200
L 200
HaTIT
F400
cTiekJT'f'irk13R
0EFTI iH
II7V AC
Figure 2. Top view of chassis showing tube locations, heater string, and adjustments.
167
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2375-1, V-2375-2, Service Material, Continued
TUBE COMPLEMENT AND RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS
Resistance Measurements
Pin 4
Pin 7
Pin 5 Pin 6
VI'
Tube
Type
12AX4
Damper
-
V2
12DQ6A
Horiz Out
-
V3
12DT5
Vert Out
1K*
NC
V4
V5
3CS6/3BY6
3DT6
Sync Sep
FM Det
60K*
0
820
V6
5CL8A
FM Lim & Vert Disch
3.5
670K
to
7M
12.5
11.5
la
V7
6AU8
Video Out & Keyed AGC 46K
V8
5AQ5
Audio Out
V9
V10
V11
V12
V13
V15
3CB6/3DK6 3rd IF Amp
3BZ6
2nd IF Amp
3BZ6
1st IF Amp
2CY5
RF Amp
5AT8
Osc-Mix
21CBP4B
CRT
V16 6CG7
V17
1B3GT
Tube
Function
Pin 1
Pin 2
NC
40
Pin 3
Inf
21
-
NC
1.21.
M*
17.5K* 470K
Pin 8
-
40
42
-
38
0
220
NC
1.21.
M*
Pin 9
-
1.3K*
15
13
13.5
12.5
17.0K*
Inf
to
7M
2.4M
12K*
560K
54K*
0
11.5
10.5
42K*
45K
670K
10.5
8.5
10
330
7.5
8.5
1.6K*
1.1K*
0
150
7
7.5
6
7
0
-
-
110K
-
-
0
5.6
4.8
0
2M
4.8
3.6
2.4K*
2.4K*
2.4K*
-
27
47
2.4K*
2.4K*
2.4K*
1.8K*
0
110K
0
-
18K
6.8K*
0
3
3.6
1.5
150K
16K*
5K*
1.8K*
to 2.6K
0 to
500K
Horiz MV
56K
HV Rect
<
-
180K1K
to 240K
-
1.5
0
48K*
-
-
.
.
18K
0
500 on
225*
470K
(R X 100) to 58K
5.4K*
0 to
.
500K
II
-
3.4K*
PIN 10
Inf
0
100K
PIN 11 180K
to 230K*
3
2.2M
1K
0
PIN 12
INFINITE
Resistances from tube pin to B.(except*) in ohms unless otherwise noted. Controls set for normal picture.
*Resistances from tube pin to junction X401 & L400.
AL- I G 1J NA = rJ -r
SOUND ALIGNMENT
6. Remove the jumper wire used to short the control grid of
EQUIPMENT: VTVM
the 3rd IF amplifier.
7. Disconnect the antenna input and place it close to the
PROCEDURE:
antenna terminals so that the signal is loosely coupled to
the receiver and the picture is barely visible. A pronounced
1. Select the strongest station available (preferably with test
noisiness (hiss) should accompany the sound.
pattern and test tone) and adjust the FINE TUNING for
8. Adjust 4.5 MC trap L204 for maximum negative voltage on
best reception. Adjust the VOLUME control so that the
VTVM.
station sound is audible,
9. Adjust the limiter input coil (L100) for maximum negative
2. Adjust the quad coil (L101) for maximum sound from the
voltage on the VTVM. If the VTVM indicates a broad
speaker.
response while making this adjustment, the receiver input
3. Use a jumper wire to short the control grid of the 3rd IF
signal is too strong. When the signal coupling described
amplifier to B-.
in step 7 is at the necessary low point, no limiting takes
4. Connect the VTVM to TP ® .
place and the VTVM will indicate a sharp response to the
5. Adjust interstage transformer T100 for maximum negative
limiter input coil adjustment.
voltage on the VTVM.
EQUIPMENT
IF ALIGNMENT
All test equipment cables and leads should be as short
and direct as possible.
Oscilloscope and VTVM - Use a low -capacitance direct
probe terminated with the decoupling network shown in
I. Sweep Generator with a 10 MC wide sweep at center frequencies from 10 MC to 90 MC and 170 MC to 216 MC.
2. CW (Marker) Generator which accurately produces the IF
and RF frequencies from 4.5 VC to 216 MC.
3. Oscilloscope with good low frequency response characteristics.
Figure 11. Keep the oscilloscope calibrated for 2 volts
peak
to
peak (P -P). Use a VTVM range suitable for
measuring -1.5 volts.
Generators - Except where otherwise noted, all signal gencrating equipment should be terminated as shown in Figure
10. Connect the signal cable ground near the ground of the
stage where the signal is injected.
Adjust the CW generator output so that: (1) When the VTVM
is being used its reading remains near the -1 volt point.
(2) When the oscilloscope is being used the marker frequencies do not distort the response curve.
4. VTVM.
5. Bias Supplies of -4 volts and -2.5 volts.
6. Standard Alignment Tool with a 3/32".hexagonal tip.
TERMINATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF EQUIPMENT
These instructions on termination and adjustment of
equipment will apply throughout the IF Alignment procedure.
168
1
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL
1959
TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
SHORT LEADS
WESTINGHOUSE (Continued)
p
or-)
i
we
RI
Chassis V-2375-1, V-2375-2
TUNER
I
R2
Zo
RI
52n
120n
56n 150n
72a
110a
85n
R2
R3
300n INPUT
W3
R
Zo GENERATOR
150n
OUTPUT
IMPEDANCE
Figure 9. Impedance matching network.
GENERATOR
OUTPUT
CABLE
rgt-D----wp----Pd-47K
47K
m. 00111F.
TO VTVM
470 MMF
OR SCOPE
-
TO TEST
POINT
RI = OUTPUT
IMPEDANCE
OF GENERATOR
Figure 10. Generator cable termination.
Figure
Decoupling network.
11.
IF ALIGNMENT
Test Equipment And Connections
I.
to TP .
Connect CW g n. (45.25 MC) to TP
2.
. Connect
VTVM to TP lBJ.
3.
4.
5.
Adjustment
Connect a -4V bias to TP Oand a -2.5V bias
Same equipment and connections as step 2.
Adj. gen. to 39.75 MC; then to 41.8 MC.
Remove gen. and VTVM connections.
Connect sweep gen. (43 MC center) to TP J.
Loosely couple CW gen. (44 MC) to xweep gen.
output cable. Connect scope to TP
Same equipment and connections as step 5.
Z200: Detune top and bottom slugs.
T202: Detune top slug only.
T201: Adj. for max. neg. voltage.
L201: Adj. for min. neg. voltage at 39.75 MC.
T200: Adj. for max. neg. voltage at 41.8 MC.
T202: Adj. bottom slug for max. peak at 44 MC.
.?..).
6.
Adj. CW gen. for 44.75 MC.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Leave scope connected as in step 6. Connect
sweep gen. (43 MC center) to "TEST INPUT"
on tuner (see tuner picture). Loosely couple
CW gen. (41.25 MC) to sweep gen. output cable.
Same equipment and connections as step 7.
Adj. CW gen. first to 44 MC for adjustments,
then to 45.75 MC to check that the Pix Carrier
is at the 50% point on the curve.
T202: Adj. top slug until the high frequency peak falls at 44.75 MC.
Retouch bottom slug to obtain a symmetrical double -peaked response,
as shown in Figure 12.
L200: Detune in clockwise direction.
L200: Adj. to place trap at 41.25 MC.
Same equipment and connections as step 8.
Mixer Output coil: Adj. for max. amplitude of response curve at 44 MC.
Z200: Adj. bottom slug (in conjunction with Mixer Output coil) to
obtain a symmetrical response curve which "rocks" about 44 MC.
45.75 MC marker should be at the 50% (6DB) point on the curve. See
Figure 13.
Z200: Adj. top slug to place trap at 47.25 MC.
connected as in step 9. Connect sweep gen.
to antenna terminals through impedance
matching network shown in Figure 9.
Ch. Selector: Check the overall response of each channel. These
curves should be similar to Figure 13. If the alignment procedure has
been followed closely, any major variations from the idealized
response can be attributed to the RF portion of the tuner.
Adj. CW gen. to 47.25 MC.
Remove CW gen. connections. Leave scope
41.25 42.25
39.75
MC
MC
I
i
1
45.00
MC
MC
I
I
I
45.75
MC
I
I I2
i
I
I
I
50°4(6DB)
I DB
I.
-P
PVOLTS
E FREO.
(MC)
39.75
41.25
45.75
47.25
MC
47.25
MC
I
NAME
45.5
MC
ADJACENT PIX
SOUND CARRIER
PIX CARRIER
ADJACENT SOUND
i
1.-
t
2 VOLTS
P -P
50%(6D8)
44MC
i
1
TYPICAL RESPONSE CURVE
TYPICAL RESPONSE CURVE
MIXER GRID TO VIDEO DETECTOR
ISt.I.F. AMP. GRID TO VIDEO DETECTOR
Figure 12.
41.25
MC
I
408
--411.11111
ir
39.75
Figure 13.
Video IF response curve.
169
Overall response curve.
'
/
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2375-1, V-2375-2, Schematic Diagram
V6A
mom
s-, NO APPLIED SIGNAL, USING
L D.C. VOLTAGES MEASURED FROM
1/2
V. T. V.M.
yCLBA
a
T100
7701
LIMITER 380
2. ALL REM TO PEAK Willa FORMS TAKEN WITH CONTROLS ADJUSTED FOR
A 110111191,L PICTURE CONTRAST FOR 100 vP- P AT TEST POINT C.
11, ALL CAPAOTAKEE %SLUES LESS THEN I ARE IN 1610. AND VALUES GREATER
THEN I ARE II mmtel, WHILE ALL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS
1/2 WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE UNMATED.
INDICATES VOLTAGE FOR NOMA/ PICTURE
CI00
4 SEE SERVICE PARTS LIST.
4.7
USED WITH 470V0591402 6 470%03012w TUNERS
it I. ISO V
I
*
4.5MC
110
ClOi
L100
II
II
1 cio2
1.0047 L _
1
Roo `
4.1
:ft102
226
!
6io86
<47011
CIO3
.0047
as*
NI
TO IF OUTPUT
4
F
YOHEILAMI
TUNER
r
SECTION I
SOUND
280v
+
2200
r
1C205
-O
.
MC
1
C206
68
83230115
122V
VII
3826
IN I.E.
I
I
+ TO
R200
12±C J
I
LTJ
oso
Li2
I
I
_I
C200
R202
8.26
R204
0203
10202
51.06
T .047
KEYED
III
1 0211
0209
T .0047
680
SECTION 2
VIDEO 1 F 0 VIDEO OUTPUT
2706
r
SYNC. SER
2706
10K
1
7
2
.002 T .005
SW 2w
5
6
L
C-ND2
R301
1006
3
11312
R309
R306
270 K
8V 2
-I
8.26 0047:
02K
226
831187C12
15.750~
C
2 301
310
ii1n0R
R307
476
826
3136
15,750-
470
1008 TC6/230 1.22 Fl
740V P.P.
R300
6 5 V R P.
001
83211
R2279 .5V
-L C
R
CONT,
GALA
IKV
0219 I
V4
514
1300
2.7
eso
2KV
SYNC.
MC
2
R207 -L C207
13.28
R2064:
45.25
2V
C210
800
47
R305
111111
OR
1
1.511
V7 B
III
3066
C204
GI-.'
R201
T.047
61
2 - *5v
I
MC
V9
122
T 3975/AC
41.8
MC
2V
CI-.
47,25
I
L200
I
18w4
7
43 1
4125
t
2.2
L201
0201
NKR
720i
T200
Er-ASK 44" Z
01111.13014-1
10
I
2
11303
611K
160
87v V.P. 15,750
3
823702T« 8304
006
740V RR
SECTION 3
15,750".
SYNC,AGC 8 VERTICAL
f
AUDIO
130 V
THIS JUMPERS
TO BE REMOVED 0NLY
IF BAIA SHOULD CAUSE
VIDEO OVERLOAD.
C4014 i +
6011E
1.8
25VPP 60.--
BREAKER
ON -OFF
_.
C403
I
F400
C402
ROMP
-
285V
.0015
160I
.0015
.15
.5H
23 A.
+ C4058
C404
C400
I
_l: 30 MF
.5V RP
60-
2402
I
30 MF
1
476
10,71
IW
L __
30VPP.
15750.--,
A
'
-II
I
II
C432
390
C430
R406
680
68106
II
Z-Tugge
L
L
_ KYJ
SPECIFICATIONS
105 to 120 volts, 60 cycle AC
180 watts
2 8 watts
Operating Voltage
Power Consumption
Audio Power Output, Maximum
V4
8
V3
V2
7
2
C409
.033 Z
7
v6A 8
_weir
V5
3CS6oR
Va7A- 0
VOLT. 4710. ,V47. vELF:TIOISCH.v&YAGc
HAM.
DAM
R405
23...-15W
5V
\CIIR 414
IK
I
I 5W
I
CHASSIS
VI
3
47K
8 R401
ISOLATED
4
5
3
4
3
4
4
5
5
V0
1.0047
vi0
VII
;.":. i6E
13:r1.".
V9
MI341443
fA 4(\ 3
4
04I0
24g.
- C435
cf.....d 1
C4I2
t8U
i
r Vi2
I
:RAMP.
Fa° T
ONLY
4
POWER
Schematic Diagram; V-2375-1 and V-2375-2.
V',
rv-,4 1
I UHF 1
,1
MIX.0501
I
I
V15
2iC8P4/8
C.R.T.
1
5
3
C9I 3 .
SECTIONwaz
170
200V.
13
I
23
T
HAIM.
i
10
6W
6C87
I
1-- t-Th
1
Z400
6211
VI
431 8407
Li
c304
000
R413
220 4.76
I
ISOMF
I-
15,750
Z 401
C429
RT B+
8404
IW
271 8412
IHIGRIG
120 V PR--
30V PP
15750
NOR. AT C
I4<vel.5VRR 60.-
16
L401
SEL.
DIODE
280v
1400
6401
R411
1
..,...
7W
20W
411
.4V PR 60 tiesesseL
SW400
CIRCUIT
III
8+24501
C407
R403
R402
3
4
,
,
vH.F
TUNER
1
,
U.H.F.
I
!
',...,ER'
12
-r
C436
J.. 680
- ONLY
UHF
t - - - C414
Ii, - -.1041'.
680
- 680
2KV ;
4 2149
v16
6CG7
H.my.
4
5
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2375-1, V-2375-2, Schematic Diagram
VP
V5
5405
3DT6
F. M. XT.
AUDIO
C 109
R 106
GRN. DOT
OUT.
5,u,
T101
200V
.022
1
OOVl
G
105
C105
001
I
100"
479
2
312V0 W
CI060-1
C107
C106
nNy- _J
1-7
5109
500K
CI i0
R,
R107I
j
ISOLATED
CHASSIS
RED
2
mg" TOOK3
5110K
RI 10V
C111E1 i-
1W
245V
330
2061F -
+
AUDIO
1W
+1100V
R104
T202
L202
7
I-
CRYSTAL
444C
125V
ilM'I
,I
IN 64 OR IN
47 NA
I
6
:1.5
14611
r- -
L 205
4.54C
1404i
0216
V15
21C11144
V74
13
I
11111
L 204
0_4
IZ2 E6,1A1
1
6222104
50-1306
.22
0214
VIDEO -OUT 9 120V
R219
AV
1 C212
2
1101111
0 ---'
3500
10
470
. °0
R223
100K
CONTRAST
CONT.
C2I5A+
62151
C.1;17
R224
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
L 206
1001(
BOO uh
R2I8
410_1.
3.9K
130V
460V
7.
ONLY
19
1
SW 11
R2I7
306
R26
ISOK
150K
10
R220 t
T R227 UHF
.3,/
L203
R213
ISO
Ti
5.5V RR 60w'
0213
R2I2
-000
2
4
125V
6225
3 R222
26V
4
z1`
2211
zw
V3
12DTS
VERT. OUT.
1/2 5CLIM
VE6T 35tH
C303
4-n-
.047
R316
ILK'
150
39K
O
13320
IN
245V
R3I6
WIT1.
+
VERT. 5.
55V1!P. 60^,
ISOK
560
OR
220
116
VERT. LIN. CONT.
2I5V R.R. 60^'
1
R324
R323
5$0
7,4V
1W
6325
R3I5
5006
ram
DER.
245V
R3I9
.0027
CRIME
MELLOW
BLUE 1.
I
(
0305
.33
T300
236V
C307
C305
2M R314
VERT. HOLD
CONT.
90V RR GO"...
R322
,047
I .047
809
561
HEIGHT CONT.
R32I
1 IV -I.
C306
R313
8C6PV.Y.
C304
R317
.033 I If:
44V*
KINc
VERT.
HORN.
-ITTL21-1'
-.1- ---I
I- -
RED
BLUE
'LACK
.4,--) 1
22
C421
V17
163Rv
6415
.,104164
t R421
566 _I IONE
820
V2
120064
0417
tc4,5
gc,
R4I0i
R416
470K
1400
R419
ISO
1403
36V
04201
5
5
14611
7
w
C423
R420
C59
75
7W
R424
5KV
280V
0424
.33
GOK
14011112. HOLD CONT.
600V
L402
14M.
8417
175V P.P.
R423
SIRE
2
1.0
FI-AR472
DAMPER
4
5
7
-1
11T`
-40V
0419
9060
-62
160
469
12444
HORIZ.OLIT.
.01
W
VI
0422
RECT.
15750,-
L
1,-0
.0047
tu
C426
lu
tu
_J
U
.06111
S
Z
0 e.070
id
"ti
C425
Ta
Z
2.0V
The thermal circuit breaker will open the receiver AC input
HORIZONTAL RINGING COIL
in event of an overload (short) and will remain open until
reset. Push the button on the rear of the receiver to reset.
1. Short out the ringing coil with a jumper wire.
indicates a short. DO NOT HOLD THE BUTTON IN. Component damage or lire may result.
Immediate reopening of the circuit breaker (button pops out)
SYNC
In areas where the received signal is weak or there is
noise interference, maximum picture stability will be obtained
by adjusting the SYNC control as follows. With the receiver
strength, adjust C419 for 0 volts DC on the meter.
5. Remove the jumper from the ringing coil.
6. Adjust the ringing coil for 0 volts DC on the meter. Check
tuned to the weak signal, adjust the HORIZONTAL and
VERTICAL hold controls for best stability. Turn the SYNC
control toward the position marked NOISY AREA - just /ar
enough to obtain maximum sync stability. Check the adjustment by switching to other channels. Picture should remain
stable on all channels.
the adjustment by switching to another channel and back
again. The receiver should pull into horizontal sync on
all channels.
171
9.
!L H
>,
CIRCUIT BREAK ER RESET
The ringing coil (L401) should be adjusted as follows:
2. Set the horizontal hold control to the center of its range.
Do not change this setting during the steps that follow.
3. Connect a VTVM to TP F for measuring the DC voltage
between TP F and B-.
4. With the receiver tuned to a station of normal signal
tog
aD
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
0
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2375-1, V-2375-2, Service
I
01 12
11
C 209
C2108
rial, Continued
C 218
200
R207
;..
C213
arx
7202
R212
® M C140 k
.'
isfl
R21O
XT
0
O
0
c4ir
,-,-...
.'1-7 " .
\-
$7.-"-..203
1214
Al?
1AMa
0
-
r
103
crosT*1
C200
01-.11
R302
--MIN-
° (t) 74:15V5
RIOS
.-."..P2.29
(I_
"'`''
8i
8423
2-b)
4110
0
..._.1CL,13
R317
iy
4..--410
C303
C 435
0
\
col
\
--W0-
L 206
R303
\
®®
T100R225
®®
ll'-'41.4'-'
-iir
i
iC410
WO '
8221
C217
"°5
R:4,8
R 308
I 0 -1-6-- CD
I
.YA.0
..---SR
RI .4.,
f 05, 8A0
R/0
.-.....3,,,
-7--
C202
I
CIC1C 102 ID ® "2'4 )
-.NY--
®
C 216
8100
6214
R 205
11
,t
=.53041, 1301
®--14.V.-4
---W.4--- It 3°7°MI
3BZ6 M Irt204
2'3.)s:I 0(7776:: - - - '2...j
1200
5C:4* --4.2°7C
C2Il
71)6AU8 tlic1.30007:3
L 203
._____
s,
C 2141
0:11_
-11-
0 / 4.
L204
-2
C2 19
R215
f
34
,1)..:412
IC:...-0.4..--VvY,-52°6
X
[email protected]
.\..-.--..%
RI 10
®3r, 41,--679 C
110
r
1
Li
al° C206 i L 201
sem .11-4
s'A
C
141
C307
R322
IT313
HEIGHT
CONTROL
CSICTho
44)1306
(37
11218
sf'
z4121-.E.
R312
psar
(!)
4
t
O 3C96 (!)
ja.,71,,,
U4 19
t16--
-W
R311
X402
;,2;;;
8320
R4I5
® V,*
4
0434
12075
® V3
(!)
(1)
C417
C 433
R409
,319
C305
R316
10418
®
47V37,-;,.
R
6- 1/vV-4
:412
7
Lop
111
Bottom view of PC board showing top components as schematic symbols.
The leads identified by letters and
numbers in the above figure connect to
the following points:
1. T101 primary
2. C407B (Audio B+, 245V)
3. T101 primary
4. Tuner IF output point
5. Arm of BRIGHTNESS control
6. Pin 3 of VII
7. Pin 11 of CRT
8. Tuner B+ point
9. Tuner "Heater Out" point
10. Pin 10 of CRT
11. Pin 12 of CRT
12. Jumper to
13. C401A (Lo B+, 130V)
14. Pin 2 of CRT
15. Pin 6 of CRT
16. T300 secondary
17. High side of VERTICAL hold control
18. T300 primary
19. Low side of VERTICAL hold control
20. C416A
21. Pin 1 of CRT
22. Arm of HORIZONTAL hold control
23. R405
24. Pin 5 of V2
25. Junction 8402 and C401A
26. C406A (Hi)821;, 280V)
27. Jumper to 01,
28. C425 (B+ +, 600V)
29. C215A
30. Arm of CONTRAST control
31. High side of BRIGHTNESS control
32. Tuner AGC point
33. Lug 1 of T400
172
34. Lug 2 of T400
35. Lug "T" of T400
36. High side of CONTRAST control
37. High side of VOLUME control
38. Arm of VOLUME control
39. C1118
40. AGC overload pumper
41. T300 primary
(A2)
AGC for IF
Video detector
CRT cathode
rp 1st IF input
CF: lloriz MV
FM detector
AGC for tuner
TEST POINTS
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MODEL AND CHASSIS CHART
Westinghouse
Models
H21T300
H21T301
H21T302
H21K305
H21K306
CHASSIS V-2376-1, V-2376-2
-uHr
4726024801-03
ALTERNATE
vvs,
VHF
Tuners Used
Chassis
H21K308
H21K309
H21K310
H21K311
H21K312
H21K313
Tuner Tubes
RF Amp: 2BN4
Osc-Mix: 5CG8
Crystal: 1N87G
RF Amp: 2CY5
Osc-Mix: 5AT8
Crystal: 1N64G
VHF:
470V019H03,H04,H05
V-2376-1
or
470V0431-103
RF Amp: 2CY5
Osc-Mix: 5AT8
Crystal: 1N64G
Osc: 2AF4A
Crystal: 1N82A
VHF:
H21TU302
H21KU305
H21KU306
H21KU308
H2IKU309
H21KU310
470V021H03, H05
V-2376-2
UHF:
472V024H01, H03
8400
(Material on
pages 173
r;
L
FpLsssesrce
1847 PILOT LIG
210EP4
through 178)
CRT
0002!
6.058
Ralf
IJ
OTFT
1203
18301
204
3BN6
EM.ovroc TOR
6AU8
PE55 NF
L101
120064
2204
ECT
T8
SOuNo L pm
L._
1202
IGO
MANE
3826
$W400
2 v20
Of
1400
AOC
- ON
gsg.
La°
3826
tv is
-F
1201
MC420
DJ
1200
L200
I,V AC
- Top view of chassis showing tube locations, heater string and adjustments.
Figure 2 -
TUBE COMPLEMENT AND RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS
Resistance Measurements
Tube Function
Tube Type
VI
12D4
Pin I
Damper
-
NC
20
V2
12DQ6A
Horiz Out
V3
12DT5
Vert Out
29K
NC
3CS6/3BY6
Sync Sep
58K
0
3BN6
FM Det
0-600
0
V4
V5
Pin 3
Pin 2
V6
6AU8
Video Out & FM Lim
0
100K
V7
5AN8
Vert Disch & Keyed
4.5M'
1.5M
V8
6AQ5A
Audio Out
0-500K
330
-
Pin 4
Pin 5
4M
-
20'
14K
500K
1.4M
17
14
13
14
12
13
34K
20K
38K
Pin 6
-
23'
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
-
17
20
22
0
1.3M
47
NC
13K
2.2M
6.5
4.8M
Cap
3.8M'
600'
-
-
-
600 on
(Rx100)
13.5K
6K
25K
10K
11
12
10
0
11
9.5
720K
f20'
9
7.5
1.5K*
900"
0-500K
2K
2K
2K
0
-
0
-
AGC
-
V9
3DK6/3CB6
3rd IF Amp
0
158
6.7
/.5
V10
3BZ6
2nd IF Amp
125K
27
6
6.8
1st IF Amp
125K
47
5
6
2K
2K
2K
5AT8
Osc-Mix
10K
4K
0
5
4
2.5K"
2K
2CY5
RF Amp
2M
0
3.5
4
3K
20K
0
-
-
2AF4A
UHF Osc
NC
6K
3
4
0
6K
NC
-
-
V15
210EP4
CRT
1.4
150K
4.4M
1.6K
NC
' TOOK
V16
6CG7
Horiz MV
68K'
180K
1K
1.4
V17
1B3GT
HV Rect
NC
INF
NC
V11
V12
V13
V14
3BZ6
'
-
-
0
110K
0
-
3
0
50K
2.6M
1K
NC
-
INF
INF
0
to 240K
-
Resistances from tube pin to B- (except ) 'in ohms an ess otherwise noted. Controls set for normal picture.
Resistances from tube pin to junction of L400 & C405A.
173
Cap
3.8M'
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2376-1, V-2376-2, Alignment Information (Continued)
L_ I G rJ NA E NJ -r
SOUND ALIGNMENT
ALIGNMENT WITH SIGNAL GENERATORS
Equipment: FM generator having output frequency of 4.5 MC
ALIGNMENT WITH AIR SIGNAL
Procedure:
with approximately ±7.5 KC deviation.
AM generator having output frequency of 4.5 MC
modulated approximately 30%.
Indicator (VTVM or oscilloscope) with high
impedance input.
I. Tune receiver to strongest of available channels. Set
QUIETING control to mid -range. Adjust quad coil L101
for peak volume. If two peaks are noted, use the one
with the slug further counterclockwise. If two peaks
Procedure:
occur
1. Connect VTVM or scope across VOLUME control. Set
QUIETING control to mid -range.
2. Apply strong 4.5 MC FM signal to TP
. Adjust quad
coil 1..101 for maximum output.
3. Using lowest signal level that will produce an indication, adjust L100 and T100 for maximum output.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. Apply strong 4.5 MC AM signal to TP
Adjust
.
QUIETING control for minimum AM output.
within
a
narrow range of adjustment, the
QUIETING control is not set correctly - or the received signal is too weak.
2. Reduce the signal strength at the antenna (use attenuator or loose coupling) allowing noise to be heard.
Adjust L100 and T100 for peak sound. If two peaks
are noted, use the one with the slug further counterclockwise.
IF ALIGNMENT
EQUIPMENT
1. Sweep Generator
2.
Oscilloscope and VTVM - Use a low -capacitance direct
probe terminated with the decoupling network shown in
Figure 13. Keep the oscilloscope calibrated for 2 volts
with a 10 MC wide sweep at center frequencies from 10 MC to 90 MC and 170 MC to 216 MC.
CW (Marker) Generator which accurately produces the IF
peak to peak (P -P). Use a VTVM range suitable for
and RF frequencies from 4.5 MC to 216 MC.
with good low frequency response character-
measuring -1.5 volts (except in step 2).
3. Oscilloscope
Generators - Except where otherwise noted, all signal gen-
istics.
erating equipment should be terminated as shown in
Figure 12. Connect the signal cable ground near the
4. VTVM
5. Bias Supplies
6.
of -4 volts and -2.5 volts.
Standard Alignment Tool with a 3/32" hexagonal tip.
ground of the stage where the signal is injected.
Adjust the CW generator output so that: (1) When the
VTVM is being used its reading remains near the -1 volt
TERMINATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF EQUIPMENT
These instructions on termination and adjustment of
point (except in step 2). (2) When the oscilloscope is
being used the marker frequencies do not distort the
equipment will apply throughout the IF Alignment procedure.
All test equipment cables and leads should be as short
and direct as possible.
(-SHORT LEADS --
response curve.
GENERATOR
OUTPUT
CABLE
TUNER
MN,
RI
}300a
R2
001 ME
INPUT
R3
to:GENERATOR
OUTPUT
IMPEDANCE
to
RI
R2
R3
52n 120n
56n 150n
72n
85n
110n
RI = OUTPUT
IMPEDANCE
OF GENERATOR
Figure 12 - Generator cable termination.
150n
Figure 11 - Impedance matching network.
-...
--...-
21
i
4
7..._ ,,, - CONDUCTOR
2
./,.-WRAP WITH TAPE
j
I
j
:
- HOLE TO FIT TUBE PIN SNUGLY
TO VTVM
OR SCOPE
470 MMF
TO TEST
POINT
PIN 5 9
Figure 13 - Decoupling network.
Figure 14 - Mixer coupling gimmick.
174
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2376-1, V-2376-2, Alignment Information, Continued
IF ALIGNMENT
Adjustment
Test Equipment and Connections
Connect a -4V bias to TP (A and a -2.5V bias
1.
to TP
T200: Detune top and bottom slugs.
T203: Detune top slug only.
.
2.
Connect CS gen. (4.5 MC - strop signal) to
L204: Adj. for min. AC voltage (null).
3.
Connect CW gen. (45.25 MC) to TP E.
Connect VTVM to TP E.
T202: Adj.for max. neg. voltage
4.
Same equipment and connections as step 3.
Adj. gen. to 39.75 MC; then to 41 8 MC.
L201: Adj. for min. neg. voltage at 39.75 MC.
5.
Remove gen. and VTVM connections.
TP E. Connect VTVM to TP C .
Ti:' Adj. for max. neg. voltage at 41.8 MC.
Connect sweep gen. (43 MC center) to TP E,
6..
T203: Adj. bottom slug for max. peak at 44 MC.
Loosely couple CW gen. (44 MC) to sweep gen.
output cable. Connect scope to TP E.
T203: Adj. top slug until the high frequency peak falls at 44.75 MC.
ire7uch bottom slug to obtain a symmetrical double -peaked response, as
shown in Figure 15. Slight retouching of T201 and T202 may be necessary in
order to obtain best double -peaked response.
Same equipment and connections as step 6.
7.
Adj. CW gen. for 44.75 MC.
8.
Leave scope connected as in step 7. Connect sweep
gen. (43 MC center) to mixer control grid (pin 9) of
V12. Use coupling gimmick shown in Figure 14.
Set Ch. selector on channel 10. Loosely couple
CW gen. (41.25 MC) to sweep gen. output cable.
9.
10.
L200: Detune in clockwise direction.
L200: Adj. to place trap at 41.25 MC.
Same equipment and connections as step 8.
Adj. CW gen. first to 44 MC for adjustments,
then to 45.75 MC to check that the Pix Carrier
is at the 50% point on the curve.
Fine Tuning control: Set to mid -range.
Mixer Output coil: Adj.for max. amplitude of response curve at 44 MC.
'T200: Adj. bottom slug (in conjunction with Mixer Output coil) to obtain a
symmetrical response curve which "rocks" about 44 MC. 45.75 MC marker
should be at the 50% (6DB) point on the curve. See Figure 16. Slight retouching
of the Mixer Output coil and T200 may be necessary in order to obtain best
response curve.
Same equipment and connections as step 9.
T200: Adj. top slug to place trap at 47.25 MC.
Adj. CW gen. to 47.25 MC.
Ch. Selector: Check the overall response of each channel. These curves
shoulc bee milar to Figure 16. If the alignment procedure has been followed
closely, any major variations from the idealized response can be attributed
to the RF portion of the tuner.
Remove CW gen. connections. Remove coupling
gimmick from V12 and connect sweep gen. to
antenna terminals through impedance matching
network shown in Figure 11. Leave scope
11.
connected as in step 10.
39.75
41.25
MC
MC
47.25
MC
Heater string test setup.
OPEN
I.F.FREQ.
NAME
(MC)
39.75
41.25
45.75
47.25
45.75
MC
ADJACENT RIX
SOUND CARRIER
PI X CARRIER
ADJACENT SOUND
----
OFF- ON
2 VOLTS
SWITCH
50%(6D8)
HEATER STRING
44 MC
TYPICAL RESPONSE CURVE
MIXER GRID TO VIDEO DETECTOR
Figure 15 - Video IF response curve.
45
397MCM5 41.02.2
II
MC
45.00
M25
C
EXTRA PROBE
45.75
MC
TO OHMMETER
I
PROBES
TESTING SERIES HEATERS
Use the extra probe to ground a point in the center of the
heater string (A). No reading on the meter (infinity) indicates
2 VOLTS
P -P
an open between point A and the high end of the string. If
the meter shows contunity, the open is between point A and
ground. Continue to split the defective half of the string and
repeat the procedure. An open heater will be quickly located.
50°/0(60B)
4 DB
REMOVAL OF AUDIO TUBE V8 (6AQ5A)
The pilot lamp (upper -right corner of chassis, Figure 2)
is in parallel with the filament of V8. Both the lamp and the
1 DB
TYPICAL RESPONSE CURVE
tube should be in place before the receiver is turned on.
NOTE: Removal of V8 while the receiver is on will force
excessive current thru the pilot lamp, causing it to burn out.
1st. I.F AMP. GRID TO VIDEO DETECTOR
Figure 16 - Overall response curve.
175
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2376-1, V-2376-2, Schematic Diagram
V5
WI(§
068
I/2 6AU8
002
C. VOLTAGES MEASURED FROM B -, NO APPLIED SIGNAL, USING V.7.0.8.
2.7
9. ALL pug TO PEAK Eta FORMS TAKEN WITH CONTROLS ADJUSTED FOR A
NORMAL PICTURE CONTRAST FOR 12501))+1, AT TEST POINT C.
3. ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES LESS '764N I ARE IN mfd AND VALVES GREATER
TORN 1 ARE DI 40414 , WHILE ALL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE 17. OHMS I/2 WATTS
UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
3866
F.M.DET.
SOUND LIMITER
26- 480V
CIEN
L100
15
4. *INDICATES VOLTAGE FOR NORMAL PICTURE.
0100
6. ALL SWITCHES SHOWN FOR NOR/A4L'ON CHANNEL" OPERATION.
4.7
4
iOOK
30 V
4
I(
3
if ',
-
6.8K
101(
,
..25I
MC
I
(goo
I
r 4111
IC202
2
4
.44,
6202
5606
5%
VW
- C200
1 C216 j 13206
C201
T.022 1.0047
6
5
R209
1,7V
27
C209
R207 IC203 -1- C204
1006 T 6130 T .22
470
C222
680
.047
S
126v
2
,000
92L
R 25080
11250
OR
IDLE(
220
6
ELECT. CF;tETF;c?..ING
ANT.
INPUT
3086
MC
3.0.1.E
7
52087 C205
13.26 I 680
V9
425
5
3
*
°°°
47
010
1132§_
2 na.i.F.
4.
L201
.70
R204
R203
8.26
I
68
MC
12Iv
MC
_
MC
4`
S 11211
39.751 0207
111.1 F.
4125
L200
22
VII
3826
1
T203
IV
C206
R2OS
I
___
QUIET CONT.
7202
1200
1
4 MC
6-13
AUDIO
I
7201
A
-C2,13
11231
DOT
1.
. I TT..
3
10
R230Ac,,Fte)Br
A
ND
SOUND
GRN.
T200
001ER TERM
.01
R102 600,
0047
C05
SECTIONF
470
265 V
TO 1.2. OUTPUT
0- 3.80
R101 1 003
8
RI 8
63 130V
1_
Ri00
5. VIE SERVICE PARTS uSt.
11212
150
T.°"
R210
470
6208
680
8213
470
SECTION 2
SKY
_L
2
10
C
VIDEO I.F. VIDEO OUTPUT
LOW B+ 130V
LOW 8+ 00 v.
630V P P
R303
I
R454363
86.3g66
2 54.418
5M
15,7504(
SYNC
CONT.
v78
SANG
KEYED
ARC
8.10.0
540
2206 11
1
6
VERY. DISCO.
Z30.2
8308
SYNC SEP
22118.20
C304 -
-1
8211
11310
2W
1006
7
_
.002 - .005
C305:
I
..-44+0.500133193
1
1----1T
-.65V
9-220*
I
1
1
-5.7v
7
223V
2301
11311
v
150v
r
3
4706
3C5658
3806
R304
2706
R309
826
I
.005
T,
3
- C303
2
oVA
2121(
2
.
1
8312
2M
.0047
R302
VERT. FOOL
CONT.
126
0301
686
8313
500K
w
VER T. UN. CONT.
IOOVP-P 60'.'
R314
1006
SECTION
SYNC . 8 VERTICAL
LOW II
(13001
(PLATE) AUDIO 8+1240V1
8402
rv\p/zto,r_*
SW 400
ON -OFF
;MK
S'AW
1.460
R401
7.5.
1.556
20W
C401
14'03
820
150.701._
7W
23-,
30MF
8419
C420
19-160
114
680
R405
0313
4.50 P -P 604,
V2
1200
9099
lE
360
8418
.01
4706
61301(
4 4V
18V P -P 60~
nAr \
5,7504,
114043
1.3vP-P 60"'
fAA
160V P -P
AI
--1\
A I /VV\
300V P -P
IOW
CAt 31.10;
HOR.AFC
0402
2W vERT 8-F(25501
A
CAIRO
25VP-P 15,750,4(
SEL.
WOE
270
C4078*
)(4(23:r
47
36vP P 604,
8404
Wl,
C
/WA
L400
HI 8+265
8411
C4086
R4I7
60K
0415
C4068*-
HOW. HOLD CONT,
1"F
d* -I
CRASS*
RAILS
8400
25 V P -P 15,7504,
064-31
VI
v2
V3
12134
12130611
12DT5
DAMPER
47.256(
3CS608
5876
HORIZ.OUT. VEITT.OLE SYNC_SER
C427
C
I.033
950 P -P 15,750,4
VS
3866
6AU8
VIDEO
F.6=1.13 -et SNO.LIM
V7A-B
5A(13
08
VERT- DISCO. 6A054
KEYED ACE
AUDIO
09
Mo.
34.LE
C428
C434
680 T
680
SW 4028
SYNC
In areas where the received signal is weak or there is
MUSH BAR)
noise interference, maximum picture stability will be obtained
by adjusting the SYNC control as follows. With the receiver
tuned to the weak signal, adjust the HORIZONTAL and
MOTOR DRIVE ASST.
VERTICAL hold controls for best stability. Turn the SYNC
control toward the position marked NOISY AREA - just Jar
enough to obtain maximum sync stability. Check the adjustment by switching to other channels. Picture should remain
stable on all channels.
Schematic diagram; V-2376-1 and V-2376-2
176
C429
I 680
PILOT LIGHT
8 1847
80812. POWER
CHANNEL SELECTOR
VII
3826
V3E1S
28.1.F.
(UHF ONLY)
SECTION 4
PROGRAM SWITCH
SW4014
25V P P
III. IF
I
v
Imo
C430 1)
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2376-1, V-2376-2, Schematic Diagram
64050
R106
Leads identified by letters and
SWITCH
BLUE T101
220V
vv
KEY TO FIGURE ON PAGE 178
SW 100.1
SOUND MUTING
AUDIO OUT
C109
2gig:S0. Srr numbers connect to the following:
.022
-Cdr. -4
R107'
MC
50011
vi,o, IC I013
C107
10
IW
3047!__
-
V
220 CONT
IN
1 I I r:s MI I I I I I I I P
I -7
C113
C70 -727,
AUDIO B
2405
50K
ME
TONE
GRN.DOT
6455
614.
V")
721;
204
295
4.5 MC
L202
Nub
GRN1
DOT I
IL
V64
1/2 6AU8
.3
4.7uh
14 ...11
'
C2 2
9
220
vir
L 203
2
( 0223
R220
25C
3W
8221
2.7K
R217
158
0216,
3.
CONTRAST
CONT.
42--
3
3,
02;
L206
ION
14,
.......-
CONT.
C
219
SWITCH
680
sv4-6
2KV
IUNF ONLY)
R326
1.544
V3
11250-P
120T5
C307
2.21.4
C°fiT
250 V
T300
Z302
DEFL YOKE
SOOnel
200
3-6
8324
17319'°V
ISO
IW
6
27K
8320
GR.
-+C30913
47
R316
R325
560
560
".i.
R322
7
1.80
VERT.
I
30 MF
IN
17. T300 primary
18. C309B
19. C418A
20. High side of HORIZONTAL hold control
21. T101 secondary
22. Two -lug speaker terminal strip
ORANGE
YELLOW
BLUE
C308
.047
8318
22K
I .33
HEIGHT
R32I
.047
SOH-.
R323
5M
VERT. OUT.
HOR1Z.
-,
I
VERT
2
23. SW100A
3
BLLE
RED
255V
BLACK
950V P -P
32VP-P
60,-
C423
.22
V17
(836T
8423
6808
1400
VI
R424
100N
010
309
L402
12K
15115
.594
I
8421
V%120
022
8422
630.,
CIAR
45V
4.7
1
IW
4
1458
7
1640 T
C422
0421
5
.047
8425
1 la! 3
265V
of`,403
:°:
1
4
C424
.47
+645V
10425
.01
0.033
MI
I
120.1,148.1,
44 i
V15
UHF I
210EP4
osc
LINER
C.R.T.
V16
M.M.S.
5
UHF.
TuNERI
C432
Tse.g,
,
cva (UHF 06171
2K5
+ 265V
6C67
4I I3
HORIZONTAL RINGING COIL
The ringing coil (L401) should be adjusted as follows:
1. Short out the ringing coil with a jumper wire. Use TP
1--q) &
J.
2. Set the HORIZONTAL hold control to the center of its
range. Do not change this setting during the steps that
follow.
3. Connect a VTVM to T. :fi; for measuring the DC voltage
between TP C -F) and B-.
4. With
the receiver tuned to
29. High side of BRIGHTNESS control
30. High side of VOLUME control
31. Tuner AGC point
32. C424
33. High side of CONTRAST control
34. Low side of CONTRAST control
35. Pilot light (twisted pair)
C426
V13
24. Pin 5 of V2
25. C302A
26. R402
27. F400
28. C425
M.V. RECT.
12D4
6. Tuner heater "in"
7. Tuner IF output point
8. Pin 7 of CRT
9. Pin 3 of CRT
10. Pin 2 of CRT
11. Tuner B+ point
12. T300 secondary
13. Arm of VERTICAL hold control
14. High side of VERTICAL hold control
15. Pin 7 of V2
16. Pin 1 of CRT
SW 20IA
8223
470
R227
22M
c2,4
.01
BRIGHT.
8222
R218
30 V
R226
,
g:
7
NI
11111111
11111
6 1,
1585
0226f
1508
2.76
5. Arm of BRIGHTNESS control
CRT
215 D047 500v
j 13011
95 - 1260
r_47
8232
OK
,22
4. Pin 4 of CRT
2ICEP4
8_2K
150-190V
-
tf
42-110071 I
0213
R219
56
VIDEO -OUT
R 214
I
205
40 un
1. T101 primary
2. C408B (Audio B+, 240V)
3. T101 primary
GRN. DOT
RTC! 4
RAILS
RHO
20_
220
C HA 5515
.047
R 109
.0047 C111
RI08i
-
I
GRN DOT
a
station of normal signal
strength, adjust C420 for 0 volts DC on the meter.
5. Remove the jumper from the ringing coil.
6. Adjust the ringing coil for 0 volts DC on the meter. Check
the adjustment by switching to another channel and back
again. The receiver should pull into horizontal sync on
all channels.
177
36. C111
37. Arm of VOLUME control
38. High side of TONE control
Ct
AGC for IF
1J Video detector
CD CRT cathode
(1 -DD 1st IF input
CD Horiz. MV
al,r Ringing coil
CID AGC for tuner
TEST POINTS
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2376-1, V-2376-2, Service Material, Continued
3
CT)
I
V8
6.
(r
4
3
31
T203
rt.
C205
Tj
V11
2
0091
LiJs!..s
--1R218
32-
C 22
-1R225
C213
C2 2
(9
C2181L200
--I R300 I -
1
/1i
V6
6A U8
h-
ti -
C102
5
\L-1
R227
lj
R220
R228
I
214
R216
1
lc
3
R226
-111232 I-
--1122021--
e-.7
C43C
-[R206
51
R219
34
R204
31
5
CIOL
R2)-151
2
R205
R213
351
3 BZ6
6
3
Nk
5
C207
V9
4
4,1
4
1
3C56
36
®
C202
R211
..X210
3DK6
L2021 4)(talu;
1200
R203
R208
t209
R2
C211
6 AC15 A 7
3
2
012
5
31-
C208
C204
R303
4215
11
C103
C201
H
C423
--I R101
11
4
3
T100
R201
C200
31--
2
R323
31 '
c 104T
R326
1
12
R4R423
C105
II
R200
13
R305
C310
C109
Z300
R104
30 =_
C300
R302 I -
R316
T1
R222
V7
R106
1--
5AN8
[IC10) IC107
T
R301
L01
3
R105
2
c305
C303
29
28
C301
--I R411 j---
1
15
Z301
--I R318 [-
1
Y1
R102
--IR J07 I -
--IR308 122.
-
R317 I--77 ---- -I --C304
R223
R313
R3141-
R311
11
25
3
1
li-R3091.) R310
R405 f- C412
(7
R418 I--FR407 I-C413
C411
----
II
R408 1-
CT
C419
C417
4.
f C414
H
_I
.0414
C415
R416
7j
R4101 -
Bottom view of PC board showing location of top components in
solid outlines. Tube pin numbering is for bottom of socket.
178
1
1
1$
19
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ONITI1
TELEVISION RECEIVERS
CHASSIS 16C20 - 16C20Q
MODEL
CHASSIS
C1415L
C1416B
C1417L
C1715L
C1716C
16C20
C1717J
16C20
16C20
16C20
16C20
16C20
C1719P
C1720C
C2001L
C2221R & Y
16C20
B2221RZ & YZ
C2223E,R,Y
B2223EZ,RZ,YZ
16C21Z
C2225E,R,W
16C21
16C20
16C20Q
16C21
16C21
16C21Z
16C21
C2245E,R,W
B2245EZ1,RZ1,WZ1
16C21Z
16C21
C2246E,R,W
16C21
C2 247E,R,W
16C21
C2249H,R,W
16C21
C2254E,H,R,W
16C23/5B26
C2282E,R,W
C2284H & R
16C21/5B28
C2330E & R
18C20
18C20
C2358E,R,W
C2359E & W
18C20
18C20
C2360M & R
16C24
C2673E,R,W
C3000E & R
16C22Q
16C21Q
C3001 E, R,W
16C22Q
C3004E,R,W
16C21Q
C3006 E,R,W
16C21Q
C3007E,R,W
16C21Q
C3008R
16C21Q
C3009E,W,Y
18C20Q
C3010E,H,R
18C20Q
C3011 E,W,Y
18C20Q
C3012H & R
18C20Q
C3013H
18C20Q
C3014H & R
18C24Q
C4007E & R
18C24Q
C4012H & R
16C21
16C21Z - 16C21Q
16C22Q
16C23
16C24 - 18C20 - 18C20Q - 18C24Q
TUNER
ADJUSTMENTS
Bandswitch
Bandswitch
Bandswitch
Bandswitch
Bandswitch
BANDSWITCH TUNER
OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS
To adjust the oscillator adjustment screws set the
fine tuning control to a position where the index
hole in the drive cam is directly over the small hole
just below the channel 13 adjustment screw (see
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Fig. 1). Without further adjustment of the fine tuning
control, insert a 68-24 alignment tool into the tuner
Bandswitch
Bandswitch
Target Turret
and
adjust each operating channel to resonance
starting with the highest channel and following each
lower channel in sequence. Be certain not to move
the fine tuning shaft when switching channels. It
will be noted that turning the oscillator screw to
one side of resonance results in a faded, washedout picture with the spacings between the wedge
lines "fogged" and turning in the opposite direction
causes the spaces between the lines to clear up,
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Bull's Eye Turret
Bull's Eye Turret
Bull's Eye Turret
Bull's Eye Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Target Turret
Bull's Eye Turret
Bull's Eye Turret
Bull's Eye Turret
Bull's Eye Turret
Bull's Eye Turret
however, going beyond this point will cause the pic-
ture to take on a "wormy" appearance from sound
getting into the picture. Correct adjustment is obtained by adjusting for a "wormy" picture and then
back down the adjustment screw slightly until the
picture clears up.
TARGET TUNER
OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS
1. Turn the fine tuning control to the approximate
position shown in Fig. 2.
Without further adjustment of the control, insert
a 68-29 alignment wrench (designed to prevent turning the adjustment screw too far into the core where
2.
it could disengage from its track) through the hole
provided in the front of the tuner and adjust each
operating channel to resonance. It will be noted
that turning the adjustment screw to one side of
resonance results in a faded, washed-out picture
with the spacings between the wedge lines "fogged"
and turning the screw in the opposite direction
causes the spaces to clear up, however, going
beyond this point will cause the picture to take on
a "wormy" appearance from sound getting into the
picture. Correct adjustment is obtained by adjusting
for a "wormy" picture and then back down the adjustment screw slightly, until the picture clears up.
Bull's Eye Turret
Bull's Eye Turret
Suffix "Q" following the chassis number identifies a receiver equipped with Zenith's Space Command remote control.
Suffix "U" is added to the chassis and model number if the receiver is factory equipped with a UHF continuous tuner.
179
-TO
Ji
_
I.F.I
TUNEABLE COIL (`U' MODEL)
USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH 175-8
CONTINUOUS U.H.F.TUNER
F CHANNEL ('U' MODELS) OCCURS
BETWEEN CHANNEL 2 AND CHANNEL 13
I
FINE TUNING STOP
TO A POSITION WHERE THE INDEX
HOLE IN THE DRIVE CAM IS DIRECTLY
OVER THE SMALL HOLE JUST BELOW
THE CHANNEL 13 ADJUSTMENT SCREW.
BEFORE ADJUSTING THE OSCILLATOR
SCREWS, SET THE FINE TUNING CONTROL
-- FINE TUNING SHAFT
;
175-101
175-102
NOTE113 POS VHF. TUNER 175-101
INCORPORATE 13 POSITION TUNER
U.H.F. MODELS
INCORPORATE 12 POSITION TUNER
V.H.T. MODELS
(SCOPE OBSERVATION FOR R.F BAND PASSES)
-TEST POINT'B CONVERTER SCREEN GRID
- - TEST POINT 'A" CONVERTER GRID ( I F INPUT)
-CODED GREEN FOR IDENT if !CAT iON PURPOSES
/1.F. INPUT JACK ("U" MODEL)
ST.
Fig. 1 Tube and Trimmer Layout, Bandswitch Tuner
OSCILLATOR
ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
(SHOWN IN CHANNEL 6 POSITION)/
CHANNEL SELECTOR SHAFT
ON U. H. F. CONTINUOUS
TUNER ( ORANGE)
CONVERTER PLATE COIL
V.H.F.I.F. OUTPUT JACK'
CONNECTOR
PILOT LIGHT -
(BROWN)
----HEAT r-ITO UHF
CONTIN JUS TUNER
1""
A.G. C (YELLOR.
HEATER(BROWN)N)
8+ ( RED)
V H F ANTENNA TERMINALS
I.F OUTPUT
\
J
4
t
NEUTRALIZING
- TRIMMER
SHAFT AND KNOB FOR 21'
' MODEL SHOWN ABOVE
AND CHANNEL INDICATOR
FINE TUNING KNOB
DISC WITHIN FINE
TUNING KNOB
CHANNEL INDICATOR ,
SHAFT
FINE TUNING
WIRE
PILOT LIGHT
CHANNEL
INDICATOR SHAF
8+(cARAL4RE
(SCOPE OBSERVATION
FOR R.F BAND PASSES)
TEST POINT B.
A GC (YELLOW)
B+( REP)
EATER (GROWN)
PILOT LIGHT CONNECTOR
21' "1:1` MODEL ONLY
MANUAL CHANNEL SELECTOR SHAFT
TUNER 175-8 (eRowN)
HEATER TO UHF CONTINUOUS
IN "LI" MODELS ONLY, IN U H.F
POSITION ADJUST. I.F INPUT
GORE THRU THIS HOLE
Fig. 2 Tube and Trimmer Layout, Target Tuner
OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS
GAM AS SHOWN WHEN
MAKING TUNER
SET TAB ON FINE TUNING
OSCILLATOR TUNING ADJUSTMENT-.
CHANNEL SELECTOR SHAFT
MIXER PLATE ADJUSTMENT G IL
MIXER TRIMMER
OF RESISTOR IN CENTER OF HOLE)
(CONNECT I F LEAD TO EXPOSED END
MIXER GRID TEST POINT "A"
R F. TRIMMER
SERIES ADJUSTMENT I.F. TRAP
V H.F. ANTENNA TERMINALS
('O" MODEL ONLY)
MOTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY-'
U H F ANTENNA TERMINALS
WREN UHF STRIPS ARE INSTALLED
175-1260175-124
USED ONLY ON
IDENTIFICATION PURPOSES
CODED GREEN FOR
175-12 3
USED ONLY ON
V.H.F. ANTENNA TERMINALS
8+ TO U.H.F CONTINUOUS
TUNER 175-8 (ORANGE)
INSERT U H F STRIP
BOTTOM COVER REMOVABLE TO
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ZENITH Chassis 16C20, -Q, 16C21, -Q, -Z, 16C22Q, 16C23, 16C24, 18C20, -Q, 18C24Q
both local and fringe signals are received, a compromise setting should be made for best overall
BULLS EYE TUNER
ADJUSTMENTS
performance.
To adjust the receiver for bull's eye tuning, set the
AFC ADJUSTMENT
fine tuning control to its approximate center position.
Without
further adjustment of this control insert
68-31 alignment wrench through the hole provided
a
The horizontal hold control is equipped with a stop
which limits knob rotation to approximately 270
degrees. To adjust the AFC, remove the knob and
turn the shaft to a position where it is virtually
impossible to disrupt horizontal synchronization
when switching from channel to channel. After adjustment, install the knob with its pointer centered
between the stops.
at the rear of the tuner and adjust each operating
channel to resonance. It will be noted that turning
the adjustment screw to one side of resonance results in a faded, washed-out picture with the spacings between the wedge lines "fogged" and turning
the opposite direction causes the
spaces between the lines to clear up, however,
going beyond this point will cause the picture to
take on a "wormy" appearance from sound getting
into the picture. Correct adjustment is obtained by
the screw in
WIDTH ADJUSTMENT
adjusting for a "wormy" picture and then back down
the adjustment screw slightly until the picture
clears up.
To obtain proper width, slide and turn the metal
sleeve along the neck of the picture tube. A setting
will be found which results in proper width and
AGC ADJUSTMENT
linearity.
Tune in a strong TV signal and slowly turn the
delay control until a point is reached where the
picture distorts and buzz is heard in the sound.
The control should then be backed down from this
position and set at a point comfortably below the
level of inter carrier buzz, picture distortion and
improper
ALIGNMENT
TO RECEIVER ANTENNA TERMINALS
sync. This setting will correspond to
ar.proximately 3 V. peak to peak output from the
MATCHING TRANSFORMER
video detector.
50 OHMS UNBALANCED TO 300 OHMS BALANCED
SWEEP GENERATOR
OUTPUT CABLE
CAUTION: Misadjustment of the AGC control can
result in a washed-out picture, distorted picture,
buzz in the sound or complete loss of picture and
sound.
FRINGE LOCK ADJUSTMENT
HOOKED END
FOR CONNECTING
TO VARIOUS GRIDS
The fringe lock adjustment is made to obtain best
possible synchronization under weak and noisy
signal conditions. To adjust, first check the AGC
adjustment and proceed as follows:
56f1
Turn the fringe lock control fully clockwise and
then back it off approximately 1/4 turn. Adjust the
vertical and horizontal hold controls and check
CERAMIC
CAPACITOR
operation of the receiver to see that it syncs normally when the turret is switched from channel to
TO CHASSIS. DO NOT
USE LEADS.
If the picture jitters or shows evidence of delay,
tearing, split phase, etc., back down the fringe lock
control further, a few degrees at a time, each time
readjusting the hold controls and switching from
channel to channel until normal sync action is obtained. It will be found that under normal signal
conditions, the correct adjustment will be near the
counterclockwise position of the control.
Fig. 4 IF-RF Alignment Fixtures
2.
SOUND ALIGNMENT
Proper alignment of the 4.5 Mc intercarrier sound
channel can only be made if the signal to the receiver antenna terminals is reduced to a level below
the limiting point of the 6BN6 (sated Beam Detector.
This level can be easily identified by the "hiss"
fringe and noisy areas, the best adjustment
will be found at or near the maximum clockwise
3. In
which then accompanies the sound. Various methods
may be used to reduce the signal level; however,
a step attenuator is recommended for most satis-
position of the control; however, do not automatical-
turn the fringe lock fully clockwise in
RESISTOR
GROUND DIRECTLY
channel.
ly
1/2 W 5%
CARBON
470 MMFD.
1.
fringe
factory results.
areas. Follow the procedure outlined. In areas where
181
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ZENITH Chassis 16C20, -Q, 16C21, -Q, -Z, 16C22Q, 16C23, 16C24, 18C20, -Q, 18C24Q
PART NUMBER APPEARS HERE
FRONT VIEW OF U.H.F. CHANGE -OVER SWITCH
\ ON "Ir MODELS ON LY- SWITCH ACTIVATED
A
ONLY
BROWN
IN THE U.H.F. POSITION
BROWN
/175-10 8 PART NQ OF TUNER
( 12 POSITION- 6V HEATER)
175-107 PART NQ OF TUNER
(13 POSITION OR "11. MODEL
6 V. HEATER
valusorar
220K I/2WATT
ORANGE
3A31101 no
KEEP-AUVE RESISTOR
TO OSC. B+
NOTE:
13 POSITION V.H.F.
TUNER 175-107 USED IN
Pu'w
ON U.H.FTUNER
TO OSC. 13+ FEED-THRU
CAP ON V.H.F. TUNER
CONJUNCTION WITH 175-8
CONTINUOUS U.H.F. TUNER
8.2K 4WATT
TO MAIN CHASSIS
B+ (265V.)
I. F. OUTPUT JACK
DROPPING RESISTOR
I. F. FILTER BOX
CONVERTER PLATE TUNING
V.H.F. ANTENNA TERMINALS
MANUAL CHANNEL SELECTOR SHAFTH
21"
"Q" MODELS ONLY
TEST POINT "B" SCREEN
FEED-THRU CAPACITOR
(SCOPE CONNECTION FOR V.H.F.
R.F. BAND PASS OBSERVATION)
OSCILLATOR Bi- SUPPLY
FEED-THRU CAPACITOR (UHF)
MOTOR DRIVE
ASSEMBLY FOR
B+ 265V. (Ru)
"Q" MODEL ONLY
TEST POINT "AN
HEATER (BROWN)
I. F. SWEEP GEN. INJECTION FOR
MAIN CHASSIS If ALIGNMENT AND
TEST POINT FOR VH.F. 05G. EXCITATION.
A G G. (YELLOW)
CONVERTER GRID IND. TRIMMER
PILOT
LIGHT
WIRE
PILOT LIGHT
CONNECTOR
CONVERTER GRID CAP. TRIMMER
CHANNEL
INDICATOR SHAFT
TEST POINT"S"
(SCOPE CONNECTION FOR LIKE R.F. BAND
PASS OBSERVATION, U.H.F. OSCILLATOR
EXCITATION ANQ I.F. SWEEP GENERAT
FOR U.H.F. POSITION ONLY)
I.F. CABLE SOCKET
"U" MODEL ONLY
R.F. PLATE CAP.
TRIMMER
R.F. GRID
TRIMMER
CODED GREEN FOR
R.F. PLATE IND.
TRIMMER
IDENTIFICATION PURPOSES
FINE TUNING
FINE TUNING
SHAFT
CHANNEL SELECTOR
SHAFT
CHANNEL INDICATOR
DISC WITHIN FINE
TUNING KNOB
1/2 TURNS \
FINE TUNING KNOB
AND CHANNEL INDICATOR
2 I/2 TURNS
SHAFT AND KNOB FOR 21"
"Q" MODEL SHOWN ABOVE
FINE TUNING CORD DRIVE
Fig. 3 Tube and Trimmer Layout, Bull's Eye Tuner
182
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ZENITH Chassis 16C20, -Q, 16C21, -Q, -Z, 16C22Q, 16C23, 16C24, 18C20, -Q, 18C24Q
Connect the step attenuator between the antenna
and the receiver antenna terminals.
marker can fall within ± 0.5 Mc of the specified
frequency. If the correct response cannot be obtained, check the position of the cores to see that
2. Tune in a tone modulated TV signal. Adjust the
they are not butted but are entering their respective
windings from the opposite ends of the coils.
1.
step attenuator until the signal is reduced to a
level where a "hiss" is heard in the sound.
5. Connect the sweep generator to terminal "A"
3.
Adjust the sound take -off coil (top and bottom
cores), intercarrier transformer, quadrature coil and
buzz control for the best quality sound and minimum
buzz. It must be remembered that any of these ad-
(mixer grid, see Fig. 1, 2 or 3, depending on tuner).
justments may cause the "hiss" to disappear and
further reduction of the signal will be necessary to
jumper between terminal "E" and the junction of
the 56 (68 in 16C20) and 1500 ohm resistors in the
cathode of the 1st IF. Adjust sweep to obtain a
response similar to Fig. 8. Switch oscilloscope to
prevent the "hiss" from disappearing during align-
10 X gain to "blow up" the traps.
Connect terminal "F" to chassis and connect a
ment.
VIDEO I F ALIGNMENT
Slowly turn the channel selector until the tuner
rotor is made to rest between two channels. This
1.
will prevent an erroneous response.
2. Connect an oscilloscope through a 10,000 ohm
isolation resistor to terminal "C" (detector).
Connect the ground lead to chassis.
3. Feed the sweep generator through the special
terminating network shown in Fig. 4 to point "G"
(Pin 1 of the 3rd IF). Adjust generator to obtain
a response similar to Fig. 5 with a detector output
of 3 volts peak to peak. Do not exceed this level
during
F ig. 6 Expanded View
the adjustments.
Set the marker generator to 45.75 Mc and alternately adjust the top and bottom cores of the 4th IF
for maximum gain and symmetry with the 45.75 Mc
marker positioned as shown in Fig. 5. The 39.75 Mc
6.
4.
Refer to Fig. 6 and 7 and adjust the 39.75 Mc
41.25 Mc, and the two 47.25 Mc traps for minimum
marker amplitude. (16C20 chassis has one 47.25 Mc
trap.) It can be seen that high oscilloscope gain
must be used to "run" the response off the screen
in order to view a "blow up" of the traps.
7.
Disconnect
the jumper between "E" and the
56 and 1500 ohm cathode resistors. Connect this
jumper between "E" and chassis. Adjust sweep
generator for 3 volts peak to peak output. Alternately adjust the 2nd, 3rd, 1st IF and the converter
plate coil until an overall response similar to Fig. 8
(Fig. 9 for 16C20) is obtained. It will be found
that the 2nd IF affects the low side (42.75 Mc) and
the 3rd IF the high side of the response. If the
receiver is equipped with a target tuner, adjust the
IF trap Ll for minimum response at 45.5 Mc. After
alignment remove all jumpers and check operation.
Fig. 5 4th IF Response
41.25
42.75
Fig. 7 Further Expansion of Fig. 6 for Detail
View of the 39J5 and 47.25 Mc Traps.
/
45.75
45.0
Fig. 8 Overall IF Response Fig. 9 Overall IF Response 16C20 Chassis Only
183
511.
CO
A
8.0107
MEP
TO IF OUTPUT ON
C
TO 50 IMF
4
230
61
11
11
II
0.;I
VOLUME
CONTROL
ON
750
121:4
BUZZ
CONTROL
25%
710
0."
J
E
AGC
GROUND DURING
I
400V
C43C
110 RFD
To
.0
I-- -1
V8
SOUND OUTPST
PLATE OF A PC DIODE
gl51IMO -11
0 MAIF
210%
C30
210%
00.001
C45
43304
S 3300
390K
210%
210%
031
BO
13
VIIA
1/2 6EA8
1/2 6U8A
+250V
25V
MFG
20
C179
MEG
VOLUME
CONTROL
RIO
400V
'10%
C47
.001
.047 T
CAM r
ODOR
±10%
4/0 .
C33
EE
-t- 250 V
I
10%
100K
MMF
470
C411
110
1
NOOK
01
C34
710%
REE6
339
VIIB
1/2 6EA8
1/2 6U8A
36
110%
CONMEG
RN
YV
-pp
LOC
210%
210015
L4
l
210%
D1125
2201
210%
210%
151
2w
6BU8
V9
474.10%
VI
R29
110%
IN
34
710%
130.
126
510%
0047
C5o
115
HOR1Z.OUTPUT
10
C36
le
T. ,503
0,,,,
1/
d,e
33
330
710%
710
DI
710%
MEG
13
P19
0212
20%
C37
E44
C54
RZO
T.""
470
C22
66K_10%
CONTROL
COD
1120K
304
Ds
= 210%
SLEEVE
6AX4GT
IN
RS
I
25OR
150K
(15041
5E5035 IIIEE
47K
R
MMF
LIN.
!VERT.
12.55
,1422
1
-1-680
MMF
47K
R
'MEET 11
K
AS
TS
I/2
II
OUT
COILS
DEFL.
ART
MMF
T680
WOE
,14
CIRCUIT 104 Al
210%
500
ITCRP4
PIX
I4AUP4
V16
0.70 NV
NED
100 MFO
La, C43A
&
01TEGIEOR
Itt11.4
I
210%
330
(501
VERT OUT.
VIOA
1/2 6CY7
V2 6DR7
BRIGNTNESS
CONTROL
"r 680
COOLS
01F1
MORIZ
19
112
010111 WOW)
(METAL
Irv. 5 KY My
DAMPER
a..
11604%
4-250 V
I!
I K3
IG3GT
H.V. RECT.
VI4
.015
1100
110%
CONTROL
l
C24
CONTRAST
C42
IN
m4
CZ3
VI3
VERY BOLO
CONTROL
7504
RZI
210%
110%
01
040
C39.1
VERT OSC.
1/2 6CY7
1/2 6DR7
V IOA
+ 250 V
7514EG
vERT SIZE
117
'1770%ION
BONA
nn
LT
1,90-1.---0770 SOUND LimiTER GRID
CDC
kr%
100K
01
C21
R6
2.2 mED
210%
=4111404
L" c.
.0033
BOX '210%
v0A
330
%
--t-LR
05
33N
110%
6mEG
0062A
CONTROL
C DELAY
01
C35
750K
MEG
10
IM
4A02
3507
0171
710%
0047
CIA
7
A.G.C. a
SYNC.CLIP.
IOW'
/4-4
.210%
CONTROL
C51
10%
47K
51
MMF
mom
WV
7.25
5 mEG
FRINGE
RIG
HORIZ.OSC. a DISCH.
Ir
210' 14
1110
610
30<
=0022 T7
0.320.
Ile
100110
m 40
HORIZ. CONTROL
)1'
-11-7-1195
0005
5/011L9
2102
2:10%
WAIF
470
CI3
1
C151
CID
L5
VIDEO AMP
V6A
1/2 6AW8A
ZENITH Schematic Diagram 16C20. Chassis 16C20Q is similar
but has changes in circuit to operate with Space Command unit.
ALIGNMENT
SOUND LIMITER PLATE
- 3R0 IF ORM
-
40100
4000
C436
Mt
700
OFCC1OR OUTPUT
- 7I040 OUTPUT
-
C-
TEST POINTS
EE
L.V. RECT.
5U4GB
V15
-17 C2?
2 4.001
OE 210%
11124
15
35
2.4 MOW
210%,
NFI
POI
1154
C29
4
Le
CZ6
E
III
T6
ae
C32
go-
6AQ5A
'BO
+250V
fgx,
SOUND OUTPUT
710
SOUND DISC.
V7
T001
SOUND LIMITER
1170 A.C.
IMTERLOCK
SWITCH
OFF COIL
SOUND TARE
's
2011210%
3RD I.F.
2ND I. F.
6BN6
61305
T
1ST I.E
V5
6BZ6
V4
6BZ6
V6B
1/2 6AW8A
01
V3
6BZ6
F
0
0S
010%
ENE
057
3300
MVP
PRODUCTION
USED IN
EARLY
OSC. CIRCUI
HORIZ.
CONTROL
HORIZ
VIIA
1/2 6EA8
1/2 6U8A
OMEG
105.
529
%IMF
4
41-1
C49
C56
EMI" MAP
611
O0
O0
+250,
MONIZ OUT..
60060
VI2
DAMPER
&NWT
VIA
801117 OSC
DISC"
RE04-6U8A
VERT OSC
VERT. OUT &
6C27 6007
010
6611
O0
O0
SYNC CLIP
IBMS
SOUNO DISC
O0
O
(.25
O0
mC
O0
SOUND L.
YID AMP
S1110
VIS
6106
7001F
85
2NO I
6626
1/4
1ST IF
6626
V3
MIX
816
6.3
B DISCH.
HORIZ. OSC.
I/2 6U8A
INTERCARRIER COIL
TEST POINT "H" SOUND LIMITER PLATE
TEST POINT "C" I.F. DETECTOR OUTPUT
u
4
HORIZONTAL HOLD CONTROL--'
VERTICAL SIZE
4p
ORE
FROM
01110411.
044005 ON POTENTIOMETEAS INDICATE COCRITIST El/TATTOO.
700 M.A . FUSE
I--- VERTICAL LINEARITY
L-A.G.C. DELAY
152
-A.C. INTERLOCK
WIDTH 'CONTROL 1METAL SLEEVE)
PIX CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
-QUADRATURE COIL
Dow AIR VOLT 01611 10E115E NETT.
VOLUME CONTROL'
0111.
-SELENIUM DIODE (HORIZONTAL A.F.C.)
[WEED LIMNS MOICATE 4I401(91 AND TEST POINTS
XI
1E2 WAIT OUSE OTHERWISE SPECIFIFO.
ONELT.
CATHODE ANY TUNE 250 ANODE VOLTIOE TO OE *ENURED WITH ELECTROSTATIC DA
COIL NESISTAKCES 11137 GIVEN AA( UNDER
RESISTANCE NEASETAEMENTS SAONE VITO COILS DISCONNECTED
ALL RESISTORS ARE 0iCE TOLLEANDE, CARON,
ALL CONDENSER CANRCITT TOtERINCE TEC. UNLiSS COMROISE SPECIFIED.
NORTE4L SMITE OF CONTROLS AND
ALL oD.TADE mEAStkENENTS TO ti MID( 11Th (0 1150AL RIFSTAY.
TO Co14EL 2 LILE11 OTHEONIST EPE:IFIED.
461..013ENSER VALUES IN miC40144A05 NAL. .THERVISE SPECIFIED.
ALL VOLTA4ES NNE D.C. TALUS OTHERwiTt SPEOFIED.
ILL D.C. NATAGES TO OT MUM(; v110 A VAC.. TARE 011.1401011 06110 11 4E1Lm. 1041 AE51114.1.
.EN ALIGNmENT POINTS
TEST POINT "J" SOUND DISC AUDIO OUTPUT
BUZZ POT
e,
BIAS
111/
TEST POINT "E"
A.GC. (YELLOW LEAD)
Bt ( RED LEAD)
FRINGE LOCK
TEST POINT "F" TO BE GROUNDED FOR I.F. ALIGNMENT
SOUND TAKE -OFF COIL
CONTRAST CONTROL
TEST POINT "D" VIDEO OUTPUT
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
4TH. I.F. TRANSFORMER
VERTICAL HOLD CONTROL
TEST POINT "G" I.F. ALIGNMENT
3RD I.F. TRANSFORMER
47.25 MC (TOP SLUG, ADJACENT SOUND)
39.75 MC. (BOTTOM SLUG, ADJACENT PIX)
ADJACENT CHANNEL TRAPS
2ND. I.F. TRANSFORMER
( BOTTOM SLUG 1ST. I.F. TRANSFORMER)
(TOP SLUG ASSOCIATED SOUND)
41.25 MC TRAP
I ST. I.F. TRANSFORMER AND
VIIB
1/2 6EA8
C25
ON TUNER
I.F. OUTPUT
SPEAKER LEADS
TO
TUNER FILAMENT (BROWN LEAD)
NOTES:
ALL RATAGES NEAMMUD FON OM. I.PCiNTE TELLICO,
SR
NOR CON
NtAl
VII
VENT OUT
VENT 05c
vio
ET/ SORT
Lit
111CSLIN
IRON
910.01X1
16v6
YT
YON
;1
0 Ile UK
510E0 ANN
OEve
N
315 Et
orassen
VS
,11112,5,
CANTER
KNOT
TUNER TIC
GSGC TO
TUNER
TO NG C 011
O.°I.JE6R"
Mil OUTPUT
I
P -SOUND DISC GRID
J -SOUND OUTPUT
I
1, GROUNDED FOR
ALIGNMENT
E- If AOC
ONLY
O
INT RLOCK
10
NUT
910%1
+265 V
/104
1500
SIR
4GB
5U5
12
r
MODELI EXCEPT I6C210 I
10.25 AMPS. ON '0'
6.36 A C.,9AMPS. OR
L.V. RECT.
.
THIS TAP ON
0 MODELS
I EXCEPT 1602101
400
10 urn
76.11C4Ic
1111,
om47110-.
C53
L_.-_1
r---,
r..41,..;
220
C34
I
RIG
ONLY
L
ISIS
4
KC
15 75
19V
lOOK
KC
15 75
100V
1
1101.
2 /Doi
C
052
XI
057
MS
III
40015
HORIZ.OSC. 8 DISCH
+265 V
2
210%
.22K
1205110%
1211
CONTROL
RAC
A.G,C.
SYNC.CLIP.,,
HORIZ. CONTROL
VII B
ti
V9
J
VIDEO AMP.
V6A
1/2 6E88
6BU8
1/2 6EA8
r-
TN
1/2 6EA8
VIIA
I
e/10%
%
I6C22 0 MODEL
zo--j
_CONTROL.......
HA,
"" IcA6
I
-1°-
BROKEN FOR
ISOUND OUTPUT j- - - - -- - -J
' CONTROL CHASSIS
.F116C262 OW)
, TO WITiNG SWITCR
. ON STEP RELAY IN I
3RD I.F
V5
6DK6-6B2 6
AY
IoOK SO%
6D06AI2
rI a
;65
HORIZ.OUTPUT
*5
023,
022
1
U
Vi
N
ti
COT
IL%
1
10
1/2 6DR7
VIOB
1/2 GCY7
VI4
a
DAMPER
LIN
RIOT
R26
I
I.
, "a
r
zl
4
COILS
DM.
I
..:111
I
I
T.
I
co,,
wcus
RIO
PIX
24AJP4
42656
I/2 TS
RIOTS CONTROLI
METAL NIDE
KV RECT.
IJ3
V13
601..
1606
vE
VI6
2ICX P4
.6/0 51
VERT. OUTPUT
6AX4GT
+ 600V
2500
ss coirt1114.
RI
MI ,..
-015
i.
'Q. IT
1210 WE
75
1111
YYf
C.DI
+265 V
VERT. OSC.
4
/lot
.1
VIOA
JUMPER IN SOCKET
C°";;PTTIFONT'WL
V 4--KL=
ROTC
12
4;42
RI
0 LIMITER
I/2 6CY7
V2 6DR7
TO
ZENITH Schematic Diagram 16C21, 16C21Z, 16C21Q, 16C22Q, 16C23 and 16C24 Chassis
20
COOS
Jr
V8
6AO 5A
22'10%
ME G.
11.011
VOLUME
-4
.01
II
035
,ft:EG 114
CONTROL
210%
con Lao
?on'
RTO
M..'
110.
C32
(5V3-5AU4-16C220)
I MODEL I6C220
TEL
M.
IC30,-*
Tnol
SOCKET AND
I WIRING FOR
I
I
I
jgio4L71-
11/VAC
BROKEN FOR
MODEL
TANC-DTs
COIL
TN
SOP
ca
SOUND DISCR.
JS
at4
C9 T NMr
It0/210%
SOUND LIMITER
ON SOUND
TO SO No/
160210
LM
V6 B
np! U2l
12
-It
t10%
4 41
R2
1/2 6EB8
0 -VIDEO OUTPUT
G- 3RD
""'`
RI
E 229
I
66Z6
2ND I.F.
1ST I.F.
V
6BVZ36
V7
66 N6
C- DETECTOR OUTPUT
TEST POINTS
LOUT
VI!
INSC
NON. OX.15
C7)
CO
VS
1ST
Ti
INIIUTI .111.1 MIMI 5.0 TKsT
011 TUNER11
-{]12
"1SC.70° LI"TIE'N ''S'
0
'I
11.
,Y.
-A':
NABS IS
.22irloy yu
TOP VIED
SPIN PLUG
SWITCH 8 CHASSIS
58251
02010 AMP
AUDIO
2820 A.C. PLUG.
FUSE
ONO
MOTOR
CHANGER
SRI ON RECORD
4 CONTACT
SOCEET TOP
0111FROM
AUDIO IMP INPUT
r
LNEISMIELDED LEDO AND RUE TO
TUBE123
SOUND
USED ON
LINES Y8 6A05A
ADDED PARTS SHOWN IN SOLID
SOC
T
1
I
3RD
I.F. TRANSFORMER
BUZZ CONTROL
47.25 MC. ADJACENT SOUND TRAP COIL BOTTOM SLUG
2 ND. I.F. TRANSFORMER TOP SLUG AND
I. F. OUTPUT FROM TUNER
ADJACENT CHANNEL PIX TRAP
39.75MC.TOP SLUG
ADJACENT CHANNEL SOUND TRAP
-1
47.25MC. BOTTOM SLUG
41.25MC. TRAP BOTTOM SLUG (ASSOCIATED SOUND)
I. F. TRANSFORMER TOP SLUG.
TEST POINT
700 MA.
TEST POINT .E I.F. A.G.C.-.FUSE
re MODELS ONLY)
7
PIX CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
INTERCARRIER COIL
-I
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
TO BE GROUNDED FOR I.F. ALIGNMENT
TEST POINTC. DETECTOR OUTPUT-'
4TH I.F. TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY
AND CRYSTAL DETECTOR
A.G. INTERLOCK
3RD I.F. GRID
TEST POINT 'G.
IN
PIX
680
47K
680
47K
OUT
OUADI4ATURE COIL
31=D
CONTRO(.
VOLUME
NOT USED ON 16623 CHASSIS. SEE 5826
FOR TUBE LAYOUT OF HI-FI AUDIO
AMPLIFIER USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH
I6023 T.V. CHASSIS.
NOTE. 6A05 SOUND OUTPUT TUBE
-TEST POI NT.J. SOUND OUTPUT
TO VOLUME CONTROL
SPEAKER CONNECTIONS
DEFLECTION YOKE
CORRECTOR MAGNETS
OFFIPUSH)
SWITCH
ON(PULL)
A.C.SOCKET
TO AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
I6C23 CHASSIS (MODEL C2282)
SWITCH AND AUDIO PLUG REPLACE
VOLUME CONTROL AND SWITCH ON
Tube and Trimmer Layout 16C21, 16C21Z, 16C21Q,
16C22Q, 16C23 and 16C24 Chassis.
ZENITH RADIO
WIDTH CONTROL( METAL SLEEVE)
DISCRIMINATOR GRID
1/1 Wet 011115 OTWONIM
1.100 O. 1011.T1011rEIS 1101CATE CLKVISE ROTATION.
TONE CONTROL
FOCUS
TEST POINT 1P1
ARE 1202 10LERANCE. CARON.
COIL RESISTANCES 1101 IIVE. ARE NKR ONE DOW
ILL. TEE END
ON DRUM TO IC 4EASVED WITO ELECT...EC
NI
NI UM
ONN PER VOLT .1411 .L111. MITE..
.1211024 aARMdnn fNaw iIn ONLY DISCONNECTED FROM CIRCUIT.
SKCIF Ill.
ALL CO0111131. VALVES IN NIUMARADS MILE. OOY
SPECIFIED.
A. COODISER CAPACITI TOLLANCe203 MESS OINERWISE OPRITIED.
DIAMIEL 2 IDLES. OTIVEN/Ilf VECII IED.
ALL VOLTAIIIS ELEASUED FORE CNYfIf 10 POIIIIS 1.010110.
ALL LOLEA0E5 AIM D.C. VLF,. OTIRRIEESE
ALL D.C. VOLTAIRE 10 IC LERNER. VIII A vA4111. TAM VOLTMETER
0.1.. II NEON 11 i IICSISTAXE.
CtE5,
HORIZONTAL HOLD CONTROL
A.G.C. DELAY
T MMF
24AJP4 (I6G24 ONLY)
CONTRAST CONTROL
VERTICAL LINEARITY
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
VERTICAL HOLD CONTROL
REMOTE CONTROL CHASSIS
VERTICAL SIZE
(FRONT VIEW
ANS
ITN
REL.
STEP
SWITCH ON
PLUG USED WITH 545834
INDAIEU1?10,11
AY
SOUND TAKE -OFF COIL
160220 ONLY
ti
Iu
SOCKET AND WIRING FOR 16[210 MODEL
VI6
2ICXP4
POWER CABLE SOCKET FOR CONTROL CHASSIS
1ST.
f
POI SOCKET ON 5-45832
REMOTE (GINE WAY)CONTRX CHASSIS
TEST POINT .o VIDEO OUTPUT
CHASSIS MODEL 16C23 ONLY I
PLUG AND SOCKET WIRING (CABINET MODEL C2282,
TY
1.
I, GSA
1F33-, 1 f1 ItE,G
T°
CONTROL
'C. y;
4....TCV420. -28.5o
N"
880
(CABINET MODEI6CL23 C2ONLT I282 CHASSIS MODEL
ALTERNATE WINNG FOR AUDIO SHIELDED LEAD AND PLUG
F
. 30155 1151111 P100/
106410 05.0(
3110 11 41110
KR? 000
6C61
RIO
MAN
66124016
VIS
414.1441
KO OJT
42,14
0101
101110 COCA
6114
01601
OSC
613
6C41
90110 LIU
V1010 6610
v6
0
0
0
O
0
O
0
0
O
GEN
O
0
O
0
0
61061
1x1 a,
640
Ok
3,4c cur
AG C
CS
-
Tom
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CONTROL
.2?
/SO
r"
?
31011F
029
20%
1510.0110ON.
TO 50 Ana 60200
PP
L
I
1
'
O
(3011
tqt
1101
.L
11/VAC
101101000
000 tat
111
63
K.
55V3
VI7
IN
035
4134,
LV. RECT.
°4101.1.
261
10
in
C34
OWL
Yz
11-0-
32
011
lir
COO SW
410
8+765 V
[1
O.C. alb 01041011141100.
4004
0(016x116011114 alcsauAss 0L1ls 6616061 1146.11160.
1 II an uktil
'6'1117.171.:1111.0';'1110104T1 ALIONINT
Am TOOT woof.
was a .016611000161 MIAMI 01800161 oloTATia.
CIO NS PIO. CON Pt. No boa TOLTAa 0111.1.
alma Mir UM 10 Ana MAN TO 11 0041 14110 ?MINIMUM
0 nook 1l MC IF 106
11111606k6 60.66*00111 NO 4114 40111 011COOSICICI 11011
COIL 1:1111i4.431 401 ..... 600 VINO NI OWL
ILL 11111510411 POI 100). 11111.411C3. 000110. ,
ALL anion awl,. T06166a1 506 66L116 men... PICNIC?.
ALL
1016166 0111011161. 6100111.
60466 611111 OF caritas 6.16 [WAIL 1161000 so TO Wan 2
ALA v061641 01160111616 16 61 ax oT6 No .1110AL .1111.111.
Att 11.c. 60600,14
60604.0 VIT. A yam. INK ICILTIORM
LIVIO4 ol !am Ishor 61.6111641.
ILL 00115111,
100
co.,.
1,1,
1138
PIS 011
10.
00.
oo&
CS.
00610
Az52
-.00.e.rw.c:r
404.1
I
14.
?MO
a.
czTenolg rou
100116
11
..16,
W-11--
CO M,
036
OA.
0101
ke
moo
TOO
V."
7"0L
<1 MSS
CY
fopof
.,
--c40
6110
RIO%
601
.004/
010,
1 KG 1016
RI
Loo,
MT
1
020
I0li
!los
7101.
cos,
c6/
CONY,
COO .2
tat
-I
I005
c..
...L
HORIZ. OSC.
SC66
8 T65 V
.Cs3
w.
RIO%
630 Ma
.
VI3A
Co.
SOY
I/2 6CG7
?et
sex
?Or
6
211
2100
3506
rr
33s
NM
11114
1.0
100
216101
4111(4
2106
6.26
103%
cN
217.
3106
1132 ,
TOO
VI4
6DQ6A
HORIZ. OUT.
HORIZ.
DISCH.
1w
3
CO.
Ot
220
aA 026
Of
vsly
RI 2501
;,%11
11.111
NU
011/00
r3 T
In
OK
Silva ms
IN
.1.0
000
1
TURF
47K
DAMPER
6DA4
6AU4GTA
6AU4GT
VI6
1
I
0700
10 FD
CO 0
I.
III
210%
S60
I?
UHF
470
TURF
OUT
"1
1610T1113011111061
1164,01. SUCK
{KM,'
1
40011
COILS
Innvat
401060
0R0c
1.
L111=4,:: <NMI
11.,
a.
6610
TO
PIX
2ICXP4
I 24AJP4 lecto ONLY
VI8
10 NV
$.47.
IJ3
H.V. RECT.
VI5
6Wice kat!,
11636
,111;5
,51'13'
8+265
2106
560
IN
6
21016
fU 11111
la*
6CK4
6C
001111101
->31, i
VERT. OUT.
4
21014
150
?IAD%
U.
c22
L
OOP. IN SOCKET
VERT.OSC.
OWL
410
An.
001011631
FIX
'11
ni
$116=LIMITIR
6CG7
VIO
.01
Dui
1011.
1
1/2 6CG7
25.0041
040
000
1"
VD%
i
OS
.11:F
;611
COO 110T50110%
1.=
VI3B
11014
00411)
NW
NO%
IN ; 3
-00
8+ 265V
SYNC.CLIP
a A.G.C.
V9
6BU8
C05.1 fr
L6C
7g1
ax K
1100
2101.
1
1
1
ZENITH RADIO
% 11V
107
COO
''. ,
.L. -
f 33
,___31016
210/
61
ICE
Rt
LS'
io.ro:r
ma
r--0
JO
Schematic Diagram 18020, 18C20Q and 18C24Q Chassis
3601 e
1.35.61.f
HOR Z. CONTROL
1.1.
A.E C.
PAR41.1.21 5PE01(10
muST BE 201.3200E0
SOME MCOELS
'V
MUTER
SOMERS
1/2 6CN7
NOTE
1111
- .-41
.1011
8+ 763V
1071AD
I..
0,0
1/
000
501
0
L°
,
111
V6A
1/2 6E68
VIDEO AMP
r - - - - -- - - 7
'''
3RD I.E.
V5
6DK6 -61326
VI2B
1/2 6CN7
VI2A
}Ito%
,t,ToL
041
IlOr
'SOUND OUT.
6805
V8
V4
6BZ6
2ND I.E.
V3
6BZ6
1ST I.F.
AllOl1W5 WOMAN ?OOP COY. TO 10103 11011C4114.
40113:
ADO%
1130
26 001
444
12°2_1
VT171111111
Ti
POO
6BN6
V7
42 5(6
Xt.
L211 ;;:,
SOUND DISCR.
121
1.,
C6
1/2 6EB8
C31=
61%
111
411101 /1
.1;7 IC4
L1 I
To
SOUND LIMITER
V 6B
70.1.1,00,UT
Doosn
F. 101200 0150 GRID
0-
0
O
O
1
T. TO OE 010610010 Map 41161111011
C-
0(01 601811
C 041111011 01010/1
0- ViCit0 MOIRA
O
VS
0001001
A.FC CA00
'Cl?
"
3W 1V 3
.a1O 6`10
65
co
Co
CD
Po
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ZENITH Chassis 18C20, 18C20Q, 18C24Q, Continued
VERTICAL SIZt
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
VERTICAL HOLD CONTROL
VERTICAL LINEARITY
A.G.C. DELAY
CONTRAST CONTROL
HORIZONTAL HOLD CONTROL
BASS TONE CONTROL
FOCUS
TREBLE TONE CONTROL -
FRINGE LOCK
TONE CONTROL ASSEMBLY MOUNTED ON ESCUTCHEON (BOTTOM)
TO TONE CONTROL SOCKET
ON BACK OF CHASSIS
TEST POINT
VI8
PIX
D. VIDEO OUTPUT
2ICXP4
24AJ P4 (18C24Q)
I.F. TRANSFORMER
3RD
ONLY
fARI F SOCKET FOR CONTROL
CHASSIS (Q MODEL ONLY)
POWER
CORRECTOR MAGNETS
700 M.A. FUSE
TEST POINT
1ST.
I.F. A.G.C.
I.F. TRANSFORMER TOP SLUG
DEFLECTION YOKE
41.25 MC. TRAP BOTTOM SLUG, ASSOCIATED SOUND
TO VOLUME CONTROL
ADJACENT CHANNEL SOUND TRAP -
SPEAKER CONN
47.25 MC. BOTTOM SLUG
ADJACENT CHANNEL PIX TRAP
39.75MC. TOP SLUG
QUADRATURE COIL
TEST POINT .G.
I.F. OUTPUT FROM TUNER
-TEST POINT or SOUND DISC GRID
3RD I.F. GRID
WIDTH CONTROL ( METAL SLEEVE)
A.C. INTERLOCK
2ND. I.F. TRANSFORMER TOP SLUG AND
47.25 MC. ADJACENT SOUND TRAP COIL
BOTTOM SLUG
BUZZ CONTROL
4TH. I.F. TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY
AND CRYSTAL DETECTOR
TEST POINT *C. DETECTOR OUTPUT
-
ON (PULL)
OFF(PUSH)
SWITCH
pw
-
VOLUME CONTROL
PIX CENTERING
ADJUSTMENT
TEST POINT 'F.
a
I
INTERCARRI ER COIL
TO BE GROUNDED FOR I.F. ALIGNMENT
SOUND TAKE OFF COIL-
TEST POINT J
TONE CONTROL
CABLE SOCKET
SOUND OUTPUT
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
Tube and Trimmer Layout 18C20, 18C20Q and 18C24Q Chassist
PRI.
VOLUME
SEC.
---K2 STEP RELAY ON -OFF
-K3 (CW) MOTOR RELAY
0* * NOTE: IMPORTANT
FUSE
FACTORY SET DO NOT ADJUST.
GROUND TERMINAL
PILOT
,41
TO AUDIO
INPUT GRID
r-
iii
C19
I
A
MICROPHONE
-101 SPEAKER SOUND RELAY
TI
TRANSFORMER
PRI.
LK! (CCW) MOTOR RELAY
SEC.
189
Tube and Trimmer Layout S-45834 Space Command Control
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ZENITH Chassis 16C20, -Q, 16C21, -Q, -Z, 16C22Q, 16C23, 16C24, 18C20, -Q, 18C24Q
V4
6AU6
V2
6AU6
AMP
AMP
VI
6AL5
V3
V5
6CMT
DISCROIODE
6AU6
LIMITER TRIPLERT
Mt"
TOOTTIAT
RELAY CONTROL
N
e
Lt.
RIR
SI;
:4
LY
LI;
200V
2009
913
L9
29.02.
2.2
Mt
.4
n4r
Gr.
.11 ITA4
YAWL
of
MOTE IIAPCITTANT
FACTORY SET. SO NOT ADJUST
C
V8
VT
6AL5
CAT
100
6CMT
RELAY CONTROL
DISCR.D1002
A
! 0.4
..11("1092-.1.44 -
AY}
V6
1.0101
ALL KATO., 1(01110 r.al CAISSIS ry
l2;
ES
IL1POS IKTICTWIL
5Y3GT
2004
RECT.
0
Ra
zao
ALL VOLTTC0 MI A.C. UA
SPEW..
41r
KRT.
ALL VOLTAGE OVISLACITERI TO RI .ACC K.
S coAL ATISLMT.
92
ALL LOOTTTSCA VALLES
SOiC'11Ei
11.1 ifiyYM005
MU. 01.91152 YE:if ICO.
poi n
Alf
C.011SE
10.S. TA El W..
15119
MT/ TASISTOCI.
:aim
C10
TAT
CDOCASEA 00[11, 129Iii.2ES
YE,' MIL
resisvias 00 05.
011 1. CAM. yalS :1 42/....
C
Sx
02
r
".
sry
RELAY
A
1
COI
1 RELAY
0
SPEC,// D.
TT A
01.STABLI
RELCW
AY
RELAY
Oo00vnc ...0 alma &WORT IL .0000
yo5.
030020%
40
,S1.14
Ant
I
O
SW
0
9149
PAWj...TY
STIPSWITC9
YZeE
111209
C Off POST TWA
CIA 10041
ROTOR
t
SWITCH
011 TA
SC011
ITOP WWI
.0111110.
CL,
DOTTED LIAT
10,01111PCLAATICO
fyi
pi0 WI AMA
111101CORCS TAROK
01 TA L SITS
5.4359 4
.00.200 V
AC
LOttM CICADIMC ,,IATRTETT.
110100
11102011 WIVE ASS011i r S 03730 S 5.419114
ASSEN 5.43320
TT
1W Of Veda coma.
F.E.`,Trz1"2`1 ZIELEL
usco yAcri 0.-4
CYT9OL ClAS311,1
say
I
WW1SIS
SYLIcrt s440,
(SCOCMEON
J
Schematic Diagram S-45834 Space Command Control Chassis
unless accidentally bent out of position. If this
occurs, proceed as follows:
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
With the vertical and horizontal size controls,
reduce the size of the picture to a point where the
four corners and sides of the picture are visible.
(In some receivers it may not be possible to reduce
the picture size sufficiently to see all the sides and
in this case it may be necessary to shift the picture
with the centering control to view one side at a
1.
The centering assembly is built into the yoke housing. This assembly is made of two magnetic rings
which can be rotated by means of tabs. Centering
is accomplished by gradually rotating the tabs with
respect to each other, then rotating both tabs simultaneously until the picture is centered.
time.)
CORRECTOR MAGNET
ADJUSTMENT
2. Bend the corrector magnet arms until the corners
become right angles and the top of the raster is
Two corrector magnets are used to obtain straight,
sharply focused sweep lines across the face of the
picture tube. The magnets are mounted on the deflection coil mounting brackets and can be moved
in and out or up and down by bending the flexible
parallel with the bottom and the left side is parallel
with the right side. After adjustment, the picture
should be restored to normal size.
NOTE: Misadjustment of the corrector magnets may
cause pincushioning, barreling, keystoning, poor
linearity, etc.
arms which support them. Adjustment has been made
at the factory and should not require readjustment
190
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
INDEX
Admiral Corp.
4G3
4H3
S11A
15A2
15B2
15B3
15D1B
16AR1C
16AS1C
16R1C,C8
16S1C
16S1CB
P17F1
Pl7F2
Pl7F3
PL17F31B
PL17F32B
PL17F33B
PL17F41B
PL17F42B
PL17F43B
PS17F12
PS17F13
PS17F22
PS17F23
C21E11E,F
C21E12E,F
C21E13E,F
CA21E11E
CA21E12E
CA21E13E
L21E22E,F
L21E23E,F
S21A
T21E20E,F
T21E21E,F
T21E22E,F
T21E23E
TA21E20E
TA21E22E
TA21E23E
13
13
13
13
13
13
24
5
5
5
5
Emerson Radio
25
1500
25
1502
25
1503
25
1504
25
1505
25
1506
25
120451H
25
120451HC
25
120452M
25
120452MC
5
13
13
13
24
24
24
24
24
24
13
13
13
13
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
13
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
General
Electric
M5 Series
17T3304
17T3305
17T3306
17T3310
17T3311
17T3315
17T3316
17T3317
17T3318
17T3320
17T3321
17T3331U
21C3439
21C3440
21C3441
21C3442
21C3443
21C3445
21C3446
21C3450
21C3451
21C3458
21C3459
21C3460
21C3461
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
Under each manufacturer's name, at left there are
listed that make chassis and models in numerical
order. The corresponding page number at right of
each listing refers to the first page of the section
dealing with such material.
GE, Continued
31
21C3478
31
21C3479
31
21C3482
31
21C3483
31
21L3455
31
21L3456
31
21T3417
31
21T3418
31
21T3419
31
21T3420
31
21T3421
31
21T3425
21T3429
31
31
21T3430
31
21T3431
31
21T3432
31
2IT3435
31
21T3436
Hoffman Radio
39
MARK 7
39
335
336
B1277
K1277
M1277
P1277
39
39
39
39
W1277
B1291
K1291
M1291
SP1291
W1291
B3411
M3411
SP3411
W3411
B3421
M3421
SP3421
W3421
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
Montgomery
Ward & Co.
Serial 85X 43
43
WG-4204A
47
WG-5062A
47
WG-5067A
47
WG-5072A
47
WG-5077A
47
WG-5162A
47
WG-5172A
Motorola
59
14P14-1
17P5-1 thru
17P5 -5A
17T32BZ
17T32WH
17T33B,M
Y17P5-1 thru
51
Yl7P5-5F
51
Yl7T32BZ
79
21C9+
79
21K97B,M
79
21K99B,+
21K104B,M 67
67
21K104W
67
21K105+
21K107B,M 67
67
21K107M
67
21K108W
67
21K109M
67
21K110W
79
21K115+
79
21K116+
79
21T57++
21T64B,M
83
A21K106B,M 67
67
A21T60++
79
Y21C9+
79
Y21K97+
79
Y21K99+
(Index continued on page 192 )
191
51
51
51
51
Motorola, Cont.
67
Y21K104+
Y21K107B,M
Y21K115++
Y21K116++
Y21T57++
Y21T62+
Y21T63+
Y21T64B,M
LTS-430
WS -430
TS -430
TS -434
67
79
79
79
79
79
83
51
51
51
59
MTS-551,-Y 79
TS -551,-Y
VTS-551
WTS-551
WTS-551Y
TS
TS
TS
TS
-552
-552Y
-553
-553Y
WTS-553
TS -556,-Y
79
79
79
79
67
67
67
67
67
83
Olympic Radio
GA
GAU
GB
GBU
GD
GDU
GF
GFU
GH
GHU
GT
GTU
GU
GUU
14TT91,U
14TT92,U
97
97
97
97
93
93
97
97
93
93
89
89
89
89
89
89
VOLUME TV -16, ADDITIONAL 1959 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
IN DE X Continued
Olympic, Cont.
17TU93,U
17TU94,U
17TU98,U
ICA96,U
ICA97,U
TA100,U
TB101,U
TD102,U
CA105,U
CB106,13
CB107,U
CD108,U
CD109,U
CD110,U
PKA115,U
PKB116,U
KD118,U
PKD118,U
KD119,U
PKD119,U
KD120,U
CF400,U
CF401,U
CH402,U
KF405
KF405U
KH406,U
KH407,U
89
89
89
97
97
97
97
93
97
97
97
93
93
93
97
97
93
93
93
93
93
97
97
93
97
97
93
93
Packard -Bell
101
101
101
V8-2
17VC1
17VT3
17VT4
17VT8
17VT9
21VT4
101
101
101
101
Philco Corp.
9L37
105
9L37U
105
9L38
105
9L38A
115
9L38U
105
9L60
117
9L60U
117
G4240L,M 117
UG4240L,M 117
G4242L,M 105
Philco, Cont.
UG4242L,M 105
G4654M,W 105
UG4654M,W 105
G4656SM
117
UG4656SM 117
G4658+
117
UG4658++ 117
117
G4660++
UG4660++ 117
G4662M,P 117
G4664P
117
UG4664P
117
G4710L,M 105
UG4710L,M 105
G4720L,M 105
UG4720L,M 105
G6628L,M 117
UG6628L,M 117
G6632+
117
117
UG6632+
RCA Victor
21T9122,U 127
21T9125,U 127
21T9127,U 127
21T9265,U 127
21T9266,U 127
21T9267,U 127
21T9275,U 127
21T9276,U 127
21T9277,U 127
21T9345,U 127
21T9346,U 127
21T9347,U 127
KCS-120E 123
KCS-120F 123
RCS -124C thru
KCS-124L 127
KCS-126A 135
KCS-126B 135
140P020,U
140P023,U
140P024,U
170P048,U
170P049,U
170P060,U
170P061,U
170P063,U
170P064,U
123
123
123
135
135
135
135
135
135
Spartan
149
149
CB
DC
18 Series 149
Sylvania Elec.
1-542-1 thru
1-542-8
141
21C414
141
210519
141
210524
141
210616
141
210621
141
21T218
141
21T305
141
Trav-ter
943-38
947-28
953-28
975-48
150
150
150
150
Westinghouse
H17C287
153
H17C288
153
H170289
153
H17C290
153
H17C291
153
H17CU287 153
H17CU288 153
H17CU289 153
H17CU290 153
H17CU291 153
H21K270
161
H21K271
161
H21K272
167
167
H21K273
167
H21K274
H21K275
167
H21K276
167
173
H21K305
H21K306
173
H21K308
173
H21K309
173
H21K310
173
H21K311
173
192
Westinghouse+
H21K312
173
H21K313
173
H21KU270 161
H21KU271 161
H21KU272 167
H21KU273 167
H21KU274 167
H21KU275 167
H21KU276 167
H21KU305 173
H21KU306 173
H21KU308 173
H21KU309 173
H21KU310 173
H21T262
161
H21T263
161
H21T264
161
H21T265
161
H21T266
161
H21T267
161
H21T268
161
H21T269
161
H21T270
161
H21T271
161
H21T300
173
H21T301
173
H21T302
173
H21TU262 161
H21TU263 161
H21TU264 161
H21TU265 161
H21TU266 161
H21TU267 161
H21TU268 161
H21TU269 161
H21TU302 173
V-2365-11 153
V-2365-12 153
V-2374-1 161
V-2374-2 161
V-2375-1 167
V-2375-2 167
V-2376-1 173
V-2376-2 173
V-2377-1 161
V-2377-2 161
HT -3500,U 161
HT -3501,U 161
HT -3502,U 161
Zenith Radio
16C20, -Q
16C21, -Q
16C21Z
16C22Q
16C23
16C24
18C20, -Q
18C24Q
C1415L
C1416B
C1417L
C1715L
C1716C
C1717J
C1719P
C1720C
C2001L
B2221RZ,+
C2221R,Y
82223++
C2223E,+
C2225E,+
B2245+
C2245E,+
C2246E,+
C2247E,+
C2249H,+
C2254E,+
C2282E,+
C2284H,R
C2330E,R
C2358E,+
C2359E,W
C2360M,R
C2673E,+
C3000E,R
C3001E,+
C3004E,+
C3006E,+
C3007E,+
C3008R
C3009E,+
C3010E,+
C3011E,+
C3012H,R
C3013H
C3014H,R
C4007E,R
C4012H,R
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
2
Another
Supreme Publications
Service Manual
Supreme Publications are Available at All Leading Parts Jobbers
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement